No matching fragments found in this document.
[?]
EXECUTIVE CORRECTION LIST
WORD LIST
Remimeo
C/Ses
Auditors
Tech/Qual
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 23 DECEMBER 1980
Remimeo ISSUE II
C/Ses
Auditors
Tech/Qual
(Cancels BTB 1 Dec 74 VI CLEARING LIST WORDS
IN SCIENTOLOGY-EXECUTIVE CORRECTION LIST
-- STUDY CORR. LIST 5 which did not give the references
to be high crimed before clearing words on a pc and did not give the type
of word clearing to be used.)
EXECUTIVE CORRECTION LIST
WORD LIST
REFERENCES:
HCO PL 4 Apr 72R III ETHICS AND STUDY TECH
Rev. 21.6.75
HCO B 8 Jul 74R I Word Clearing Series 53R
Rev. 24.7.74 CLEAR TO F/N
HCO B 21 Jun 72 I Word Clearing Series 38 METHOD 5
HCO B 9 Aug 78 II CLEARING COMMANDS
HCO B 17 Jul 79 I Word Clearing Series 64
THE MISUNDERSTOOD WORD DEFINED
These are the words from HCOB 23 December 1980 Issue I EXECUTIVE
CORRECTION LIST.
These words should be cleared on the pc before the EXECUTIVE
CORRECTION LIST is actually assessed per HCOB 9 Aug 78 Issue II CLEARING
COMMANDS.
The auditor must have received high crime checkouts from Qual on the
above references before clearing these words on a pc. The auditor uses
Method 5 Word Clearing when clearing these words on the pc.
This word list need only be cleared once in the pc's auditing if it
was correctly cleared the first time.
The fact of having cleared this word list on the pc must be noted in
the appropriate place in the pc's folder. (Ref: Auditor Admin Series 6R
THE YELLOW SHEET.)
WORDS FROM THE EXECUTIVE CORRECTION LIST
A, action, afraid, after, alcohol, an, and, another, ARC Break, are, area,
as, attention, attest, auditing.
Back-up, bad, be, been, blown, bogged, bonuses, by.
Case, causing, collected, comm, communicating, completing, complied,
compromised, condition, conflict, confused, connected, constantly, cope,
couldn't, counter-intention, course, courses, cramming, cycle.
Dare, data, debug, debugs, decided, Dianetics, didn't, difficulty,
disagreements, disasters, disinterested, do, doesn't, doing, don't, drugs,
duress.
HCOB 23.12.80 II - 2 -
Earlier, eating, else, enough, environment, ethics, evaluation, exec,
executive, expecting.
Failed, failures, false, false reported, falsified, favors, felt, fixed,
followed, for, from.
Gave, get, getting, give, given, got, granting.
Had, handle, handling, has, hat, have, having, help, here, hit, hostile.
Ill, in, in your road, inactive, inadequate, incomplete, invalidation, is,
it.
Know.
Lazy, leave, like, lines, losses.
Make, many, medicine, missed, missing, misunderstood, mis-use,
moonlighting.
Neglecting, news, no, not, nothing.
Of, off, on, opinions, or, orders, other, out, out ethics, out exchange,
out Int, out 2D, overloaded, overts, overwhelmed, own.
Paid, personnel, Phase I-ing, physically, policy, post, practice,
pretending, problem, problems, protecting, PTS, public, purpose.
Q&A.
Really, reality, receiving, refer, removed, restim, rushed.
Say, Scientology, seeking, seldom, senior, should, similar, sleep,
solutions, solve, some, someone, something, somewhere, sort, special,
staff, staff member, staff members, stat, status, stops, student, study,
subject.
Taken, tech, than, the, there, things, 3rd partying, through, time, to,
told, too, training, trouble, trying, 2D.
Undermanned, unhatted, unjustly, unusual, upset, use, using.
Was, were, weren't, what, why, with, withhold, withholding, W/Hs, won't,
words, work, worse, wrong.
You, your.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
of CALIFORNIA
BDCSC:LRH:SK:nc
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
of CALIFORNIA
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=23/12/80
Volnum=0
Issue=1
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
EXECUTIVE CORRECTION LIST
Remimeo
Auditors
C/Ses
Execs
Tech/Qual
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 23 DECEMBER 1980
Remimeo ISSUE I
Auditors
C/Ses
Execs
Tech/Qual
(Cancels BTB 27 March 72RA Issue V EXECUTIVE
CORRECTION LIST Study Corr List 5A as it contained Debug-type actions on a
case-handling list.)
EXECUTIVE CORRECTION LIST
The Executive Correction List is designed to handle charge in the
area of being an Exec or difficulties as an Exec. It could also be used to
help a failed Exec clean up his charge.
It does not replace the Debug Tech Checklist in HCO PL 23 Aug 79 II
and is not to be confused with it. The Debug Tech Checklist addresses a
lack of products while this list is a case-handling list.
The list can be assessed Method 3 or Method 5. A second bracket in
the handling shows the further actions to be done after the list has been
F/Ned on all reading items.
This correction list can be followed up by other auditing/ debug
actions as adjudicated by the C/S to fully handle areas an Exec is having
difficulty with as disclosed by the assessment of this list.
PC'S NAME: __________________________________ DATE:
__________________________
AUDITOR: ____________________________________
1. OUT INT?
_______
(Check to make sure the read on Int is valid i.e. not a protest or
false read. If it is a valid read, end off for C/S instructions.)
2. GIVEN A WRONG WHY?
_______
(L4BRA and handle.)
3. GIVEN A WRONG WHY FOR EXEC FAILURES?
_______
(L4BRA and handle.)
4. CRAMMING GAVE A WRONG WHY?
_______
(L4BRA and handle.)
5. WRONG ETHICS CONDITION?
_______
(L4BRA and handle.)
6. TOLD YOU WERE PTS AND YOU WEREN'T?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N. L4BRA if any trouble.)
7. AS AN EXEC DO YOU HAVE AN ARC BREAK?
_______
(ARCU CDEINR E/S to F/N.)
8. UPSET WITH A STAFF MEMBER?
_______
ANOTHER EXEC?
_______
SENIOR EXEC?
_______
(ARCU CDEINR E/S to F/N.)
9. AS AN EXEC DO YOU HAVE A PROBLEM?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
HCOB 23.12.80 I - 2 -
10. PROBLEMS WITH OTHER STAFF MEMBERS?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
11. AS AN EXEC HAS A WITHHOLD BEEN MISSED?
_______
(Pull it, 2wc E/S to F/N.)
12. W/Hs FROM STAFF?
_______
(Pull them, 2wc E/S to F/N.)
13. OVERTS ON STAFF?
_______
(Pull them, 2wc E/S to F/N.)
14. OVERTS ON YOUR POST?
_______
(Pull them, 2wc E/S to F/N.)
15. COUNTER-INTENTION?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N, handle as a W/H.)
16. SOME SORT OF OUT ETHICS?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N, handle as a W/H.)
17. OUT EXCHANGE?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
(Exchange by Dynamics per HCO PL 4 April 72 ETHICS.)
18. LAZY?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Exec Confessional.)
19. INACTIVE?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Exec Confessional.)
20. OUT 2D?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N, handle as a W/H.)
21. OUT 2D WITH PUBLIC?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N, handle as a W/H.)
22. DO YOU HAVE OPINIONS YOU DON'T DARE SAY?
_______
(Get what. 2wc E/S to F/N.)
23. DOING OTHER THINGS ON POST TIME?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N, handle as a W/H.)
24. FALSE REPORTED?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N, handle as a W/H.)
25. FALSIFIED A STAT?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N, handle as a W/H.)
26. COLLECTED FALSE BONUSES?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N, handle as a W/H.)
27. COULDN'T GET PAID?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
28. GRANTING SPECIAL FAVORS?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N, handle as a W/H.)
29. RECEIVING SPECIAL FAVORS?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N, handle as a W/H.)
30. MOONLIGHTING?
_______
(2wc to F/N.) (C/S to program for further handling as needed.)
31. PTS TO SOMEONE IN THE ENVIRONMENT?
_______
(2wc to F/N.) (C/S to program for further handling as needed.)
HCOB 23.12.80 I - 3 -
32. ARE YOU CONNECTED TO SOMEONE HOSTILE TO DIANETICS OR SCIENTOLOGY?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (PTS Interview.)
33. PTS STAFF MEMBERS?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
34. DON'T KNOW WHAT TO DO?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
35. LOSSES AS AN EXEC?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (L1C.)
36. COULDN'T HELP?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (3 Way Help/2 Way Failed Help.)
37. AN EARLIER TIME YOU FAILED TO HELP?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (3 Way Help/2 Way Failed Help.)
38. COULDN'T SOLVE IT?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
39. SELDOM REFER TO POLICY?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
40. UNHATTED?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
41. DON'T HAVE A HAT?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
42. DON'T STUDY?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Student Rehab List.)
43. TROUBLE WITH STUDY?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Student Rehab List.)
44. FAILED AS A STUDENT?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Student Rehab List.)
45. BLOWN STUDY?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Student Rehab List.)
46. OFF COURSE TO HANDLE POST?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Student Rehab List.)
47. WAS YOUR TRAINING INADEQUATE?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Student Rehab List.)
48. RUSHED THROUGH COURSES?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Student Rehab List.)
49. INCOMPLETE COURSES?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Student Rehab List.)
50. FALSE ATTEST?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N, handle as a W/H.) (Student Rehab List.)
51. MISUNDERSTOOD WORDS IN DIANETICS AND SCIENTOLOGY?
_______
(Find and clear them, each to F/N. WCCL if necessary.) (Method One Word
Clearing.)
52. AN EARLIER SIMILAR SUBJECT WAS MISUNDERSTOOD?
_______
(2wc-find what word(s) in the subject was Mis-U and clear it up.
Clear each word to F/N. WCCL if necessary.)
(Method One Word Clearing.)
HCOB 23.12.80 I - 4 -
53. SEEKING STATUS?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
54. ARE YOU PRETENDING?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
55. YOU HAD DISAGREEMENTS?
_______
(Find out what, find the Mis-U words and clear to F/N.)
(Disagreements handling per HCOB 19 Jan 66 DANGER CONDITIONS
-- TECHNICAL DATA FOR REVIEW AUDITORS.)
56. EARLIER PRACTICE IN YOUR ROAD?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Pgm for GF 40X Handling.)
57. MISSING DATA?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
58. WITHHOLDING DATA?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Vital Info RD.)
59. HERE FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE?
_______
(Pull it, 2wc E/S to F/N. Note for further handling.)
60. EVALUATION?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
61. INVALIDATION?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
62. DISINTERESTED?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N, handle any out ruds.)
63. HAVE YOU COMPROMISED YOUR OWN REALITY?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
64. COULDN'T GET YOUR ORDERS COMPLIED WITH?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Admin TRs.)
65. TROUBLE HANDLING PERSONNEL?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Program to include Fear of People R/D, if exec is
not Clear or OT, and Professional TRs Course and Admin TRs.)
66. TROUBLE GETTING POLICY FOLLOWED?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
67. NEGLECTING A BOGGED AREA?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N, watch for any out rud and handle.)
68. TROUBLE COMMUNICATING?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Program to include Exp Grade 0, Professional TRs
Course and Admin TRs.)
69. 2D TROUBLES CAUSING CONFLICT ON POST?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
70. DIFFICULTY COMPLETING A CYCLE OF ACTION?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
71. AFRAID TO GIVE ORDERS?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Program to include Fear of People RD, if exec is not
Clear or OT, and Professional TRs Course and Admin TRs.)
HCOB 23.12.80 I - 5 -
72. OUT OF COMM?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N, watch for any out rud and handle.)
(Program to include Exp Grade 0 and Professional TRs Course.)
73. IS YOUR AREA UNDERMANNED?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
74. ARE YOU CONSTANTLY HIT BY BAD NEWS AND DISASTERS ON YOUR LINES?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Any PTS handling needed.)
75. CONSTANTLY HAVING TO COPE?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
76. CONSTANTLY PHASE I-ing YOUR AREA?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
77. OVERLOADED ON POST?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
78. CONFUSED BY TOO MANY THINGS TO DO?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
79. OVERWHELMED ON POST?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
80. NO BACK-UP?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
81. WAS THERE A FAILED PURPOSE?
_______
(Indicate it, 2wc E/S to F/N.)
82. NO HELP FROM YOUR SENIOR?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
83. Q AND A?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Anti-Q and A Drill.)
84. AFRAID TO USE ETHICS?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Program to include Fear of People RD, if exec is not
Clear or OT, and Professional TRs Course.)
85. ARE YOU AFRAID OF THE PUBLIC?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Program to include Fear of People RD, if exec is not
Clear or OT, and Professional TRs Course.)
86. MIS-USE OF ETHICS?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N, watch for any out rud and handle.)
87. ARE YOU PROTECTING YOUR STATUS?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
88. USING DURESS?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Exec Confessional.)
89. DOING SOMETHING OTHER THAN YOUR HAT?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N, watch for any out rud and handle.)
90. AS AN EXECUTIVE, HAVE YOU DECIDED YOU WON'T MAKE IT?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
91. WERE YOU TAKEN OFF POST UNJUSTLY?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
HCOB 23.12.80 I - 6 -
92. ARE YOU NOT REALLY ON POST?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
93. ARE YOU TRYING TO LEAVE POST?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Exec Confessional.)
94. ARE YOU EXPECTING TO BE REMOVED FROM POST?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
95. SHOULD YOU BE SOMEWHERE ELSE?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
96. DON'T YOU LIKE THE STAFF YOU WORK WITH?
_______
(General O/Ws on those staff.) (Exec Confessional/General Staff
Confessional.)
97. 3RD PARTYING STAFF?
_______
(General O/Ws on those staff.) (Exec Confessional and/or General Staff
Confessional.)
98. USING UNUSUAL SOLUTIONS?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N, handle as a W/H.)
99. POLICY DOESN'T WORK FOR YOU?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Note for further handling by Qual.)
100. TECH DOESN'T WORK ON YOU?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N. GF M5 and handle.)
101. FAILED DEBUGS?
_______
(Assess Product Debug Repair List.)
102. DEBUGS DIDN'T WORK?
_______
(Assess Product Debug Repair List.)
103. THINGS GOT WORSE AFTER A DEBUG?
_______
(Assess Product Debug Repair List.)
104. FELT BAD AFTER CRAMMING?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Cramming Repair List.)
105. FAILED CRAMMING?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Cramming Repair List.)
106. CRAMMING DOESN'T WORK?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Cramming Repair List.)
107. DON'T GET AUDITING?
_______
(Indicate it. 2wc E/S to F/N.)
108. TAKEN OFF AUDITING?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.)
109. ARE THERE STOPS?
_______
(Find out what. Clean up any protest.)
110. ARE YOU ON DRUGS?
_______
MEDICINE?
_______
ALCOHOL?
_______
(2wc to F/N.) (Program for full Drug handling including Purification
RD, Survival RD and a Drug RD. If pc has had one or more of these, program
for any needed repair.)
111. ATTENTION FIXED ON SOMETHING?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Survival RD.)
HCOB 23.12.80 I - 7 -
112. NOT GETTING ENOUGH SLEEP?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Handling to be worked out with D of P after
session.)
113. NOT EATING?
_______
(2wc E/S to F/N.) (Handling to be worked out with D of P after
session.)
114. ARE YOU PHYSICALLY ILL?
_______
(2wc to find what. Note BD item. 2wc to F/N and get further C/S
instructions for handling if necessary.)
115. RESTIM?
_______
(Assess and handle a C/S 53.)
116. TROUBLE WITH YOUR OWN CASE?
_______
(Assess and handle C/S 53.)
117. IS THERE NOTHING WRONG?
_______
(Get pc to tell you about it briefly. If correct, then indicate to
F/N. Go E/S and indicate it if no F/N at first.)
118. SOMETHING ELSE WRONG?
_______
(2wc what and, if no joy, GF M5 and handle.)
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
of CALIFORNIA
BDCSC:LRH:MIR:nc
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
of CALIFORNIA
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=21/12/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
THE SCIENTOLOGY DRUG RUNDOWN
Remimeo
Qual
Class III Auditors
and Above
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 21 DECEMBER 1980
Remimeo
Qual
Class III Auditors
and Above
THE SCIENTOLOGY DRUG RUNDOWN
(References: HCOB 30 Jun 65 RELEASE, REHABILITATION OF FORMER
RELEASES AND THETAN EXTERIORS
HCOB 21 Jul AD15 RELEASE REHABILITATION
HCOB 7 Nov 65 RELEASE REHABILITATION ERROR
HCOB 19 Dec 80 REHAB TECH
HCOB 30 Jun 62 ARC PROCESS)
I have just finalized a new rundown concerning the handling of drugs.
It is called the Scientology Drug Rundown and it uses Scientology auditing
techniques to handle drugs on Dianetic Clears who, of course, cannot be run
on engrams and the New Era Dianetics Drug Rundown. This rundown will make
for smoother gains up the Grades and OT Levels for the Dianetic Clear
because it will handle any charge on the case on the subject of drugs. And
in some instances it could mean the difference between a case that is
resistive and rocky and a case that flies in auditing.
THEORY
It is very important to handle the effects of drugs, medicine and
alcohol on a case. In the 60's drug use became widespread in the culture
and it was then that I discovered the need to audit out drugs as a first
action on pcs. Drugs make it difficult to get stable auditing gains. In
fact, a drug history makes one a resistive case in many instances until the
drugs are handled.
This requires both an objective and a subjective handling. The
Purification Rundown and Survival Rundown are objective handlings; they
don't involve or directly address the person's own thinkingness to
accomplish the intended results. These rundowns work wonders when done
correctly.
Normally, the subjective handling consists of the New Era Dianetics
Drug Rundown, wherein the pc's engrams and mental pictures concerning drugs
are erased. The total package, then, is made up of objective and subjective
handlings. Both are necessary to effect the proper result. The objective
handlings (Purification Rundown and Survival Rundown) won't do the whole
job by themselves.
The case which has gone Clear prior to receiving a NED Drug Rundown
has had no means of handling the subjective aspects of drugs until now. You
must not run engrams on a Clear, so the problem we were faced with solving
was: how do you handle a case's charge on drugs if you can't run engrams on
him? Well, I've put together a line-up which solves this problem simply
and effectively-the Scientology Drug Rundown. It accomplishes a necessary
release of charge on drugs, and thus helps to remove drugs as a case factor
for Dianetic Clears and allows them to get the maximum gains out of the
Grades and OT Levels.
HCOB 21.12.80 - 2 -
THE LINE-UP
The Scientology Drug Rundown handles charge on drugs with the
following tools:
1. Rehabbing chemical releases on drugs, which unsticks the person
from
masses pulled in during drug experiences or "trips".
2. Recalls on drugs to handle the charge on drugs and drug incidents.
3. Further Objective Processing to extrovert the person after the
charge
is handled.
REHABS OF RELEASES ON DRUGS
Definition: RELEASE-When the preclear disconnects from the bank that
is a release. When you take a thetan out of a mass that is a release. This
is not the same as getting rid of the mass which is called Erasure. There
are many releases which normally occur in auditing. The Classification,
Gradation and Awareness Chart, displayed in any org, explains these in
detail.
Definition: REHAB (Short for REHABILITATION) -- When the person was
originally released he had become aware of something that caused the
reactive mind to destimulate at that point or become weak. This is a
release. When the sudden point of awareness is again found, the release
state can be regained or rehabilitated. The procedure of regaining a former
release state is called a rehab.
Some years ago I made the discovery that drugs can give a person the
sensation of releasing from the bank while pulling in mass on the person at
the same time. This is one of the factors which makes drugs as deadly as
they are.
When such "chemical releases" are located and rehabbed, the person
becomes unstuck from mass pulled in during "trips". This is covered in HCOB
23 Sept 68 DRUGS & TRIPPERS.
Drug rehabs were part of the original Class VIII Drug Rundown and are
now reinstated as the first step of the Scientology Drug Rundown.
RECALL PROCESSING
One of the oldest methods of processing we have in Dianetics and
Scientology is the recall process. It has been a mainstay of auditing
techniques since 1951. It has a new application now on the Scientology Drug
Rundown.
The charge a Dianetic Clear has on drugs can be released by running
charged drugs using simple recall techniques. On the Scientology Drug
Rundown this is done after the drug rehabs.
OBJECTIVE PROCESSING
In order to extrovert the pc's attention after the recalls, one runs
some objective processing. This isn't a long parade of processes. It is
just intended to get the pc extroverted and in PT.
HCOB 21.12.80 - 3 -
AUDITOR REQUIREMENTS
In order to deliver the Scientology Drug Rundown, any auditor must:
1. Be at least a Provisional Class III Auditor.
2. Have high crimed this issue and drilled the procedure until he can
attest he knows it cold.
3. Have high crimed HCOB 19 Dec 80 REHAB TECH and thoroughly drilled
the rehab procedures until expert.
PRECLEAR PREREQUISITES
The Scientology Drug Rundown is for cases who have gone Clear before
having completed a New Erg Dianetics Drug Rundown. I discovered in 1978
that we had been far more successful in making Clears than anybody had
guessed. A number of these Clears had attained the state prior to getting
their drugs run out using Dianetics. Also, some went Clear while on the
Drug Rundown itself and were left with charge connected with drugs. So the
prerequisites for someone receiving the Scientology Drug Rundown are:
1. Is Dianetic Clear (but NOT in the Non-Interference Zone. See
C/S Series 73.).
2. Has not had a full NED Drug Rundown or was on it when Dianetic
Clear
was attained and so has charged drugs unrun.
3. Has done a successful Purification Rundown.
4. Has done the Survival Rundown or a full, thorough Program of
Objectives.
It will be pointless to run someone on the Scientology Drug Rundown
without points 3 and 4 above well in, so don't do it.
PROCEDURE
PRELIMINARY STEPS:
1. Fly the pc's ruds so he is F/N, VGIs before starting the rundown.
1A. CONDITIONAL STEP: If the pc has never had an Original Assessment Sheet
done on him, do one per HCOB 24 June 1978R, New Era Dianetics Series 5R,
ORIGINAL ASSESSMENT SHEET. Even though the pc is not going to be run on
Dianetics, the Original Assessment Sheet must be done if he has never
before had one in his auditing. This will provide the C/S, the D of P and
the auditor with essential data on the case.
2. From the pc, get a list of each drug, medicine or alcohol he has taken
this lifetime if one doesn't already exist in the folder. Note the read the
item gives at the exact end of the pc's statement of the item. If a drug
list already exists, it maybe used and a new list need not be made.
3. Clear the terms "release" and "rehab" and the rehab procedure with the
pc if these have not been cleared previously. Use HCOB 19 Dec 80 REHAB
TECH.
Make sure the pc has a good
HCOB 21.12.80 - 4 -
grasp of what rehabs are and how they fit into the Scientology Drug Rundown
procedure as explained on page 2 of this issue.
A. DRUG REHABS:
1. R-factor the pc that you will now begin rehabbing releases on drugs.
2. Clear the question "Did you go release on ?" and let the pc
know you will fill in the blank with an item (drug) off the drug list and
that this is the question you will use to check for releases on each drug.
3. Take the first drug off the list and check the question with the pc,
noting any instant read.
NOTE: Each drug will be checked for release whether or not the drug
read when listed. You are looking for periods when the pc felt released
while he was under the influence of the drug and this is not dependent on
whether the drug is reading in PT. To repeat, each drug on the list is
checked for release, reading or not.
4. If the question reads and the pc was released, find out how many times
he was released and it will F/N. Don't go at this too strenuously. It is a
light action and the pc may F/N just on spotting that he had felt released
on the drug.
5. If no read on the question but the pc says he did go release, check
Suppressed or Invalidated. (The Assert or Protest buttons may be checked if
the pc is assertive or protesty about having gone release.)
6. If the question reads but the pc says he didn't go release, the read is
False or Protest. Find which and handle.
7. If no read on the question, check Suppress and Invalidate. If still no
read, leave off trying to rehab it. Instead, do Step 8.
8. If the pc didn't go release on the drug (or if there is an ARC Break F/N
while rehabbing it), put in ruds on the drug by checking and handling the
following questions:
(a) "In taking (drug) was there an ARC Break?"
ARCU CDEINR E/S to F/N.
(b) "In taking (drug) was there a problem?"
Itsa E/S to F/N.
© "In taking (drug) was a withhold missed?"
Pull it E/S to F N.
An out rud can obscure a release, so after the ruds have been put in
on the drug, re-check for a release. If still no release, that's it. Drop
it and go on to the next drug.
9. Occasionally a rehab won't go to F/N even though the pc did release on
the drug. If this occurs put in ruds on the period before the release using
the following questions:
(a) "Before the release on (drug) was there an ARC Break?"
(b) "Before the release on (drug) was there a problem?"
© "Before the release on (drug) was a withhold missed?"
HCOB 21.12.80 - 5 -
With the ruds in, continue the rehab.
10. If you get a release that just won't rehab clear the following question
and ask the pc "Did you take anything earlier on the track that was similar
to (drug) ?" (When you find and rehab that earlier drug, the one which
wouldn't rehab also releases, so there is no need to go back to the one
which was hung up.)
11. Repeat steps 3-10 as necessary for each remaining drug, medicine or
alcohol on the drug list. Each item is checked for release whether it is
reading or not. Of course, the rehab question itself must read before you
proceed with any rehab steps.
12. When all the drugs on the list have been checked you can ask the pc if
there are any other drugs he would like to add to the drug list. If so, add
them, being sure to catch any read. Then, on any added items do steps 3-10
until all items on the list have been handled.
These steps comprise the first part of the Scientology Drug Rundown.
B. RECALLS ON DRUGS:
On this part of the rundown each reading drug on the drug list is run
out using recall processing. PC INTEREST IS NOT CHECKED. If the item reads,
run it.
O. CONDITIONAL: If the drug list used is one which already existed in the
folder before the person went Clear the list would have to be reassessed at
this point to see which items were reading in PT. It is possible that
charge on some of the items would have keyed out or blown when the person
went Clear and if the list were not assessed in PT, items might get run
which do not have available charge. (Items added by the pc on step 12 of
the Drug Rehabs section of this RD are validly reading if they read when
the pc listed them.)
1. Taking the item with the largest read (sF or better), run it in the
commands below. (Clear a flow before running it for the first time.)
NOTE: A flow must read before it is run as covered in HCOB 3 Dec 78
UNREADING FLOWS.
Flow 1: "Recall a time you took/had (drug being run) ."
Run it repetitively to F/N, Cog, VGIs.
Flow 2: "Recall a time you gave another (drug being run) ."
To F/N, Cog, VGIs.
Flow 3: "Recall a time another gave another or others
(drug being run) ."
To F/N, Cog, VGIs.
Flow 0: "Recall a time you gave yourself (drug being run) ."
To F/N, Cog, VGIs. (Quad pcs only.)
NOTE: Ensure the pc tells you what he has recalled. A pc may just
recall the time and not tell you about it unless you ask him "What was it?"
or some such question.
2. When the first reading drug selected has been run to EP on each reading
flow take the next best reading drug off the list and run it as covered in
step 1.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until all reading drugs have been run.
HCOB 21.12.80 - 6 -
4. Reassess the items on the list which didn't read on first assessment.
Run any now-reading items as per step 1. Use the Suppress and Invalidate
buttons as needed.
5. Repeat the reassessment of any unreading items (using Suppress and
Invalidate as needed) until all reading items have been run.
When all reading items have been run, the Recalls on Drugs portion of
the rundown is completed.
C. OBJECTIVE PROCESS:
The final step of the Scientology Drug Rundown consists of running the
pc on an objective process. The purpose of this is to extrovert his
attention after it has been introverted while doing the subjective parts of
the rundown. Almost any objective process would do.
One wouldn't rerun a person's CCHs 1-4 or anything like that, but one
might very well run an Environment Locational on the pc per HCOB 6 May 80,
SRD Series 6, ENVIRONMENT LOCATIONAL. Or one could do Reach and Withdraw on
MEST locations per HCOB 7 May 80, SRD Series 7, REACH AND WITHDRAW ON MEST
LOCATIONS.
Which objective process gets run is not so important as the point that
something must be run to extrovert the person's attention. Whichever
process is run it would be taken to a point where the pc was cheerful,
fully extroverted and in present time.
This completes the rundown.
ABILITY GAINED AND EP
The Ability Gained of the rundown is "Freedom from harmful effects of
drugs, medicine and alcohol and free from need to take them." Doing each
step of the Scientology Drug Rundown fully will achieve that EP on any Pc
who is fully set up for it in the first place.
There are gains to be had from this rundown which might not be
expected from such a seemingly simple set of actions. Run a pc or two on
the rundown and you'll see what I'm talking about.
One thing which you may observe on pcs is a point of sudden resurgence
during or near the end of the rundown. At this point, the pc comes up to PT
and out of drug masses or ceases to be introverted and becomes extroverted
(both of the above are the same thing-the phenomenon of the person having
been parked down the track due to drugs and then snapping up to PT). This
is significant and shows that the EP of the rundown has been obtained.
Depending on the pc, this resurgence may happen suddenly, accompanied
by a big cog, dial-wide F/N and VVGIs, in which case, one would be safe to
end off the recall steps of the rundown. Any charge on drugs will have
moved off. So you can run an objective process next and that would
complete the rundown.
On other cases, the resurgence may not be as sudden, i.e. it will
happen
gradually with the pc rolling happily along, having his wins and cogs and
feeling better session after session. He may remark that he is feeling more
in PT and this is to be expected. In these cases, one continues handling
reading drugs
HCOB 21.12.80 - 7 -
and reassesses the drug list as needed to ensure that all charged drugs and
flows are run to EP. By the time this is done and the pc has run the ending
objective process, if the auditing has been standard he will have come up
to PT and out of drug masses just the same as the pc who achieves this as a
big win and sudden resurgence. The end product is the same in both cases.
It is very important, however, that the recall step is not ended
simply because the pc has a good win which is mistaken for the EP. To do
this could result in the auditor and C/S being accused of taking part in a
very disreputable activity-quickying. And nobody wants to be hung with that
kind of reputation!
If there is any question as to whether a big win the pc has had
represents the resurgence being looked for, continue the rundown after the
pc has had his win. You will be safe in doing this. No one thus far has
shown evidence of overrun when continuing the rundown past the point of a
big win (after the persistent F/N dies down, of course) and in completing
the steps of the rundown. (As a note, that possibility does exist though,
if the pc's big win also happened to be the EP. Should this occur and the
pc begin to manifest overrun of the rundown-and not simply overrun of a
process or drug-then the EP is rehabbed and the rundown completed with the
objective process.)
If no point of resurgence occurs in the pc, then something is amiss
with the auditing the pc has received. An FES would have to be done to
locate the errors and they would have to be repaired. The FES may have to
only go back a few sessions or the whole case may need to be FESed.
TIPS
Pcs often have big wins on these recall flows, followed by persistent
F/Ns. When this happens it is wise to let the pc have his win so you don't
miss a reading drug or flow because of the F/N.
Occasionally the pc may run a flow that runs much longer and deeper
than other flows.
Don't be surprised if drug manifestations turn on while running
certain drugs-they blow when the process is taken to EP. And don't mistake
the euphoria of a drug incident in restim for the EP of a flow.
It is not unusual for a pc to go through a revivification on this
rundown. This isn't anything to puzzle over though, as it is simply
something which may occur on this rundown. If it does occur, don't stop the
process. Carry on and the pc will come through it.
SPECIAL NOTE
Occasionally, a pc goes Clear in the middle of the NED Drug Rundown.
In such a case, the correct thing to do is a verification and
rehabilitation of the attainment of the state to full EP and resurgence,
per the Dianetic Clear Special Intensive. After this is done, the
Scientology Drug RD Recall steps are done on the remaining unhandled drugs
which are now reading. You would have to reassess the unhandled portion of
the drug list before doing any recalls to ascertain which drugs would now
get run. The drug rehabs would not need to be done on these cases.
HCOB 21.12.80 - 8 -
PREVIOUSLY RUN DRUGS
Once in a while a C/S will run across a Dianetic Clear who, despite
having had a drug rundown, still has unhandled charge, incidents and masses
in connection with drugs. Possible reasons for this are: drug residues
left in the body which prevented auditing gains; lack of a full set of
Objectives thoroughly done each one to EP; or poorly done or quickied
auditing on the drug rundown itself.
Such a case might be obvious from an FES of the drug rundown the
person had. Where such things as no Objectives run or "run to EP in 3
minutes", drug items unrun because the pc had "no interest" in the item
(which usually means the person was no longer interested in taking the
drug), reading items left unrun or items not run to full EP, are obvious
from folder study, the C/S may find that the case would need the
Scientology Drug Rundown. This would particularly apply to Dianetic Clears
who still manifested heavily the effects of drugs whether in auditing, on
post or in life. (Ref: HCOB 8 Jan 69, DRUGS AND "INSANITY"-NON COMPLIANCE
AND ALTER-IS applies in particular, but all the 1969 HCOBs on drugs as well
as later issues would also apply and help the C/S decide whether the case
is one which would benefit from the Scientology Drug Rundown.)
The point here is that a case that has gone Dianetic Clear and had a
poorly done drug rundown could possibly hang up on auditing on the Expanded
Lower Grades because of unhandled charge on drugs.
If this proved to be the case through folder study and other
indicators the basic handling would be:
1. Purification Rundown.
2. Survival Rundown.
3. End of Endless Drug Rundowns Repair List.
4. Scientology Drug Rundown.
This battery of actions would handle any lingering unhandled drug
charge or manifestations on a Dianetic Clear due to botched earlier drug
handling.
CAUTIONS AND REMEDIES
Never run Recalls on the same drug twice. Never run unreading drugs or
flows. To do so may drop the pre-OT into more charge than one can easily
get him out of. Should such happen and not resolve by the usual means
(rehabbing the overrun, indicating an uncharged drug or flow was taken up
and shouldn't have been or L1C on the session) the auditor can assess an
L3RG and indicate any reads to key out the charge. No engram running would
be done.
One should take care not to Q and A off the rundown into handling some
other case manifestation or hidden standard. The purpose of the rundown is
to handle drug charge, enabling the pc to make case gain in his subsequent
auditing (where other aspects of the case would be handled).
An auditor can mistakenly let the pc itsa on and on if his TR-2 and
session control are not in. This cuts down the effectiveness of the
rundown. If the auditor doesn't control this (without ARC Breaking the pc,
however) he can run the pc's havingness down and plow him in.
HCOB 21.12.80 - 9 -
One must not audit this rundown (or any other, for that matter) over
out ruds. If this has occurred, the action to take is to fly the pc's ruds
checking for "audited over" ("Have you been audited over _______ ?") or an
L1C on the recent session or sessions.
Should the rundown be messed up it can be repaired with the End of
Endless Drug Rundowns Repair List.
SUMMARY
We now have a method for handling drugs on a person with unhandled
drugs who, because he has gone Clear, should not be run on engrams. It is
essential to handle drugs as covered in this issue. Otherwise one is
placing the Pre-OT in jeopardy of waiting his auditing on the Grades as it
will have been done over the bypassed charge of unhandled drug incidents.
Once the pre-OT has attained OT III any remaining effects from drugs can be
terminatedly handled on the OT Drug Rundown.
Using this simple procedure we can ensure that the Dianetic Clear
attains all the gains possible in his Grade Chart auditing, quite in
addition to the relief and expansion one experiences when freed from drug
influences, as will occur on this new rundown.
We now have the means by which the effects of drugs can be effectively
handled for anyone at any position on the Bridge.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:nc
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=20/12/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
PREREQUISITES FOR SOLO AUDITOR COURSE
AND ADVANCED COURSE LEVELS
Remimeo
BPI
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 20 DECEMBER 1980
Remimeo
BPI (Also issued as an HCO Policy Letter
of the same date and sane title.)
PREREQUISITES FOR SOLO AUDITOR COURSE
AND ADVANCED COURSE LEVELS
The following are the new prerequisites as they appear on the 1980
Grade Chart for persons going onto the Solo Auditor Course, preparatory to
doing the Advanced Course Levels.
1. Basic Study Manual or Student Hat.
2. The Purification Rundown.
3. The Survival Rundown (unless full Objectives have been run, each to
its End Phenomena).
4. Any TRs Course, such as Co-Audit TRs on the Survival Rundown, or
the
How To Achieve Effective Communication Course (the new HAS Course),
or a Professional TRs Course.
5. New Era Dianetics Drug Rundown (or full Drug Rundown received prior
to the release of New Era Dianetics).
or
Scientology Drug Rundown (for persons who have attained Clear
before the Clearing Course and before completing a Dianetic Drug Rundown).
6. Dianetics fully run to Dianetic Case Completion (on any non-Clear).
7. ARC SW and Grades 0-IV fully run to End Phenomena, with the Ability
Gained for each Grade (run Triple or Quad) with good Success
Stories.
All Expanded Grades Processes are run, if necessary, to achieve
this.
8. If Clear has been attained before doing the Clearing Course: A
full
verification of the State of Clear done on the Dianetic Clear
Special Intensive, with each step done and attested to by the C/S.
9. If Clear has not yet been attained: Power Processing (Grades V and
VA)
fully run to End Phenomena, before Advanced Courses are begun. To
begin the Solo Auditor Course, the pc, if not complete on Power and VA,
must be on Power or Power Set-Ups. A pc on Grade VI Set-Ups may also begin
the Solo Auditor Course.
("Set-Ups" = A series of auditing actions given to ensure the pc is
"set up" to receive a major action.) Solo Set-Ups can be done at a Saint
Hill or an Advanced Org.
HCOB 20.12.80 - 2 -
Advances made in the technology at both the beginning of the Bridge
and in upper levels have resulted in these revised mandatory prerequisites.
These steps fully and honestly done prepare the individual more fully than
ever before for solo auditing successfully on his OT Courses.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:dr
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=19/12/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
REHAB TECH
Remimeo
Tech
Qual
Academies
Class III
Auditors
and above
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 19 DECEMBER 1980
Remimeo
Tech (Cancels BTB 6 Dec 68 RELEASE, REHABILITATION OF,
Qual not written by myself.)
Academies
Class III
Auditors
and above
REHAB TECH
REFERENCES:
HCOB 30 Jun 65 RELEASE, REHABILITATION OF, FORMER
RELEASES AND THETAN EXTERIORS
HCOB 21 Jul AD15 RELEASE REHABILITATION
HCOB 2 Aug 65 RELEASE GOOFS
HCOB 30 Aug 80 Keeping Scientology Working Series 24
WINS, "STATES", AND GRADE CHART DECLARES
HCOB 15 Nov 78 DATING AND LOCATING
This bulletin is a condensation of the tech I first developed in 1965
on the subject of rehabs and release.
While there is considerably more data on these subjects in the
Technical Volumes and on the Class VIII tapes, this issue sets forth the
key data and presents the methods for rehabbing in one consolidated issue
for the first time.
DEFINITIONS:
"Rehab" is a shortened version of "rehabilitate", which means: to
restore to a former capacity or condition.
"Release" is the term for what occurs when a person separates from his
reactive mind or some part of it or when he separates from some mass.
In Scientology we use the term "rehabilitate" most commonly to mean:
restoring a state of release previously attained by the pc.
RELEASES
Scientology processes can be categorized as follows:
1. Those processes which direct the preclear's attention to the mental
masses
in his reactive mind in order to enable him to separate out from them.
2. Those processes which are aimed at increasing the preclear's abilities.
Both types of processes lead to release.
Both types of processes are necessary to bring a person up the levels
of awareness and up each step of the Grade Chart to OT.
When you take a thetan out of a mass, that's a release.
When you erase the mass and leave the thetan there, that's an erasure.
Erasure is a different phenomenon from release.
HCOB 19.12.80 - 2 -
In auditing, when the pc spots something in the bank he disconnects
from the bank to a greater or lesser degree. That is a release. Or, when
the pc becomes free of a difficulty or personal "block" or inability
stemming from the mind, that is a release.
A person can and does go release many times in the course of his
auditing. He may go release many times while being run on the processes of
a Grade before he attains the ability of that Grade.
The Grades Releases are covered fully in HCOB 22 Sep 65, RELEASE
GRADATION, NEW LEVELS OF RELEASE, in HCOB 27 Sep 65, RELEASE GRADATION,
ADDITIONAL DATA, and on the Grade Chart itself. Further data can be found
in HCO PL 23 Oct 80 II, CHART OE ABILITIES GAINED FOR LOWER LEVELS AND
EXPANDED LOWER GRADES.
Oddly enough, the idea of release can translate through to the pc to
include releases in life, too. For example, a person was in prison and they
let him out. This might well read as a release on a pc being asked about
former releases, and it would be okay. One sees how this can be in view of
the basic concept of release, e.g. when you take a person out of a mass-any
mass-that is a release.
So "release" points in life such as the above are valid, and, though
one doesn't ask for them specifically, should they come up during a former
release rehab on a pc, they are to be handled.
However, the auditor must understand that such a release in no way
means that a person is a release on a process or on one of the Grades!
Prison might be a problem to someone but getting out doesn't make him a
problems Release! Don't misconstrue one for the other and declare someone
a Grades Release at some Level because he had a release in life.
Actually one can go release on any subject and theoretically one could
rehab any release a pc had. The exact subjects a pc must be released on in
order to make it up the Bridge are those listed on the Grade Chart.
Occasionally it is necessary to rehab a win or state attained by the pc
which is not specifically mentioned on the Grade Chart. But, again, one
would not mistake it for a Grade Chart Release. (Ref: HCOB 30 Aug 80,
Keeping Scientology Working Series 24, WINS, "STATES", AND GRADE CHART
DECLARES.)
OVERRUN
Overrun occurs when the thetan considers that something has gone on
too long or happened too often.
When the person begins to feel this way about something, he begins to
protest it and try to stop it. This tends to make things more solid and
builds up mass in the mind. People who are very intent on stopping things
in life appear solid and massy.
In auditing, an overrun means the preclear came out of the bank and
then went back into it again. For instance, the pc released on the process
"From where could you communicate to your dog?" but the auditor continued
the process after he should have indicated the F/N and gone on to something
else. By continuing, the auditor throws the pc back into the bank again
and wrecks the release state.
HCOB 19.12.80 - 3 -
An overrun in auditing can also mean that the pc gained an ability to
do something and the auditor continued the process or grade past the point
where the ability had been regained. By pushing on, the ability can get
invalidated. In both cases the person's attention goes back onto his case
and hangs up. The person can feel the mass of it again.
In life when something is overrun, the person begins to accumulate
protests and upsets about the thing or activity he feels overrun on. His
attention tends to stick on it. This also builds up mass.
An overrun, whether it occurred in auditing or in life, is handled in
auditing using the tech of rehabbing.
THEORY OF REHABBING
The theory of rehabs is based on the following stable datum: This
particular universe is built by twos. One cannot know a datum unless there
is another datum to compare it to. This fact can also be seen to operate in
the field of the mind. (Ref: Logic 8, Scientology 0-8, THE BOOK OF
BASICS.)
Thus, in rehabbing a release point one is getting the pc to view one
datum (a time of release from a mass) as compared to another datum (a time
he was stuck in the mass) and when this is done the pc moves out of the
mass once again. That is the simplicity of what occurs.
To expand on the mechanics involved, it can be described as follows:
When a person has been overrun, he is trying to stop the mass or thing
he has gone back into. The other side to that is the time or times he was
released from it. These are opposites: the "plus" of the mass and the
"minus" of the time the mass wasn't there. This idea of opposites tends to
hang things up.
The idea then behind handling an overrun is to unstabilize this plus-
minus pair by getting the pc to clearly spot the "minus" side of it. When
this happens, the "plus" side goes.
When the pc's attention is directed to the points when he was released
from the mass he ceases to try and stop the mass and it goes. The release
state then rehabilitates.
So the mechanism being worked with here is that the mass connected
with an overrun can be knocked out by spotting the release connected with
it. It is a very simple principle which has important uses in auditing.
TYPES OF REHABS
There are three types of rehab procedures for use in rehabbing
releases or states.
The earliest is Rehab 1965 Style. This is followed by Rehab by
Counting which I developed in 1968. Later on, in 1971, I developed the
Date/Locate procedure.
Each of the three has its uses depending on what it is one is trying
to rehab.
One does a Rehab '65 Style when one is rehabbing a specific point,
such as the point a specific former release was attained.
HCOB 19.12.80 - 4 -
A Rehab by Counting is done when, for instance, a process appears
overrun in session or when one is rehabbing "releases" such as on drugs on
the Scientology Drug Rundown, or at any time something is likely to have a
number of releases connected with it.
A Date/Locate is used when one wants to directly spot the exact time
and location of a specific incident and thus blow the mass connected with
it. (Date/Locate is used on the last step of the Dianetic Clear Special
Intensive to determine the exact point a person went Clear. The Date/Locate
procedure has many other uses in other types of auditing as well, but in
rehabbing its most frequent use is on the DCSI, per the above.)
INDOCTRINATING THE PC
The procedure for doing a rehab is quite simple when one understands
the theory of it and makes sure the pc does, too.
Before doing any rehab or Date/Locate, clear the terms and procedure
with the pc so that he understands. Use the data in this issue to clear the
theory of release and rehabs, and to clear the procedure to be used-Rehab
'65 Style or Rehab by Counting. Use data in HCOB 15 Nov 78, DATING AND
LOCATING, in indoctrinating the pc to the Date/Locate theory and procedure.
All the terms and steps of the procedure are covered in that issue.
The better the pc understands what is going on the smoother it will
go. Do not skimp this indoctrination step. Any auditing efforts can go up
in smoke if one tries to audit the pc over misunderstoods.
1. Clear the terms below with the pc, using demos and consulting the pc's
understanding.
A. RELEASE:
1. a person who has been able to back out of his bank. The bank is
still there but the person isn't sunk into it with all its somatics and
depressions. 2. When the pc disconnects from the mass in his bank, that is
a release. When this happens, the pc disconnects from the bank to a greater
or lesser degree. 3. A person who has become free of a difficulty or
personal "block" stemming from the mind. 4. When you take a thetan out of a
mass, that is a release.
B. REHABILITATE:
to restore to a former capacity or condition. In auditing, this means
to do the series of actions in session which result in regaining a state of
release for the pc. Abbreviated "Rehab".
C. KEY-IN:
the action of some part of the reactive mind moving in on the person.
A Key-in occurs when the environment around the awake but fatigued or
distressed individual is similar to some part of the reactive mind. Since
the reactive mind operates on the equation A=A=A, the present time
environment becomes identified with the contents of a particular portion of
the bank and so it activates and exerts its influence on the person.
D. KEY-OUT:
the action of the reactive mind or some portion of it dropping out of
restimulation on the pc.
E. GRADE:
a series of processes culminating in an exact ability attained,
examined and attested to by the pc. (See the Classification Gradation and
Awareness Chart for the complete explanation of the different grades.)
HCOB 19.12.80 - 5 -
Auditing processes result in a release. The auditing processes of a
Grade, when done, result in the pc attaining the specific ability of that
Grade.
2. Clear "overrun" with the pc, using the section "Overrun" in this issue.
Have the pc demo an overrun in auditing and in life.
3. Clear with the pc the stable datum on which rehabbing is based (under
"Theory of Rehabbing" in this issue). Have him demo each (using a demo
kit) as needed to ensure he's got it. 4. Using a demo kit, clear with the
pc the simple mechanics of rehabbing (spotting the release connected with a
mass). Ref: Section on "Theory of Rehabbing" in this issue.
5. Go over with the pc each step of the procedure to be used (Rehab '65
Style
or Rehab by Counting or Date/Locate, if needed). Clear any words
regarding these procedures, which have not previously been cleared in the
pc's auditing. Use a demo kit as needed.
6. Cover meter dating with the pc so he understands its purpose and how it
is
done. Use E-Meter Drill 22 to explain it. Ensure the pc understands you
don't want him dependent on the meter but that you will help him, using the
meter, if necessary. (Ref: HCOB 4 Aug 63, ALL ROUTINES, E-METER ERRORS,
COMMUNICATION CYCLE ERROR.)
Be sure the pc understands the simple basics of rehabbing with no
questions or confusions or misunderstood terms, before you begin any rehab.
Additionally, when doing any type of rehab session it is important to
ensure the pc's ruds are in before starting.
REHAB PROCEDURES
PROCEDURE FOR REHAB '65 STYLE
I. Determine what is going to be rehabbed. This might be a release on a
process, some other type of former release, the ability of a Grade
attained or some other state achieved by the pc.
A. For a process, use the question:
"Were you released on (process)?".
a. Clear the question on the pc first, omitting the
name of the actual process.
b. Then check the question (including the name of
the actual process) on the meter.
c. If no read on the question, check Suppress and
Invalidate.
d. If the pc says he was released but no read on the question,
check
Suppress or Invalidate. If pc is assertive or protesty about
having been released, check Asserted and/or Protest.
B. For rehabbing a state: One would simply orient the pc to the state
(having already verified that it is a valid state and having C/S
instructions to do so)
HCOB 19.12.80 - 6 -
and proceed with the rehab steps. (Ref: HCOB 30 Aug 80, Keeping
Scientology Working Series 24, WINS, "STATES", AND GRADE CHART DECLARES.)
(Exception: The State of Clear would only be handled on a full Dianetic
Clear Special Intensive. Any other states which might come up on that
Intensive would, if valid, be handled routinely by the trained DCSI
auditor, per DCSI procedure.)
C. Rehabbing Grades: Data on using '65 Style to rehab Grades is
covered
in the "Rehabbing Grades" section of this issue.
D. Rehabbing Former Releases: Data on using '65 Style to rehab former
releases is covered in the "Rehabbing Former Releases" section of
this issue.
II. When it has been determined that the pc was released on the process,
the
Ability Gained for a Grade had been attained or the state being
rehabbed has been established, one proceeds by first finding out when this
occurred, per Step 1 below, and then continues with the remainder of the
rehab steps:
1. Loosely locate the session or time in which it occurred.
(Note: This may have to be meter dated if the pc is unable to locate
when it happened. For this reason, any auditor doing rehabs must be adept
at E-Meter Drill 22, "E-Meter Hidden Date, This Life". Also, see HCOB 2 Aug
65, RELEASE GOOFS, point 4, Meter Mis-use.)
You simply want to determine when. The pc may give you the year, month
and day of the release, he may describe it by significance ("The moment I
thought to myself, 'That's why I wrecked the car!'"), or he may spot when
it occurred by location ("It occurred when I was in session for the first
time with Joe in his new auditing room."). The reference for this is:
HCOB 8 Jun AD13, THE TIME TRACK AND ENGRAM RUNNING BY CHAINS, BULLETIN
2, HANDLING THE TIME TRACK.
NOTE: The indicators which tell you that the release or state is
rehabilitated are an F/N on the meter and VGIs on the pc. If this
occurs on any step of the rehab procedure, simply indicate the F/N and
gently end off on that rehab action.
2. Get in Suppress, Invalidate buttons on the session or time.
3. Get in "unacknowledged" or "what was unacknowledged".
4. Indicate anything found to the pc as By-passed Charge.
5. Find the Key-in that was Keyed-out in that time or session.
(The person went release because something keyed out in that time or
session.)
6. When this is found and recognized by the pc, the pc will recover the
release and the process, Grade, state, etc. will be rehabilitated.
7. If this does not happen, find out what keyed in (at some point after the
release) that ended the release state and get it loosely located as in
Step 1.
8. Repeat Steps 2 to 6 on it.
HCOB 19.12.80 - 7 -
9. CONDITIONAL: If, when the above is done, the release still has not
rehabbed, get the pc to Itsa alternately the point of key-out when the
pc released and the point of key-in afterwards, one after the other. (Use
the meter to guide the pc, if necessary, by asking "What's that?" when you
see a fall on the needle.) This isn't an alternate/repetitive question-
"What was keyed out then?"/"What was keyed in then?"-but a use of these and
any such wording, one after the other, as Itsa invitations until the
release is regained and F/N, VGIs obtained.
CHECKING FOR EPs
If one wants to check if the pc has reached the EP of a process, or if
one suspects that the EP may have been reached out of session, one can
check "Did anything occur?" per HCOB 5 Dec 71 IMPORTANT END PHENOMENA and
if the EP has been reached it can be rehabbed using the Rehab '65 Style.
One would never ask leading questions or feed the EP to the pc in such
situations. Simply check if anything occurred.
PROCEDURE FOR REHAB BY COUNTING
1. Establish there is something to be rehabbed. (Naturally, you can't
rehab
a release if there isn't one. You couldn't rehab a process if the pc
had never run it.)
The question would vary depending on the situation being rehabbed.
a. If it looks (due to overrun phenomena) as though a process has
been
overrun in session, one could ask, "Have we by-passed a release
point on this process?".
b. For rehabbing releases on drugs on the Scientology Drug Rundown,
one
would check, "Did you go release on (drug) ?".
2. If there is a release the question should read. If no read, check
Suppress and Invalidate. There must be a read either on checking the
question or on the pc's origination that there is a release there, before
proceeding with the rehab.
3. If no read but the pc says he was released, check if the release has
been
suppressed or Invalidated. If the pc is asserting release or being
protesty about it, check Asserted and/or Protest.
4. Sometimes the pc will F/N simply on spotting he was released. This can
be
quite common especially when the pc's ruds are in and the auditor's
TRs are smooth. An F/N with good indicators tells you that the rehab is
complete and the mass has keyed out or the state has been rehabilitated.
5. If no F/N on spotting there was a release, ask the pc how many times
he
was released. Get him to count the number of times and when he gets it
he will E/N.
6. Sometimes the pc can't get the number and the auditor can then use the
meter to count how many times and get it that way. He can ask the pc
if he has some idea of approximate number of times and then use "More than
_______ ?"/"Less than _______ ?". He uses the tech of E-Meter Drill 22 to
establish the general range of the number of times. He would the count to
the pc. ("Were you released on (_______) 10 times? 11, 12?", etc.)
HCOB 19.12.80 - 8 -
The correct number of times will read and, when indicated, will F/N.
Rehab by counting is a simple procedure but it can get messed up by an
uncertain attitude on the part of the auditor or by rough auditor TRs, so
be sure you are confident and well drilled.
BRIDGING FROM REHAB BY COUNTING
TO '65 STYLE
If, even with the ruds in, doing a Rehab by Counting doesn't F/N, one
can bridge over into a Rehab '65 Style and rehab it that way. Doing a Rehab
'65 Style will clean up any by-passed charge on the release and allow it to
rehab.
If on the Rehab by Counting the pc had said he was released several
times, one would have to find the primary release point (the one "that is
most real to him," or when he "had the biggest win," etc.) in order to do
the Rehab '65 Style steps on that release point. Handled smoothly in this
way, you will be able to rehabilitate the release, with F/N, VGIs.
DATE/LOCATE PROCEDURE
The Date/Locate procedure is very thoroughly covered in HCOB 15
November 1978, DATING AND LOCATING, and thus is not repeated here. It is
based upon the fundamental principles of rehab tech, but the additional
theory and full Date/Locate procedure contained in HCOB 15 Nov 78 must be
understood and drilled well before it is done on any pc.
ADDITIONAL DATA ON SPECIFIC
USES OF REHAB PROCEDURES
If one is to handle rehabs he must know the fine differences involved
in the application of rehab tech to each type of thing to be rehabbed.
For example, the rehabbing of Grades and the rehabbing of former
releases differ from each other and they also differ slightly in some of
their steps from the rehabbing of specific processes or states as covered
earlier in this issue.
For this reason each is taken up separately here in its own section.
REHABBING GRADES
The rehabilitation of any Grade is done on the basis of actual
auditing having been done to the end product of the specific Ability Gained
for the Grade on all flows. (Note: pcs should be Quaded up by the time
they receive their Grades.)
One does not rehab a Grade by checking "Did anything occur?" or "Were
you released on Grade _______ ?" Of course something would have occurred on
the Grade and the pc would have released each time a process or a flow on a
process of the Grade F/Ned. This is not what you're looking for.
The End phenomena of a Grade is the attainment of an ability by the pc
which he did not previously have. Each level of the Grade Chart results in
a
specific ability gained by the pc when
HCOB 19.12.80 - 9 -
he does that particular Grade. These are expressed on the Grade Chart in
the "Ability Gained" column.
The specific ability for each of the four flows of a Grade is listed in
HCOB/HCO PL 23 October 1980 Issue II, CHART OF ABILITIES GAINED FOR LOWER
LEVELS AND EXPANDED GRADES. These are what you are interested in finding
out and rehabbing, if they have been attained.
You want to determine that the pc has gained the ability for each flow
of the Grade when you are rehabbing. It's not: Did he get his Grade 0
ability? It's: Is he willing for others to communicate to him on any
subject? Does he no longer resist communication from others on unpleasant
or unwanted subjects? Yes? Good, he's made it on Flow 1 of Grade 0.
Does he have the ability to communicate freely with anyone on any
subject? Is he free from or no longer bothered by communication
difficulties, and no longer withdrawn or reticent? Does he like to outflow?
If so, he's attained the ability on Flow 2 of Grade 0.
One checks each flow of a Grade for the ability of that flow in this
way. If the pc says he can't, or if he reads on the meter as being unable
to communicate freely to others, for example, then you know he is not
complete on that Grade. He would need to have an FES done at least as far
back as the beginning of that Grade and any errors found corrected, and
then more processes for that Grade run on all flows until the Ability
Gained had been genuinely attained. Further data about handling the pc who
hasn't made a Grade is contained in C/S Series 4.
A Dianetic pc who couldn't honestly say he was a well and happy human
being would need more somatic items run out R3RA.
One would never try to rehab a Grade the pc had never really been run
on, or for instance, Q and A with a pc who asserted he was a Grade 2
Release because he went to confession as a youth. The Abilities Gained of
the Grades are attained only by auditing on the various processes of each
Grade. The results of well-run Grades are light years above anything that
other fields or practices can offer, so don't sell them short by omitting
or quickying them.
The procedure, then, for rehabbing a Grade is as follows:
1. Establish from folder study that the pc has run the processes of the
Grade
on all flows in the first place. There should be some evidence in the
folder that the pc has attained the Grade, whether previously declared or
not. He should have run enough processes for this to be evident.
2. Show the pc (with pc on the meter) the written statement of the Ability
Gained for Flow 1 of the Grade, and have him read it. (Ref: HCOB/HCO PL
23 October 1980 II, CHART OF ABILITIES GAINED FOR LOWER LEVELS AND EXPANDED
LOWER GRADES.)
3. Then check with the pc as to whether he has attained (or "can do") the
ability for that flow of the Grade, as stated in HCOB/HCO PL 23 October
1980 II.
4. If he has attained it, rehab it by Rehab '65 Style.
5. Repeat Step 2 and 3 on the Ability Gained for each of the remaining
flows
(Flow 2, 3 and 0) of the Grade.
HCOB 19.12.80 - 10 -
6. If the pc has attained the ability on each flow of the Grade, he is a
valid release on that Grade.
7. If the pc doesn't have the Ability Gained for one or more of the flows
of
the Grade, he doesn't have the abilities of the Grade. The processes
(and the flows) he ran on it would have to be FES'ed to locate any errors.
The errors found would have to be corrected and any unflat process
flattened. Then additional processes for that Grade would need to be run
until the pc really had the Ability Gained for each flow of the Grade.
REHABBING FORMER RELEASES
Rehabbing former releases came into being in 1965 and was done most
frequently in that year and the years immediately following it, after the
Grades had been established. At that time it was necessary to clear up and
get acknowledged the former releases a pc may have had during his
processing in the previous years, and to determine that he had been
released on each Grade before he went onto power and Clearing.
It is still a very valid tech that is used when needed.
It may in some instances be done, at the adjudication of the C/S,
where a case is having trouble or is bogged and the C/S suspects from
folder study that the case may be hung up on former release points.
In genning the pc in to this action ensure hs understands what is
being looked for. Although one uses Rehab '65 Style, the action is not the
same as rehabbing a Grade or even exactly the same as rehabbing a process.
Here you are looking for times in the pc's auditing history, recent or
distant, when he felt good in sessions. This would not necessarily have to
be a specific EP of a process the pc ran or the EP of a particular Grade.
Rehabbing former releases is not limited by reference to any specific
process or Grade. Also, when the pc is asked about an earlier release, he
may offer up a time he felt released from something in life. If so, this
would be checked and handled just as any other release point, as in this
action you are going to rehab any and all validly reading release points
the pc may offer. When a former release is found it is rehabbed by the '65
Style.
The procedure for rehabbing former releases is:
1. Ensure the pc's ruds are in and that he has been through steps 1-6 of
the
section "Indoctrinating the pc", in this issue.
2. Have the pc demo the idea of former releases as it applies to auditing
and
to life until he's got it.
3. R-Factor the pc that you are going to rehab any former releases he may
have
had.
4. Clear the question: "Have you been released earlier?" Then check the
question.
5. If you get a read on clearing or checking the question, find nut what
the
release was on.
a. If no read on the question when cleared or checked, check Suppress
and Invalidate.
HCOB 19.12.80 - 11 -
b. If pc says he was released earlier but no read on the question
when
cleared or checked, check Suppress or Invalidate. If the pc is
assertive or protesty about having been released, check Asserted and/or
Protest.
6. When it has been determined that the pc has been released earlier, one
then
proceeds per Step 1 of Rehab '65 Style instructions until one gets an
F/N and rehabilitation of the former release.
7. One then checks for any other former releases by checking, "Is there
another time you were released earlier?" and handles per Steps 5 and 6
above.
8. Repeat Step 7 as long as the pc has former releases to rehab.
9. Conditional: If on Steps 5 a or b the meter doesn't read or ceases
reading
even after Suppress, Invalidate, Asserted and/or Protest are checked, or
if an ARC Break needle turns on while doing the rehabs, one checks for and
handles any ARC Breaks which may be present in the session or connected
with the thing you are trying to rehab.
After handling any ARC Breaks, recheck for former releases and handle
until the Auditor, pc and meter are in agreement that any former releases
have been rehabbed and that there are no ARC Breaks preventing any former
release from reading. It may be necessary to also check and handle the
other rudiments (PTP and Missed Withholds) to ensure there is nothing
preventing any former release from reading.
10. Conditional: If the pc has a big win in rehabbing former releases, one
would let him have his win and end the session. When sessions are
resumed, one would then check for and handle any remaining former releases.
When all the pc's former releases have been rehabbed, the action is
complete.
ADVICE TO AUDITORS AND C/SES ON REHABS
Meter Dependence
In using the meter on a rehab of any sort, one does not want to get
into a situation where the pc is made dependent on the meter for obtaining
data. One uses the meter in a rehab only when the pc is unable to come up
with the data needed. In getting the number of times released on a process,
for instance, the auditor would get the pc to establish the number of times
released and only if the pc could not get it would the auditor use the
meter to find the number of times released. This all comes under increasing
the pc's certainty of his data and is best expressed in HCOB 4 August 1963
ALL ROUTINES, E-METER ERRORS, COMMUNICATION CYCLE ERROR.
Out Ruds
When a rehab is not going to an F/N, one usually finds that there is
an out rud over which the rehab is being done. This can be:
a. An out rud on the subject being rehabbed;
b. An out rud on something before the release occurred;
HCOB 19.12.80 - 12 -
c. An out rud in the rehab session itself.
One has to find out what the out rud is, handle it and then the rehab
should go easily to F/N.
If at any time an ARC Break needle turns on during a rehab,
immediately find what the ARC Break is on and handle fully. Then take the
rehab to F/N.
An ARC Break, particularly, may obscure a release and prevent it from
reading. The remedy is to handle the ARC Break and then recheck for the
release.
NOTE: That one has F/Ned the ruds or handled session outnesses to F/N
does not mean the rehab is finished, so complete the rehab if needed once
the ruds are in.
Rehabs are very simple to do provided the auditor's comm cycle is not
rough or distracting and both he and the pc understand what is being done
on a
rehab and how the procedures go. The action is one of de-stimulation not
re-stimulation. It is done with a light touch and is a smooth action. One
doesn't get into forcing the pc on a rehab.
Drilling the different rehab procedures must be a part of any High
Crime checkout on this bulletin so that the auditor can confidently handle
any situation that might arise during a rehab.
The best way to run a session is to be so sharp as an auditor that you
never let the pc overrun in the first place. But should this occur or
should you inherit a pc that another auditor has overrun, or should life
and livingness knock out a release state, this issue lays out the steps for
restoring any type of release.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:dr/nc
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=2/12/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
FLOATING NEEDLE AND TA POSITION
MODIFIED
Remimeo
Tech & Qual
All Levels
All Auditors
All Supervisors
All Internships
All C/Ses
Tech Checksheets
Examiners
Ethics Officers
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 2 DECEMBER 1980
Remimeo
Tech & Qual
All Levels
All Auditors
All Supervisors
All Internships
All C/Ses
Tech Checksheets
Examiners
Ethics Officers
FLOATING NEEDLE AND TA POSITION
MODIFIED
This Bulletin carries further the data given in:
HCOB 10 December 1978RB URGENT-IMPORTANT C/S Series 99RB
Re-revised 25 May 1980 SCIENTOLOGY F/N AND TA POSITION
and modifies but does not cancel all HCOBs that mention having to have the
TA between 2.0 and 8.0 before the F/N can be considered valid, including:
HCOB 21 October 1968R Revised 8 July 1977 FLOATING NEEDLE
HCOB 7 May 1969R, Issue V Revised 15 July 1977 FLOATING NEEDLE
HCOB 21 April 1971RC Revised 25 July 1978 C/S Series 36RC DIANETICS
HCOB 24 October 1971RA Re-revised 25 May 1980 FALSE TA
HCOB 15 February 1972R Revised 26 January 1977 FALSE TA ADDITION 2
HCOB 23 November 1973RB Re-revised 25 May 1980 DRY AND WET HANDS
MAKE FALSE TA
HCOB 8 June 1970 LOW TA HANDLING
HCOB 13 June 1970 Issue II HUBBARD CONSULTANT STUDY STRESS ANALYSIS
HCOB 2.12.80 - 2 -
Some recent tests I conducted have shown that a floating needle is a
floating needle regardless of tone arm position.
This changes an earlier belief that, in order to be valid, the tone
arm had to be between 2.0 and 3.0 for it to be called a floating needle.
Carefully examining dozens of F/Ns which occurred with the TA well
above 3.0 and looking for any troubles with the case following calling the
F/N an F/N, I found that there were no adverse consequences.
Therefore, it can be safely assumed that a floating needle is a
floating needle regardless of where the tone arm position may be. It should
be called, indicated and written as an F/N, with the TA noted.
Palm moisture, pc grip and other factors alter the TA position but not
the F/N. The auditor must also be prepared to handle and handle false TA
and nothing in this finding changes handling.
Tone arm positions register the relative mass of the case and nothing
in this finding changes that. There are low TA cases and high TA cases and
the state of the TA remains important and all data regarding TA positions
are valid.
An ARC Break needle (an F/N accompanied by bad indicators) remains an
ARC Break needle and nothing in this finding changes that. It must be
handled. (One ordinarily checks for an ARC Break in this case.)
This finding about TA position and F/Ns has been corrected earlier.
This present issue carries it further based on very thorough recent
testing. There are apparently no liabilities of any kind in calling high
and low TA F/Ns F/Ns.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:nc
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=24/11/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Happiness Rundown Series 1
HAPPINESS RUNDOWN
Broad Public Issue
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 24 NOVEMBER 1980
Broad Public Issue
Happiness Rundown Series 1
HAPPINESS RUNDOWN
This rundown is based on the booklet "The Way to Happiness."
The booklet is being released on general public lines and it is not a
church publication as it is not religious. Scientology has its own creed
and codes and the fact that it also uses this booklet to aid in spiritual
counselling is incidental to its public use.
A minister or pastoral counselor can, however, counsel on any subject
and that the church sells a rundown based on the booklet does not make the
booklet religious.
THE WAY TO HAPPINESS
Factually, the world has gotten itself a lot of new violence potential
without also getting a campaign for higher morality. Such an imbalance is
catastrophic. The police, banks, merchants, insurance people are all in
real trouble through the decline of morality.
The Kentucky school board, right now, is faced with no morals being
taught in their schools. They already have a crime problem if their schools
are like anyone else's.
Materialism and mechanism (these are philosophic schools) are on a
rampage. The biologists, psychs, evolutionists are pushing them to the
limit. These are blown up by the simple question, "Your data may be quite
correct but you have no proof that there is not something else that uses
all this." Their position is untenable philosophically. So, using this, the
psychs and biologists and so on are edging the churches out and factually
are creating a dangerous social situation. At a time when man can wield
unlimited force, he has no moral codes or restraints.
There factually is no moral code today. The Christian one was nice.
But if you read the Ten Commandments, they are designed for people several
thousand years ago.
There have not been any codes of morals based on common sense. They
are handed down from heaven, even in China. The psychs use this to get an
inside track. The U.S. government-and possibly some others-cannot finance
religion, per the First Amendment. This means they cannot allow children to
be taught morals, and cannot permit any power to churches. The psychs love
that. They are anti-religious. They teach that one succumbs to temptation,
that morals are inbred by paralleling the history of the race and when a
child gets old enough his inbred nerves go moral. This is pure claptrap,
but that happens to be their belief. This means that crime will worsen, the
psychs will ride higher and higher.
Philosophers (not religious ones) over the world in various times and
places have noted these qualities of morality so don't
HCOB 24.11.80 - 2 -
get the idea this is all derived from China. Confucius, for instance, was
mainly interested in reforming the government, not the individual.
In all times and all places, the morals contained in this book have
appeared amongst tribes and races.
What they lacked-in China, in the Near East, in Europe-was some basic
principle which made the picture clear. When I isolated the common
denominator, the dynamic principle of existence, I had such a factor. I
never before applied it to straightening out ideas on the subject of
morality. But the precepts contained in this book are not just culled here
and there and put together. I worked them out newly with due attention to
what had gone on before in man's history. His moral codes are woefully
inadequate to deal with modern life. This one will.
There is another point. Nobody could ever possibly have kept any of
the old moral codes. Old Mo-Tzu's code only lasted a few hundred years
until people finally decided you couldn't keep it-too severe-and they even
forgot it ever existed after about the 1st century B.C. and only found it
again this century. There have been novels and plays about someone trying
to live the life of Christ and the hero always winds up in a mess, the
lesson being that His teachings couldn't be followed.
The booklet, "The Way to Happiness," contains a non-religious moral
code based on common sense. It may be the first such code.
THE HAPPINESS RUNDOWN
Essentially, what the booklet does is give people stable data which
holds off confusions. For people will be found to be quite confused on this
subject.
This moral code is different in that it can be kept. It consists of 21
major rules or precepts and about 15 sub-rules making a total of about 36
in all. In number 20 there are about 20 additional items. In all, the
rundown, then, would be handling about 56 separate concepts on the subject
of morality, plus morality itself. There are probably around 10 steps for
each concept: there are therefore over 500 questions or actions. This gives
one some idea of the length of the rundown.
The object of the rundown is to clear up any confusions on the subject
of morals, any and all transgressions against these specific morals, to
slide the person out of the valence of any immoral person and obtain an EP
of realization/cognition that one really is on the Way to Happiness.
Although the rundown is handling very hot charge, it runs very lightly
and smoothly.
As these precepts and booklet do contain, in fact, the major
principles of morality as they apply to modern life and as it is a fact
that tragedy and unhappiness occur when the points are violated, the
rundown should steer the person in a direction where he is certain he can
live a happier life. So the rundown should be quite successful. It is quite
a tour de force, really, to assemble the essentials into a modern moral
code. And because these are somewhat universal, they will be found to have
a lot of charge on them as they were the points where one went off the
rails.
The rundown itself picks up specific confusions, transgressions and
valence closures. It will probably get rid of
HCOB 24.11.80 - 3 -
a lot of shame, blame, regret. A person should feel pretty clean and sparky
after it. The potential is there.
The Happiness Rundown could keep a lot of Class IV orgs and missions
going. Two rundowns-the Purification Rundown and the Survival Rundown- have
been made available. Now here is another. People could have their grades
before or after this. It has no engram running and could be run anywhere up
the chart, even on Clears.
The booklet itself will be running on through the society if well
marketed. It should feed back pcs to the org even if the rundown is not
religious. As I have said, a pastor can counsel anything.
Good luck with this rundown.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Approved & Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
of CALIFORNIA
BDCSC:LRH:dm:bk
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Approved & Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
of CALIFORNIA
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=23/11/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Confessional Form 8RA
CASE SUPERVISOR CONFESSIONAL
Remimeo
HCO
Tech/Qual
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 23 NOVEMBER 1980
Remimeo
HCO
Tech/Qual (Cancels & Replaces BTB 24 May 73RA Re-Rev. 10 March 77,
Confessional Form 8R, CASE SUPERVISOR CONFESSIONAL which failed
to give the correct reference on how to do a Confessional and omitted the
end rudiments. Additional Confessional questions have also been added to
the list to cover various aspects not previously taken into account.)
Confessional Form 8RA
CASE SUPERVISOR CONFESSIONAL
Ref: HCOB 30 November 1978 CONFESSIONAL PROCEDURE
Anyone doing a Confessional must have done or be on a Confessional
course or internship.
The procedure for doing a Confessional is contained in HCOB 30 November
1978, CONFESSIONAL PROCEDURE.
When applying Confessional tech correctly, you are helping the
individual to face up to his responsibilities in his group and the society
and putting him back into communication with his fellow man, his family,
and the world at large.
AUDITOR: ______________________________ PRECLEAR:
___________________________
ORG: __________________________________ DATE:
_______________________________
1. Have you ever evaluated the meaning of technical materials for
an auditor?
_______
2. Have you ever told an auditor how he should audit?
_______
3. Have you ever pretended to quote HCOBs or PLs without showing the
actual issue?
_______
4. Have you ever failed to refer an auditor to an HCOB, book or tape?
_______
5. Have you altered the content of an HCOB or PL in any way?
_______
6. Have you ever C/Sed for a process which you'd seen but was never
published?
_______
7. Have you ever accepted Verbal Tech from anyone?
_______
8. Have you ever misused or altered tech?
_______
9. Have you given out instructions to an auditor that were contrary to
HCOBs or PLs?
_______
HCOB 23.11.80 - 2 -
10. Have you tolerated out-admin in pc folders?
_______
11. Have you ever OKed an auditor's C/S when you really couldn't tell
what happened in the last session?
_______
12. Have you ever C/Sed a case when the folder summary was confusing or
out of date?
_______
13. Have you ever gone on C/Sing a case when an FES should have
been done?
_______
14. Have you ever failed to get familiar with a case before C/Sing it?
_______
15. Have you ever C/Sed a folder from just a glib study of the last
session's admin?
_______
16. Have you ever given up trying to correct an auditor's handwriting?
_______
17. Have you ever C/Sed a case without Exam reports?
_______
18. Have you ever failed to see that pc programs were actually
completed?
_______
19. Have you ever allowed a pc to be audited without the folder
being C/Sed?
_______
20. Have you ever just patched up a pc and then dropped him?
_______
21. Have you permitted a frequent change of auditors on a case?
_______
22. Have you ever let red tags remain unhandled for more than
24 hours?
_______
23. Have you C/Sed a red-tagged session without first finding out
what really went wrong?
_______
24. Have you ever C/Sed an ill pc without finding and handling
the tech reason?
_______
25. Have you ever not handled mis-C/Sing or mis-auditing on a case?
_______
26. Have you ever neglected the cases of Execs?
_______
27. Have you ever let staff cases go unhandled?
_______
28. Have you ever failed to send an auditor to Cramming when you
should have?
_______
29. As a C/S have you ever neglected to handle auditors you were
C/Sing for, who had out-TRs or out-metering?
_______
30. Have you ever given a well done to an auditor when the session
really wasn't?
_______
31. Have you not studied your C/S hat?
_______
32. Have you ever C/Sed while your High Crime checkouts were
backlogged?
_______
33. Have you been spending C/Sing time doing something else?
_______
HCOB 23.11.80 - 3 -
34. Have you ever backlogged or refused to do Cramming Orders that
had been written on you?
_______
35. Have you ever failed to insist that auditors you were C/Sing for
kept up their High Crime checkouts?
_______
36. Have you neglected to keep up inspections of the Tech and Qual
lines per C/S Series 57?
_______
37. Have you ever pushed quality and neglected quantity?
_______
38. Have you ever pushed quantity and neglected quality?
_______
39. Is there any technical question you are afraid to ask for fear
it would make you look incompetent or stupid?
_______
40. Have you ever C/Sed over tech misunderstoods?
_______
41. Have you ever failed to get good results on a case?
_______
42. Have you ever continued to C/S a case that baffled you without
seeking help from a senior Tech terminal?
_______
43. Have you ever "gone on hoping" while C/Sing a case?
_______
44. Have you ever sent a pc to ethics when the real cause of the
trouble was out tech?
_______
45. Have you ever Q'd and A'd with a pc when C/Sing?
_______
46. Have you ever Q'd and A'd with an auditor when C/Sing?
_______
47. As a C/S, have you ever failed to hold your position on something?
_______
48. Have you ever become involved 2D-wise with a pc you were C/Sing?
_______
49. Have you ever let a Senior Exec tell you how to program a pc?
_______
50. Have you ever let a Registrar tell you how to program a pc?
_______
51. Have you ever let personal opinion sway you in C/Sing a pc's case?
_______
52. Have you ever talked with a pc and then C/Sed his case from
that talk?
_______
53. Have you ever agreed with an auditor that the pc was responsible
for the session going wrong?
_______
54. Have you ever written a C/S based on some idea or opinion
instead of following the C/S Series?
_______
55. Have you ever not written a Cramming Order when you should have?
_______
HCOB 23.11.80 - 4 -
56. Have you ever failed to use ethics or justice on someone that
was being harmful or destructive on Tech or Qual lines?
_______
57. Have you ever failed to use ethics on an auditor when
it was needed?
_______
58. Have you ever not handled an examiner who falsely reported?
_______
59. Have you ever failed to use ethics on a pc when it was needed?
_______
60. Have you ever failed to take action when justice was misapplied
on an auditor or other tech personnel?
_______
61. Have you accepted any illegal pc for processing?
_______
62. Have you ever incorrectly labelled a pc "illegal"?
_______
63. Have you ever used the Snr C/S to front for you?
_______
64. Have you ever covered up errors in your C/Sing?
_______
65. Have you ever blamed your errors on another C/S or auditor?
_______
66. Have you ever blamed a pc?
_______
67. Have you ever made a C/S wrong?
_______
68. Have you ever C/Sed badly?
_______
89. Do you have overts of omission on a Snr C/S?
_______
70. Do you have overts of commission on a Snr C/S?
_______
71. Do you have overts of omission on LRH?
_______
72. Do you have overts of commission on LRH?
_______
73. Have you ever not bothered to see that auditors were
properly trained?
_______
74. As a C/S, have you ever neglected to ensure the auditors
under you were in good case shape?
_______
75. Have you ever condoned or been involved in a TTC rip-off?
_______
76. Have you ever failed to help establish a TTC?
_______
77. Have you ever invalidated an auditor's intentions?
_______
78. Have you ever invalidated an auditor's future?
_______
79. Have you ever invalidated an auditor's potential?
_______
HCOB 23.11.80 - 5 -
80. Have you ever invalidated or harassed an Auditor when no
technical goof had occurred?
_______
81. Have you ever invalidated or harassed an auditor for doing
a correct action?
_______
82. Have you failed to recognize and acknowledge a technically
perfect session?
_______
83. Have you ever invalidated an auditor's willingness to audit?
_______
84. Have you ever failed to strengthen an auditor's willingness
to audit?
_______
85. Have you ever let an auditor give up auditing and not do
anything about it?
_______
86. Have you ever snooped through a pc folder for personal interests?
_______
87. Have you ever had a pc get extra exams just to get an F/N after
session?
_______
88. Have you ever C/Sed while not having read the basic books or
C/S Series?
_______
89. Have you ever run a process you weren't qualified to run?
_______
90. Have you ever C/Sed for an auditor to run a process that was
above his training level?
_______
9i. Have you ever C/Sed solo folders without authority to do so?
_______
92. Have you ever delivered processes which were unauthorized for
the org you were at?
_______
93. Have you ever done illegal solo sessions on yourself?
_______
94. Have you ever read your own case folder?
_______
95. Have you ever C/Sed your own case?
_______
96. Have you ever guessed at or falsely reported the
F/N VGI percentage?
_______
97. Have you ever C/Sed for an action and then after the folder
was sent to the auditor had doubts if it was the correct action?
_______
98. Have you ever sent a pc to declare when you knew or had doubts
if he'd made it?
_______
99. Have you ever C/Sed a pc for higher Grades hoping that would
handle the pc?
_______
100. Have you ever C/Sed a pc to attest to a Grade without evidence
of the full Ability Gained having been achieved?
_______
101. Have you ever C/Sed for a multiple declare?
_______
102. Have you ever C/Sed a pc to declare or attest to states being
asserted just to avoid upsetting the pc?
_______
HCOB 23.11.80 - 6 -
103. Have you C/Sed a pc to attest to processes or a Grade run
in a former life although the pc could not recall the processes
and no release point could be found?
_______
104. Have you ever let a pc attest to Clear when he hadn't made it?
_______
105. Have you ever written a C/S to "2wc a process to EP"?
_______
106. Have you ever let an auditor get an F/N by 2wc or discussion
of a level or process and call that the EP?
_______
107. Have you ever C/Sed a pc to declare or attest to states
being asserted because you didn't know what else to do?
_______
108. Have you ever C/Sed a pc to attest to states being asserted
because you felt you had to "validate the pc"?
_______
109. As a pc, have you falsely attested to Grades, Levels or states?
_______
110. Have you ever over-estimated a pc's true case level?
_______
111. Have you ever under-estimated a pc's true case level?
_______
112. Have you ever failed to see that a pc fully understood the
auditing procedure?
_______
113. Have you ever C/Sed for major actions to repair a case?
_______
114. Have you ever illegally audited pcs outside an org?
_______
115. Have you ever illegally C/Sed case folders outside an org?
_______
116. Have you ever broken your contract with an org?
_______
117. Have you ever disclosed Class VIII Course data?
_______
118. Have you ever disclosed data from a confidential process?
_______
119. Have you ever been insecure with confidential materials?
_______
120. Have you ever zeroxed or copied confidential materials?
_______
121. Have you ever refused to C/S a case?
_______
122. Have you ever refused to C/S for an auditor?
_______
123. Have you ever refused to C/S for an org?
_______
124. Have you ever threatened to quit your post as C/S?
_______
125. Have you ever considered giving up C/Sing?
_______
HCOB 23.11.80 - 7 -
126. Have you ever left a Tech post to escape from something?
_______
127. Have you ever considered leaving a Tech post to escape
from something?
_______
128. Have you ever advised someone against getting auditing
at some org?
_______
129. As a C/S, have you ever falsely or inaccurately represented
anything?
_______
130. Regarding your C/Sing is there anything which shouldn't be known?
_______
131. Is there anything about the auditors you C/S for which should
not be known?
_______
132. Is there anything about the tech delivery at an org or mission
where you've C/Sed which shouldn't be known?
_______
133. Have you committed a tech overt not covered in these questions?
_______
134. Is there any question about your C/Sing which you would hate
to be asked?
_______
185. Do you still have attention on one of these questions?
_______
136. Is there another question I should have asked you?
_______
137. In this Confessional, have you told a half-truth?
_______
138. In this Confessional, have you told an untruth?
_______
139. In this Confessional, has a withhold been missed?
_______
140. In this Confessional, have you told all?
_______
Give the pc the proclamation of Forgiveness:
BY THE POWER INVESTED IN ME, ANY OVERTS AND WITHHOLDS YOU HAVE FULLY
AND TRUTHFULLY TOLD ME ARE FORGIVEN BY SCIENTOLOGISTS.
On any adverse reaction to the Proclamation of Forgiveness, get the
rest of the withhold or repair the withhold session. (Ref: HCOB 10 Nov 78R-
1, PROCLAMATION: POWER TO FORGIVE ADDITION.)
(Note: If this is being done as an HCO Confessional, the Proclamation
of Forgiveness is omitted.)
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
BDCS:LRH:KM:nc Approved & accepted by
the
Copyright $c 1980 BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
by L. Ron Hubbard of the
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
Approved & accepted by the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=18/11/80
Volnum=0
Issue=2
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
CASE SUPERVISOR CORRECTION LIST
WORD LIST
Remimeo
C/Ses
Auditors
Tech/Qual
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 18 NOVEMBER 1980
Remimeo ISSUE II
C/Ses
Auditors (Cancels BTB 1 Dec 74 Iss V CLEARING LIST WORDS IN
Tech/Qual SCIENTOLOGY-CASE SUPERVISOR CORRECTION LIST as
this BTB no longer corresponds with the latest Case
Supervisor Correction List, HCOB 12 Oct 80. Further
this BTB did not give the references to be high crimed
before clearing words on a pc and did not give the type
of word clearing to be used.)
CASE SUPERVISOR CORRECTION LIST
WORD LIST
REFERENCES: HCO PL 4 Apr 72R III ETHICS AND STUDY TECH
Rev. 21.6.75
HCOB 8 Jul 74R I W/C Series 53R
Rev. 24.7.74 CLEAR TO F/N
HCOB 21 Jun 72 I W/C Series 38 METHOD 5
HCOB 9 Aug 78 II CLEARING COMMANDS
HCOB 17 Jul 79 I W/C Series 64
THE MISUNDERSTOOD WORD DEFINED
These are the words from HCOB 12 Oct 1980 CASE SUPERVISOR CORRECTION
LIST.
These words should be cleared on the pc before the CASE SUPERVISOR
CORRECTION LIST is actually assessed Per HCOB 9 Aug 78 Issue II CLEARING
COMMANDS.
The auditor must have received high crime checkouts from Qual on the
above references before clearing these words on a pc. The auditor uses
Method 5 Word Clearing when clearing these words on the pc.
This word list need only be cleared once in the pc's auditing if it
was correctly cleared the first time.
The fact of having cleared this word list on the pc must be noted in
the appropriate place in the pc's folder. (Ref: Auditor Admin Series 6R
THE YELLOW SHEET.)
WORDS FROM THE CASE SUPERVISOR CORRECTION LIST
A, about, alcohol, actions, admin, afraid, an, and, any, ARC Break, are,
as, auditor, auditors.
Been, booted, by.
Case, certain, chits, completions, compliance, condition, couldn't,
courses, covered, cramming, C/S, C/Ses, C/Sing.
Data, desperate, Dianetics, disagreements, do, doesn't, D of P, dog cases,
don't, drugs.
HCOB 18.11.80 II - 2 -
Earlier, eating, else, encountered, enough, environment, ethics,
evaluation, exam, exec, execs.
Failed, failing, false, faulty, flubby, for, from.
Get, getting, got.
Has, have, help, hidden, hopeful.
Ill, illegible, in, inadequate, instructions, interruptions, invalidation,
is, it.
Know.
Like, line, lines, losses.
Materials, medicine, missed, missing, misunderstood, moonlighting.
No, not.
Of, off, off-line, on, or, orders, others, out, out-admin, out-ethics, out-
int, out-2D, overloaded, overrepairing, overts, overwhelmed.
Paid, pc, pcs, permitting, physically, post, practice, pretending,
prevented, problem, problems, programs, PTS.
Q and A.
Red tags, registrars, reports, restim, rushed.
Scientology, seeking, similar, situations, sleep, solve, some, someone,
something, sort, status, study, subject.
Taking, tech, Tech Services, the, there, through, time, to, told, training,
trouble.
Unhandled, upset.
Was, were, weren't, what, when, why, with, withhold, withholding,
withholds, words, work, worksheets, write, writing, wrong.
You, your.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
Approved & accepted
by the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:MIR:bk
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
Approved & accepted
by the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=18/11/80
Volnum=0
Issue=1
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
AUDITOR CORRECTION LIST
WORD LIST
Remimeo
C/Ses
Auditors
Tech/Qual
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 18 NOVEMBER 1980
Remimeo ISSUE I
C/Ses
Auditors (Cancels BTB 1 Dec 74 Iss IV CLEARING LIST WORDS
Tech/Qual IN SCIENTOLOGY-AUDITOR CORRECTION LIST-STUDY
CORRECTION LIST 3 which omitted giving the references
to be high crimed before clearing words on a pc
and the method of word clearing to be used. This
word list has also been revised to include the
additional words from HCOB 27 Mar 72RB III Re-rev.
9.11.80 Study Correction List 3RB, AUDITOR CORRECTION
LIST-AUDITOR RECOVERY.)
AUDITOR CORRECTION LIST
WORD LIST
REFERENCES: HCO PL 4 Apr 72R III ETHICS AND STUDY TECH
Rev. 21.6.75
HCOB 8 Jul 74R I W/C Series 53R
Rev. 24.7.74 CLEAR TO F/N
HCOB 21 Jun 72 I W/C Series 38 METHOD 5
HCOB 9 Aug 78 II CLEARING COMMANDS
HCOB 17 Jul 79 I W/C Series 64
THE MISUNDERSTOOD WORD DEFINED
These are the words from HCOB 27 March 72RB AUDITOR CORRECTION LIST.
These words should be cleared on the pc before the AUDITOR CORRECTION
LIST is actually assessed Per HCOB 9 Aug 78 II CLEARING COMMANDS.
The auditor must have received high crime checkouts from Qual on the
above references before clearing these words on a pc. The auditor uses
Method 5 Word Clearing when clearing these words.
This word list need only be cleared once in the pc's auditing if it
was correctly cleared the first time.
The fact of having cleared this word list on the pc must be noted in
the appropriate place in the Pc's folder. (Ref: Auditor Admin Series 6R
THE YELLOW SHEET.)
WORDS FROM THE AUDITOR CORRECTION LIST
A, about, afraid, all, an, and, answered, any, ARC Break, as, assessment,
assessment TRs, audit, audited, auditing, auditor, auditor's, avoiding.
Bad, be, been, bonuses, breaking.
Call, called, can't, case, cases, chair, circumstances, code, coffee shop
auditing, collected, commands, condition, confidential, couldn't, courses,
cramming, C/S, C/Sing.
HCOB 18.11.80 I - 2 -
Desperate, Dianetics, didn't, disagreements, discussing, disinterested,
doesn't, D of P, dog cases, down, drilling.
Earlier, else, E-meter, enough, environment, ethics, evaluation, exec,
eyesight.
Failed, failures, false, falsely, falsified, favors, FES, flubbed, F/N,
F/Ned, folder, for, forced, from.
Gave, get, getting, given, got.
Had, has, have, help.
In, inadequate, in session, invalidated, invalidation, in your road, it.
Level, list, L & N, losses, lower.
Master, meter, missed, misunderstood, moonlighting.
NCG, never, no, nobody, non-standard, not.
Of, off, on, one, org, out-ethics, outside, out-2D, over, overt, overts,
own.
Paid, passed, pc, pc's, pcs, pcs', place, practice, prevented, problem,
problems, process, processes, program, PTS.
Question.
Rabbited, read, reads, restim, retrain, retrained, R/S, run, rushed.
Said, Scientology, seeking, senior (adj.), should, similar, solutions,
solve, some, someone, something, sort, special, squirreling, starrate,
status, studying, subject, sure.
TA, taken, tech, technical, Tech Sec, Tech Services, tell, terms, the,
there, through, time, to, told, training, tried, trouble, TRs, TR 0, TR 1,
TR 2, TR 2 Ѕ, TR 3, TR 4.
Under, understand, understanding, unsessionable, unusual, upset, using.
Want, warranted, was, wasn't, were, weren't, W/H, W/Hs, when, why, with,
without, words, work, worried, write, wrong, W/S.
You, your.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
Approved & accepted by the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:SK:bk
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
Approved & accepted by the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=12/11/80
Volnum=0
Issue=2
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Confessional Form 6RA
REGISTRAR AND SALES PERSONNEL
CONFESSIONAL LIST
Remimeo
HCO
Tech/Qual
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 12 NOVEMBER 1980
Remimeo ISSUE II
HCO
Tech/Qual (CANCELS & REPLACES BTB 23 Feb 73RA Rev. 10 Mar 77
Confessional Form 6R REGISTRAR AND SALES PERSONNEL
LIST which omitted the and rudiments. Additionally
the wording of the questions has been improved and
further questions have been added to cover aspects
not previously taken into account.)
Confessional Form 6RA
REGISTRAR AND SALES PERSONNEL
CONFESSIONAL LIST
REF: HCOB 30 November 1978 CONFESSIONAL PROCEDURE
This is a Confessional for use in cleaning up overts and withholds on
Registrars and Sales personnel.
Anyone doing a Confessional must be on or have completed a
Confessional course or internship.
The procedure for doing a Confessional is contained in HCOB 30
November
1978 CONFESSIONAL PROCEDURE.
When applying Confessional tech correctly, you are helping the
individual to face up to his responsibilities in his group and the society
and putting him back into communication with his fellow man, his family,
and the world at large.
AUDITOR: ______________________________ PRECLEAR:
____________________________
ORG: __________________________________ DATE:
________________________________
1. Have you ever stolen money?
_______
2. Have you ever sold anything that belonged to someone else?
_______
3. Have you ever forced another into buying something he didn't want?
_______
4. Have you ever used threats as a means of obtaining money?
_______
5. Have you ever bribed someone to obtain money?
_______
6. Have you ever accepted a bribe?
_______
7. Have you ever blackmailed anybody?
_______
8. Have you ever forged a signature, check or document?
_______
9. Have you ever had another write a check for money he didn't have?
_______
10. Have you ever falsely presented a service or product in order to
make a sale?
_______
HCOB 12.11.80 II - 2 -
11. Have you ever lied in order to close a sale?
_______
12. Have you ever promised special favors to a prospect to get a sale?
_______
13. Have you ever gone out 2D to get a sale?
_______
14. Have you ever made a sale that was not in the best interest of
the prospect?
_______
15. Have you ever sought out wealthy public and sold them services
they did not necessarily need or regged them for "donations"
which were not really for any org service?
_______
16. Have you persuaded a prospect to pay for services with money
which did not belong to him thereby creating a PTS A situation
for the prospect?
_______
17. Have you persuaded or encouraged a prospect to borrow money
under false pretenses?
_______
18. Have you ever argued with a prospect?
_______
19. Have you ever made a prospect wrong?
_______
20. Have you ever ARC Broken a prospect?
_______
21. Have you ever given a prospect misunderstood words or terms?
_______
22. Have you ever failed to repair an upset with a prospect?
_______
23. Did you ever fail to see that a prospect actually received
what you sold him?
_______
24. Have you ever been negligent in closing a sale?
_______
25. Have you ever failed to close an important sale?
_______
26. As a Reg have you ever failed to take an opportunity to
disseminate Scientology?
_______
27. Have you ever hindered a person's progress through Scientology?
_______
28. Have you ever counted money on one week's GI that was not really
received until a later week?
_______
29. Have you ever refused to help another Reg close a sale?
_______
30. Have you ever made false bonus claims?
_______
31. Have you ever accepted a bonus you didn't earn?
_______
32. Have you collected commissions or bonuses on reg cycles where
checks bounced or pcs turned out to be illegal, and kept the
commissions/bonuses anyway?
_______
33. Do you still intend not to repay the org for any
bonuses/commissions you have falsely claimed?
_______
34. Have you ever reported false stats?
_______
HCOB 12.11.80 II - 3 -
35. Have you charged more than the correct price?
_______
36. Have you charged less than the correct price or fee?
_______
37. Have you ever undercut another org's prices?
_______
38. Have you ever misused special package deals authorized by Flag?
_______
39. Have you ever tried to obtain sales by criticizing another
org or mission?
_______
40. As a Reg, have you ever ripped off mission public or public
from a lower org?
_______
41. Have you ever made loans or transfers on behalf of another
without that person's prior knowledge and permission?
_______
42. Have you ever debited someone's account without that person's
prior knowledge and permission?
_______
43. Have you ever received commissions or bonuses from illegally
debiting someone's account?
_______
44. Have you counted public transferring from another org as a
Paid Start before ensuring the transfer was valid?
_______
45. Have you promoted a transfer to help make a sale?
_______
46. Have you ever taken another person's sale?
_______
47. Have you ever failed to invoice monies received for services?
_______
48. Have you ever encouraged or aided a prospect in false reporting
to a bank or other loan agency to obtain a loan?
_______
49. Have you ever given a Professional discount to an auditor whose
cert was not valid and in full force?
_______
50. Have you gone mutual out-ruds with the public about prices?
_______
51. Have you sold courses to public that they do not intend to take
just so they could receive auditing at a discounted price?
_______
52. Have you ever committed the org to deliver free or
cut-rate services?
_______
53. Have you ever promised something you were uncertain the org could
deliver, just to get a sale?
_______
54. Have you ever made unauthorized deals to get the GI up?
_______
55. Have you ever promised a return of fees in order to obtain a sale?
_______
56. Have you ever accepted a check that you knew wasn't good?
_______
HCOB 12.11.80 II - 4 -
57. Have you ever invoiced money or checks which were not good at
the time of invoicing?
_______
58. Have you ever permitted checks that weren't good to be counted
on the org's income?
_______
59. As a Reg have you concentrated on selling books in order to
get book bonuses, while neglecting to sell major services?
_______
60. Have you neglected people you thought didn't have much money?
_______
61. Do you reg for "this week's GI" only?
_______
62. Have you knowingly taken money for something that could not be
delivered?
_______
63. Have you ever made special arrangements which later caused an
upset for the prospect or org?
_______
64. Have you ever committed the HGC to servicing a pc without first
getting a Tech Estimate and D of P OK?
_______
65. Have you ever knowingly regged an illegal pc for auditing?
_______
66. Have you ever tried to persuade technical staff or org execs
to accept an illegal pc onto auditing lines?
_______
67. Have you ever invalidated Scientology services to the public?
_______
68. Have you ever taken another Reg's prospects?
_______
69. Have you ever made another org or Registrar wrong in order
to obtain a sale?
_______
70. Have you ever held onto another org's income?
_______
71. Have you ever counted money paid for transfer to another org
as your org's income?
_______
72. Have you ever held onto another org's customer?
_______
73. Have you ever neglected to keep complete Registrar and
sales records?
_______
74. Have you relied on gimmicks, new services or special offers
to make GI rather than knowing and fully using standard Reg tech?
_______
75. Have you ever failed to keep yourself informed of what the
org can deliver?
_______
76. Have you ever failed to keep yourself informed of the results
being obtained in Tech?
_______
77. Have you failed to clean up your own misunderstoods on
org services?
_______
78. Have you ever failed to get yourself adequately briefed on new
services you were supposed to sell or packages you were supposed
to use?
_______
HCOB 12.11.80 II - 5 -
79. Have you ever failed to do Reg drills when needed?
_______
80. As a Reg have you ever avoided or refused correction?
_______
81. Have you ever criticized the org or org executives to the public?
_______
82. Have you done other things when you were supposed to be selling?
_______
83. Have you only pretended to know your product?
_______
84. Have you ever tried to make an org become insolvent?
_______
85. Have you ever tried to handle a senior by keeping sales low?
_______
86. Have you done anything to undermine the reputation of another?
_______
87. Have you ever harmed Dianetics or Scientology?
_______
88. Have you been secretly selling for another org?
_______
89. Have ever used a sales position to build up a private practice?
_______
90. Was it ever an overt to sell?
_______
91. Have you committed any overts against L. Ron Hubbard?
_______
92. Have you extravagantly spent org funds in order to close a sale?
_______
93. Have you misused org funds?
_______
94. Have you ever used the org's phones for personal calls?
_______
95. Have you ever broken an appointment?
_______
96. Do you have overts against a certain type of prospect?
_______
97. Have you done anything that a prospect shouldn't find out about?
_______
98. Do you have any overts against money?
_______
99. Do you have any overts against training?
_______
100. Do you have any overts against processing?
_______
101. Do you have any overts against Scientology?
_______
102. In this Confessional, have you told any half-truths?
_______
103. In this Confessional, have you told an untruth?
_______
104. In this Confessional, has a withhold been missed?
_______
105. In this Confessional, have you told all?
_______
HCOB 12.11.80 II - 6 -
Give the pc the Proclamation of Forgiveness:
BY THE POWER INVESTED IN ME, ANY OVERTS AND WITHHOLDS YOU HAVE FULLY
AND TRUTHFULLY TOLD ME ARE FORGIVEN BY SCIENTOLOGISTS.
On any adverse reaction to the proclamation of Forgiveness, get the
rest of the withhold or repair the withhold session. (Ref: HCO PL 10
November 1978R-1 PROCLAMATION: POWER TO FORGIVE ADDITION.)
(NOTE: If this is being done as an HCO Confessional the Proclamation
of Forgiveness is omitted.)
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Susan Krieger
Mission Issues
Revision I/C
Accepted & approved by the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:SK:bk
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Susan Krieger
Mission Issues
Revision I/C
Accepted & approved by the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=12/11/80
Volnum=0
Issue=1
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
CASE SUPERVISOR CORRECTION LIST
Remimeo
Auditors
C/Ses
Tech/Qual
Qual Sec
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 12 NOVEMBER 1980
Remimeo ISSUE I
Auditors
C/Ses
Tech/Qual
Qual Sec
(Cancels BTB 27 March 72RA Issue IV Revised 14 Jan 75, CASE
SUPERVISOR CORRECTION LIST which incorrectly added Debug end Confessional
questions to a case handling list.)
CASE SUPERVISOR CORRECTION LIST
This list is designed to clean up any BPC a C/S may have on his post.
It does not replace the Debug Checklist or C/S Confessional but has
its own purpose as stated above.
The list can be assessed Method 3 or Method 5. A second bracket in the
handling shows the further actions to be done after the list has been F/Ned
on all reading items.
This Correction List can be followed up by other auditing/ Debug
actions as adjudicated by the C/S or Cramming Officer to fully handle areas
a C/S (as a pc or as a C/S) is having difficulty with as disclosed by the
assessment of this list.
NAME: _________________________________ DATE:
________________________________
AUDITOR: ______________________________ POST:
________________________________
1. OUT INT?
_______
(Check to make sure the read on Int is a valid read and not a protest
or false read. If it is a valid read, end off for C/S Instructions.)
2. WRONG WHY?
_______
(L4BRA and handle.)
3. WRONG ETHICS CONDITION?
_______
(L4BRA and handle.)
4. TOLD YOU WERE PTS WHEN YOU WEREN'T?
_______
(L4BRA and handle.)
5. AS A C/S IS THERE AN ARC BREAK?
_______
(ARCU CDEINR E/S to F/N.)
6. UPSET WITH A PC?
_______
(ARCU CDEINR E/S to F/N.)
7. UPSET WITH AN AUDITOR?
_______
(ARCU CDEINR E/S to F/N.)
8. UPSET WITH AN EXEC?
_______
(ARCU CDEINR E/S to F/N.)
9. AS A C/S DO YOU HAVE A PROBLEM?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
HCOB 12.11.80 I - 2 -
10. PROBLEMS WITH PCS?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.) (Do the 2WCs in HCOB 15 July 71, C/S Series 50.)
11. PROBLEMS WITH AUDITORS?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.) (Do the 2WCs in HCOB 15 July 71, C/S Series 50.)
12. AS A C/S HAS A WITHHOLD BEEN MISSED?
_______
(Pull it, E/S to F/N.)
13. WITHHOLDS ABOUT PCS?
_______
(Pull them E/S to F/N.)
14. WITHHOLDS ABOUT AUDITORS?
_______
(Pull them E/S to F/N.)
15. OVERTS ON PCS?
_______
(Pull them E/S to F/N.)
16. OVERTS ON AUDITORS?
_______
(Pull them E/S to F/N.)
17. PTS TO SOMEONE IN THE ENVIRONMENT?
_______
(2WC to F/N.) (C/S to program as needed for further PTS handling.)
18. WERE THERE NO EXAM REPORTS?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N. If discreditable handle as a W/H.)
19. UNHANDLED RED TAGS?
_______
(Handle as a W/H E/S to F/N.)
20. FALSE COMPLETIONS?
_______
(Handle as a W/H E/S to F/N.)
21. ARE YOU ON DRUGS?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.) (L3RG on the Drug RD if he had one/Drug RD Repair
List. No R3RA is to be done on Clears or OTs.) (Pgm for full Drug Handling,
including Purif RD and Survival RD.)
22. ARE YOU ON MEDICINE?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.) (L3RG on his Drug RD if he had one/Drug RD Repair
List. No R3RA is to be done on Clears or OTs.) (Pgm for full Drug Handling,
including Purif RD and Survival RD.)
23. ARE YOU ON ALCOHOL?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.) (L3RG on the Drug RD if he had one/Drug RD Repair
List. No R3RA is to be done on Clears or OTs.) (Pgm for full Drug Handling,
including Purif RD and Survival RD.)
24. ADMIN LINES OUT?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
25. TROUBLE WITH TECH SERVICES?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
26. OVERLOADED?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
27. OVERWHELMED?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
HCOB 12.11.80 I - 3 -
28. NO HELP FROM A D OF P?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
29. ILLEGIBLE WORKSHEETS?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
30. PERMITTING OFF LINE CASE ACTIONS?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
31. WRONG C/Ses?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
32. FAULTY PROGRAMS?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
33. OUT ADMIN?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
34. MISSING DATA?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
35. WITHHOLDING DATA?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.) (Pgm for Vital Info RD.)
36. LOSSES ON PCS?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
37. BOOTED OFF POST?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
38. LOSSES ON AUDITORS?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
39. C/S Q AND A?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
40. TROUBLE WITH WRITING PROGRAMS?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
41. OVER-REPAIRING PCS?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
42. TROUBLE GETTING COMPLIANCE?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
43. SOME SORT OF OUT-ETHICS?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
44. FLUBBY AUDITORS?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
45. COULDN'T HELP A PC?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
(3 Way Help/3 Way Failed Help. Each of the six legs to EP:
Who have you failed to help?
Who has failed to help you?
Who has failed to help another?
Who have you helped?
Who has helped you?
Who has helped another?)
46. AN EARLIER TIME YOU FAILED TO HELP?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.) (3 Way Help/3 Way Failed Help.)
HCOB 12.11.80 I - 4 -
47. COULDN'T SOLVE IT?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
48. TROUBLE WITH STUDY?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.) (Student Rehab List.)
49. MISUNDERSTOOD WORDS IN DIANETICS AND SCIENTOLOGY?
_______
(Find and clear them each to F/N. WCCL if needed.)
(Pgm for Method 1.)
50. AN EARLIER SIMILAR SUBJECT TO DIANETICS AND SCIENTOLOGY
WAS MISUNDERSTOOD?
_______ (Get the earlier subject and clear the misunderstood words to F/N.
WCCL if necessary.) (Pgm for Method 1.)
51. PERMITTING REGISTRARS TO C/S?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
52. YOUR TRAINING WAS INADEQUATE?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.) (Student Rehab List.)
53. YOU RUSHED THROUGH COURSES?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.) (Student Rehab List.)
54. SEEKING STATUS?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
55. PRETENDING TO KNOW?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.) (Pgm to handle as per Exp GF 40.)
56. DISAGREEMENTS?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
57. HIDDEN DATA LINE?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
58. EARLIER PRACTICE?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.) (Pgm for Exp GF 40.)
59. OUT 2D?
_______
(Handle as a W/H E/S to F/N.)
60. EVALUATION?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N-Triple/Quad.)
61. INVALIDATION?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N-Triple/Quad.)
62. HOPEFUL C/SING?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
63. AFRAID TO C/S?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
64. DON'T KNOW WHAT TO DO?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
65. TAKING INSTRUCTIONS FROM EXECS?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
66. COULDN'T GET PAID?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
67. PREVENTED FROM C/SING?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
HCOB 12.11.80 I - 5 -
68. INTERRUPTIONS?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
69. DOG CASES?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.) (C/S Series 80 Handling and C/S Confessional.)
70. GOT DESPERATE?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
71. MOONLIGHTING?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
72. DON'T LIKE CERTAIN AUDITORS?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.) (C/S Confessional.)
73. DON'T LIKE CERTAIN PCS?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.) (C/S Confessional.)
74. NOT GETTING ANY CRAMMING?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.) (Cramming Repair List if needed.)
75. CRAMMING DOESN'T WORK?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.) (Cramming Repair List.)
76. MISSING WITHHOLDS ON OTHERS BY FAILING TO WRITE CRAMMING ORDERS
OR ETHICS CHITS?
_______ (2WC to F/N or E/S to F/N.)
77. ENCOUNTERED SITUATIONS NOT COVERED IN THE MATERIALS?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
78. TECH DOESN'T WORK FOR YOU?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
79. TECH DOESN'T WORK ON YOU?
_______
(C/S 53RL to F/Ning.) (GF M5 and handle.)
SO. NOT GETTING ENOUGH SLEEP?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
81. NOT EATING?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
82. PHYSICALLY ILL?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N.) (Assist pgm including Medical Treatment as needed.)
83. RESTIM?
_______
(C/S 53RL to F/Ning.)
84. TROUBLE WITH YOUR CASE?
_______
(C/S 53RL to F/Ning.)
85. SOMETHING ELSE WRONG?
_______
(2WC what and if no joy GF M5 and handle.)
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
BDCS:LRH:SK:nc Approved & accepted by the
Copyright $c 1980 BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
by L. Ron Hubbard of the
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
Approved & accepted by the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=8/11/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
C/S SERIES 53 RL LONG FORM
WORD LIST
Remimeo
C/Ses
Auditors
Tech/Qual
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 8 NOVEMBER 1980
Remimeo
C/Ses (CANCELS BTB 9 Apr 72RA Iss VII CLEARING LIST WORDS
Auditors IN SCIENTOLOGY-C/S SERIES 53 RI which was an
Tech/Qual incomplete word list for the longer C/S 53 RL.)
C/S SERIES 53 RL LONG FORM
WORD LIST
REFERENCES: HCO PL 4 Apr 72R III ETHICS AND STUDY TECH
HCOB 8 Jul 74R I CLEAR TO F/N
HCOB 21 Jun 72 I METHOD 5
HCOB 9 Aug 78 II CLEARING COMMANDS
HCOB 17 Jul 79 I W/C Series 64
THE MISUNDERSTOOD WORD DEFINED
These are the words from HCOB 24 Nov 73RE C/S Series 53RL LONG FORM.
These words should be cleared on the pc before the list is actually
assessed on him per HCOB 9 Aug 78 II CLEARING COMMANDS.
An auditor must have received high crime checkouts himself from Qual
on the above references before clearing these words in session on the pc.
The auditor uses Method 5 Word Clearing while clearing these words.
This word list need only be cleared once in the pc's auditing if
correctly cleared the first time.
The fact of having cleared this word list on the pc must be noted in
the appropriate place in the pc's folder. (Ref: Auditor Admin Series 6R
THE YELLOW SHEET.)
WORDS FROM C/S SERIES 53RL LONG FORM
A, action, actions, alcohol, all, an, another, any, anything, ARC Break,
are, at, attacked, audited, auditing, auditor.
Bad, been, being, between, black, by.
Can, cans, can't, committed, couldn't, cream.
Date, deadness, Dianetic Clear, did, didn't, do, doing, done, don't, drugs,
drunk, dry.
Else, engram, engrams, errors, evaluation, exam, exams, examiner,
experienced.
False, faulty, feel, felt, F/Ns, for, forced, found.
Get, given, giving, go, going, gone, grip.
Had, hands, has, have, havingness, hear, high.
HCOB 8.11.80 - 2 -
Ill, in, incidents, incomplete, indication, interiorized, interrupted,
into, invalidation, invisible, involved, is, isn't, it, item, items.
Keeps, kept, kicked.
Like, list, location, long, look, loosen, loss, lost, low, LSD.
Medicine, meter, mind, missed, misunderstood, misunderstoods, more.
Not, nothing.
Of, off, on, once, other, out, out-rudiments, over, overlisted, over-
repaired, overrun, overts, overwhelming.
Past, physically, point, pot, practice, problem, protesting, PTS, pulled,
put, puzzled.
Read, reads, really, release, repairing, reports, restimulation, run,
rushed.
Sad, said, same, shying, see, session, sessions, sized, smoked, some,
someone, something, sort, spaces, stops, study, suppressed.
TA, taken, than, that, the, there, thing, tired, to, too, trapped, twice.
Unconsciousness, understand, upset, used, using.
Want, wait, was, we, well, went, wet, what, when, why, with, withhold,
withholding, word, word clearing, wrong.
You, your, you're.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF
SCIENTOLOGY
OF CALIFORNIA
BDCSC:LRH:MIR:bk
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF
SCIENTOLOGY
OF CALIFORNIA
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=5/11/80
Volnum=0
Issue=2
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
ARBITRARIES
Remimeo
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 5 NOVEMBER 1980
Remimeo ISSUE II
(Originally LRH OODs item of 16 April 1970.
Also issued as an HCO PL, same date,
same title.)
ARBITRARIES
An arbitrary is a false order or datum entered into a situation or
group. It is 3rd dynamic aberration.
An arbitrary is something entered without reason. For the tech on
this I refer you to "Dianetics, Evolution of a Science". It is a
fascinating subject, arbitraries.
I found one time that people hadn't read Problems of Work where
confusion and the stable datum is first covered. When I got that text
across, then why we had stable terminals become very plain. Stable data is
the other side of the coin. An arbitrary could be said to be a false stable
datum.
Now if we can get arbitraries understood we will make some progress.
Whenever we as an organization violate the basic philosophy of
Dianetics and Scientology we get into muddy water.
The whole trouble for instance with C/Sing is that the theory of the
mind is not learned, only the mechanical processes. When one doesn't know
the basic put-together of the mind but only knows processes, one never
learns WHY the processes are used or when to use them. So one can be an
auditor but can fail as a C/S if he doesn't know WHY and therefore WHEN to
use a process.
A C/S should be an expert on the Original Thesis and the first few
chapters of the DMSMH and on 8-80 and 8-8008. I'll bet those studying
C/Sing right now are still puzzling over processes!
Know your basics. They're in our very oldest books. All advances have
been in how to handle basics better.
Applies to pcs and to organizations alike.
Know WHY and you can tell WHEN.
If you knew the most basic data given in Dianetics and Scientology
books, and if you knew Scientology HCO Bulletins and policy Letters and Sea
Org Flag Orders, you would never need an order at all. You would know the
true intention and could work it all out.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Compiled & issued by
Sherry Anderson
Compilations Missionaire
Accepted by the
BDCSC:LRH:SA:nc BOARD OF DIRECTORS
Copyright $c 1970, 1980 of the
by L. Ron Hubbard CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED OF CALIFORNIA
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Compiled & issued by
Sherry Anderson
Compilations Missionaire
Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
OF CALIFORNIA
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=4/11/80
Volnum=0
Issue=4
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
TEMPERATURES
Remimeo
MO Hat
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 4 NOVEMBER 1980
Remimeo ISSUE IV
MO Hat
(Originally LRH OODs item of 27 January 1972.)
(Note: This data is given for information alone and is not
intended to prescribe or otherwise treat an individual. All prescriptions
and treatments should be done in due accordance with the medical laws of
any country in which a person seeks treatment.)
TEMPERATURES
Many persons run a daily temperature.
The cycle of temperature is different from one person to the next. In
the morning the temperature is usually sub-normal (below 98.6 Deg F or 37
Deg C). In the late afternoon there is sometimes a small rise above
normal.
This does not necessarily mean the person is ill.
When a person has been sick and is running a "low order fever" in
late afternoons he should be up and around and should be down a little
while if he feels too tired and then get up again.
Continuous lying in bed because of a "low order temperature" will
weaken a person.
Low order temperature means one of a few tenths occurring once a day.
All people have low and then higher temperature cycles. It does not
mean that a person is ill.
The AMA, since it makes its bucks out of temperatures doesn't bother
to mention this in its medical literature and texts.
Silly Optimist: A person who expects to feel well all the time while
running a meat body.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Compiled & issued by
Sherry Anderson
Compilations Missionaire
Approved & accepted by the
BDCS:LRH:SA:nc
Copyright $c 1972, 1980 BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
by L. Ron Hubbard of the
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Compiled & issued by
Sherry Anderson
Compilations Missionaire
Approved & accepted by the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=4/11/80
Volnum=0
Issue=3
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
VITAMIN C
Remimeo
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 4 NOVEMBER 1980
Remimeo ISSUE III
(Originally LRH OODs item of 27 October 1971.)
(Note: This data is given for information alone and is not
intended to prescribe or otherwise treat an individual. All prescriptions
and treatments should be done in accordance with the medical laws of any
country in which a person seeks treatment.)
VITAMIN C
There are Vitamin C tablets that don't upset the stomach. 500 mg
VITASCORBOL (French) can be taken in any quantity. They taste like circus
lemonade if you care to suck them or chew them up. No stomach recoil.
Don't lay off Vitamin C. This is the only vitamin the body doesn't
make so far as is known. It prevents scurvy.
If you feel you want something to drink or eat and you don't know
what it is-it's Vitamin C. Take some and the odd craving goes away.
C can be taken up to thousands of mgs. It helps cure colds and a long
list of things including fever, recovering from illness and fatigue.
When vitamins don't work, there's an aberration in the way of it.
Same is true of any medicine or hormone.
Mind monitors structure. That couldn't be discovered until someone
knew how to handle the mind! Namely us.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Compiled & issued by
Sherry Anderson
Compilations Missionaire
Approved & accepted by the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:SA:nc
Copyright $c 1971, i980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Compiled & issued by
Sherry Anderson
Compilations Missionaire
Approved & accepted by the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=4/11/80
Volnum=0
Issue=2
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
VITAMINS
Remimeo
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 4 NOVEMBER 1980
Remimeo ISSUE II
(Originally LRH OODs item of 24 October 1971.)
(Note: This data is given for information alone and is not
intended to prescribe or otherwise treat an individual. All prescriptions
and treatments should be done in due accordance with the medical laws of
any country in which a person seeks treatment.)
VITAMINS
I have found some crew members are having stomach trouble.
Do not take vitamins in transparent gelatine capsules. The capsule
melts in the upper stomach and can give you what feels like a stomach ulcer-
too full, burning, pain after eating.
This is because the vitamin powder is dumped by the capsule when it
melts into the upper area instead of the lower intestine as it should be.
A coated tablet is the answer. It's called "enteric (for intestine)
coated".
There are "enteric gelatine capsules" made which dissolve an hour
after being taken. You put vitamin powder in them.
To handle the "ulcer feeling"-pain or too full or burning-one takes 2
aluminum hydroxide tablets (one trade name is Maalox No. 2) (chewing them
up) and a few swallows or a glass of milk every couple hours and in a day
or two all should be back to normal-unless or course you continue to take
harsh, fast dissolving pills!
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Compiled & issued by
Sherry Anderson
Compilations Missionnaire
Approved & accepted by the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:SA:nc
Copyright $c 1971, 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Compiled & issued by
Sherry Anderson
Compilations Missionnaire
Approved & accepted by the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=4/11/80
Volnum=0
Issue=1
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Confessional Form 10RA
PRD CONFESSIONAL LIST
Remimeo
HCO
Tech/Qual
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 4 NOVEMBER 1980
Remimeo ISSUE I
HCO
Tech/Qual (CANCELS & REPLACES BTB 24 Oct 73RA Re-rev. 10 Mar 77
Confessional Form 10R PRD CONFESSIONAL LIST which omitted
the End Rudiments.)
Confessional Form 10RA
PRD CONFESSIONAL LIST
REF: HCOB 20 November 197S CONFESSIONAL PROCEDURE
Anyone doing a Confessional must be on or have done a Confessional
course or internship.
The procedure for doing a Confessional is contained in HCOB 30
November
1978 CONFESSIONAL PROCEDURE.
When applying Confessional tech correctly, you are helping the
individual to face up to his responsibilities in his group and the society
and putting him back into communication with his fellow man, his family,
and the world at large.
This Confessional List is for use on persons who have attested to the
PRD but continue to have study difficulties or don't attend study or don't
apply Study Tech. It can also be used on students having difficulty while
on the PRD but does not replace the use of Word Clearing Correction Lists,
Study Correction Lists, PCRD or any aspect of standard Supervision.
AUDITOR: ______________________________ PRECLEAR:
____________________________
ORG: __________________________________ DATE:
________________________________
1. Have you failed to use Study Tech?
_______
2. Did you have some other purpose for doing the PRD?
_______
3. Did you take the PRD for status only?
_______
4. Have you tried to be better than or beat someone else on course?
_______
5. Have you quickied the PRD?
_______
6. Did you fail to clear every definition in each word on
the word lists?
_______
7. Did you fail to use all the meanings in sentences until you had
a conceptual understanding of each definition?
_______
8. Did you skip clearing the derivations or idioms or any needed
technical terms?
_______
9. Did you try to rush through the PRD?
_______
10. Did you use a dinky dictionary?
_______
HCOB 4.11.80 I - 2 -
11. Have you gone by an area of study you knew you had confusions
on and didn't clear it up?
_______
12. Have you failed to use Study Tech since the PRD?
_______
13. Have you ever alter-ised or misadvised others on the use of
Study Tech?
_______
14. Have you ever drifted off while listening to a tape?
_______
15. Have you failed to use a demo kit when you needed to?
_______
16. Have you given a non-standard checkout?
_______
17. Have you given another student a false pass?
_______
18. Have you cheated on the PRD exam?
_______
19. Have you discussed the PRD exam with anyone outside the Qual Div?
_______
20. Were you studying over withholds?
_______
21. Is there anything about the PRD which you don't like and think
should be changed?
_______
22. Have you attested to the PRD without having fully achieved the
end product of Super-Literacy?
_______
23. Have you attested to Super-Literacy without having fully done
the PRD Checksheet?
_______
24. Did you withhold any subjects from your auditor on Method 1
word clearing?
_______
25. During Method 1, did you fail to fully clear a misunderstood word?
_______
26. Were you just pushed for student points by the Supervisor?
(If so, ask: Who exactly have you made guilty of this?)
_______
27. Were you less than 100% honest about your studies while on the PRD?
(If so, ask: What was the nature of your dishonesty?)
_______
28. Did you skip words on the word lists?
_______
29. Did you brush off any words or definitions of words as "unimportant"
and therefore not fully clear each word?
_______
30. Did you attest to the PRD when you knew you had uncertainties on
the materials?
_______
31. Have you ever allowed yourself to be rushed through your materials
so you could be counted as a stat? (If so, ask: Who exactly have
you made guilty of this?)
_______
32. Is there anything about the PRD, or the Academy, or Scientology,
that you are making allowances for?
_______
33. Have you secretly violated any course rule or regulation?
_______
HCOB 4.11.80 I - 3 -
34. Have you been thinking unkind or critical thoughts about
L. Ron Hubbard? Your Supervisor? Other students? Staff members?
_______
35. Have you criticised the PRD, your Supervisors, or the
D of T to others?
_______
36. Have you ever falsely signed off items on a checksheet?
_______
37. Have you incorrectly word cleared another student?
_______
38. Have you pretended not to be bogged on study when you really were?
_______
39. Have you ever felt that you were given an incorrect target on
course? (If so, ask: Who exactly have you made guilty of this?)
_______
40. Have you ever bluffed your way through a checkout?
_______
41. Have you accepted a non-standard checkout so you could get on
with it?
_______
42. Have you done anything outside of course hours which you
shouldn't have?
_______
43. Have you withheld asking a question because you were afraid it
would sound stupid?
_______
44. Have you been keeping other students from doing their work?
_______
45. Are you upset by my questions?
_______
46. Have you been such a problem to your Supervisor that you've been
robbing other students of their fair share of the Supervisor's
time?_______
47. Is there anyone to whom you make a regular practice of discrediting
Scientology, its organizations or its personnel?
_______
48. Have you ever used a demo kit to keep the Supervisor off your back?
_______
49. Have you ever, while on course, felt that you would not achieve your
goals, by reason of poor supervising or poor coaching or twinning?
(If so, ask: Who exactly have you made guilty of this?)
_______
50. Have you prevented anyone, including Supervisors, from achieving
goals concerning you, or others, in Scientology?
_______
51. Have you ever been critical of Scientology terminology?
_______
52. How do you feel about these questions?
_______
53. In this Confessional, have you told a half-truth?
_______
54. In this Confessional, have you told an untruth?
_______
55. In this Confessional, has a withhold been missed?
_______
HCOB 4.11.80 I - 4 -
56. In this Confessional, have you told all?
_______
Give the pc the Proclamation of Forgiveness:
BY THE POWER INVESTED IN ME, ANY OVERTS AND WITHHOLDS YOU HAVE FULLY
AND TRUTHFULLY TOLD ME ARE FORGIVEN BY SCIENTOLOGISTS.
On any adverse reaction to the Proclamation of Forgiveness, get the
rest of the withhold or repair the withhold session. (Ref: HCOB 10 Nov 78R-
1 PROCLAMATION: POWER TO FORGIVE ADDITION.)
(NOTE: If this is being done as an HCO Confessional, the Proclamation
of Forgiveness is omitted.)
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
I/C
Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
of CALIFORNIA
BDCSC:LRH:SK:bk
Copyright $c 1980
By L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision I/C
Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
of CALIFORNIA
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=3/11/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
EXERCISE
Remimeo
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 3 NOVEMBER 1980
Remimeo
(Originally LRH OODs item of 3 March 1972.
Also issued as an HCO PL same date, same title.)
EXERCISE
Health of a body requires some exercise. When a body is not exercised
it goes down hill, diet or no diet.
Exercise and correct diet keep a body going.
This applies especially to auditors, desk workers and students.
That's why you should be out there getting some air in your lungs and
some limberness in the muscles for a short time each day.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Compiled & issued by
Sherry Anderson
Compilations
Missionaire
Approved & accepted by
the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF
SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:SA:nc
Copyright $c 1972, 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Compiled & issued by
Sherry Anderson
Compilations Missionaire
Approved & accepted by the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=23/10/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
CHART OF ABILITIES GAINED
FOR LOWER LEVELS AND
EXPANDED LOWER GRADES
Type = 22
iDate=25/6/70
Issue=0
Rev=3
rDate=27/4/75
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Remimeo
Tech
Qual
Execs
C/Ses
KOTs
Auditors
Regges
Examiners
Qual Secs
HCO
C & A
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 23 OCTOBER 1980
Remimeo
Tech CANCELS BPL 25 June 70RB Rev. 27.4.75
Qual
Execs EXPANDED LOWER GRADES
C/Ses CHART OF ABILITIES GAINED.
KOTs
Auditors (Also issued as HCO POLICY LETTER same title, same date.)
Regges
Examiners
Qual Secs
HCO
C & A CHART OF ABILITIES GAINED
FOR LOWER LEVELS AND
EXPANDED LOWER GRADES
REF: CLASSIFICATION, GRADATION AND AWARENESS CHART
HCOB 11 Nov 73 PRECLEAR DECLARE? PROCEDURE
BPL 25 June 1970RB, Rev. 27 April 75, EXPANDED LOWER GRADES, CHART OF
ABILITIES GAINED is hereby CANCELLED as it failed to state the Ability
Gained for all flows of the Expanded Lower Grades.
EXPANDED GRADES ARE ATTESTED TO BY THE PC DECLARING THE FULL
STATEMENT
OF THE ABILITY GAINED FOR ALL FOUR FLOWS.
The chart given below lists the Ability Gained for each of the Lower
Levels plus the four flows of the Expanded Grades.
It is used by the Examiner when a pc is sent to "Declare?". The
Examiner has the pc read the entire statement for the Ability Gained for
that Grade (including all four flows) or Level and must accept only the pc
declaring the full statement for the Ability Gained.
Declare procedure is done exactly as stated in HCOB 11 November 1973
PRECLEAR DECLARE? PROCEDURE.
LEVEL ABILITY GAINED
GROUP PROCESSING COMPLETION Awareness that change is available.
(Not a mandatory level)
DIVISION 6 CO-AUDIT PROCESSES Personal case improvement in
(Not a mandatory level) oneself and the ability to help
others with co-auditing.
REPAIR OF ONE'S LIFE Awareness of truth and the way
(Not a mandatory level) to personal integrity.
(NOTE: At C/S discretion, where a pc
needs 2 Way Comm or rudiments or
other repair put in on his life and
livingness previous to his doing a
major beginning action such as the
Purification Rundown, such repair can
be done initially. This is not a
mandatory action and would only be
done as directed by the C/S.)
HCOB 23.10.80 - 2 -
LEVEL ABILITY GAINED
PURIFICATION RUNDOWN Freedom from the restimulative
effects
of drug residuals and other toxins.
SURVIVAL RUNDOWN Feeling in present time and able to
control and put order into the
environment. Greatly increased
survival potential.
NED DRUG RUNDOWN Freedom from harmful effects of
drugs, alcohol and medicine and
free
from the need to take them.
DIANETIC CASE COMPLETION A well and happy pc.
SCIENTOLOGY DRUG RUNDOWN Freedom from harmful effects of
drugs, medicine or alcohol and free
from the need to take them.
EXPANDED ARC STRAIGHTWIRE Knows he/she won't get any worse.
EXPANDED GRADE 0
COMMUNICATIONS RELEASE
FLOW 1: Willing for others to communicate
to him on any subject; no longer
resisting communication from others
on
unpleasant or unwanted subjects.
FLOW 2: Ability to communicate freely with
anyone on any subject; free from,
or
no longer bothered by,
communication
difficulties; no longer withdrawn
or
reticent; likes to outflow.
FLOW 3: Willing for others to communicate
freely to others about anything.
FLOW 0: Willingness to permit one's self
to communicate freely about
anything.
EXPANDED GRADE 1
PROBLEMS RELEASE
FLOW 1: Ability to recognize the source of
problems and make them vanish; has
no
problems.
FLOW 2: No longer worried about problems he
has been to others; feels free
about
any problems others may have with
him
and can recognize source of them.
FLOW 3: Free from worry about others'
problems with or about others, and
can
recognize source of them.
FLOW 0: Free from worry about problems with
self and can recognize the source
of
them.
HCOB 23.10.80 - 3 -
LEVEL ABILITY GAINED
EXPANDED GRADE 2
RELIEF RELEASE
FLOW 1: Freedom from things others have
done to one in the past. Willing
for
others to be cause over him.
FLOW 2: Relief from the hostilities and
sufferings of life; ability to be
at
cause without fear of hurting
others.
FLOW 3: Willing to have others be cause
over others without feeling the
need
to intervene for fear of their
doing
harm.
FLOW 0: Relief from hostilities and
sufferings imposed by self upon
self.
EXPANDED GRADE 3
FREEDOM RELEASE
FLOW 1: Freedom from upsets of the past;
ability to face future; ability to
experience sudden change without
becoming upset.
FLOW 2: Can grant others the beingness to
be the way they are and choose
their
own reality; no longer feels need
to
change people to make them more
acceptable to self; able to cause
changes in another's life without
ill
effects.
FLOW 3: Freedom from the need to prevent or
become involved in the change and
interchange occurring amongst
others.
FLOW 0: Freedom from upsets of the past one
has imposed upon oneself and
ability
to cause changes in one's own life
without ill effects.
EXPANDED GRADE 4
ABILITY RELEASE
FLOW 1: Ability to tolerate, and freedom
from others' fixed ideas,
justifications and make-guilty of
self; free of need to respond in
like
kind.
FLOW 2: Moving out of fixed conditions into
ability to do new things; ability
to
face life without need to justify
own
actions or defend self from others;
loss of make-guilty mechanisms and
demand for sympathy; can be right
or
wrong.
FLOW 3: Can tolerate fixed conditions of
others in regard to others; freedom
from involvement in others' efforts
to
justify, make guilty, dominate, or
be
defensive about their actions
against
others.
FLOW 0: Ability to face life without need
to
make self wrong; loss of
make-self-guilty mechanisms, and
self-invalidation.
HCOB 23.10.80 - 4 -
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF
SCIENTOLOGY
of CALIFORNIA
BDCSC:LRH:bk
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
of CALIFORNIA
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=11/10/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
DRUGS AND THEIR EFFECTS ON AUDITING GAINS
BPI
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 11 OCTOBER 1980
BPI
DRUGS AND THEIR EFFECTS ON AUDITING GAINS
REFERENCES:
THE BASIC DIANETICS PICTURE BOOK THE BASIC SCIENTOLOGY PICTURE BOOK
HCOB 6 Feb 78RA THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN
REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM
HCOB 1 May 80 Survival Rundown Series 1
THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN
HCOB 12 May 80 DRUGS AND OBJECTIVE PROCESSES HCOB 29 Aug 80
Keeping Scientology Working Series 23
HOW NOT TO MISS OUT ON GAINS FROM YOUR AUDITING
My intention and wish for all Scientologists has always been for them
to become more able through auditing and thereby lead happier and more
successful lives. I count among my happiest moments the times when I
receive letters from Scientologists telling me of their wins in auditing
and how their lives have improved through Scientology.
Auditing is the road to freedom for everyone, and no matter where you
are on the Bridge, I want you to make the greatest gains possible from any
auditing you receive.
To this end I have written this issue (and had some illustrations
done to accompany the text) which I trust will be of use to you as you move
up the Bridge.
There are three conditions which, when met, help ensure that any
person getting audited will be in a position to get the most out of his
auditing. A person who:
1. is freed from the restimulative effects of drugs, medicines and
alcohol and any lingering effects their residues may have,
2. has had his attention unstuck from incidents in his past
experience,
and
3. is alert, in present time and in good communication with the
things
around him
stands to make very good or even spectacular gain on whatever auditing he
is receiving. This is quite in addition to the general feeling of well-
being which accompanies meeting 1, 2 and 3 above.
HCOB 11.10.80 - 2 -
Indeed, such a person is far above what passes for "normal" currently
in the society.
Add on top of this, good auditing on the person's current program and
you would have someone who was routinely doing very, very well in life.
There are reasons why the attainment of 1, 2 and 3 above are
advantageous to the progress of any person's auditing.
The wins experienced in auditing will be greater and more stable if
the person is free from the effects of drugs and if his attention is in PT
and not stuck on past occurrences. What is more, the person will be in an
optimum state to recover wins he experienced in any previous auditing.
Regaining these former wins is not so easy if a person is still hindered by
past drugs he has taken and has attention units stuck out of present time.
Additionally, the pc who is alert and in present time will be more
capable of spotting and identifying any new state of existence he may reach
or have reached as a result of auditing. The ability to identify these
points of gain accurately can be very important.
The biggest factor in preventing the attainment of the three
conditions mentioned above is, of course, drugs.
Drugs are essentially poisons. The degree they are taken determines
the degree of effect they have. A small amount gives a stimulant. A greater
amount acts as a sedative. An even larger amount acts as a poison and can
be fatal. This is true of any drug.
Drugs have unfortunately become very common and widely used in our
society during the last 15 or 20 years. In the 1960s it became apparent
what drugs can do to a case.
Drugs can inhibit a person from achieving gains in auditing and can
inhibit a person from achieving a full resurgence of a state validly
attained. It has been found that a person is unauditable while under the
influence of a drug. He won't make gains. Also, drugs often produce
lingering effects which affect the person and have a definite inhibiting
influence on a person's auditing progress until they are handled. And it
isn't only the more notorious drugs like LSD or angel dust which have these
effects. Common medicines such as aspirin and novocaine (to say nothing of
alcohol) can mess a person up, too.
Even though there may be a period during which the person feels good
or "high" from taking drugs, after the drug wears off the person ordinarily
feels worse than before the drug was taken.
HCOB 11.10.80 - 3 -
Drugs cause portions of the Reactive Mind to come in on the person
and cause him to re-experience incidents out of his past. They sometimes
also cause the person to hallucinate, which means to see things that aren't
there.
Hallucination
[GRAPHICS INSERTED]
Reactive Mind
Present time reality Person on drugs
So, when a person is on drugs, what gets recorded in his mind is a
combination of present time events and possibly hallucinations and other
incidents out of his Reactive Mind.
HCOB 11.10.80 - 4 -
[GRAPHICS INSERTED]
Drugs can ball up a person badly. Because they scramble things around
so, drugs can make it very difficult for the person to think clearly. They
can also make a person seem dull and stupid.
[GRAPHICS INSERTED]
HCOB 11.10.80 - 5 -
In auditing it can be very difficult for a person who has been on
drugs to fully contact actual incidents or parts of incidents in the bank
due to the person's ability to do so being shut off by drugs. In his
auditing he will not then be able to spot the source of those things which
have undesirable effects on him.
[GRAPHICS INSERTED]
A person can become so confused by the effects of drugs he has taken
that when he looks for something in his bank there doesn't seem to be
anything there at all!
This can make the person think he has no Reactive Mind to audit. Of
course, that is not the case. The actual fact is that the effects of drugs
have shut off the person's ability to perceive and handle the bank.
HCOB 11.10.80 - 6 -
Another thing that can happen as a result of drugs is that the person
can become stuck in a "drug high", which means that the person is under the
influence of a part of his Reactive Mind that was recorded when he was
feeling the euphoric effects of drugs.
[GRAPHICS INSERTED]
This can cause him to "feel great" and feel he "has no problems" or
"can't see anything so there must be nothing there". Again this is simply
the effect of drugs shutting off the person's perception of his bank.
A fact we have come to learn in Scientology is that a person will not
make the full gains available to him from auditing until the effects of the
drugs he has taken are handled.
Fortunately, we have a program to handle this.
HCOB 11.10.80 - 7 -
THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN
It has been found that drugs can remain in the body after the effects
have worn off. These drug residues can sometimes circulate through the
system long after the person has taken the drug and make the person feel as
though he were again "high". Drugs and other residues in the body, from our
chemically oriented society, can prevent a person from realizing his full
potential as a Spiritual Being through Scientology.
Through a program known as the Purification Rundown, the restimulative
effects of these drug residues and other harmful substances can be
eliminated.
The program consists of exercise, heavy sweating in a sauna, vitamins
and other nutrients, good food and plenty of rest. The drug effects can be
resolved through the exercise and sauna and the person's system can be
built back up by the vitamins and this can put him in a position where he
can really make gains in auditing.
[GRAPHICS INSERTED]
HCOB 11.10.80 - 8 -
In Scientology we are interested in you, the Spiritual Being. Treating
bodies is not our business. We are interested in helping people become more
aware and spiritually free. The Purification Rundown assists this purpose
by helping the person handle the harmful effects that drug residues in his
body can have on him spiritually.
THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN
After the person has successfully completed the Purification Rundown,
his potential for increased awareness of the world around him can be
greatly enhanced.
There is another step which helps make this potential a reality. It is
also the next step in handling the harmful effects of drugs on the
individual. This remarkable level is called the Survival Rundown.
The Survival Rundown consists of a whole series of very important
auditing processes as well as other actions and drills which have worked
wonders in the lives of many people.
The way the Survival Rundown works is this: it gets the person into
present time and in control of his body and in good communication with the
things of his environment. It also works to un-fixate a person's attention
from the body where, for some, it may have been stuck for some time.
On the Survival Rundown there are processes which get the person in
touch with the world around him and which reacquaint a person, newly
purified from the Purification Rundown, with the physical universe and get
him causative over it.
There are drills which improve the person's understanding of
communication, increase his ability to communicate and raise his level of
intention.
These drills are followed by a highly workable series of processes
which further increase the person's control of his body and surroundings,
further increase his ability to communicate with his surroundings and other
people and increase his ability to have things for himself. The person's
causativeness over specific physical universe objects and his ability to
span his attention over wider and wider portions of the environment are
also addressed and increased.
At this stage of the Survival Rundown, there are actions which lead to
a greater understanding of physical universe relationships and their
organization.
The gains up to this point in the Survival Rundown are considerable
when thoroughly done. Then, with the person's self-determinism and control
over the environment at higher levels than before, these increased
abilities are focused on the person's work and living areas. The result of
this is better personal organization and a great aid in accomplishing the
things one decides to accomplish. If a person is able to produce valuable
products in his life he will be happier and have high morale. Such a person
has a high potential for survival indeed!
HCOB 11.10.80 - 9 -
All these actions, plus further drills to enable the person to handle
everyday life situations, bring the person to the EP of the Survival
Rundown which is "Feeling in Present Time and able to control and put order
into the environment. Greatly increased survival potential."
[GRAPHICS INSERTED]
Truly, this is a rundown which anyone can benefit from regardless of
case level. We live in uncertain times in an uncertain world. But an
individual can do something about his own survival, and the Survival
Rundown is the most workable answer.
HCOB 11.10.80 - 10 -
After a well done Purification Rundown and Survival Rundown, further
auditing a person receives can go more quickly and smoothly and the gains
can be much greater than auditing received before doing these rundowns.
[GRAPHICS INSERTED]
Handling the harmful effects of drugs is a vital step in any person's
quest for spiritual freedom and so the Purification Rundown and Survival
Rundown must be considered a standard part of the Bridge for anyone.
HCOB 11.10.80 - 11 -
[GRAPHICS INSERTED]
These basic steps of the Bridge and those that follow them, will lead
you to the states of Clear and OT and the attainment of these is something
I very much want to see every Scientologist in the world achieve. Good
luck!
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Illustrations by the
Research and Technical
Compilations Unit
Approved and accepted
by the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:RTCU:bk
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Illustrations by the
Research and Technical
Compilations Unit
Approved and accepted by the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=6/10/80
Volnum=0
Issue=2
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Confessional Form 4R
SUPERVISOR CONFESSIONAL LIST
Remimeo
HCO
Tech/Qual
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 6 OCTOBER 1980
Remimeo ISSUE II
HCO
Tech/Qual (CANCELS & REPLACES BTB 24 Dec 72RA Issue IV Confessional
Form 4 SUPERVISOR CONFESSIONAL LIST which failed to give the
correct reference on how to do a Confessional, and omitted the end
rudiments. Additional Confessional questions have also been added to the
list.)
Confessional Form 4R
SUPERVISOR CONFESSIONAL LIST
REF: HCOB 30 November 1978 CONFESSIONAL PROCEDURE
Anyone doing a Confessional must have done or must be on a
Confessional course or Internship.
The procedure for doing a Confessional is contained in HCOB 30
November
1978 CONFESSIONAL PROCEDURE.
When applying Confessional tech correctly, you are helping the
individual to face up to his responsibilities in his group and the society
and putting him back into communication with his fellow man, his family,
and the world at large.
AUDITOR: _______________________________ PRECLEAR:
___________________________
ORG: ___________________________________ DATE:
_______________________________
1. Have you ever given a student verbal data?
_______
2. Have you taught a course without a checksheet?
_______
3. Have you given students checksheets other than those
officially approved?
_______
4. Have you deleted materials from an approved checksheet?
_______
5. Have you failed to provide course materials?
_______
6. Have you failed to update and correct checksheets before issuing
to new students?
_______
7. Have you permitted a student to falsely attest?
_______
8. Have you attested to a student's course completion without verifying
his ability to apply the materials?
_______
9. Have you ever permitted a student to blow?
_______
10. Have you failed to remain in good ARC with your students?
_______
11. Have you ever advised anyone not to take services at a
Scientology Org?
_______
HCOB 6.10.80 II - 2 -
12. Have you blamed others for poor course attendance?
_______
13. Have you ever become emotionally or sexually involved
with a student?
_______
14. Have you falsified statistics?
_______
15. Have you ever gotten angry with a student?
_______
16. Have you ever interrupted a student who was doing well?
_______
17. Have you ever failed to handle a bogged student?
_______
18. Have you ever made a student re-do checkouts, drills or practicals
to boost stats?
_______
19. Have you ever lied to, deceived or misdirected a student concerning
Scientology?
_______
20. Have you ever lied to a student?
_______
21. As a Supervisor have you ever left a course unattended?
_______
22. Have you ever failed to refer a student to the materials?
_______
23. Have you ever failed to keep a course exactly on schedule?
_______
24. Have you failed to apply Word Clearing tech?
_______
25. When word clearing students have you ignored reads?
_______
26. Have you pretended you can read a meter?
_______
27. Have you graduated someone you had misgivings about?
_______
28. Have you ever used Supervisor status to obtain unusual favors?
_______
29. Have you passed a student just to be kind?
_______
30. Have you ever given a checkout on materials you were uncertain of?
_______
31. Have you ever failed to correct a student's mistakes?
_______
32. Have you ever become complacent about the existing scene in your
course room?
_______
33. Have you done something you wouldn't like your students
to know about?
_______
34. Have you ever failed to apply study tech?
_______
35. Are you pretending that you know study tech?
_______
36. Have you done admin or other duties during course time?
_______
37. Have you ever permitted anyone to come into the course room and
bother students for any reason?
_______
38. Have you ever permitted a student to enturbulate a class?
_______
HCOB 6.10.80 II - 8 -
39. Have you ever offloaded students instead of handling them?
_______
40. Have you ever failed to recover a blown student?
_______
41. Have you ever used your position as a Supervisor to procure
students for another group?
_______
42. Have you ever discussed or talked about your personal problems
or case to a student?
_______
43. Have you ever subjected a student to ridicule?
_______
44. Have you C/Sed student sessions when not qualified to do so?
_______
45. Have you ever flunked a student who really knew the data?
_______
46. Is there something a student might find out about you?
_______
47. Have you ever neglected to give praise to a student when due?
_______
48. Have you ever run a slow course?
_______
49. Have you blamed others for poor course enrollments?
_______
50. Have you ever failed to spot a student's dope-off, glee or other
manifestation of misunderstoods and get them cleaned up?
_______
51. Have you ever failed to use Supervisor Two-Way Comm when needed?
_______
52. Have you ever failed to apply ethics tech when needed?
_______
53. Have you ever invalidated a student rather than his mistake?
_______
54. Have you ever allowed quickied drilling on checksheet drills?
_______
55. Have you claimed false bonuses?
_______
56. Have you not studied your hat?
_______
57. Have you pretended qualifications not attained?
_______
58. Have you personally studied past misunderstoods?
_______
59. Have you ever invalidated study tech?
_______
60. Have you ever invalidated Scientology materials?
_______
61. Have you ever failed to muster your students precisely on time,
note absences and take action?
_______
62. As a Supervisor, have you permitted students to goof off during
course hours?
_______
63. Have you permitted students to eat or smoke in the course room?
_______
HCOB 6.10.80 II - 4 -
64. As a Supervisor have you ever stood around or sat at your desk not
actively handling students?
_______
65. Have you failed to get students through their course and graduated?
_______
66. As a Supervisor have you produced any overt products?
_______
67. Have you ever condoned out-tech?
_______
68. As a Supervisor have you ever done anything you wouldn't want LRH
to know about?
_______
69. Concerning study or supervision have you committed any overt that
hasn't been revealed?
_______
70. In this Confessional, have you told a half truth?
_______
71. In this Confessional, have you told an untruth?
_______
72. In this Confessional, has a withhold been missed?
_______
72. In this Confessional, have you told all?
_______
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
I/C
Approved & accepted by
the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:SK:bk
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision I/C
Approved & accepted by the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=6/10/80
Volnum=0
Issue=1
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Confessional Form 2R
GENERAL STAFF CONFESSIONAL LIST
Remimeo
HCO
Tech/Qual
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 6 OCTOBER 1980
Remimeo ISSUE I
HCO
Tech/Qual
(CANCELS & REPLACES BTB 24 Dec 72RA Issue II Confessional Form
2 GENERAL STAFF CONFESSIONAL LIST which failed to give the correct
reference on how to do a Confessional, and omitted the end rudiments.
Additional Confessional questions have also been added to the list.)
Confessional Form 2R
GENERAL STAFF CONFESSIONAL LIST
REF: HCOB 30 November 1978 CONFESSIONAL PROCEDURE
Anyone doing a Confessional must have done or be on a Confessional
course or internship.
The procedure for doing a Confessional is contained in HCOB 30
November
1978 CONFESSIONAL PROCEDURE.
When applying Confessional tech correctly, you are helping the
individual to face up to his responsibilities in his group and the society
and putting him back into communication with his fellow man, his family,
and the world at large.
AUDITOR: _____________________________ PRECLEAR:
_____________________________
ORG: _________________________________ DATE:
_________________________________
1. Have you ever stolen anything from a Scientology Organization?
_______
2. Are you here only to get free processing?
_______
3. Do you intend to leave this organization once trained?
_______
4. Have you audited outside pcs for money while a member of this org?
_______
5. Have you ever fed an org pc to an outside auditor?
_______
6. Have you ever broken a contract with an org?
_______
7. Have you ever shifted the blame to an innocent staff member?
_______
8. As a staff member, have you failed to keep the org schedule?
_______
9. Have you offered or delivered free services?
_______
10. Have you accepted services from an organization without
being invoiced?
_______
HCOB 6.10.80 I - 2 -
11. Have you ever advised anyone against joining staff of a Scientology
Organization or the Sea Org?
_______
12. Have you ever given Scientology materials to a group opposed to
Scientology?
_______
13. Have you ever said discreditable things to the press or public
concerning Scientology?
_______
14. As a staff member have you failed to regularly attend staff study
or take your enhancement time?
_______
15. Have you ever refused to comply with legal orders from a senior?
_______
16. Have you ever false reported as a staff member?
_______
17. Have you falsified a statistic?
_______
18. Have you ever followed an order you knew to be off-policy?
_______
19. Have you given false evidence to an Ethics body?
_______
20. Have you ever obstructed an Ethics investigation?
_______
21. Have you withheld data to protect yourself or another?
_______
22. Have you ever third partied a staff member?
_______
23. Have you ever lied to a staff member?
_______
24. Have you feigned illness to avoid work?
_______
25. Have you failed to pay back loans you actually owe?
_______
26. Have you caused upset to a public pc or student?
_______
27. As a staff member, have you committed a problem?
_______
28. As a staff member, have you ever devised a solution which then
became a problem?
_______
29. Have you ever had case on post??
_______
30. Have you prevented a fellow staff member from wearing his hat?
_______
31. Have you done anything to get another removed from post for your
own personal gain?
_______
32. Have you ever engaged in a power push against a senior executive?
_______
33. Have you ever used a Scientology position to obtain unusual
favors?
_______
34. Have you ever personally accepted a commission, percentage, bribe or
gift for giving any firm or person this organization's business?
_______
35. Have you engaged in any sort of 2D activities with public
students or pcs?
_______
36. Have you lived or slept with anyone other than your legal spouse?
_______
HCOB 6.10.80 I - 3 -
37. Have you created a new 2D relationship while legally married
to another person?
_______
38. Have you ever advised anyone against following policy?
_______
39. Have you prevented another from learning his post?
_______
40. Have you prevented another from studying or training?
_______
41. Have you ever slowed things down just because your seniors wanted
them speeded up?
_______
42. Do you ever privately laugh at the antics of your superiors?
_______
43. Have you done anything to get another staff member in bad repute?
_______
44. Have you ever damaged org property?
_______
45. Have you wasted org supplied?
_______
46. Have you juggled org accounts?
_______
47. As a staff member have you produced any overt products?
_______
48. Have you ever given out data which was contrary to HCO Bulletins
or Policy Letters?
_______
49. Have you ever pretended to quote HCOBs or PLs without showing the
actual issue?
_______
50. Have you ever prevented tech or policy from being known or correctly
used?
_______
51. Have you ever just pretended to work?
_______
52. Have you taken credit for the work done by another?
_______
53. Have you maligned another to enhance your own reputation?
_______
54. Have you caused or contributed to an org mutiny?
_______
55. Have you spent post time on matters not related to your post or
org business?
_______
56. Have you encouraged another to blow?
_______
57. Have you done anything to damage the repute of a senior
Scientology Org?
_______
58. Have you done anything to damage the repute of the Sea Org?
_______
59. Have you discouraged org pcs or students from advancing
to a senior org?
_______
60. Have you ever lied to a public pc or student?
_______
61. Have you ever lied to a potential pc or student?
_______
HCOB 6.10.80 I - 4 -
62. Have you ever withheld that you had a PTS A situation with a
parent or relative?
_______
63. Have you falsely reported to a Sea Org Missionaire?
_______
64. Have you ever false reported to Flag?
_______
65. Have you ever reported compliance to an order or target which
was not fully done?
_______
66. Have you knowingly violated policy?
_______
67. Have you blamed another for not doing your job?
_______
68. Do you think it really doesn't matter whether you do a good job
or not?
_______
69. As a staff member, have you ever taken books, packs, pens, small
amounts of money or other articles which did not belong to you?
_______
70. Are you here purposely to upset or damage Scientology?
_______
71. While on staff of a Scientology organization have you committed
any civil crime?
_______
72. Is there something an Ethics Officer shouldn't know about you?
_______
73. Have you done something you wouldn't like LRH to know about?
_______
74. As a staff member have you committed some overt that hasn't been
revealed?
_______
75. In this Confessional, have you told a half truth?
_______
76. In this Confessional, have you told an untruth?
_______
77. In this Confessional, has a withhold been missed?
_______
78. In this Confessional, have you told all?
_______
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
Approved & accepted by
the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:MIR:bk
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
Approved & accepted by the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=28/9/80
Volnum=0
Issue=3
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
CONFESSIONAL REPAIR LIST
LCRD WORDS LIST
Type = 12
iDate=9/4/72
Issue=2
Rev=1
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Remimeo
C/Ses
Auditors
Tech/Qual
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 28 SEPTEMBER 1980
Remimeo ISSUE III
C/Ses
Auditors (Cancels BTB 9 Apr 72R II CLEARING LIST WORDS IN
Tech/Qual SCIENTOLOGY-LCR which did not contain all the
words for the LCRD.)
CONFESSIONAL REPAIR LIST
LCRD WORDS LIST
REFERENCES:
HCO PL 4 Apr 72R III ETHICS AND STUDY TECH Rev. 21.6.75
HCOB 8 Jul 74R I Word Clearing Series 52R
Rev. 24.7.74 CLEAR TO F/N
HCOB 21 Jun 72 I Word Clearing Series 38 METHOD 5
HCOB 9 Aug 78 II CLEARING COMMANDS
HCOB 17 Jul 79 I Word Clearing Series 64
THE MISUNDERSTOOD WORD DEFINED
These are the words from HCOB 23 Jul 80 CONFESSIONAL REPAIR LIST-
LCRD.
These words should be cleared on the pc before the list is actually
assessed on him per HCOB 9 Aug 78 II CLEARING COMMANDS.
The auditor must have received high crime checkouts from Qual on the
above references before clearing these words on a pc. The auditor uses
Method 5 Word Clearing when clearing these words on the pc.
This word list need only be cleared once in the pc's auditing if it
was correctly cleared the first time.
The fact of having cleared this word list on the pc must be noted in
the appropriate place in the pc's folder. (Ref: Auditor Admin Series 6R
THE YELLOW SHEET)
WORDS FROM THE CONFESSIONAL REPAIR LIST-LCRD
A, about, accepted, accurately, accusation, acknowledge, action, afraid,
alcohol, all, already, an, angry, another, answer, any, anything,
appropriate, ARC Break, are, at, auditing, auditor, avoid.
Back, basic, be, been, betrayal, but, by.
Call, cans, chain, coming, confessional.
Dare, demanded, did, didn't, different, don't, drugs.
Earlier, else, error, evaluation.
Fail, false, feel, find out, F/N, F/Ning, for, fulfilled.
Get, giving.
Had, half-truths, handled, happen, has, have, he, hear, here, hungry.
HCOB 28.9.80 III - 2 -
In, injustice, invalidated, is.
Kept, known.
Left, lie, list.
Medicine, meter, middle, might, misdirect, missed, misunderstood, more.
Not.
Of, off, once, one, opinions, or, out Int, overrun, overt, overts.
Part, problem, protested, purpose.
Question.
Read, reading, reasons, recently, reputation, rest.
Said, same, say, scene, should, some, someone, something, suppressed.
Taken, taken up, tell, telling, than, that, the, there, tired, to, told.
Undisclosed, unflat, unnecessary, up, upset.
Waiting, was, were, weren't, what, when, with, withhold, withholding,
withholds, worded, worried, wrong.
You, your.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Susan Krieger
Mission Issues Revision I/C
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:SK:dr
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Susan Krieger
Mission Issues Revision I/C
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=28/9/80
Volnum=0
Issue=2
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
L1X HI-LO TA LIST REVISED
WORDS LIST
Type = 12
iDate=9/4/72
Issue=9
Rev=2
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Remimeo
C/Ses
Auditors
Tech/Qual
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 28 SEPTEMBER 1980
Remimeo ISSUE II
C/Ses
Auditors (Cancels BTB 9 Apr 72RA IX CLEARING LIST WORDS IN
Tech/Qual SCIENTOLOGY L1X HI-LO TA LIST REVISED which did not
include the new words from the revised L1X HI-LO TA
LIST, HCOB 1 Jan 72RB.)
L1X HI-LO TA LIST REVISED
WORDS LIST
REFERENCES:
HCO PL 4 Apr 72R III ETHICS AND STUDY TECH
Rev. 21.6.75
HCOB 8 Jul 74R I CLEAR TO F/N
HCOB 21 Jun 72 I Word Clearing Series 38 METHOD 5
HCOB 9 Aug 78 II CLEARING COMMANDS
HCOB 17 Jul 79 I Word Clearing Series 64
THE MISUNDERSTOOD WORD DEFINED
These are the words from HCOB 1 Jan 72RB L1X HI-LO TA LIST REVISED.
These words should be cleared on the pc before the list is actually
assessed on him per HCOB 9 Aug 78 II CLEARING COMMANDS.
The auditor must have received high crime checkouts from Qual on the
above references before clearing these words on a pc. The auditor uses
Method 5 Word Clearing when clearing these words on the pc.
This word list need only be cleared once in the pc's auditing if it
was correctly cleared the first time.
The fact of having cleared this word list on the pc must be noted in
the appropriate place in the pc's folder. (Ref: Auditor Admin Series 6R
THE YELLOW SHEET)
WORDS FROM THE L1X HI-LO TA LIST REVISED
A, about, accused, acted, action, actions, acts, actual, afraid, after,
alcohol, all, an, and, another, any, anyone, anything, ARC Break, ARC
Broken, are, assessment, assigned, at, attacked, attention, audited,
auditing, auditor, aware.
Bad, be, because, been, being, between, black, blow, break, by, BPC.
Cans, can't, can't have, case, cases, caused, causing, chain, chains,
charged, clash, clothing, cognitions, commands, committed, committing,
condition, confront, connected, connection, considerations, continue,
correct, couldn't, cover, covered, cramming, cream, crimes, C/S.
Dare, date, Dianetic, Dianetics, did, didn't, disagreements, do, does,
doing, done, don't, drink, drug, Drug RD, drugs, drunk, dry, duration.
HCOB 28.9.80 II - 2 -
Else, engram, engrams, EPs, erase, error, errors, evaluation, ever, exam,
examiner, experienced, exterior.
Fail, false, false TA, faulty, feel, felt, fine, flows, F/Ns, for, found,
found out, from.
Get, given, giving, go, going, gone, gone on, grip.
Had, hand, hands, handle, handled, happen, has, hassles, have, having,
havingness, hear, here, hiding, high, hostile.
Ill, in, incidents, incomplete, incorrectly, indicated, indication,
inspection, interested, interiorized, interruptions, interview, interviews,
into, Int RD, invalidated, invalidation, invisible, involved, is, isn't,
it, item, items.
Keeps on, kept, kicked, kind.
Labelled, leave, left, lie, life, like, list, listed, listening, listing,
location, long, looking, loosen, loss, lost, low, LSD.
Masses, materials, may, medicine, mentioned, messed up, meter, might, mind,
missed, misunderstood, misunderstoods, must.
Need, no, not, nothing, not-ised, not-ising, nulling.
Objectives, of, okay, on, once, opinions, or, other, others, out, out rud,
out-ruds, out ethics, over, overlisted, overrepair, overrepaired, overts,
overrun, overwhelm, own.
Past, pc, persistent, personality, physically, picture, pictures, point,
pot, practice, problem, problems, procedure, process, protested,
protesting, PT, PTS, PTS Interview, puzzled.
Quad, quadded up, questions.
Read, reading, reads, really, reasons, recalls, release, repairing, report,
restimulation, ruds, run, rundown, rushed, R3RA.
Sad, said, same, satisfied, say, saying, scared, Scientology, secondary,
see, self-auditing, separated, session, sessions, should, shouldn't, sized,
smoke, smoked, smoking, some, somebody, someone, something, sort, spaces,
state, still, stops, stuck, studied, study, suppressed.
TA, take, taken, taking, talk, talking, Tech, telling, that, the, their,
there, thing, think, this, thought, tight, tired, to, told, too, trapped,
triple, tripled, trouble, trying, twice, two way comm, type.
Understand, understood, undisclosed, unflat, unrun, unwilling, up, upset,
urgently, using.
Wait, waiting, want, was, way, we, wearing, well, went, were, weren't, wet,
what, when, who, whole track, why, why finding, will, with, withheld,
withhold, withholding, without, word clearing, words, wrong, wrongly.
You, your, you're, yourself.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by Susan Krieger
Mission Issues Revision I/C
BDCS:LRH:SK:dr for the
Copyright $c 1980 BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
by L. Ron Hubbard of the
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by Susan Krieger
Mission Issues Revision I/C
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=17/9/80
Volnum=0
Issue=2
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
GREEN FORM WORDS LIST
Type = 12
iDate=9/4/72
Issue=1
Rev=1
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Remimeo
C/Ses
Auditors
Tech/Qual
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 17 SEPTEMBER 1980
ISSUE II
Remimeo (Cancels BTB 9 April 72R Issue I CLEARING LIST WORDS
C/Ses IN SCIENTOLOGY GREEN FORM as this BTB did not include
Auditors the new words from the revised Green Form, HCO PL 7 April
Tech/Qual 1970RC Rev. 4.7.80, GREEN FORM.)
GREEN FORM WORDS LIST
REFERENCES:
HCO PL 4 Apr 72R III ETHICS AND STUDY TECH
Rev. 21.6.75
HCOB 8 Jul 74R I Word Clearing Series 52R
Rev. 24.7.74 CLEAR TO F/N
HCOB 21 Jun 72 I Word Clearing Series 38 METHOD 5
HCOB 9 Aug 78 II CLEARING COMMANDS
HCOB 17 Jul 79 I Word Clearing Series 64
THE MISUNDERSTOOD WORD DEFINED
These are the words from HCO PL 7 April 1970RC Rev. 4 July 1980 GREEN
FORM.
These words should be cleared on the pc before the Green Form is
actually assessed per HCOB 9 Aug 78 Issue II CLEARING COMMANDS.
The auditor must have received high crime checkouts from Qual on the
above references before clearing these words on a pc. The auditor uses
Method 5 Word Clearing when clearing these words on the pc.
This word list need only be cleared once in the pc's auditing if it
was correctly cleared the first time.
The fact of having cleared this word list on the pc must be noted in
the appropriate place in the pc's folder. (Ref. Auditor Admin Series 6R THE
YELLOW SHEET.)
WORDS FROM THE GREEN FORM
A, about, against, alcohol, altering, an, any, anything, ARC Break, are,
arrested, aspirin, audited, auditing, auditor.
Bad, be, because, been, breaks, by, by-passed, by-passed charge.
Can't, Clear, code, coming, comm cycle, committed, confidential, connected,
copies, could, crime, crimes, criminal, cured.
Dangers, data, debts, demanded, Dianetic Clear, do, doing, drugs, drunk.
Else, engram, enough, environment, environmental, erased, error, evaluated,
exactly, experimenting, exterior.
Food, for, from.
HCOB 17.9.80 II - 2 -
Get, gone, group.
Had, handled, handwritten happen has, hasn't, have, here, hidden standard,
hungry.
If, ignored, in, Int RD, invalidated, is, it.
Kept, know, knowledge.
Left, list.
Matching, materials, menace, mentioned, messed up, missed.
Non-standard, not.
Of, or, orgs, originations, over-repaired, overrun, overt.
Person, physically, picture, present time problem, process, PT.
Record, release, restimulation, review, rushed.
Scientology, self-auditing, sleep, someone, something, sufficient,
suppressed, suppressive, study.
Taken, taped, tech, that, the, there, this, tired, to, tranquilizers,
typed.
Unflat, unnecessary, unpaid, up, upsetting.
Was, what, which, with, withhold, worked, works, would, wrong.
You, your.
ADDITIONAL WORDS FROM RESISTIVE CASES ASSESSMENT
And, attested, after, antagonistic, attained.
Being, before.
Continuously, committing.
Doesn't.
Engrams, earlier.
Former.
Grades.
Ill.
Misunderstoods.
Never.
Out, overwhelmed, overts, on.
Part, practices, pretending, prior.
Run, rudiments.
Seriously, seeking, same.
Therapy, thrill, training.
Valence.
Want, went.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:MIR:bk
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=17/9/80
Volnum=0
Issue=1
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
L3RG AND R3RA WORD LIST
Type = 12
iDate=28/4/78
Issue=0
Rev=1
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Remimeo
Auditors
C/Ses
Tech/Qual
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 17 SEPTEMBER 1980
ISSUE I
Remimeo (Cancels BTB 28 April 74R DIANETICS CLEARING LISTS
Auditors AND R3R as this BTB did not include the words from
C/Ses the revised issues, HCOB 28 June 78 New Era Dianetics
Tech/Qual Series 7 R3RA COMMANDS and HCOB 11 April 71RD L3RG,
nor the Preassessment words.)
L3RG AND R3RA WORD LIST
REFERENCES:
HCO PL 4 Apr 72R III ETHICS AND STUDY TECH
Rev. 21.6.75
HCOB 8 Jul 74R I Word Clearing Series 53R
Rev. 24.7.74 CLEAR TO F/N
HCOB 21 Jun 72 I Word Clearing Series 38
METHOD 5
HCOB 9 Aug 78 II CLEARING COMMANDS
HCOB 17 Jul 79 I Word Clearing Series 64
THE MISUNDERSTOOD WORD DEFINED
These are the words from HCOB 11 April 1971RD IMPORTANT L3RG DIANETICS
AND INT RD REPAIR LIST, the Preassessment List and R3RA Commands.
These words should be cleared on the pc before the L3RG or
Preassessment List is assessed or R3RA Commands are run per HCOB 9 Aug 1978
Issue II CLEARING COMMANDS.
The auditor must have received high crime checkouts from Qual on the
above references before clearing these words on a pc. The auditor uses
Method 5 Word Clearing when clearing these words on the pc.
This word list need only be cleared once in the pc's auditing if it
was correctly cleared the first time.
The fact of having cleared this word list on the pc must be noted in
the appropriate place in the pc's folder. (Ref. Auditor Admin Series 6R THE
YELLOW SHEET.)
WORDS FROM L3RG R3RA PROCEDURE AND PREASSESSMENTS
A, abandoned, accept, aches, alcohol, all, already, an, and, another, ARC
Break, are, assessed, at, attain, attitudes, audited, auditor.
Basic, be, because, been, beginning, black, by, by-passed.
Causing, chain, chains, changed, changing, charge, charged, clear, close,
cognition, command, commands, completed, compulsions, confused, connected,
continue, constantly, could.
Date, death, declare, demand, Dianetic, did, different, discomforts,
dislikes, distracted, do, does, drugs, duration, durations.
HCOB 17.9.80 I - 2 -
Earlier, else, emotions, end, engrams, erased, erasing,
expressed, exterior, eyes.
False, fears, feelings, first, flows, flubbed, F/N, for, from, found.
Get, giving, go, going, gone, goof, gotten.
Had, handled, happened, has, have, heavily, held up.
Implant, in, incident, incidents, incorrect, indicated, interest,
interested, interrupted, Int RD, invalidated, invisible, is, it, item.
Jump, just.
Late, later, left, let, list, locate.
Make, mass, me, medicine, messed up, misemotions, misrun, missed,
misunderstood, misworded, more, move.
New, no, nobody, not, nothing, numbnesses.
Of, okay, on, one, or, original, original item, originally, others, over.
Pains, past, persistent, picture, pictures, place, point, postulate,
preassessment, preassessment item, pressure, pressures, prevented, problem,
protesting.
Read, real, really, reason, refuse, resent, restimulated, return, run,
running.
Said, same, say, saying, see, seem, sensations, sequence, should, similar,
simply, skipped, solid, some, something, soon, sorenesses, start, starting,
state (noun), still, stop, stopped, stuck, suppressed.
Tell, than, that, the, there, thing, this, through, time, tired,
tirednesses, to, too, trouble, twice, two.
Unnecessary, unconsciousnesses, upset.
Was, we, went, were, what, when, while, with, withhold, wording, would,
wrong.
You, your, yourself.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:MIR:bk
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=16/9/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
PTS RD CORRECTION LIST
WORDS LIST
Type = 12
iDate=1/12/74
Issue=7
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Remimeo
C/Ses
Auditors
Tech/Qual
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 16 SEPTEMBER 1980
Remimeo
C/Ses (Cancels BTB 1 Dec 74 Iss VII CLEARING LIST WORDS IN
Auditors SCIENTOLOGY-PTS RD CORRECTION LIST which omitted
Tech/Qual giving the references to be high crimed before clearing
words on a pc and the method of word clearing to be used.)
PTS RD CORRECTION LIST
WORDS LIST
REFERENCES:
HCO PL 4 Apr 72R III ETHICS AND STUDY TECH
HCOB 8 Jul 74R I CLEAR TO F/N
HCOB 21 Jun 72 I METHOD 5
HCOB 9 Aug 78 II CLEARING COMMANDS
HCOB 17 Jul 79 I W/C Series 64
THE MISUNDERSTOOD WORD DEFINED
These are the words from HCOB 16 Apr 72 PTS RD CORRECTION LIST.
These words should be cleared on the pc before the PTS RD CORRECTION
LIST is actually assessed per HCOB 9 Aug 78 II CLEARING COMMANDS.
The auditor must have received high crime checkouts from Qual on the
above references before clearing these words on a pc. The auditor uses
Method 5 word clearing when clearing these words on the pc.
This word list need only be cleared once in the pc's auditing if it
was correctly cleared the first time.
The fact of having cleared this word list on the pc must be noted in
the appropriate place in the pc's folder. (Ref. Auditor Admin Series 6R THE
YELLOW SHEET.)
WORDS FROM THE PTS RD CORRECTION LIST
A, about, achieved, additional, after, agree, all, all right, an, and,
another, anyway, are, attest, audited, auditing, auditor.
Bad, be, been, believe, but, by.
Can't, caused, communication, complete, completely, condition.
Decided, detected, didn't, disagrees, disclosed, does, doing, don't.
Earlier, else, engram, errors, ever, everything.
Feel, feelings, first.
Gains, given, group.
Handle, handled, has, have, hold.
HCOB 16.9.80 - 2 -
Ill, in, incomplete, is, it.
Know.
Lies, like, list, lost.
Middle, misunderstood, more.
Not, now.
Of, okay, on, only, onto, or.
People, person, physically, place, protested, PTS, PTS RD.
Really, rundown.
Said, Scientology, situation, someone, something, still, suppressive.
Than, that, the, there, this, to, told.
Understand, upset.
Want, was, wasn't, were, weren't, what, when, whole, with, words, wrong,
who.
You, your.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues
Revision
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF
SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:MIR:bk
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=11/9/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
L4BRA WORDS LIST
Type = 12
iDate=9/4/72
Issue=0
Rev=1
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Remimeo
C/Ses
Auditors
Tech/Qual
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 11 SEPTEMBER 1980
Remimeo (CANCELS BTB 9 Apr 72R CLEARING LIST WORDS IN
C/Ses SCIENTOLOGY L4BR which did not contain all of
Auditors the words from the revised L4BRA, HCOB 15 Dec 68RA.)
Tech/Qual
L4BRA WORDS LIST
REFERENCES:
HCO PL 4 Apr 72R III ETHICS AND STUDY TECH
Rev. 21.6.75
HCOB 8 Jul 74R I Word Clearing Series 52R
Rev. 24.7.74 CLEAR TO F/N
HCOB 21 Jun 72 I Word Clearing Series 38
METHOD 5
HCOB 9 Aug 78 II CLEARING COMMANDS
HCOB 17 Jul 79 I Word Clearing Series 64
THE MISUNDERSTOOD WORD DEFINED
These are the words from HCOB 15 Dec 68RA L4BRA FOR ASSESSMENT OF ALL
LISTING ERRORS.
These words should be cleared on the pc before the L4BRA is actually
assessed per HCOB 9 Aug 78 Issue II CLEARING COMMANDS.
The auditor must have received high crime checkouts from Qual on the
above references before clearing these words on a pc. The auditor uses
Method 5 Word Clearing when clearing these words on the pc.
This word list need only be cleared once in the pc's auditing if it
was correctly cleared the first time.
The fact of having cleared this word list on the pc must be noted in
the appropriate place in the pc's folder. (Ref. Auditor Admin Series 6R THE
YELLOW SHEET.)
WORDS FROM THE L4BRA
THE MISUNDERSTOOD WORD DEFINED
another, answer, ARC Break, ashamed, asserted, auditor.
Because, been, before, being, by, by-passed, by-passed charge.
Carried, carried on, cause, charge, correct, correction, couldn't.
Denied, did, didn't, different, do, done.
Earlier, else, else's, errors, evaluated, exterior.
Fail, first, forced, found, from.
Given, gone.
Had, handled, has, have.
HCOB 11.9.80 - 2 -
In, incomplete, interest, invalidated, is, it, item, items.
Kind.
List, listed, listing, long.
Made, meaningless, missed.
No, not, nothing, nulling.
Of, off, on, only, or, other, out, overrun, overt.
Past, place, in the first place, point, previously, process, protest,
protested, PTP, pushed, put.
Question.
React, release, restimulated, right.
Said, session, some, somebody, someone, suggest, suggested.
Taken, that, the, there, this, thought, to, too.
Under, understand, understood, unnecessary, upset.
Volunteered.
Want, was, way, were, what, when, while, withheld, withhold, word, wrong.
You, your, yours, yourself.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:SK:bk
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=2/9/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
REPAIR CORRECTION LIST WORDS
Remimeo
Auditors
C/Ses
Tech/Qual
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 2 SEPTEMBER 1980
Remimeo
Auditors
C/Ses
Tech/Qual
REPAIR CORRECTION LIST WORDS
REFERENCES:
HCO PL 4 Apr 72R III IMPORTANT-ETHICS AND STUDY TECH
Rev. 21.6.75
HCOB 8 Jul 74R I Word Clearing Series 52R
Rev. 24.7.74 CLEAR TO F/N
HCOB 21 Jun 72 I Word Clearing Series 38
METHOD 5
HCOB 9 Aug 78 II CLEARING COMMANDS
HCOB 17 Jul 79 I Word Clearing Series 64
THE MISUNDERSTOOD WORD DEFINED
These are the words from HCOB 16 Oct 78 REPAIR CORRECTION LIST.
These words should be cleared on the pc before the list is actually
assessed on him per HCOB 9 Aug 78 II CLEARING COMMANDS.
The auditor must have received high crime checkouts from Qual on the
above references before clearing these words on a pc. The auditor uses
Method 5 word clearing when clearing these words on the pc.
These words need only be cleared once in the pc's auditing if they
were correctly cleared the first time.
The fact of having cleared this word list on the pc must be noted in
the appropriate place in the pc's folder. (Ref: Auditor Admin Series 6R
THE YELLOW SHEET.)
WORDS FROM THE REPAIR CORRECTION LIST
A, action, an, and, anyway, asked, assessed, assessment, attesting,
audited, auditing, auditor.
Bad, be, been, being, by, by-passed, by-passed charge.
Case, charge, chart, complete, could, cycle.
Declare, did, didn't, do, done.
Ever, exterior.
Fall, false read, feel, felt, F/N, F/Ned, F/Ning, from.
Get, get on with, given, going, gone, grade, grade chart.
Had, handle, handled, has, have, high, high TA, how.
In, indicate, Int RD, is, it, item.
Just.
Kept, know.
List, lists, low, low TA.
Many, messed up, misassessed, missed.
HCOB 2.9.80 - 2 -
No, not.
Often, on, one, other, out-list, over-repair, overrun.
Prepared, prepared list, prepared lists, prevented.
Read, really, repair, repaired, repairs, rundown.
See, should, some, something.
TA, take up, tell, the, there, think, time, to, told, too, TRs.
Unnecessary, up.
Want, was, wasn't, were, what, when, while, win, with, would, wrong.
You, your.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Susan Krieger
Mission Issues
Revision I/C
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF
SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:SK:dr
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Susan Krieger
Mission Issues
Revision I/C
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=30/7/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
THE NATURE OF A BEING
Remimeo
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 30 JULY 1980
Remimeo
THE NATURE OF A BEING
When one is associating with or attempting to guide or handle a
person, it is necessary to know something of the nature of a being.
If a being were a single unit, separated from all other beings,
conditions and current influences, the task of understanding him would be
relatively simple and philosophers would have had it all worked out long
before Dianetics and Scientology.
A single unit being responds to the most elementary and simple rules
and laws you will find in Dianetics and Scientology. Affinity, Reality,
Communication and Understanding; the time track; mental image pictures; the
earlier incident holding the later in place; responses to Matter, Energy,
Space, Time, Form as well as force; and the axioms. On this you can rest
assured. And one might even wonder why we need all the additional bulletins
and cautions and provisions and lectures.
The fact of the matter is that when one addresses a person, a human
being "in the flesh" one is not addressing a simple being.
Possibly an example will illustrate this: I had just finished giving
a Congress and a staff member had made some appointments for me to see
people who wanted to talk to me. And, in a conference room, I was suddenly
confronted by a woman who was demonstrably and actively insane. She was
incoherent, she was being "pursued", she was utterly agitated. Well, I was
not then and never was in the business of treating the insane. Yet here was
a situation which had to be handled if only to maintain social calm. In
those days there were many techniques for exteriorizing people and so I
used one of them, putting her back of her head. promptly she went sane,
calmly reviewed her problem with her husband, sensibly made up her mind
what she was going to do to properly resolve the matter, thanked me and
departed. For a brief time she had temporarily become a single unit being.
I have not given the example as a lesson in what to do in such cases
for exteriorization techniques are not reliable. But only to illustrate the
complexity of people.
What you see as a human being, a person, is not a single unit being.
In the first place, there is the matter of valence. A person can be
himself or he can be under the belief that he is another person or thing
entirely. This removes him a step from being a simple being.
Then there is the matter of being in a body. A body is a very complex
contrivance, quite remarkable, quite complicated. And it is also quite
subject to its own distortions.
There are also the entities (as discussed in "Dianetics, The Modern
Science of Mental Health", pages 84-90, and also "The History Of Man",
pages 13-14, 43, 75-77). These follow all the rules and laws and phenomena
of single beings.
HCOB 30.7.80 - 2 -
And then there is the matter of influences of other people around
this human being.
From a single, simple being there is a progressive complication
setting in as one adds all these other factors.
The single, simple being, without any further associations can be out
of valence even miles away from other contacts.
It is the aggregate of all these factors which you address when you
seek to guide or handle the usual human being.
This is also why objective processes are so effective-they get many
of these factors all going in the same direction for once.
None of this is to say that it is impossible to handle all this. Far
from it. But it does tell one why all the additional precautions (like
don't overrun, like careful session procedures) are there in all those
materials.
But mainly it tells you that full recoveries seldom happen fast and
that cases require an awful lot of work and often for a very long time.
And like the woman at the Congress, one sometimes gets a sudden near-
magical result. The trouble with that one was that she soon went back into
her head and became again a composite, even though she now did have a sane
plan of action to follow.
Results, if you follow the rules and laws carefully and with good
heart, can be obtained. And you, knowing your business, can obtain them.
But don't become discouraged if it all doesn't happen fast and if it
takes a long time. When you are handling a human being, you are handling a
composite.
We did not construct the human mind or human body. We did not put the
universe there to involve, oppress or complicate life. We are working with
the end product of an awful lot of trials and tribulations.
If we were working with single beings, it would be a nothing to do.
We are not. We are working with a complexity and we can do an awful lot,
far more than anyone could do before us. And our work with life has effects
and influences far beyond our auditing tables. It took vast, vast numbers
of years and eons for life to get that involved and complicated. Be glad
that it doesn't take even a tiny fraction of that to dig it out and smooth
it out with Dianetics and Scientology.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:dr
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=29/7/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
CRIMINALS AND PSYCHIATRY
Remimeo
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 29 JULY 1980
Remimeo
CRIMINALS AND PSYCHIATRY
Almost every modern horror crime was committed by a known criminal
who had been in and out of the hands of psychiatrists and psychologists
often many times.
There is no particular reason to enumerate endless case histories of
this: they occur too frequently in news accounts and the newspaper morgues
are thick with them. And as such stories develop it is found that the
perpetrator had a long history, some even from childhood, of psychiatric
and psychological treatment.
Such a record of failure does not seem to come to the attention of
legislators and these continue to pour floods of money into the coffers of
the psychiatrists, psychologists and their organizations. The public at
large, by survey, seems to be aware of this state of affairs if not the
whole facts: the only real customers the psychiatrist and psychologist have
are the governments-the public does not of its own volition go to them.
The most charitable look at this would be that the psychologists and
psychiatrists are simply incompetent. But other more sinister implications
can be drawn.
Developed in the latter part of the 19th Century, they appeared on
the militaristic scene of a re-arming and conquest-minded Germany. At that
time, the arch-criminal Bismarck was laying the ground work for the
slaughters of World War I and World War II. It fitted with the philosophy
of militarism that man was an animal and that there was neither soul nor
morality standing in the way of the wholesale murder of war.
Up until that time the Church had some influence upon the state and
possibly some power in restraining bestiality and savagely insane conduct
but, small as it might have been, it was incompatible with the unholy
ambitions of the militarists. That man was only an animal after all,
soulless and entitled to no decency, was bound to be a popular doctrine.
That insanity consisted of urges to harm others would have been a very
unpopular idea to government heads who had nothing else in mind. And so the
notion that insanity was a physical disease was taken up avidly.
The basic tenet of psychology is that man is just an animal. The
basic tenet of psychiatry is that insanity is a physical disease. Neither
has any proof that these tenets are correct. That man can be reduced to
animalistic behavior does not prove that that is his true basic nature.
That some physical diseases also produce mental aberration does not prove
that any "mental illness" has bacteria or virus and indeed none have ever
been isolated.
The instigators, patrons and supporters of these two subjects
classify fully and demonstrably as criminals.
If the crimes committed by a government in one single day were
committed by an individual, that individual would be promptly put in a cell
and probably even a padded cell.
HCOB 29.7.80 - 2 -
Unfortunately, positions of power and authority attract to themselves
beings who, all too often, need that altitude to exercise their lust for
covertly or overtly harming others. Government positions are well suited to
this use; they are also all too often held to be above any law. Some of the
most notorious criminals in history have operated from government
positions. This becomes statistically impressive when one counts the
strewn corpses.
Looking this over (and it is amply documented in any history book or
newspaper) one can begin to make some kind of sense out of it. Spawned by
an insanely militaristic government, psychiatry and psychology find avid
support from oppressive and domineering governments. The employer of these
people classifies, even in the most generous view, as criminal. Thus it
cannot be much wondered at that these subjects have no real success or even
interest in detecting and handling criminals.
One cannot go so far as to say that psychiatry and psychology
knowingly create criminals or actively plan and implant their patients to
commit crimes, even though it might look this way in some cases. Rather,
these subjects are false subjects, based on false principles which are well
suited to the demands and ambitions of their employers. Their technology is
incapable of detecting, much less helping, the criminal. It is even
doubtful if their employers, the governments, would tolerate a subject
which could detect and resolve criminality-for who would be the first ones
detected? Some amongst the governments, of course. No, the wolf would only
favor a jury of wolves to judge the crime of killing sheep. That is why you
see governments flooding out money for psychologists in schools and
psychiatrists in government departments.
With a complete, government supported monopoly in the field of the
mind,
potential criminals will go right on remaining undetected until they injure
or
slaughter citizens and, having done so, become unrelieved or even confirmed
in
their habit patterns in the hands of psychiatrists and psychologists and
re-released upon the world to further injure and slaughter citizens.
The credence and power of psychiatry and psychology are waning. It
hit its zenith about 1960: then it seemed their word was law and that they
could harm, injure and kill patients without restraint. The appearance of
an actual technology of the mind-Dianetics and Scientology-has played no
small part in acting as a restraint. At one time they were well on their
way to turning every baby into a future robot for the manipulation of the
state and every society into a madhouse of crime and immorality. The world
is still suffering from the effects of that domination.
There is no real reason why, using the proper technology, the
criminal cannot be detected and also reformed. One might also, by the use
of false data stripping, redeem a psychologist or psychiatrist-though this
would be made difficult by the fact that he achieves all his power and
money from the state which might have quite different purposes for him.
The world is turning, things change. And there may come a day when
the mad dogs of the world are not given over to the charge of mad dogs. But
that will be to the degree that you successfully carry forward Dianetics
and Scientology.
LRH:bk L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright $c 1980 FOUNDER
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=25/7/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=1
rDate=10/9/80
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
COURSE SUPERVISOR CORRECTION LIST
WORDS LIST
Remimeo
C/Ses
Auditors
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 25 JULY 1980R
Remimeo REVISED 10 SEPTEMBER 1980
C/Ses
Auditors
(Cancels BTB 1 Dec 74 III CLEARING LIST Tech/Qual WORDS IN
SCIENTOLOGY COURSE SUPERVISOR CORRECTION LIST STUDY CORR. LIST 2 which did
not give the references to be high crimed before clearing words on a pc and
did not give the type of word clearing to be used.)
(Revision in Script)
COURSE SUPERVISOR CORRECTION LIST
WORDS LIST
REFERENCES:
HCO PL 4 Apr 72R III ETHICS AND STUDY TECH
Rev. 21.6.75
HCOB 8 Jul 74R I Word Clearing Series 52R
Rev. 24.7.74 CLEAR TO F/N
HCOB 21 Jun 72 I Word Clearing Series 38
METHOD 5
HCOB 9 Aug 78 II CLEARING COMMANDS
HCOB 17 Jul 79 I Word Clearing Series 64
THE MISUNDERSTOOD WORD DEFINED
These are the words used in HCOB 27 Mar 72R II COURSE SUPERVISOR
CORRECTION LIST STUDY CORR. LIST 2R.
These words should be cleared on the Course Supervisor (the pc) before
the list is actually assessed on him per HCOB 9 Aug 78 II CLEARING
COMMANDS.
An auditor must have received high crime checkouts himself from Qual
on the above references before clearing these words in session on the
Course Supervisor (pc).
The auditor uses Method 5 Word Clearing while clearing these words on
the Course Supervisor (pc).
These words need only be cleared once in the Course Supervisor's
(pc's) auditing if correctly cleared the first time.
The fact of having cleared these words on the pc must be noted in the
appropriate place in the pc's folder. (Ref: Auditor Admin Series 6R THE
YELLOW SHEET)
WORDS FROM THE COURSE SUPERVISOR CORRECTION LIST
A, ability, about, afraid, after, agreeable, all, already, an, and,
another, answer, any, anyway, apply, ARC Break, are, as, attained,
available.
Be, been, being, believe, bog, bogged, bound, bulletins, by.
Can, cannot, can't, case, certain, class, classroom, clearing, competence,
conflict, confront, confronted, consequences, consider, control,
correction, course, cross, covered.
Definition, demos, did, didn't, disagreements, do, does, dog, doing, done,
don't, double, drugs, duress.
Each, else, encountered, enough, every, experimenting.
Fail, falsify, feel, find, fixed, F/Ning, for, forced, found, found out,
from, fully.
HCOB 25.7.80R - 2 -
Get, getting, give, giving, go, good, graduated, graduates.
Had, handle, handled, has, hasn't, hatted, have, he, helped, helping, here,
how.
Ideas, if, important, in, in order to, interesting, instead, interpreting,
interrupting, is, issues, it.
Knew, know, knowledgeable.
Lack, leaving, less, like, list, lists, listen, listened, losses, lots.
Make, make it, many, materials, meter, M9, methods, misemotion, missing,
misunderstood, misunderstoods, more.
Native, neglecting, never, new, no, not.
Of, on, once, or, order, orders, other, others, outnesses, over, overt,
overts, overwhelmed, own.
Patience, people, physically, policy, popular, post, powerful, preventing,
problems, product, prove, purpose.
Questions.
Rather, really, reason, refer, regulated, responsible, right.
Said, same, second, should, shouldn't, situations, so, some, somebody,
someone, something, staff, started, statistic, stats, status, still,
student, Student Hat, students, studied, study, subject, supervise,
supervised, supervising, supervision, supervisor, supervisors, suppressive.
Tape, tapes, teach, teaching, tech, tell, than, that, the, their, them,
then, there, these, things, think, thinking, third, third partying,
through, time, tired, to, told, too, trouble, TRs, trying.
Unable, understand, understanding, unwell, upset, use, using.
Verbal.
Want, were, what, when, who, why, will, with, withholds, word, words, work,
worked, working, works, worth, would, wrong.
You, your, yourself.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:SK:dr
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=23/7/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
CONFESSIONAL REPAIR LIST-LCRD
Type = 12
iDate=8/12/72
Issue=0
Rev=2
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Remimeo
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 23 JULY 1980
Remimeo
CANCELS AND REPLACES BTB 8 DEC 72RA
SAME TITLE
CONFESSIONAL REPAIR LIST-LCRD
This is the Prepared List to use for repairing/correcting
Confessionals, whether done in session or by a tech trained and qualified
HCO terminal, or for repairing other O/W actions such as O/W write-ups.
If, after a Confessional or O/W write-up, the person Red Tags at the
examiner or if he gets sick or upset or falls on his head, this list is
assessed and handled to straighten the matter out. The repair action would
be a 24 Hour repair priority.
If there is a bog during a Confessional action, the auditor would
first check for Missed Withholds, False Reads and ARC Breaks in that order
and handle what he found. (Ref. HCOB 30 Nov 78 CONFESSIONAL PROCEDURE.)
This action will handle many bogs and resolve the difficulty. If it
doesn't, use the following list.
The list can be assessed Method 3 or Method 5. All reading items are
handled to EP per the instructions given.
The list should be used with a prefix which acts as a time limiter
such as "In this session _______ ", "On your O/W write-up _______ ", etc.
PRECLEAR: _____________________________ DATE:
________________________________
AUDITOR: _____________________________
1. OUT INT?
_______
Check to make sure the read on Int is a valid read and not a protest or
false read. If it is a valid read, end off for C/S instructions.
2. LIST ERROR?
_______
L4BRA and handle.
3. DID YOU HAVE AN ARC BREAK?
_______
ARCU, CDEINR E/S to F/N.
4. DID YOU HAVE A PROBLEM?
_______
2WC E/S to F/N.
5. HAS A WITHHOLD BEEN MISSED?
_______
Pull it getting who nearly found out, etc. E/S to F/N.
6. DID YOU TELL PART OF A WITHHOLD BUT NOT THE REST?
_______
Get all of the withhold, flatten it E/S to F/N.
7. DID YOU MISDIRECT THE AUDITOR?
_______
2WC E/S to F/N. Flatten any unflat Confessional chains uncovered.
HCOB 23.7.80 - 2 -
8. DID YOU AVOID TELLING ONE OVERT BY GIVING A DIFFERENT ONE?
_______
Pull it, E/S to F/N.
9. WERE YOU WAITING FOR A MORE ACCURATELY WORDED QUESTION?
_______
2WC E/S to F/N. Then pull any overt chains that were missed.
10. DID THE AUDITOR FAIL TO FIND OUT SOMETHING ABOUT YOU?
_______
Get what, flatten it E/S to F/N.
11. WERE YOU WORRIED ABOUT REPUTATION?
_______
Clean it up 2WC E/S to F/N.
12. ARE THERE OPINIONS YOU DON'T DARE SAY?
_______
Get what. 2WC E/S to F/N.
13. ARE YOU HERE FOR UNDISCLOSED REASONS?
_______
Find out why he's here, 2WC E/S to F/N. Note for further handling.
14. WAS THERE AN EARLIER OVERT UNDISCLOSED?
_______
Pull it and clean it up E/S to F/N.
15. WAS A CHAIN OF OVERTS NOT TAKEN BACK TO BASIC?
_______
Take it back to basic.
16. ARE YOU WITHHOLDING ANYTHING?
_______
Get what it is, E/S to F/N.
17. DID YOU TELL ANY HALF-TRUTHS?
_______
Get all of the withhold, flatten it E/S to F/N.
18. WAS THERE SOMETHING THE AUDITOR SHOULD HAVE KNOWN ABOUT YOU
THAT HE DIDN'T?
_______ Get what. Pull it E/S to F/N.
19. DID YOU FAIL TO ANSWER A CONFESSIONAL QUESTION?
_______
Find out which question and handle.
20. IS THERE MORE THAT SHOULD BE KNOWN ABOUT SOMETHING?
_______
Get it all E/S to F/N.
21. WAS A READ MISSED?
_______
Find out on what question and handle it to EP.
22. WAS A READING QUESTION NOT TAKEN UP?
_______
Find out which question and handle it to EP.
23. DID THE AUDITOR CALL AN F/N WHEN YOU DIDN'T FEEL YOU WERE F/NING?
_______
Indicate it if so. 2WC E/S to F/N. Find out what question or overt was
being handled and handle it to F/N.
24. DID YOU TELL A LIE?
_______
2WC E/S to F/N ensuring you get the lie or what he was covering up by
lying and who missed it. Then flatten any unflat questions uncovered if
necessary.
25. WAS A QUESTION LEFT UNFLAT?
_______
Find out which one, indicate it, flatten it.
HCOB 23.7.80 - 3 -
26. DID YOU HAVE TO GET THE SAME W/Hs OFF MORE THAN ONCE?
_______
2WC E/S to F/N.
27. WAS THERE A FALSE READ?
_______
2WC E/S to F/N. Indicate the false read if so. Can also clean it up
with suppress, inval, protest, if needed.
28. SOMEONE DEMANDED A W/H YOU DIDN'T HAVE?
_______
2WC E/S to F/N. Indicate it if so.
29. WAS THERE A FALSE ACCUSATION?
_______
2WC E/S to F/N.
30. HAD YOU TOLD ALL?
_______
2WC E/S to F/N. Indicate it if so.
31. HAS AN OVERT BEEN PROTESTED?
_______
Get what it was and get in protest button on it, check for E/S.
32. WAS THERE A WITHHOLD THAT KEPT COMING UP?
_______
Get who wouldn't accept it, who said it still read.
Indicate false read. 2WC the concern.
33. WERE THERE OVERTS OR WITHHOLDS THAT WEREN'T ACCEPTED?
_______
Get what. Get who wouldn't accept it. Get off any protest and inval,
and clean it up E/S to F/N.
34. DID THE AUDITOR NOT HEAR OR ACKNOWLEDGE WHAT YOU SAID?
_______
Indicate the BPC. Get what the auditor missed and clean it up E/S to
F/N.
35. DID THE AUDITOR GET ANGRY AT YOU?
_______
If this happened, indicate it is illegal to do so. 2WC E/S to F/N.
Clean up any ARC Break to F/N.
36. WERE YOU AFRAID OF WHAT MIGHT HAPPEN?
_______
2WC E/S to F/N.
37. WAS THERE AN INJUSTICE?
_______
2WC E/S to F/N.
38. WAS THERE A BETRAYAL?
_______
2WC E/S to F/N.
39. WAS ANYTHING SUPPRESSED?
_______
Clean it up E/S to F/N.
40. WAS ANYTHING INVALIDATED?
_______
Clean it up E/S to F/N.
41. WAS ANYTHING PROTESTED?
_______
2WC E/S to F/N.
42. WAS THERE ANY EVALUATION?
_______
2WC E/S to F/N.
43. HAS SOMETHING BEEN MISUNDERSTOOD?
_______
Clean it up, clearing any MU words each to F/N.
44. WAS THERE SOMETHING WRONG WITH THE METER OR CANS?
_______
False TA handling.
HCOB 23.7.80 - 4 -
45. WERE YOU TIRED OR HUNGRY?
_______
2WC E/S to F/N.
46. HAD YOU RECENTLY TAKEN DRUGS
_______
MEDICINE
_______
ALCOHOL
_______
2WC E/S to F/N. Note for C/S.
47. HAS SOMETHING BEEN OVERRUN?
_______
Get what, rehab.
48. WAS A QUESTION OVERRUN?
_______
Find out which question and rehab.
49. WAS AN F/N MISSED?
_______
Find out on what and rehab.
50. WAS SOME ACTION UNNECESSARY?
_______
Find out what it is. Indicate it if so. E/S to F/N.
51. WAS THE PURPOSE OF THE CONFESSIONAL ALREADY FULFILLED?
_______
2WC to find out, if so. Indicate it if so. Rehab the EP of the
Confessional.
52. WERE YOU IN THE MIDDLE OF ANOTHER AUDITING ACTION?
_______
2WC E/S to F/N. Note for C/S.
53. IS THERE ANOTHER CONFESSIONAL LIST MORE APPROPRIATE TO YOUR SCENE?
_______
2WC E/S to F/N. Note for C/S.
54. WAS THERE SOMETHING ELSE WRONG?
_______
If so and it doesn't clean up on 2WC, GF M5 and handle.
55. HAS THE UPSET BEEN HANDLED?
_______
2WC. If so, indicate it to F/N.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Revisions assisted by
Research and Technical
Compilations Unit
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:RTCU:bk
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Revisions assisted by
Research and Technical
Compilations Unit
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=12/7/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=1
rDate=5/11/82
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
THE BASICS OF ETHICS
Remimeo
All HCOs
Tech Sec
Qual Sec
Ds of T
Supervisors
Ethics Officers
Cramming Officers
Students
All Staff
All Hats
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 12 JULY 1980R
Remimeo REVISED 5 NOVEMBER 1982 All HCOs Tech
Sec (Also issued as HCO PL, same date, same title.)
Qual Sec
Ds of T
Supervisors
Ethics Officers
Cramming Officers
Students
All Staff
All Hats
(Revised to include in the references additional early works on the
subject of Ethics, to provide some added data on the subject and to correct
a section of the issue which in its wording seemed to infer that by
starting an ethics cycle on himself a person begins going downhill-which is
not the case.)
THE BASICS OF ETHICS
References:
Dianetic Auditor's Bulletin PREVENTIVE DIANETICS
Vol 1, No. 12, June 1951 (Section on Morals & Ethics)
Tech Vol I, Page 113
PAB No. 40 THE CODE OF HONOUR
26 Nov 1954 Tech Vol II, Page 104
Book: SCIENCE OF SURVIVAL Chapter 21, ETHIC LEVEL
HCO PL 9 Jul 80 ETHICS, JUSTICE AND THE DYNAMICS
ETHICS AND JUSTICE PACK IN VOLUNTEER MINISTER'S HANDBOOK
HCO PL 1 Sep 65 ETHICS PROTECTION
HCO PL 29 Apr 65 ETHICS REVIEW
HCO PL 27 May 60 DEAR SCIENTOLOGIST
HCO PL 12 Apr 65 JUSTICE
HCO PL 11 May 65 ETHICS OFFICER HAT
HCO PL 6 Mar 66 REWARDS AND PENALTIES, HOW
TO HANDLE PERSONNEL AND ETHICS
MATTERS
HCO PL 29 Dec 66 MATTERS JUDICIAL HISTORICAL
PRECEDENCE OF ETHICS
HCO PL 18 Jun 68 ETHICS
HCO PL 4 Oct 68 ETHICS PRESENCE
Rev. 8.7.80
HCO PL 7 Dec 69 ETHICS, THE DESIGN OF
HCO PL 7 Dec 69 II THE ETHICS OFFICER, HIS CHARACTER
HCO PL 24 Feb 69 JUSTICE
HCO PL 7 Sep AD13 COMMITTEES OF EVIDENCE
SCIENTOLOGY JURISPRUDENCE,
ADMINISTRATION OF
HCO PL 17 Mar 65 ADMINISTERING JUSTICE
HCO PL 24 Feb 72 INJUSTICE
Throughout the ages, man has struggled with the subjects of right and
wrong and Ethics and Justice.
The dictionary defines Ethics as: "The study of the general nature of
morals and of the specific moral choices to be made by the individual in
his relationship with others."
HCOB 12.7.80R - 2 -
Rev. 5.11.82
The same dictionary defines Justice as: "Conformity to moral right,
or to reason, truth or fact," or: "The administration of law."
As you can see, these terms have become confused.
All philosophies from time immemorial have involved themselves with
these subjects. And they never solved them.
That they have been solved in Dianetics and Scientology is a
breakthrough of magnitude. The solution lay, first, in their separation.
From there it could go forward to a workable technology for each.
ETHICS consists simply of the actions an individual takes on himself.
It is a personal thing. When one is ethical or "has his ethics in" it is by
his own determinism and is done by himself.
JUSTICE is the action taken on the individual by the group when he
fails to take these actions himself.
HISTORY
These subjects are, actually, the basis of all philosophy. But in any
study of the history of philosophy it is plain that they have puzzled
philosophers for a long time.
The early Greek followers of Pythagoras (Greek philosopher of the
sixth century B.C.) tried to apply their mathematical theories to the
subject of human conduct and Ethics. Some time later, Socrates (Greek
philosopher and teacher 470? - 399 B.C.) tackled the subject. He
demonstrated that all those who were claiming to show people how to live
were unable to defend their views or even define the terms they were using.
He argued that we must know what courage, and justice, law and government
are before we can be brave or good citizens or just or good rulers. This
was fine but he then refused to provide definitions. He said that all sin
was ignorance but did not take the necessary actions to rid Man of his
ignorance.
Socrates' pupil, Plato (Greek philosopher, 427? - 347 B.C.) adhered to
his master's theories but insisted that these definitions could only be
defined by pure reason. This meant that one had to isolate oneself from
life in some ivory tower and figure it all out-not very useful to the man
in the street.
Aristotle (Greek philosopher 384 - 322 B.C.) also got involved with
Ethics. He explained unethical behavior by saying that Man's rationality
became overruled by his desire.
This chain continued down the ages. Philosopher after philosopher
tried to resolve the subjects of Ethics and Justice.
Unfortunately, until now, there has been no workable solution, as
evidenced by the declining ethical level of society.
So you see it is no small breakthrough that has been made in this
subject in the last 80 years or so. We have defined the terms, which
Socrates omitted to do, and we have a workable technology that anyone can
use to help get himself out of the mud. The natural laws behind this
subject have been found and made available for all to use.
HCOB 12.7.80R - 3 -
Rev. 5.11.82
ETHICS
Ethics is so native to the individual that when it goes off the rails
he will always seek to overcome his own lack of Ethics.
He knows he has an Ethics blind spot the moment he develops it. At
that moment he starts trying to put Ethics in on himself and, to the degree
that he can envision long-term survival concepts, he may be successful,
even though lacking the actual tech of Ethics.
All too often, however, the bank is triggered by an out-ethics
situation and, if the individual has no tech with which to handle it
analytically, his "handling" is to mock up motivators. In other words, he
tends to believe or pretend that something was done to him that prompted or
justified his out-ethics action, and at that point he starts down hill.
It is not his attempt to get his Ethics in that does him in. It is the
automaticity of the bank which kicks in on him and his use of a bank
mechanism at this point which sends him down the chute. When that happens,
nobody puts him down the chute harder, really, than he does himself.
And, once on the way down, without the basic technology of Ethics he
has no way of climbing back up the chute-he just caves himself in directly
and deliberately. And even though he has a lot of complexities in his life,
and he has other people doing him in, it all starts with his lack of
knowledge of thy technology of Ethics.
This, basically, is one of the primary tools he uses to dig himself
out.
BASIC NATURE OF MAN
No matter how criminal an individual is, he will be trying, one way or
another, to put Ethics in on himself.
This explains why Hitler invited the world to destroy Germany. He had
the whole war won before September, 1939, before he declared war. The
allies were giving him everything he wanted; he had one of the finest
intelligence organizations that ever walked; he had Germany well on the way
to getting her colonies back and the idiot declared war! And he just caved
himself and Germany right in. His brilliance was going at a mad rate in one
direction and his native sense of Ethics was causing him to cave himself in
at a mad rate in the other direction.
The individual who lacks any Ethics technology is unable to put in
Ethics on himself and restrain himself from contra-survival actions so he
caves himself in. And the individual is not going to come alive unless he
gets hold of the basic tech of Ethics and applies it to himself and others.
He may find it a little unpalatable at first, but when you're dying of
malaria you don't usually complain about the taste of the quinine: you may
not like it, but you sure drink it.
JUSTICE
When the individual fails to put in his own Ethics, the group takes
action against him and this is called Justice.
HCOB 12.7.80R - 4 -
Rev. 5.11.82
I have found that Man cannot be trusted with Justice. The truth is,
Man cannot really be trusted with "punishment". With it he does not really
seek discipline, he wreaks injustice. He dramatizes his inability to get
his own Ethics in by trying to get others to get their Ethics in: I invite
you to examine what laughingly passes for "Justice" in our current society.
Many governments are so touchy about their divine rightness in judicial
matters that you hardly open your mouth before they burst into uncontrolled
violence. Getting into police hands is a catastrophe in its own right in
many places, even when one is merely the plaintiff, much less the accused.
Thus, social disturbance is at maximum in such areas.
When the tech of Ethics isn't known, Justice becomes an end-all in
itself. And that just degenerates into a sadism. Governments, because they
don't understand Ethics, have "Ethics Committees" but these are all worded
in the framework of Justice. They are even violating the derivation of the
word Ethics. They write Justice over into Ethics continuously with medical
ethics committees, psychological ethics committees, Congressional
committees, etc. These are all on the basis of Justice because they don't
really know what Ethics is. They call it Ethics but they initiate Justice
actions and they punish people and make it harder for them to get their own
Ethics in.
Proper Justice is expected and has definite use. When a state of
discipline does not exist the whole group caves in. It has been noted
continually that the failure of a group began with a lack of or loss of
discipline. Without it the group and its members die. But you must
understand Ethics and Justice.
The individual can be trusted with Ethics, and when he is taught to
put his own Ethics in, Justice no longer becomes the all-important subject
that it is made out to be.
BREAKTHROUGH
The breakthrough in Scientology is that we do have the basic
technology of Ethics. For the first time Man can learn how to put his own
Ethics in and climb back up the chute.
This is a brand new discovery; before Scientology it had never before
seen the light of day, anywhere. It marks a turning point in the history of
philosophy. The individual can learn this technology, learn to apply it to
his life and can then put his own Ethics in, change conditions and start
heading upwards toward survival under his own steam.
I hope you will learn to use this technology very well for your own
sake, for the sake of those around you and for the sake of the future of
this culture as a whole.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Adopted as Official
Church Policy by the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
INTERNATIONAL
CSI:LRH:dr:iw
Copyright $c 1980, 1982
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Adopted as Official
Church Policy by the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
INTERNATIONAL
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=30/6/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=1
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
STUDENT REHABILITATION
LIST WORDS
Type = 12
iDate=15/11/74
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Remimeo
C/Ses
Auditors
Tech/Qual
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 30 JUNE 1980R
Remimeo
C/Ses (Cancels BTB 15 November 1974 CLEARING LIST WORDS IN
Auditors SCIENTOLOGY STUDENT REHABILITATION LIST which did not
Tech/Qual give the references to be high crimed before clearing
words on a pc and did not give the type of word clearing
to be used.)
(Revisions in Script)
STUDENT REHABILITATION
LIST WORDS
REFERENCES:
HCO PL 4 Apr 72R III ETHICS AND STUDY TECH
Rev. 21.6.75
HCOB 8 Jul 74R I Word Clearing Series 52R,
Rev. 24.7.74 CLEAR TO F/N
HCOB 21 Jun 72 I Word Clearing Series 38,
METHOD 5
HCOB 9 Aug 78 II CLEARING COMMANDS
HCOB 17 Jul 79 I Word Clearing Series 64,
THE MISUNDERSTOOD WORD DEFINED
These are the words from HCOB 15 Nov 74 STUDENT REHABILITATION LIST.
These words should be cleared on the student (as the pc) before the
list is actually assessed on him per HCOB 9 Aug 78 Iss II CLEARING
COMMANDS.
The auditor must have received high crime checkouts from Qual on the
above references before clearing these words on the student (pc). The
auditor uses Method 5 word clearing when clearing these words on the
student (pc).
These words need only be cleared once in the student's (pc's) auditing
if they were correctly cleared the first time.
The fact of having cleared these words on the pc must be noted in the
appropriate place in the student's pc folder. (Ref. Auditor Admin Series 6R
THE YELLOW SHEET)
WORDS FROM THE STUDENT REHABILITATION LIST
A, about, added, advice, after, alcohol, already, an, and, apply, ARC, ARC
Breaks, at, attestation, audit, auditing, available.
Bad, best, booted.
Came, certificates, checksheet, clear, clearing, coaching, confused,
couldn't, course, courses.
Dictionary, didn't, disagreements, dispute, do, downgraded, drugs, duress.
HCOB 30.6.80R - 2 -
Each, earlier, eat, else, enough, error, ethics, evaluation, eyesight exam
examination.
Failed, false, family, fees, find, flunked, for, forced, from, fully.
Gave, get, getting, given, God.
Had, hadn't, have, having, HCOBs, help.
In, interference, interpreted, interruptions, invalidation.
Kept, knew, known.
Lied, list, live, lots.
Mad, made, master, materials, meter, method, method one, missing,
misunderstood, money.
Never, no, nobody, not.
Of, off, often, on, or, other, out, out-ethics, out-2D, over.
Passed, pay, people, personal, physical, place, players, practical,
prevented, problem, problems, PTS.
Quotas.
Reason, reasons, registrars, restim, resulting, rules.
Scientology, service, set, similar, simply, sleep, some, someone,
something, stated, stopped, student, studied, study, studying, subject,
supervisor.
Taking, tape, tape players, tapes, tech, terms, than, that, the, there,
things, this, to, told, too, trouble, TRs, twin, 2D.
Under, understand, understood, unreal, use.
Verbal, violated.
Was, were, weren't, when, why, with, withhold, word, word clearing, words,
wrong.
You, your.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:SK:bk
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=28/6/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=1
rDate=28/1/81
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
STUDENT CORRECTION LIST WORDS
Type = 12
iDate=1/12/74
Issue=2
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Remimeo
C/Ses
Auditors
Tech/Qual
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 28 JUNE 1980R
Remimeo REVISED 28 JANUARY 1981
C/Ses
Auditors
Tech/Qual
(Cancels BTB 1 Dec 74 Issue II CLEARING LIST WORDS IN
SCIENTOLOGY STUDENT CORRECTION LIST which did not include the new words
from the revised Student Correction List, HCOB 27 March 72RA.)
(Revised to align with revision of HCOB 27 March 72RB
Re-Revised 28 Jan 81 STUDENT CORRECTION LIST-REVISED.)
(Ellipses indicate deletions.)
STUDENT CORRECTION LIST WORDS
REFERENCES:
HCO PL 4 Apr 72R III ETHICS AND STUDY TECH
Rev. 21.6.75
HCO B 8 Jul 74R I Word Clearing Series 53R
Rev. 24.7.74 CLEAR TO F/N
HCO B 21 Jun 72 I Word Clearing Series 38
METHOD 5
HCO B 9 Aug 78 II CLEARING COMMANDS
HCO B 17 Jul 79 I Word Clearing Series 64
THE MISUNDERSTOOD WORD DEFINED
These are the words from HCOB 27 March 72RB STUDENT CORRECTION LIST.
These words should be cleared on the student (as the pc) before the
list is actually assessed on him per HCOB 9 Aug 78 Issue II CLEARING
COMMANDS.
The auditor must have received high crime checkouts from Qual on the
above references before clearing these words on the student (pc). The
auditor uses Method 5 word clearing when clearing these words on the
student (pc).
This word list need only be cleared once in the student's (pc's)
auditing if it was correctly cleared the first time.
The fact of having cleared this word list on the pc must be noted in
the appropriate place in the student's pc folder. (Ref: Auditor Admin
Series 6R THE YELLOW SHEET)
WORDS FROM THE STUDENT CORRECTION LIST
A, able, about, acceptable, admin, afraid, after, alcohol, all, already,
an, and, another, any, application, ARC Break, ARC Broken, are, as, attest,
available.
Bad, basic, be, been, behavior, being, breaking, but, by.
Can't, case, change, checksheet, class, clay demos, clear, clearing, cold,
committed, completion, complicated, concerning, confused, consideration,
correction, course, courses, cramming.
HCOB 28.6.80R - 2 -
Rev. 28.1.81
Data, decided, define, definitions, demo kit, demos, determinism,
Dianetics, dictionaries, dictionary, did, didn't, diet, difficult,
disagreements, disinterested, distracted, distracting, distraction, do,
doesn't, doing, done, don't, drugs, duress.
Earlier, eat, else, enough, environment, errors, eyesight.
Failed, falsely, falsify, fellow, find, finish, finishing, first, follow,
for, found, frequent, from, fully, fun.
Getting, given, go, gone, gradient, guide.
Had, hadn't, has, hasn't, hat, have, haven't, hear, help, him, hit, hot,
how.
Ill, in, incomplete, interpreted, interruptions, invalidated, invalidation,
is, it.
Kit, know.
Lack, language, learned, life, lighting, like, list, listen, listening, ...
lose.
Made, manual, many, mass, materials, mean, medicine, memory, method, method
one, method three, missing, misunderstood, misunderstoods, mixing, more.
Native, need, never, no, noisy, not.
Of, on, or, other, others, out 2D, over, overt, overts, own.
Pack, packs, part, participate, past, personal, physically, poor,
practical, practice, prerequisites, printed, problem, PTS.
Rather, read, really, reason, refused, ... remember, room, restim, rushed.
Said, same, Scientology, section, seeking, self, set, should, shouldn't,
similar, skipped, small, smoke, some, somebody, someone, something, source,
speak, stats, status, student, student's, students, studies, study,
studying, subject, supervisor, supervisors, supposed, system.
Tapes, targets, tech, terms, the, there, think, this, threat, time, tired,
to, told, too, trick, trouble, troubled, twin, typographical.
Under, understanding, unreal, ... upset, use, using.
Ventilation, verbal.
Want, was, were, weren't, what, when, why, win, with, withheld, withhold,
withholds, without, won't, word, words, work, would, wrong.
You, your, you're, yourself, you've.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Revision assisted by
Research & Technical
Compilations Unit
Accepted by the
BDCSC:LRH:RTC:nc BOARD OF DIRECTORS
Copyright $c 1980, 1981 of the
by L. Ron Hubbard CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED of CALIFORNIA
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Revision assisted by
Research & Technical
Compilations Unit
Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
of CALIFORNIA
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=24/6/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Survival Rundown Series 16
WHO DOES THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN?
Remimeo
Dissem Secs
Distrib Secs
Regges
C/Ses
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 24 JUNE 1980
Remimeo (Also HCO PL 24 June 1980)
Dissem Secs
Distrib Secs
Regges
C/Ses Survival Rundown Series 16
WHO DOES THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN?
Ref: HCOB 1 May 1980 SRD Series 1
THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN
HCOB 4 May 1980 SRD Series 4
C/S Series 110 C/SING THE SURVIVAL
RUNDOWN
HCOB 23 Dec 1971 C/S Series 73
THE NO-INTERFERENCE AREA
HCOB 12 May 1980 DRUGS AND OBJECTIVE PROCESSES
The Survival Rundown has been especially developed as the next step
after the Purification Rundown.
The Survival Rundown results in a person feeling in present time and
able to control and put order into the environment. He will have greatly
increased survival potential.
The majority of pcs do need the Survival Rundown and they should get
it at an appropriate place in their program; the best time being
immediately following the Purification Rundown. The C/S adjudicates this of
course with full use of the C/S Series and the Survival RD Series.
The only prerequisite for the Survival RD is the Purification RD.
WHO WOULD NOT BE PUT ON THE SURVIVAL RD?
Any pc who is on or between R6EW, Clearing Course, OT I, OT II or OT
III, or who has received NED for OTs auditing would not be put onto the
Survival Rundown.
The above are the only Grade Chart points where a pc can not receive
the Survival RD.
(Note: The Survival RD has not yet been piloted on any pcs who are on
or have completed NED for OTs so such pcs are not to be C/Sed onto the
Survival RD at this time.)
The Survival Rundown is the key to increased survival for your public,
staff and the org.
Most importantly, it is a big step on the Bridge and it opens the way
to mental and spiritual processing with more gains than ever before.
Flood people onto the Survival Rundown. Your org will boom with this
rundown. It changes lives!
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:MM:bk
Copyright $c 1980 As assisted by
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Tech Project I/C
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
As assisted by
Tech Project I/C
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=23/6/80
Volnum=0
Issue=2
Rev=1
rDate=15/9/80
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
WORD CLEARING CORRECTION
LIST WORDS
Type = 12
iDate=9/4/72
Issue=4
Rev=1
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Remimeo
C/Ses
Auditors
Tech/Qual
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Remimeo
C/Ses HCO BULLETIN OF 23 JUNE 1980R
Auditors ISSUE II
Tech/Qual REVISED 15 SEPTEMBER 1980
(Cancels BTB 9 Apr 72R IV CLEARING LIST WORDS IN SCIENTOLOGY WORD
CLEARING CORRECTION LIST as it did not include the new words from the
revised WCCL, HCOB 27 Nov 78 WORD CLEARING CORRECTION LIST.)
(Revisions in Script)
WORD CLEARING CORRECTION
LIST WORDS
REFERENCES:
HCO PL 4 Apr 72R III ETHICS AND STUDY TECH
Rev. 21.6.75
HCOB 8 Jul 74R I CLEAR TO F/N
HCOB 21 Jun 72 I Word Clearing Series 38
METHOD 5
HCOB 9 Aug 78 II CLEARING COMMANDS
HCOB 17 Jul 79 I Word Clearing Series 64
THE MISUNDERSTOOD WORD DEFINED
These are the words from HCOB 27 Nov 78 WORD CLEARING CORRECTION LIST.
These words should be cleared on the pc before the list is actually
assessed on him per HCOB 9 Aug 78 II CLEARING COMMANDS.
The auditor must have received high crime checkouts from Qual on the
above references before clearing these words on a pc. The auditor uses
Method 5 Word Clearing when clearing these words on the pc.
These words need only be cleared once in the pc's auditing if they
were correctly cleared the first time.
The fact of having cleared these words on the pc must be noted in the
appropriate place in the pc's folder. (Ref: Auditor Admin Series 6R THE
YELLOW SHEET)
WORDS FROM THE WORD CLEARING CORRECTION LIST
A, about, action, actual, already, an, any, apply.
Basic, been, being, but, by, by-passed, by-passed charge.
Cans, case, clear, cleared, clearing, confused, couldn't, courses.
Defined, definition, definitions, demo, dictionary, did, didn't, difficult,
distracted, do, done, during.
Earlier, else, enough, evaluation.
Fail, family, feel, find, first, F/N (noun and verb), F/Ns, forgetting,
fully.
Get, good.
Hands, has, have, hear, him, hopeless.
Improper, in, in regard to, indicated, invalidated, invalidation, is it.
HCOB 23.6.80R II - 2 -
Just.
Keep, kept, knew, knowingness.
List, look, look up.
Make, missed, misunderstood, misunderstoods.
Need, not, nothing.
Of, on, or, other, out-ruds, over, overrun, overwhelmed.
Place, protest, protesting, puzzled.
Read, reading, really, regard, rid.
Said, school, Scientology, sentences, should, similar, sized, some,
something, specialized, still, studied, study, subject, subjects.
Technical, tell, than, that, the, them, there, these, tired, to, training,
try.
Understand, understood, unreading, use, using.
Was, wasn't, were, what, when, which, why, win, with, word, word cleared,
word clearer, word clearing, words, wrong.
You, your.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:SK:dr
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=23/6/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=1
rDate=25/2/82
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
CHECKING QUESTIONS ON GRADES PROCESSES
Remimeo
All Auditors
C/Ses
Academy Levels
Tech
Qual
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 23 JUNE 1980R
Remimeo REVISED 25 FEBRUARY 1982
All Auditors
C/Ses CANCELS THE ORIGINAL ISSUE
Academy Levels
Tech
Qual
CHECKING QUESTIONS ON GRADES PROCESSES
Ref: HCOB 12 Jun 70 C/S Series 2 PROGRAMMING OF CASES
HCO PL 17 Jun 70RA URGENT AND IMPORTANT
Re-rev. 27.4.81 TECHNICAL DEGRADES
HCOB 19 Apr 72 C/S Series 77
Reiss. 30.8.80 KSW Series 8 "QUICKIE" DEFINED
HCOB 27 May 70R UNREADING QUESTIONS AND ITEMS
Rev. 3.12.78
HCOB 3 Dec 78 UNREADING FLOWS
HCOB 30 Apr 79R C/S Series 106R
Rev. 31.3.81 Dn Clear Series 12
AUDITING THE DIANETIC CLEAR
(HCOB 23 Jun 80 was not written by myself and was not approved by me.
It falsely stated that an auditor was not to check the processes of a Grade
for a read before running that process. This was called to attention by Snr
C/S Int.)
EACH GRADE PROCESS, THAT IS RUN ON A METER, MUST BE CHECKED FOR A
READ
BEFORE IT IS RUN AND IF NOT READING, IT IS NOT RUN AT THAT TIME.
I believe that the HCOB in question, HCOB 23 Jun 80 has created an
Out Tech situation of pcs being run on unreading processes on Grades,
leading to pc protest, out of sessionness and a tendency on some auditors'
parts to cease to expect a process EP! Though the issue was purported to be
a handling of quickying, it gave rise to quickying.
"NO READS"
A process or question or command can be suppressed or invalidated
which would prevent a read and could cause a miss if these buttons were not
gotten in.
A process that has been started but left unflat (not taken to EP) may
no longer read on the process question but would read on unflat? or
incomplete?
These rules apply to subjective grade processes; they do not apply to
processes that are not fun on a meter such as objective processes or
assists (except for metered assist actions).
It is a Gross Auditing Error to run an unreading Grade process on a
pc; it is also a Gross Auditing Error for an auditor to miss reads on
processes or questions and so not run them. A C/S seeing too many processes
or questions said to be unreading should suspect that the auditor's
metering is out and get it checked in Cramming. If found to be out, order a
retread or retrain of the E-Meter Drills and put the auditor through the
drills given in HCOB 22 Apr 80, ASSESSMENT DRILLS.
HCOB 23.6.80R - 2 -
Rev. 25.2.82
Actually, a process that "doesn't read" stems from three sources: (a)
The process is not charged; (b) The process is invalidated or suppressed or
© Ruds are out in session.
Factually PC interest also plays a part in this.
I think quickying came from (1) Auditors trying to push past the
existing or persistent FNs or (2) Auditors with TRs so poor that the pC was
not in session. Nearly all grade processes and flows will read on PCs in
that grade chart area unless the above two conditions are present.
One also doesn't make a big production of checking as it distracts the
PC. There is a system, one of many, one can use. One can say, "the next
process is (state wording of the auditing question)" and see if it reads.
This does not take more than a glance. If no read but, more likely, if it
isn't charged, an FN or smoothly null needle, one hardly pauses and one
adds "but are you interested in it?" PC will consider it and if not charged
and PC in session, it will FN or FN more widely.
If charged, the PC would ordinarily put his attention on it and you'd
get a fall or just a stopped FN followed by a fall on the interest part of
the question.
It takes pretty smooth auditing to do this and not miss. So if in
doubt, one can again check the question. But never hound or harass a PC
about it. Inexpert checking questions for read can result in a harassed PC
and drive him out of session so this auditing action, like any other,
requires smooth auditing.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:dm:bk
Copyright $c 1980, 1982
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=22/6/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
INT RD CORRECTION LIST WORDS
Type = 12
iDate=9/4/72
Issue=10
Rev=1
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Remimeo
C/Ses
Auditors
Tech/Qua
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 22 JUNE 1980
Remimeo
C/Ses (Cancels BTB 9 April 1972R Issue X CLEARING LIST WORDS
Auditors IN SCIENTOLOGY-INT RUNDOWN CORRECTION LIST REVISED
Tech/Qua as it did not include the new words from the revised Int
Rundown Correction List, HCOB 29 October 1971RA INT RUNDOWN
CORRECTION LIST REVISED.)
INT RD CORRECTION LIST WORDS
REFERENCES:
HCO PL 4 Apr 72R III ETHICS AND STUDY TECH
HCOB 8 Jul 74R I CLEAR TO F/N
HCOB 21 Jun 72 I METHOD 5
HCOB 9 Aug 78 II CLEARING COMMANDS
HCOB 17 Jul 79 I W/C Series 64
THE MISUNDERSTOOD WORD DEFINED
These are the words from HCOB 29 Oct 71RA Interiorization Rundown
Series 12, INT RUNDOWN CORRECTION LIST REVISED.
The auditor must have received high crime checkouts from Qual on the
above references before clearing these words on a pc. The auditor uses
Method 5 Word Clearing when clearing these words on the pc.
These words need only be cleared once in the pc's auditing if they
were correctly cleared the first time.
The fact of having cleared these words on the pc must be noted in the
appropriate place in the pc's folder. (Ref: Auditor Admin Series 6R, THE
YELLOW SHEET.)
WORDS FROM INT RD CORRECTION LIST
A, about, action, after, against, afraid, already, an, and, another,
anything, anywhere, ARC Break, are, assessed, assessment, audited, auditor.
Back, badly, be, because, been, begin, being, being in, being stuck in,
body, button, by-passed, by-passed charge.
Can't, cause, caused, chain, charge, clear, cleared, concept, concerned,
concerning, confused, continues, correction.
Damage, Dianetic, Dianetics, did, didn't, different, do, done, during.
Earlier, else, End of Endless Int Repair RD, engram, engrams, errors,
exterior.
Failed, feel, find, first, flat, flow, for.
Get, go, going, going in.
Had, handling, has, have.
If, in, incident, instead, Int, Int RD, interiorization, into, is, it,
item.
HCOB 22.6.80 - 2 -
Jails, just.
Leaving, left, letting, list, long.
Misrun, misunderstood, move.
Neglected, no, not.
Of, okay, on, one, or, other, others, over, overdone, overrepaired,
overrun, overt, out, out list.
Part, past, perfectly, place, post, practice, problem, push.
Read, recall, religion, repair, reviewed, run, rundown, running.
Scientology, secondary, several, should, some, something, stuck, subject.
Than, that, the, there, things, thinking, this, time, times, to, trying.
Unflat, understand, unnecessary.
Wanted, was, we, were, what, when, who, will, win, with, withhold, word,
wording, worried, would, wrong.
You, your, yourself.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
CMO Mission: Issues
Revision 2nd
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:DO:dr
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
CMO Mission: Issues
Revision 2nd
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=20/6/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
L1C WORD LIST
Type = 12
iDate=9/4/72
Issue=6
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Remimeo
C/Ses
Auditors
Tech/Qual
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 20 JUNE 1980
Remimeo
C/Ses (Cancels BTB 9 April 1972 Issue VI which did not give
Auditors the references to be high crimed before clearing words on
Tech/Qual a pc and did not give the type of word clearing to be used.)
L1C WORD LIST
REFERENCES:
HCO PL 4 Apr 72R III ETHICS AND STUDY TECH
HCOB 8 Jul 74R I CLEAR TO F/N
HCOB 21 Jun 72 I METHOD 5
HCOB 9 Aug 78 II CLEARING COMMANDS
HCOB 17 Jul 79 I W/C Series 64
THE MISUNDERSTOOD WORD DEFINED
These are the words from HCOB 19 March 1971 LIST-1-C L1C.
These words should be cleared on the pc before the L1C is actually
assessed per HCOB 9 Aug 78 Issue II CLEARING COMMANDS.
The auditor must have received high crime checkouts from Qual on the
above references before clearing these words on a pc. The auditor uses
Method 5 Word Clearing when clearing these words on the pc.
This word list need only be cleared once in the pc's auditing if it
was correctly cleared the first time.
The fact of having cleared this word list on the pc must be noted in
the appropriate place in the pc's folder. (Ref. Auditor Admin Series 6R THE
YELLOW SHEET.)
WORDS FROM THE L1C
A, acknowledged, action, actions, affinity, an, attention, auditing.
Been, before.
Command, communication, confusing, continued, cut.
Data, decision, did, disappointed, done.
Earlier, emotion, engram, error, evaluated, exterior.
For.
Given, go, goal, grasped.
Has, have, haven't, help.
Ignored, in, incident, interrupted, invalidated.
Known.
HCOB 20.6.80 - 2 -
Listing, long.
Made, meaning, missed, misunderstanding, misunderstood.
No, not.
Occurred, of, other, overrun.
Perception, prevented, problem.
Reality, reason, refusal, refused, rejected, rejection, restimulated.
Said, shift, short, similar, situation, some, someone, something, startled,
sudden.
Than, the, there, too.
Understood, unnecessary, upset.
Was, what, withhold, willingness, word, wrong.
You.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:MIR:bk
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Mission Issues Revision
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=19/6/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
THE AUDITOR'S CODE
Type = 21
iDate=14/10/68
Issue=0
Rev=1
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Remimeo
Class VIIIs
All Auditors
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 19 JUNE 1980
Remimeo (Also HCO PL 14 Oct 68RA Rev. 19 Jun 80)
Class VIIIs
All Auditors
CANCELS HCO PL OF 14 OCT 1968R
(Revisions in Script)
THE AUDITOR'S CODE
The pledge of practitioners of pastoral counseling.
Required to be signed by the holders of or before the issuance of
certificates for the certificates to be valid.
I hereby promise as an auditor to follow the Auditor's Code.
1. I promise not to evaluate for the preclear or tell him what he should
think about his case in session.
2. I promise not to invalidate the preclear's case or gains in or out of
session.
3. I promise to administer only Standard Tech to a preclear in the
standard
way.
4. I promise to keep all auditing appointments once made.
5. I promise not to process a preclear who has not had sufficient rest and
who is physically tired.
6. I promise not to process a preclear who is improperly fed or hungry.
7. I promise not to permit a frequent change of auditors.
8. I promise not to sympathize with a preclear but to be effective.
9. I promise not to let the preclear end session on his own determinism
but
to finish off those cycles I have begun.
10. I promise never to walk off from a preclear in session.
11. I promise never to get angry with a preclear in session.
12. I promise to run every major case action to a floating needle.
13. I promise never to run any one action beyond its floating needle.
14. I promise to grant beingness to the preclear in session.
15. I promise not to mix the processes of Scientology with other practices
except when the preclear is physically ill and only medical moans will
serve.
HCOB 19.6.80 - 2 -
16. I promise to maintain Communication with the preclear and not to cut
his
comm or permit him to overrun in session.
17. I promise not to enter comments, expressions or enturbulence into a
session that distract a preclear from his case.
18. I promise to continue to give the preclear the process or auditing
command
when needed in the session.
19. I promise not to let a preclear run a wrongly understood command.
20. I promise not to explain, justify or make excuses in session for any
auditor mistakes whether real or imagined.
21. I promise to estimate the current case state of a preclear only by
Standard Case Supervision data and not to diverge because of some
imagined difference in the case.
22. I promise never to use the secrets of a preclear divulged in session
for
punishment or personal gain.
23. I promise to never falsify worksheets of sessions.
24. I promise to see that any fee received for processing is refunded
following the policies of the Claims Verification Board, if the
preclear is dissatisfied and demands it within three months after the
processing, the only condition being that he may not again be processed or
trained.
25. I promise not to advocate Dianetics or Scientology only to cure illness
or
only to treat the insane, knowing well they were intended for spiritual
gain.
26. I promise to cooperate fully with the authorized organizations of
Dianetics and Scientology in safeguarding the ethical use and practice
of those subjects.
27. I promise to refuse to permit any being to be physically injured,
violently damaged operated on or killed in the name of "mental
treatment".
28. I promise not to permit sexual liberties or violations of patients.
29. I promise to refuse to admit to the ranks of practitioners any being
who
is insane.
Auditor
Date
_________________________
_______________________________________
Witness Place
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:nt:bk for the
Copyright $c 1968, 1976, 1980 BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
by L. Ron Hubbard of the
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=1/6/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Co-Audit Series 5
C/SING FOR CO-AUDITS
Co-Audit Course
Checksheets
Tech
Qual
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 1 JUNE 1980
Co-Audit Course
Checksheets
Tech
Qual Co-Audit Series 5
C/SING FOR CO-AUDITS
Ref: HCOB 2 Oct 71, C/S Series 63
C/SING FOR NEW AUDITORS OR VETERANS
HCOB 16 Jun 70, C/S Series 6
WHAT THE C/S IS DOING
HCOB 7 Apr 60, A NEW SUMMARY OF AUDITING
The whole of the C/S Series applies, of course, in C/Sing for co-
audits. But most particularly, where co-audits are involved, the C/S must
remember that he is more often than not C/Sing for green, inexperienced
auditors or, in the case of some co-audits, even non-tech trained auditors
who are co-auditing on a read-it, drill-it, do-it basis. And the pc who is
being audited by this new, untried auditor will himself be, more than
likely, a new, inexperienced pc.
This calls for a gradient approach, both from the standpoint of C/Sing
for the case and C/Sing for the inexperienced auditor.
The purpose of a co-audit is to get people up the Grade Chart. Any
C/Sing is always done from that viewpoint.
To accomplish this best on a co-audit, C/Ses are kept simple and
within the do-ability of the pc and the auditor. The guidelines here are
well laid out in HCOB 2 Oct 71, C/S Series 63, C/SING FOR NEW AUDITORS OR
VETERANS, and the wise Co-Audit C/S will become very familiar with the
cases and the abilities of his co-auditors and will use those guidelines
accordingly.
Because of these factors, the Co-Audit C/S will need to keep even a
sharper eye out than usual for any of the things that can come up or go
awry in a session and cut across the progress of the case. The main things
to watch out for and get handled when they do occur are:
1. Pc going exterior. (Int Rundown Series)
2. Unhandled PTSness. (HCOB 31 Dec 78, Iss II, OUTLINE OF PTS HANDLING,
and all of its referenced issues)
3. Unhandled Repair. (HCOB 31 Mar 80, C/S Series 109, CONDITIONAL STEP
FOLLOWING THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN)
4. Previous incomplete processing needing completion. (C/S Series 109)
5. Mutual Out Ruds/Mutual Out Ethics. (HCOB 17 Feb 74, C/S Series 91,
MUTUAL OUT RUDS, and HCOB 21 Aug 79, TWINNING) 6. Overrun/Underrun.
(HCOB 19 Apr 72, C/S Series 77, "QUICKIE" DEFINED, and HCOB 21 Mar 74, END
PHENOMENA)
HCOB 1.6.80 - 2 -
The point here is not so much that these are more likely to occur on a
co-audit than elsewhere (though this may be true in some cases). The point
is that when they do occur an inexperienced co-auditor is less likely to be
aware of them or report them. And the pc himself is less likely to know
what is going on.
C/Sing for a co-audit is not a delicate business. Co-auditors are
usually eager to jump in with both feet and get the job done.
It's not a delicate business, but it is a matter of using a gradient
approach. When the right gradient approach is used there's a lot of
satisfaction for a C/S in bringing a co-audit team on up the line and
winning, both as pcs and co-auditors.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:bk
Copyright $c 1980
By L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=31/5/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Co-Audit Series 4
STAFF CO-AUDITS
All Orgs
All Staff & Execs
Qual Sec
SSO
Co-Audits
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 31 MAY 1980
All Orgs
All Staff & Execs
Qual Sec
SSO Co-Audit Series 4
Co-Audits
STAFF CO-AUDITS
(Refs: HCO PL 20 Jul 70 CASES AND MORALE OF STAFF
Reiss. 26.12.79
HCO PL 14 Dec 70 Personnel Series 14 Org Series 10
GROUP SANITY
HCO PL 17 Jun 63 STAFF CLEARING PROGRAM
HCO PL 21 Oct AD12 AUDITING SUPERVISOR, AND
AUDITING INSTRUCTORS, DUTIES OF
HCOB 7 Apr 60 A NEW SUMMARY OF AUDITING
HCOB 21 Aug 79 TWINNING
HCO PL 22 May 76 STAFF SECTION OFFICER HAT
HCO PL 30 Nov 76R ONLY SSO CAN TIP
Rev. 25.4.79
HCO PL 29 Oct 79 SSO RESPONSIBILITY FOR STANDARD
STAFF COURSES
HCO PL 23 Jul AD19 AUDITOR ASSIGNMENT POLICIES
CO-AUDIT SERIES HCOBs.)
Org staffs are made up of individuals. The better the case shape of
each individual staff member, the more viable the org.
If an org is going to prosper, its staff must be getting audited,
making case gain and actively progressing on the Grade Chart. Failure to
use the tech on one's own staff is one of the fastest ways to allow the
tech to go out or slip into disuse or become alter-ised.
Staff need a reality on the tech they work so hard to deliver-not just
those technically trained who do the actual delivery but those working in
admin capacities as well.
And quite apart from the fact that inattention to staff cases will
result in a failing org and dwindling viability and potential, is the fact
that staff members work hard and deserve the benefit of the tech they are
handling and making available to others.
How does an org get all its staff audited? Every org should have Staff
Staff Auditors as provided on the org board. Not all orgs do have them, but
where they do these auditors serve a needed function and are valuable. The
truth is, although they should, small orgs often don't have such an auditor
and in a large org such auditors are hard put to handle all staff cases on
a regular basis.
So how does an org get all its staff audited? The answer of course is
STAFF CO-AUDITS.
We have had co-audit tech since the early days and it's high time we
revitalized it and put it into active use as one of an org's standard
functions.
To create an immediate upsurge in staff morale, activity level and
enthusiasm all you have to do is establish a going Staff Co-Audit. It takes
only some good planning and a bit of
HCOB 31.5.80 - 2 -
determination. Among staff the need and the want and the interest is there.
If you want to prove it just fan that interest a bit and watch what
happens!
HOW TO ORGANIZE A STAFF CO-AUDIT
Qual is responsible for staff cases. A Staff Co-Audit would be
organized and set up in Qual, in the Department of Enhancement under the
SSO.
The first actions of the Qual Sec and SSO would be to work out the
bare bones essentials for a co-audit and get an I/C selected.
An org of any size will require a Co-Audit I/C, and if the I/C is also
going to be the Co-Audit Supervisor he had better be someone who knows how
to audit and can run good 8-C or he won't be able to handle the entire
scene or individual co-audit teams when they run into trouble.
In a small org where there's no-one available to be the Co-Audit I/C,
the SSO holds the hat from above. And if there's no SSO posted, it's the
responsibility of the Qual Sec to get a Staff Co-Audit set up and running.
But regardless of who does the initial planning and set up, there's
got to be a trained Co-Audit Supervisor in attendance at all scheduled co-
audit times who is actively running the show. And he will need at least
some part time help.
A Staff Co-Audit doesn't eliminate the need for Staff Staff Auditors.
Staff Staff Auditors are very much a part of the Qual org board, and even
with a staff co-audit running they would still need to handle individual
cases and would also be used as Review auditors for the co-audit.
If the org has no staff C/S, C/Ses will need to be set up. These can
be assigned from trained staff who volunteer or are selected to help out on
this basis after production hours.
Get some space allocated, arrange for any needed furniture, chairs,
tables, adequate paper, etc., and most important of all-the needed tech
materials. Don't let lack of equipment be a hug. In one successful co-audit
a couple of years ago and in early co-audits as well, staff audited with a
meter on one knee and a clipboard on the other! Not ideal but where it's
necessary it can be done and simply adds to the esprit de corps. It's a
matter of what it takes to get the job done.
Set up a schedule that will accommodate the majority oi staff. Two
scheduled co-audit periods may have to be arranged so as not to disrupt
regular production. This would be done in liaison with other execs.
As soon as the general plan is established, hold a rousing good staff
muster and let the entire staff know what's going to be done. The Staff Co-
Audit is for everyone-the trained and the untrained. The original maxim
holds true-any two people can do it. The untrained will simply need tighter
guidance in order to carry it off. Get some real enthusiasm generated and
you'll find you have no shortage of volunteers to help with the initial set
up. The way to get a staff co-audit rolling is to make it an all-hands
action.
HCOB 31.5.80 - 3 -
The rest of the planning and execution takes shape from there. It
includes:
1. Review of all staff cases and staff folders made ready for C/Sing. Get
the
staff cases sorted out as to category, as covered in HCO PL 20 Jul 70,
CASES AND MORALE OF STAFF. Where staff cases have been neglected you may
need a corps of FESers to begin with to get all the folders FESed so the
C/S can operate with full data.
2. Get the folders programmed and C/Sed.
3. Arrange that any staff who need medical treatment, PTS handling or
Ethics
handling are handled on a priority basis so they can get onto the co-
audit as soon as possible. This gets done simultaneously with getting the
co-audit into operation.
4. While all this is going on, the Co-Audit I/C or the Co-Audit Supervisor
or
both get themselves trained up and boned up on all the tech on co-
audits and how to run them.
5. Set up the necessary admin lines and lines for folders to and from the
C/S.
6. Get the staff who can start immediately, twinned up according to
comparable training and case level per HCO PL 23 Jul AD19, AUDITOR
ASSIGNMENT POLICIES, HCOB 21 Dec 79, C/S Series 107, AUDITOR ASSIGNMENT
POLICIES, etc., and HCOB 21 Aug 79 TWINNING. Note: It's not ideal to twin
up family members or marital teams, if it can be arranged otherwise. The
possibility of mutual out ruds between such teams is greater as well as the
possibility of overts or withholds from each other, which may result in
unnecessary difficulty on the co-audit. Twin them up with other partners
and it will all go more smoothly. Additionally, don't break up any
successful existing co-audit teams when setting up the co-audit. Keep these
maintained.
7. START the staff co-audit and keep it rolling.
WHAT IS RUN ON A STAFF CO-AUDIT
All programming and C/Sing of cases for a staff co-audit is done
against the Grade Chart.
On a staff co-audit you have two main zones of activity-co-auditing
for the trained and the untrained.
In the first group you'll have staff with different levels of training
and in both groups you'll have different levels of cases.
Where twinning is concerned, the two groups are handled separately.
Those in the trained group are twinned with others in the trained
group, taking training and processing levels into consideration.
Those in the untrained group are twinned with others in the untrained
group, taking case levels and study speed into consideration.
HCOB 31.5.80 - 4 -
From there it's a matter of what needs to be run to get the person on
or up the Grade Chart.
While the co-auditing is all done in one room it will save wear and
tear on the Co-Audit Sup to have the trained staff seated together in one
section and the untrained staff together in another section nearby. This
way he can more easily keep an eye on the new green auditors and pcs who
will require the most attention. But he does not neglect one group for the
other. (It is not mandatory for professionally trained co-auditors to be
closely supervised in the class room while they are in session. They
normally can be trusted to audit in a separate auditing room if the pc
prefers this to the classroom co-auditing set up.)
Ideally, all staff would do:
1. The Purification Rundown (not an audited action)
2. The Survival Rundown (which is designed for co-audit purposes for
the
trained and untrained alike, as well as for use in the HGC) and
3. The Drug Rundown
in that sequence, if they have not already completed those steps. This is a
matter for the C/S to determine according to individual cases.
Those who are complete on the above opening steps for all cases would
then be programmed for their next Grade Chart action, whatever that might
be.
TRAINED CO-AUDITORS: Trained personnel are expected to apply the skills of
the highest level they were trained in if that's what is required for the
pc. Some of them may need redrilling on certain actions or study of new
bulletins that have come out since they were trained.
When a team of trained staff co-auditors have completed all the
processes of one Grade on each other at the level of any formal training
they've had, they can move into auditing at the next higher level, either
taking it on a read-it, drill-it, do-it basis or getting fully trained on
that level before resuming their co-audit.
UNTRAINED CO-AUDITORS: Co-auditing on the Survival Rundown provides an
excellent starting point for new, beginning co-auditors.
Should you have an untrained staff member who has already had full
Objectives as a pc he could still train on the Survival Rundown steps and
deliver them to his twin, and his twin would give him any Survival RD steps
he hadn't previously received.
If you have an untrained team where both have had full Objectives, or
full Objectives and Drug Rundowns, they'd fill in any new or omitted steps
and would be programmed for their next Grade Chart actions. You'd need to
give these untrained staff co-auditors some basic definitions to begin with-
auditor, preclear, session, etc. Then teach them the comm cycle and get
them through Co-Audit TRs. Do not make it a long runway. You want them in
there auditing and they can be polished up as they go.
Muzzled auditing is the keynote for the beginning co-auditor. It is
covered fully in the HCOBs listed in Co-Audit Series 1 and the various
tapes on co-audits given on the Co-Audit Supervisor Course Checksheet (HCO
PL 2 Jun 80). It is simple enough for any co-auditor to do and it lends
itself perfectly to the early Grade Chart processes as well.
HCOB 31.5.80 - 5 -
If the untrained co-auditor remains muzzled there's very little
trouble he can get into. But he will hit some trouble spots somewhere along
the line and he'll need to be bailed out by the Co-Audit Supervisor, set
straight and given a boost to keep going. The attitude is always that he
can do it, because the truth of the matter is that he can and he will make
it, taken up on the right gradient approach.
Untrained staff co-audit teams who are kept at it can get each other
through the Survival Rundown, Drug Rundown, NED and the Grades, training
and auditing on a read-it, drill-it, do-it basis as they go. They won't be
fully classed auditors but the experience will be invaluable and the gains
tremendous and it wouldn't take much to get them classified after that.
Expanded Dianetics and power processing would only be co-audited by
auditors fully trained and classed to deliver the tech of those processes.
RESPONSIBILITY OF CO-AUDITORS: The entirety of the TWINNING HCOB (HCOB 21
Aug 79) applies to co-audit teams. That and The Auditor's Code make up the
co-auditor's Bible. Co-auditors are responsible for getting each other
through. They do twin checkouts, find and handle each other's
misunderstoods, drill their materials until they're confident, and deliver
the tech to each other. For the untrained, it's a read-it, drill-it, do-it
operation and it makes auditors. A co-auditor is responsible for the
quality of the auditing he gives and gets. You'll find most staff eager to
meet the challenge.
HOW A STAFF CO-AUDIT IS RUN
All the tech on how to run a co-audit in HCOB 29 May 80, Co-Audit
Series 2, and other Co-Audit HCOBs applies to a Staff Co-Audit.
The I/C and any Staff Co-Audit Supervisor must know this tech well and
keep it fully applied.
Put a good auditor onto handling the Staff Co-Audit because he'll need
to be able to handle all levels of cases, bail any of them out at any time,
and run good 8-C on the entire room.
He's got to be able to jump in and handle ruds if needed, spot bad
indicators, find and indicate bypassed charge, assess lists, give D of P
interviews, correct co-auditors and keep all the sessions moving. He's
alert and on the move, with an eye on every session in progress:
For a co-audit of any size (and most staff co-audits will be large)
he'll need an assistant. The assistant can be assigned to the post or
arranged for on a volunteer basis, but the Co-Audit Supervisor should be
given back-up he can rely on.
Running a large co-audit in a common room can be a noisy business, and
there will be distraction for pc and auditor alike. But it can be done,
preclears become used to it, auditing does get delivered, and it makes a
far better auditor when one learns his trade under co-audit circumstances.
Don't expect it all to go smoothly, because it won't. There's plenty
of randomity on any co-audit but there's apt to be more of it on a staff co-
audit because of the different case and training levels involved. The Co-
Audit Supervisor holds it all together and keeps the co-auditors auditing.
HCOB 31.5.80 - 6 -
Staff Co-Audits are tightly scheduled and tightly controlled. There's
a roll book kept, with a roll call for each scheduled period, graphs are
kept, and all points of What Is A Course must be well in.
With the twinning system firmly established it's not likely a Co-Audit
MAA would be needed, but one can be assigned if it becomes necessary.
Correction is done by pink sheets which are handled in the Co-Audit
room. Should that not always be workable, the person could be sent to the
Cramming Officer. But he must be handled swiftly so co-auditing is not held
up.
If a staff member simply is not making gains on the co-audit, even
with debugging from the Co-Audit Supervisor, he would be turned over to a
Staff Staff Auditor, an Intern or a Review auditor for auditing and
returned to the co-audit when he could make it.
Red tags on a staff co-audit, as in any other auditing, must be
handled within 24 hours.
The Co-Audit Supervisor rolls up his sleeves and makes sure it all
gets done. And his job is made easier as it goes along by an enthusiastic
and winning staff.
Let's pump some new life into org staffs everywhere with Staff Co-
Audits that get people up the Grade Chart. You have all the tech you need
to do it. Everybody wins, and the boost in staff morale, in staff spirit
and staff effectiveness will be quite astounding.
It's the way to make fully qualified staff members. And you'll be
making auditors at the same time!
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:dr
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=30/5/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Co-Audit Series 3
SUPERVISING CO-AUDIT TRS
Co-Audit Courses
Tech
Qual
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 30 MAY 1980
Co-Audit Courses
Tech
Qual
Co-Audit Series 3
SUPERVISING CO-AUDIT TRS
(Ref: HCOB 24 Dec 79 TRs BASICS RESURRECTED)
Between Dept 17 TRs Courses for brand new people, which are fairly
permissive, and Professional Auditor TRs which result in a smooth, flawless
comm cycle required by a professional auditor, we have Co-Audit TRs.
These are the TRs given to those who are not yet on the professional
training route but who are training to give and receive auditing on a co-
audit basis on rundowns and other co-audits designed for the non-
professional.
They are the same drills, TRs 0-4, that are done on the Professional
TRs Course. They would be preceded by some study of the ARC Triangle and
the Comm Formula. And Co-Audit TRs would also have to include Upper Indoc
TRs. But on Co-Audit TRs, you are not trying to make a pro auditor.
You give the co-auditor a chance to get his feet wet, to get a taste
of what's expected of him on TR drills and to get some experience with
them. You coach and supervise him to some good wins, to where he gets the
hang of it, and you leave it at that.
The way to accomplish this is to start him on an easy gradient and
have him cycle through the TRs, getting a bit stiffer each time he cycles
through.
He would cycle through TRs 0-4 first, until he had achieved some
confidence with those TRs.
He would then go onto Upper Indoc TRs 6-9, cycling through those TRs 6-
9, getting a bit stiffer each time through, until he had achieved some
confidence with TRs 6-9.
If the student is then having trouble and really flubbing on a certain
TR, he might want to spend a bit more time on that one. But do not let him
get stuck on trying to master one TR. The fault will be in an earlier TR or
in the theory study of ARC and communication where something was not
grasped or learned fully enough. So after he's had a go at the TR he finds
difficult and is still not making it, put him back to the beginning to
restudy the basics on ARC and communication and then put him through TRs 0-
4 and 6-9 again. He'll come through it, and it needn't be a long drawn-out
business. In fact, it should not be.
You want him up to being able to apply his TRs passably in a co-audit
session with a terminal of comparable case level and training to his own.
That doesn't mean your coaching or supervision is any less spot on. It
doesn't mean the co-auditor doesn't give it the best he's got, or that he's
permitted to be sloppy or chop up pcs. It does mean that you don't demand
of a person on a non-professional co-audit the same polish, the same
expertise you're going to demand of a student on an auditor training course
who will need to perfect his comm cycle to the point where he can handle
any case, any pc, any situation confidently and with ease.
HCOB 30.5.80 - 2 -
Don't confuse these two levels of TRs. Don't let your professional
auditors-in-training get by with anything less than perfect TRs.
But with the person who's there to bootstrap his way through giving
and getting some auditing any way he can, realize you're not out to make a
professional auditor of him-yet.
Get him to the point where he can handle a session passably. When he's
had some wins at that, when he's discovered just what can be accomplished
in auditing sessions, he'll probably be reaching for professional auditor
training. And that's when you give him professional auditor TRs, done the
hard way.
Keep Co-Audit TRs in their own sphere.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:dr
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=29/5/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Co-audit Series 2
CO-AUDITS: HOW TO RUN THEM
Remimeo
All Orgs
Tech
Qual
Co-audit Supervisor Courses
Supervisors
C/Ses
Survival
Rundown
Sup Checksheet
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 29 MAY 1980
Remimeo
All Orgs
Tech
Qual
Co-audit
Supervisor Courses Co-audit Series 2
Supervisors
C/Ses
Survival CO-AUDITS: HOW TO RUN THEM
Rundown
Sup Checksheet
One of the simple secrets of a successful co-audit is administration.
Without smooth workable lines and hatted terminals on those lines who
really know their business and run a snap and pop operation no org or
mission can expect to succeed with their co-audits.
However, where lines and terminals are in and functioning smoothly,
rapidly, routinely, you'll have a high volume of co-auditors, many released
pcs routing on to their next services, an active, uptone courseroom and new
public banging on the door demanding co-audit courses.
It's a very simple matter to run a highly successful co-audit. The key
to that success is standard administration.
This issue lays out the basic general features of administering co-
audit courses. Any co-audit course, whether it is a specific rundown co-
audit package, a professional co-audit on NED or the Grades or other type
of co-audit, it follows the principles and guidelines laid out herein.
CO-AUDIT REQUIREMENTS
Any fair sized co-audit course, if one is to set it up to succeed,
will require at least:
A Co-audit Supervisor-to supervise co-auditing actions. The co-audit
supervisor must be tech trained to a level which
enables him to handle the materials being co-audited. The level of tech
training required for the co-audit supervisor will vary depending on the
type of co-audit being supervised and the level of the materials being co-
audited.
Course Supervisors-for the theory and practical sections of co-audits
where some preparatory training is done.
In a small org or mission these posts might be covered by one person,
but it is not optimum.
HCOB 29.5.80 - 2 -
Add to this:
A C/S to case supervise the co-auditing sessions.
A Course Admin (who might be able to service more than one co-audit),
and
A Co-audit I/C, who has the overall responsibility for one or more
co-audits.
and one would have an ideal scene, personnel-wise, for a co-audit set up to
deliver in volume and expand.
CO-AUDIT THEORY
(Ref: HCO PL 2 Dec AD12 SUPERVISOR'S STABLE DATA
Reiss. 7.9.67
HCO PL 24 Oct 68 SUPERVISOR KNOW-HOW RUNNING THE CLASS
HCOB 25 Mar 59 HAS CO-AUDIT AND COMM COURSE
HCOB 25 Jun 71R BARRIERS TO STUDY.)
Anyone dealing with the administration and supervision of a co-audit
course must realize first and foremost that it is not a study course. It is
not a study activity. It is a doingness activity. Students are there to do
the actions of auditing, not to learn theory. This must be the supervisors'
orientation towards the course.
The students enrolling on the course are going to be eager beavers and
the Course Supervisors must have the attitude of contributing to the
enthusiasm the students will bring to the course. The students will be
there to move further along the Bridge and this is what the supervisors
must make sure happens.
Auditing, auditing, auditing is what is stressed and that is what is
delivered.
On a professional co-audit, the co-auditors will have been already
trained in the theory and skills of the level they are auditing.
On a rundown co-audit package, co-auditors will often have no previous
technical training. New co-auditors do have to learn what they will be
applying but this has been cut down to the bare bones essentials. They are
given mainly the "How" and only enough of the "Why" to make their co-audit
actions meaningful.
The student is not being trained here to think with his materials. He
is being trained to exactly apply the auditing procedure rat-tat-tat. If
the pc does "A", the auditor is trained to respond with "B". And auditor
and pc alike soon learn that this produces results.
Also, for all their eagerness these students will not necessarily have
done a Student Hat so they will be operating without the benefit of a
command of study tech.
For these reasons, the supervisors must be particularly good at
spotting and handling the manifestations of misunderstood words and
manifestations of skipped gradients. The third barrier to study, lack of
mass, probably won't be as prevalent on a co-audit as on a straight study
course, but will possibly occur on any of the co-audit's theory sections.
Not being trained in study tech, the students will not necessarily be able
to spot these things. The supervisors must be alert for them and handle
them when they occur.
HCOB 29.5.80 - 3 -
TWINNING AND COURSE ATTITUDE
(Ref: HCOB 21 Aug 79 TWINNING
HCO PL 21 Oct 62 AUDITING SUPERVISOR AND
AUDITING INSTRUCTORS, DUTIES OF
HCO PL 23 Jul AD19 AUDITOR ASSIGNMENT POLICIES
HCOB 21 Dec 79 AUDITOR ASSIGNMENT POLICIES,
CRAMMING ASSIGNMENT POLICIES)
HCOB 21 Aug 79 TWINNING is applied to the letter on co-audits. Nowhere
is this piece of tech more applicable than on a co-audit course.
Twinning also enhances the atmosphere the supervisors must establish
on the course.
Co-auditors are twinned according to comparable case and training
level, as covered in the above references. Once twinned they are not
musical chaired.
It is important that the Co-audit Supervisor twin students correctly.
Properly twinned co-auditors will fly along while poorly twinned ones will
generate problems, and where there is a big difference in ability, create
an out-exchange situation in which the faster twin is always coaching the
slower one to get him to catch up.
A Co-audit Course is a team activity. It is a jump-in-and-do-it
activity and the supervisors establish this as the operating tone of the
course from the first day. The activity level of the course is very high.
The Co-audit Course supervisors would exemplify this attitude by being
human dynamos in the courseroom and this would rub off on the students.
The Co-audit supervisor's activity level must be high because he deals
heavily in individual attention to each student, co-auditor and pc. He must
maintain a high level of ARC with each student. He must always be
approachable by the students and stay in good comm with them.
The students will not be perfect students nor will they be free
necessarily of their drug engrams (before their Drug RD) and these points
make individual attention for students a prime supervisor duty.
THE COURSE ROOM/THE CO-AUDITING ROOM
The Course Supervisor(s) and the Co-audit Supervisor(s) have different
and distinct zones of operation on a co-audit course.
Ideally, the course is divided into a study section, a practical
section and a co-audit section. These would exist in separate rooms, each
with its own supervisor(s) in order to provide the best possible study and
auditing environments.
Where the above is not possible, the theory part of the co-audit
course would be done in one room with the theory supervisor and the
practical and co-auditing part of the course would be done in another room,
with the co-audit supervisor.
The theory and practical sections are not put together in the same
room.
(Ref. HCOB 24 Jan 77 TECH CORRECTION ROUND-UP.)
HCOB 29.5.80 - 4 -
The theory course room, practical course room and co-audit course room
would be as near as possible to one another in the org. It is, after all,
one course!
In the co-audit room, the auditing tables would be set up with the
auditors facing outwards from the center of the room and pcs facing inwards
toward the center. In this way, the co-audit supervisor can monitor each
session from the center with a minimum of walking about.
NEW STUDENTS
When a new student enrolls he is greeted and welcomed by the Course
Supervisor (and the Co-audit Supervisor if available). Right then and there
the student gets indoctrinated with the idea that this is a gung-ho
activity, that the students help each other out and take responsibility for
one another. He is also infoed about twinning and given the datum that the
better the auditing he delivers the better will be the auditing he
receives. This is factually true and has been proven over the years. He is
informed that it is to his advantage and best interests to become as
competent an auditor as possible.
BEGINNING MUSTER
The Co-audit Course begins on schedule with a roll call of both the
students on theory and the co-auditor teams (who are mustered in the study
room). Roll call is done this way so that there is only one roll book and
accurate 8-C can be run.
Tight scheduling must be maintained in both theory and co-audit room.
Every minute counts if these students and co-auditors are to get the most
out of their scheduled periods.
Immediately after the initial muster the two teams split up-students
on theory sections to their seats in the study area; co-auditors to their
sessions in the co-audit room.
RUNNING THE COURSE
All Points of HCO PL 16 Mar 71R WHAT IS A COURSE? must be in on any co-
audit course. HCOB/PL 30 Oct 78 COURSES THEIR IDEAL SCENE must also be in.
A standard roll book, routine roll call each period, student graphs, a
progress Board, are all used. The materials that will be needed on the
course must be readily available. (This includes auditor admin materials.)
The course and the co-audit are both run with good stiff control and
ARC.
The Supervisor gets right onto targeting students for the period after
the beginning muster. He then works to ensure every pair of students makes
or surpasses their targets.
If there are a lot of checkouts for him to do, it is best to have a
sign-up sheet at the front of the room. This puts order into the activity
and makes it predictable for the students. On a course of any size at all,
a sign up sheet is a necessity to keep things from falling into chaos.
HCOB 29.5.80 - 5 -
Heaven forbid that the course supervisor would ever be caught at his
desk during course hours! No. He would be right on the floor ensuring the
students studying their course packs were learning the data and that the
students drilling had their drills down cold. He'd be watching for students
manifesting MUs and jumping in to handle when he spotted one.
He gives students studying their packs spot checks to ensure they are
getting what they are studying. If they aren't, he gets the MU found. If he
can't get it located quickly, he sends the student to the course word
clearer or, lacking one or when extensive word clearing is needed, to Qual
for word clearing.
On practical checkouts the Supervisor cannot really afford to turn it
into a coaching session and get stuck with one pair of students at the
expense of everyone else in the class. Either the student being checked out
has the drill down or he doesn't. If he does, great, pass. If he doesn't,
the Supervisor issues the student a pink sheet with the error(s) noted and
what he has to do to correct it so the student will pass on the next
checkout.
Pink sheets are handled in the course/co-audit room, by the student co-
auditor's twin or the supervisor. Only if the student became hopelessly
bogged would he be sent to Cramming.
The supervisor would give every student individual attention and
wouldn't get stuck with any one pair of students for too long a period.
He would be moving from team to team, seeing how they were doing,
checking out their drilling, correcting outnesses when he saw them, always
encouraging them and establishing the reality that they can audit
successfully.
He would use every bit of supervisor tech at his disposal to get
students through their drilling and onto the co-audit. And quickly. The
student reads the material, drills it and he does it. One, two, three.
RUNNING THE CO-AUDIT
The Co-audit Supervisor's job is to ensure that auditing occurs and
that it is successful auditing and that the pcs make the expected gains on
their auditing.
Before the co-audit class starts, when the folders have come out from
the C/S, the Co-audit Sup checks each one, notes what the pc needs and puts
the folder in its proper stack (to Co-auditor, D of P, Declare, Co-audit
Sup handling, Ethics, MO, Review, etc.). He then battle plans his day to
get all the actions done in the proper sequence. For example, he would plan
to do pc "A"'s D of P Interview, get pc "B" to the MO, get pc "C" into
session with his co-auditor, make sure pc "D"'s MAA interview gets done by
the MAA, etc. In this way he assures that the pcs make the fastest progress
possible.
He doesn't want to spend time on these administrative cycles once
there are sessions going, so he gets them planned out before course.
After roll call and muster at the start of class the Co-audit
Supervisor gets right down to 8-Cing co-audit teams into session. He passes
out the folders from the C/S and handles any questions or uncertainties the
auditor may have about the C/S instructions. He does this by reference to
course materials and not by verbal tech. He then arranges the co-audit
teams in the auditing area and gets the sessions going.
HCOB 29.5.80 - 6 -
The Co-audit Sup must budget his time wisely so that maximum co-audit
production can occur. If one twin needed ruds to start a session and
another twin needed a D of P interview but would not be going right into
session after it, the Sup would do the ruds first and get those twins into
session. Then he would do the D of P interview.
Once the sessions have started he is there observing the sessions.
He acts as a monitor for each co-audit session.
He ensures that if it's muzzled co-auditing that is to be done, the co-
auditor remains muzzled giving only command and acknowledgement.
He is there to help out if a co-auditor gets into something he can't
handle. If a co-auditor gets into trouble he alerts the Co-audit Supervisor
by putting his hand out behind him. The Co-audit Supervisor comes over and,
getting in comm with both the auditor and pc, finds out what is happening.
This is done with good TRs and all points of the Auditor's Code in. The Co-
audit Supervisor would put in a good R-factor to the pc about what was
going on and include the pc in any discussion. The pc may say he spotted
why he had done something and that he felt really good at that point and
that would be the bug right there-overrun. In a metered session the Co-
audit Supervisor might have to look over the worksheets to find out where
the session went amiss. Once he finds the goof, he shows the auditor what
to do per Source references, to remedy it and gives the pc another R-factor
about what the auditor will do.
The Co-audit Supervisor has to know his tech cold and be able to
figure out at a glance what is wrong with a session and instruct the co-
auditor (with the proper Source reference) what to do to put it right.
At no time does he criticize or belittle the auditor, or in any way
lower the auditor's altitude in the session. The Co-audit Supervisor
doesn't violate Auditor's Code clause 20 by explaining or justifying any
auditor mistakes to the pc. Nor does he invalidate the pc or evaluate for
the pc and tell him what is going on with his case. The Supervisor steps in
only to isolate the bug, get any BPC found and indicated and get the
auditor to resume the session.
If the cause of the session difficulty isn't apparent the Co-audit
Supervisor would R-factor both pc and auditor that he is going to put the
pc on the meter (if he isn't already) and find what's bugging the session.
He makes it clear that he is not taking over auditing the pc; he is simply
finding the session bug. He takes the auditor's chair and, using the
appropriate prepared correction list for the co-audit materials he assesses
it down to the first read and indicates it to the pc. If the co-auditor is
trained to handle the read, the supervisor instructs the auditor on what to
do to handle it (according to the list instructions) and gets the co-
auditor back in the chair and running the session. (The co-audit supervisor
would keep copies of the appropriate correction lists on his clipboard and
readily available.)
Should the Co-audit Supervisor find that what reads on the list is
something that the co-auditor is not trained to handle but which the
supervisor is qualified to handle (such as an out rud, overrun, etc.), the
supervisor may handle it then and there providing it would not keep him
away from supervising his other co-auditors for too long a period of time.
HCOB 29.5.80 - 7 -
As soon as the pc's BPC is handled to F/N and VGIs the supervisor
turns the session back over to the co-auditor.
If the trouble is something which would require more extensive
handling, such as an Int Rundown or review auditing of some sort or if the
Co-audit Supervisor is not qualified to handle the charge found on the
prepared list, he would indicate the charge found to the pc and R-factor
him that the folder would have to go back to the C/S for instructions. He
would then turn the session back over to the auditor to end it.
REPEATED SESSION BOGS
The Co-audit Supervisor may find that after he has straightened out a
session it bogs again. In this case the Supervisor would probably do the
appropriate correction list Method 5, all the way through, and isolate all
the points that were out. He would then get the co-auditor to handle them
or handle them himself, as described above. In those cases where the Co-
audit Supervisor was not qualified to handle the reads or where handling
was lengthy, he would indicate to the Pc that the folder would have to go
back to the C/S for further instructions and then turn the session back
over to the auditor to end it.
INTERRUPTING SESSIONS
The supervisor must be able to quickly recognize any bad indicator and
must stay on the alert for them. If he notices something going wrong in a
session he doesn't have to wait until the auditor puts out his hand for
help but can gently step in and handle.
The Co-audit Supervisor must, however, give the auditor more than
sufficient opportunity to spot that something is wrong with the session. If
the supervisor interrupts sessions all the time and bypasses the auditor,
the auditor may stop taking responsibility for the pc and the session
because "if anything was wrong with the session the supervisor would jump
in and take over". The auditor might decide he doesn't have to concern
himself with how his pc is doing because "the Supervisor will do all of
that".
The goal in all of this is to get a win for the co-audit team and get
the pc through his auditing.
RULE
The rule to follow in handling session difficulties is:
IF THE CO-AUDITOR CAN HANDLE IT, HE HANDLES IT.
The Co-audit Supervisor always maintains an encouraging attitude, good
TRs and the certainty that the auditor will pull off the session. He never
expects the auditor to do anything above his training level, but he does
expect him to successfully audit what he has been trained to do.
The Co-audit Supervisor never steals the co-auditor's hat, but only
borrows it for very short periods of time and even then doesn't exclude the
co-auditor from the proceedings. He doesn't allow himself to become the
auditor no matter how much the pc may seem to demand it or how rattled the
auditor may appear at having made some goof. With ARC and certainty he
isolates the bug in the session, gets the co-auditor to straighten it out
or straightens it out himself and gets the co-auditor to continue the
session.
HCOB 29.5.80 - 8 -
POINT OF CAUTION
The Co-audit Supervisor must be sure not to become the pc's auditor
completely because then the pc is likely to reactively create more trouble
in order to get further attention.
If at all possible, the co-auditor must handle the session and bring
his pc through it. Coming through a rough session to a win is a tremendous
morale booster and nothing will more raise an auditor's confidence in the
tech and his ability to apply it.
AUDITORS DO NOT LEAVE THEIR PCS
The Co-audit Supervisor never assists an auditor who has left the
auditing chair or walked off from his pc to get the Co-audit Supervisor to
help. Should an auditor leave his pc to seek assistance, the Co-audit
Supervisor firmly, but with ARC tells the auditor to go back to his pc and
put his hand out behind him. The supervisor then assists that auditor as
soon as he possibly can.
Permitting a co-auditor to leave his pc violates the Auditor's Code,
Clause 10, "I promise never to walk off from a preclear in session", is bad
form and adds unnecessary randomity to the co-audit room. Co-auditors must
be R-factored about this procedure before they begin auditing.
SESSION ADMIN
The Co-Audit Supervisor monitors the sessions until the last one is
finished. He gets the auditors to write up their sessions correctly and
legibly for their pcs' folders. The supervisor is responsible for the
quality of the co-auditors' admin and must see that the folder admin is
correctly done.
The Co-audit Supervisor also keeps a Log Book in which each co-auditor
logs the number of hours he audits daily. In this way both the co-auditors
and the Co-audit Supervisor have a ready record of the total number of
hours co-audited for the week.
Any co-auditors who finish their sessions early and have their admin
done and folders turned in before the end of the class period can spend the
remaining course time helping out by drilling with other students or drill
themselves, etc.
When the last session is over for the course period the Co-audit
Supervisor gets the folders over to the C/S office after the co-auditors
have written them up. He would make it a point to attend the end-of-class-
muster and should ensure that his co-auditors are also there.
However, sessions that were still in progress at the end of the course
period would not be ended for these musters, nor would the Co-audit
Supervisor leave any sessions in progress to attend the musters.
END-OF-CLASS MUSTER
This muster is held for the entire class, at the end of the course
period. The purpose of the muster is to share wins and validate the
students who are doing well and auditing. This has the effect of
establishing for the other students that it can be done easily and that
they, too, will make it. The supervisors should never miss an opportunity
to make this point. Students who are auditing should be encouraged to
relate their wins to the class.
HCOB 29.5.80 - 9 -
The Co-audit Supervisor can add to the wins being related by the
students and co-auditors and pcs, and punch up for the students not yet
auditing, the gains they can experience and the fact that they can do it.
Besides boosting group morale-it happens to be the truth.
MUTUAL OUT RUDS
The theory of mutual out ruds is covered in HCOB 17 Feb 74, C/S Series
91 MUTUAL OUT RUDS. Mutual out ruds can stack up on courses and the
supervisors must be sharp in recognizing indicators in a pair of students
with out ruds on the rest of the group, and get them handled.
A co-audit team withdrawn or out of comm with the rest of the class
could be a mutual ARC Break or withholds. A pair going around looking
overly concerned or hunted likely have a mutual problem. Two students
joking or being snide obviously have withholds from the group.
Now these things could also stem from something misunderstood in their
training and the supervisor must detect this and handle by finding the MUs
and straightening out the student's drilling and procedure. Whatever the
cause, the supervisor must not let mutual out ruds go unhandled and the C/S
must order checks for mutual out ruds when necessary to keep a co-audit
team's ruds in on each other and on the group. Failing to do this can cost
dearly in terms of lost gains for pcs.
Mutual out-ethics must be spotted and handled as well.
BLOWY STUDENTS
Students who are blowy or who have blown must be recovered and
handled. They must first be checked for BPC in their sessions and out tech
on their cases and then checked over for MUs and overts and withholds as co-
auditors.
Since they are engaged in both receiving and giving auditing, both
aspects must be thoroughly checked. When the session BPC is found or the
out-Int handled or the O/Ws pulled such blowy feelings will cease.
The blown student's twin is responsible for recovering his course
partner per HCOB 21 Aug 79 TWINNING.
REMEDIES
As mentioned before, students on the co-audit will be eager beavers
but may be unhatted on study tech and will need help over any rough spots
they may encounter in the river.
The supervisors have to know and use their available tools to guide
the student through such impasses.
On the study portion of the course, the Course Supervisor has to be
able to spot a student with an MU a mile off and handle it rapidly and with
ARC. If he cannot locate the MU or bug easily he utilizes the course Word
Clearer. If the student is really plowed in it is a job for Qual. Don't let
the bogged student stagnate on course and don't ever buy any confused "it-
can't-be-dones". We've had co-audits for over 30 years in Dianetics and
Scientology and the Co-audit Courses have always been very, very
successful.
HCOB 29.5.80 - 10 -
The lack of mass phenomena won't be as likely to occur here as on a
theory course because of the amount of practical prior to the auditing
section but it must be handled and remedied quickly if it does occur.
The most frequently observed manifestation on the drills section will
very likely be the skipped gradient. (Ref: HCOB 25 Jun 71R, BARRIERS TO
STUDY) If the student is having trouble with a drill he's come up on too
steep a gradient. The remedy is to cut back to the action or drill where he
was doing well, where he understood it and was not confused. Find out what
he missed right at the tail end of that action or drill, because that's
where he thought he had it down pat and went on and right there he skipped
a gradient. Clear up what he missed at that point and bring him forward
again, on the right gradient, to where he was having trouble. Now he will
be able to do the drill because he truly understands the earlier gradient.
The badly bogged student probably needs a trip to Qual for handling.
In such cases the bogged student's twin goes, too. For one half of a co-
audit team to get so plowed under means it is very likely that something is
awry with the other half of the team. Qual would check both students and
probably have to straighten both out.
The Co-audit Supervisor would mainly be remedying bogged sessions. It
may sometimes occur that the Co-audit Supervisor notices something out with
a session while watching, before the auditor puts out his hand or is even
aware something is wrong. The supervisor wouldn't let the session fall
completely to pieces even though the co-auditor hadn't asked for help.
Neither would he just jump in without giving the co-auditor ample
opportunity to handle the session difficulties himself.
After determining what was wrong, the supervisor would place his hand
gently on the auditor's shoulder and get in comm with the pc and auditor.
Without eval or inval he would instruct the auditor with the appropriate
Source reference, on how to correct the situation.
For example, in a Dianetic Co-audit the supervisor notices that the
pc's TA has been going up and up but the auditor isn't checking for an
earlier incident. The supervisor would place his hand on the auditor's
shoulder gently, R-factor the pc that he wanted to interject something into
the session and then suggest to the auditor that he try checking for an
earlier incident or earlier beginning. Then he sees to it the auditor does
so and gets on with the session.
It is important to lot the co-auditor teams know what the Co-audit
Supervisor's purpose is. He is there to run the class, oversee the sessions
and ensure that the pcs achieve the greatest gains possible from their
auditing. He is not there to run the session or audit the pc. The co-
auditors do the auditing.
RED TAG SESSIONS
In the event of a session that red tags at exams it must be repaired
within 24 hours per C/S Series 86RD, THE RED TAG LINE.
Occasionally a pc will red tag at exams after the session. When this
happens, the supervisor does not take a condemnatory attitude towards the
auditor. And he certainly does not let the auditor rabbit from further
auditing even if the pc must go to Qual for a review session.
HCOB 29.5.80 - 11 -
Normally, the co-audit team will audit on a turnabout basis. On Monday
Joe audits Bill for the first part of the class time and then Bill audits
Joe for the second part of the class period, etc. Or on Monday Joe audits
Bill, on Tuesday Bill audits Joe and so on. In the event of a red-tagged
session the pc would continue to get sessions until repaired and the red
tag removed. It is optimum for all concerned that the co-auditor be
instructed on how to handle the goofed session and repair it himself if
this is feasible. However a review session in Qual may be needed. That is
up to the C/S who should keep in mind that this is not an HGC operation and
that the co-auditor handles his pc except in dire circumstances.
Sending the pc to review would only be done if the session bug
couldn't be spotted in the worksheets or by observation or if a Scientology
auditor was needed to fly the ruds or do a Date/ Locate, handle Int, etc.
If the co-auditor can handle it and it is within the scope of the co-
audit materials, he would take the pc right in the next day and handle it.
He may need to do a bit of drilling on his procedure first but would still
go back in there and handle his pc. This keeps the members of the co-audit
team taking responsibility for each other. Of course, the red tag session
must be repaired in 24 hours no matter who does it. This rule is
invariable.
STATS
The Course Supervisor's stats are:
1. Student Points.
2. Number of students moved through the theory and onto the
auditing
portion of the course that week.
The Co-audit Supervisor has the stats of:
1. Co-audited WDAH (minus 10 hours for every day a red tag session
goes unhandled).
2. Co-audit course completions.
The Co-audit student/auditor has the stats of:
1. Student Points.
2. Number or co-audited WDAHs.
I have given you the essentials for a successful co-audit.
For any co-audit, following the instructions in this issue will give
you a bustling, high morale co-audit course with shiny completions rolling
out the other side and further up the Bridge.
Co-audits throw the gates to the Bridge wide, wide open. They enable
orgs to deliver far more auditing hours to more public and staff than
anyone ever dreamed possible. And it's economical for the orgs and public,
too.
HCOB 29.5.80 - 12 -
Scientology is in an international boom, Supervisor, and I am counting
on you to do your part in keeping the boom going.
While we now have thousands making daily progress up the Bridge, we
have the line-up to handle millions. Millions of Clears and OTs.
Do your job well and we'll have wins all around.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:dr
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=28/5/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Co-Audit Series 1
CO-AUDIT DEFINED
Type = 12
iDate=4/12/76
Issue=1
Rev=1
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Type = 12
iDate=4/12/76
Issue=2
Rev=1
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Type = 12
iDate=4/12/76
Issue=3
Rev=1
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Type = 12
iDate=4/12/76
Issue=4
Rev=1
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Type = 12
iDate=4/12/76
Issue=5
Rev=1
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Type = 12
iDate=4/12/76
Issue=6
Rev=1
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Type = 12
iDate=4/12/76
Issue=7
Rev=1
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Type = 12
iDate=4/12/76
Issue=8
Rev=1
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Type = 12
iDate=4/12/76
Issue=9
Rev=1
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Type = 12
iDate=4/12/76
Issue=10
Rev=1
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Type = 12
iDate=4/12/76
Issue=11
Rev=1
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Type = 12
iDate=4/12/76
Issue=12
Rev=1
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Type = 12
iDate=4/12/76
Issue=13
Rev=1
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Type = 12
iDate=4/12/76
Issue=14
Rev=1
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Type = 12
iDate=4/12/76
Issue=15
Rev=1
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Type = 12
iDate=4/12/76
Issue=16
Rev=1
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Type = 12
iDate=4/12/76
Issue=17
Rev=1
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Type = 12
iDate=8/12/76
Issue=1
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Type = 12
iDate=8/12/76
Issue=2
Rev=1
rDate=3/4/77
Addition=1
aDate=3/4/77
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Remimeo
All Orgs
All Divisions
C/Ses
Co-Audit Supervisor's Course
Co-Auditors
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 28 MAY 1980
Remimeo
All Orgs
All Divisions
C/Ses
Co-Audit Supervisor's Course
Co-Auditors
CANCELS Co-Audit Series 0-18, as issued on:
BTBs 4 Dec 76 and 4 Dec 76R
Issues I through XVII.
(Co-Audit Series 2R, 3R, 3R Addition, 8-1, 4, 5, 6, 7,
8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 and 18.)
and
BTBs 8 Dec 76, Issue I, 8 Dec 76R, Rev. and
Reiss. 3 Apr 77, Issue II 8 Dec 78-1, Addition of 3
Apr 77, Issue I. (Co-Audit Series 0, 1R and 0-1.)
Co-Audit Series 1
CO-AUDIT DEFINED
The co-audit has just come back into its own.
The introduction of the Purification Rundown has brought thousands
flocking into orgs and missions around the world and from the wins being
reported on this very basic action we can be assured that, with standard
handling, this flow will continue.
Already we have a vast public fresh from the purification Rundown and
ready for all the gain awaiting them on their next steps on the Bridge. We
have entire staffs through purification and poised at the starting line for
their next enhancement action.
With so many now prepared for and in vital need of the technical
levels that follow purification, how do we get all of this tech delivered?
The answer: CO-AUDITS.
CO-AUDIT DEFINED
The co-audit is an early Scientology and Dianetics innovation.
It was the bright idea used in the early days to get a lot of auditing
done in more volume and on a broader scale than would ever have been
possible
on a one-for-one basis at that time. It was also the means of training the
many who were
HCOB 28.5.80 - 2 -
demanding training in this new technology, and providing them with the
opportunity to get their own cases handled while at the same time giving
them a subjective reality on the processes they were delivering to others.
The term "co-auditing" is an abbreviation for "cooperative auditing".
A CO-AUDIT IS: A TEAM OF ANY TWO PEOPLE WHO ARE HELPING EACH OTHER
REACH A BETTER LIFE WITH SCIENTOLOGY OR DIANETIC PROCESSING.
It is a cooperative action toward a very worthwhile goal. It was then
and is today a very valuable tool.
Co-audits are our quickest and most economical way of restoring
vitality and purpose to the society, something I know all Scientologists
are working with me to achieve.
Co-audits will handle the many, staff and public alike, who are
reaching for those auditing actions which will bring them up through the
next levels toward clearing and who are willing to bootstrap their way up
through these levels.
THE PURPOSE OF A CO-AUDIT IS TO GET CO-AUDITORS UP THE GRADE CHART.
TYPES OF CO-AUDITS
Co-auditing is not a limited activity. Any pair of Scientologists who
have the interest and desire to help each other up the Grade Chart can co-
audit.
There are beginners' co-audits for new people. There are professional
co-audits for trained auditors. Where specially designed co-audit packages
are issued, non-professional co-audits can now be conducted for public on
some of the first steps of the Grade Chart. Co-audits (professional and non-
professional) should always be available for staff.
HAS CO-AUDIT
The HAS Co-Audit is for new public who have had no previous experience
with the subject of auditing at all. Under very close supervision and using
processes which undercut most reality levels, it gives a person new to
Scientology his first taste of auditing, both as an auditor and as a
preclear.
The co-auditors do "muzzled" auditing which means that the auditor
says only two things. He gives the command and acknowledges the answer to
that command. If the preclear says anything that is not an answer to the
command the auditor nods his head and awaits an answer before giving an
acknowledgement. If he runs into any difficulty the auditor puts his hand
out behind him and waits for the supervisor to come and handle the
situation.
HAS co-audits are a fabulously successful way of introducing new
public to the gains available to them through auditing and training. HAS co-
auditors discover for themselves, through giving and receiving auditing,
that Scientology and Dianetic auditing is workable technology which enables
them to help others and be helped in return.
HAS co-auditors frequently attain greatly improved levels of
communication, responsibility and certainty. Some have major case gain.
HCOB 28.5.80 - 3 -
CO-AUDITING OF SPECIFIC RUNDOWNS
Rundown co-audits are especially designed co-audit packages set up to
permit co-audit team members, regardless of their training or lack of it,
to audit each other through the full steps of that rundown.
Included in a rundown co-audit are any and all study and training
steps needed to prepare co-auditors to successfully audit each other to the
full EP of the rundown.
SURVIVAL RUNDOWN CO-AUDIT
The Survival Rundown, currently being released, is the first
individual rundown to be offered as a co-audit package. It takes co-
auditors, even those with no previous tech training, and trains them up to
do a very proficient job of delivering the Survival Rundown to one another-
and has them delivering it as they learn!
This rundown co-audit gets the co-auditors into session, giving and
receiving processing on the Survival Rundown, with tremendously successful
results-and FAST.
OTHER RUNDOWN CO-AUDITS
It is expected that co-audit packages on other rundowns will be
released from time to time in the future. These rundown co-audit packages
would be carefully planned and tailored to include the minimal but correct
and necessary training gradients for delivery to public as well as staff.
This does not mean that, in the absence of such a package for a
specific rundown, co-auditing could not be done. Auditors trained in the
skills of a level of a particular run. down could co-audit that rundown,
provided they are at that level pc-wise and training-wise. The co-audit
would need to be organized and be properly supervised and C/Sed throughout,
but the organization could be as minimal as providing a setup for one such
co-audit team.
PROFESSIONAL CO-AUDITS
A professional co-audit is a co-audit between auditors trained on the
skills of a level who are auditing each other on that level.
Professional co-audits have long been a favored and highly successful
method whereby Scientologists could move up the auditing and training sides
of the Bridge.
Professional co-audits are for auditors who are doing the Professional
Training Route and for auditors who have completed their training but
haven't themselves moved up the Grades. Professional co-audits are offered
in Department 11 (Department of Training).
Academy and Briefing Course students could and should co-audit and get
themselves up the Grade Chart as they go, in pace with their training.
Professional co-auditing can be done following each auditor training
course. It can also be done on special co-audits set up by orgs so that
these
auditors can continue to
HCOB 28.5.80 - 4 -
co-audit under the supervision of org tech terminals and use org
facilities.
Such co-audits for public students would be charged for at a nominal
fee and would include C/Sing, etc.
A person can get all of his New Era Dianetics and Grades auditing on
these co-audits.
NOTE
Orgs do not have the license to offer public non-professional co-
audits on NED (Full NED Programs) or the Grades.
Training courses are already very much streamlined.
Any public interested in co-auditing New Era Dianetics or the Grades
should be routed on to the NED Course or the Academy Levels where they can
rapidly complete their study and get on to the professional co-audits.
Thus an org's concentration as far as public co-audits go would be on
Div 6 co-audits, specific rundown co-audit packages and professional co-
audits on New Era Dianetics and the Grades.
STAFF CO-AUDITS
Staff co-audits are by far the most advantageous method for an org to
ensure its staff get and stay in good case shape and move on up the Bridge.
A well-run staff co-audit is the answer to the problem of how does an
org, already short on auditors, get all its staff audited.
The staff co-audit can be arranged to be done by trained staff
auditors (teamed with each other) and/or untrained staff (teamed with each
other).
It can include any processing from the beginning of the Grade Chart up
through Expanded Grade IV as well as processing on special rundowns
designed for co-audit purposes.
In the case of untrained staff co-auditing, this would ideally begin
with the Survival Rundown Co-Audit, in which the staff member is trained on
Co-Audit TRs and Upper Indocs and then co-audits with his twin on a full
battery of Objectives and other actions, to completion of the Rundown.
Following this, the untrained staff co-auditors would need to be
gradiently programmed and C/Sed and taken step-by-step through the next
Grade Chart action on a "read-it, drill-it, do-it" basis.
"Read-it, drill-it, do-it" means:
1. The co-auditors twin up and study and check each other out on the
basic issues and skills for the process or Grade to be audited.
2. They drill the actual actions involved in running the process,
under
tight supervision of a trained Co-Audit Supervisor.
3. They then audit each other on the process to EP, under the tight
guidance of a trained co-audit supervisor.
HCOB 28.5.S0 - 5 -
Do you want to see an immediate upsurge in staff morale, activity level
and enthusiasm? Establish a staff co-audit.
Specifics on setting up staff co-audits and how to supervise and run
them are covered in HCOB 30 May 1980, Co-Audit Series 3, STAFF CO-AUDITS
and HCOB 29 May 1980, Co-Audit Series 2, CO-AUDITS: HOW TO RUN THEM.
GUIDING FACTOR
The Grade Chart is the guiding factor in any co-audit. One doesn't
audit a pc on processes or rundowns above his Grade in violation of the
Grade Chart regardless of where the auditing is done or whether it is an
HGC type of action or a co-audit action.
HISTORY OF CO-AUDITS
The development of public and staff co-audits and the HA8 Co-audit can
be followed in the numerous materials issued over the Fears on the subject,
a list of which is included below:
1955 Tech Volume II, Page 162, Section 7.
1957
HCOB 13 Jun 1957 STUDENT INTENSIVES & CO-AUDITING PROCESSES
1958
HCOB 22 Dec 1958 NEW HGC PROCESS (A New Straightwire)
1959
HCOB 10 Mar 1959 SUPPLEMENTAL DATA SHEET TO HCO
BULLETIN OF FEB 16, 1959
HCOB 17 Mar 1959 DO IT YOURSELF THERAPY
HCOB 25 Mar 1959 HAS CO-AUDIT AND COMM COURSE
HCOB 8 Apr 1959 HAS CO-AUDIT AND COMM COURSE
HCOB 21 May 1959 HGC PROCESSES AND ACC PROCESSES AS OF MAY 21, 1959
HCOB 9 Jun 1959 NEEDED MATERIAL
HCOB 10 Jun 1959 CO-AUDIT FORMULA
HCOB 21 Jul 1959 HGC ALLOWED PROCESSES
HCOB 3 Sep 1959 WHY VICTIM WORKS AS A PROCESS
HCOB 25 Sep 1959 HAS CO-AUDIT
HCOB 29 Sep 1959 THE ORGANIZATION OF A PE FOUNDATION
HCOB 30 Oct 1959 TO RETAIN CO-AUDIT PCS, INTEREST IN CASE
HCOB 31 Oct 1959 CREATE PROCESSES, DANGERS AND ADVANTAGES
HCOB 15 Dec 1959 HAS CO-AUDIT
HCOB 15 Dec 1959 URGENT CHANGE IN ALL CO-AUDIT COURSES
Tapes: 5905C12 6LACC-1 CLEARING
5905C13 6LACC-2 SECOND LECTURE ON CLEARING METHODOLOGY
5905C14 6LACC-3 CLEARING TECHNOLOGY
1960
HCOB 2 Feb AD10 THE CO-AUDIT TEAM
HCOB 4 Feb 1960 THEORY OF RESPONSIBILITY PROCESSING
HCOB 7 Apr 1960 A NEW SUMMARY OF AUDITING
HCOB 14 Apr 1960 NEW PE DATA
HCOB 20 Nov 1960 HAS CO-AUDIT ENDED
HCOB 28.5.80 - 6 -
HCOB 22 Dec 1960 HAS CO-AUDIT RESUMED
HCOB 29 Dec 1960 THE NEW PE AND NEW HAS CO-AUDIT
1961
HCO PL 23 Jan 1961 PE COURSE ABOLISHED
1962
HCOB 15 Mar AD12 SUPPRESSORS
HCO PL 21 Oct 1982 AUDITING SUPERVISION AND AUDITING INSTRUCTORS, DUTIES
OF
HCOB 15 Dec 1962 CO-AUDIT AND MISSED W/Hs
1963
HCO PL 17 Jun 1963 STAFF CLEARING PROGRAM
HCOB 21 Jul 1963 CO-AUDIT-ARC BREAK PROCESS
1964
HCO PL 19 Mar 1964 STAFF REGULATIONS, STAFF INTENSIVES
HCOB 10 Dec 1964 LISTEN STYLE AUDITING
HCOB 26 Dec 1964 ROUTINE 0-A EXPANDED
1974
HCOB 17 Feb 1974 MUTUAL OUT RUDS
The processes contained in some of the above issues now appear at
different levels of the Grade Chart or are pre-Grade processes, and they
would only be co-audited in their correct sequence, as pre-Grades or on the
Grades or Expanded Grades.
SUMMARY
The HAS CO-AUDIT as it is currently being delivered is covered in
detail in FDD 234 DIV VI INT Series, the HAS Co-Audit Series 1-17.
Data on how to set up and supervise co-audits for specific rundowns,
NED and the Grades Processes is contained in HCOB 29 May 1980, Co-Audit
Series 2, CO-AUDITS: HOW TO RUN THEM. That issue and Co-Audit Series 3
give full information on running staff Co-Audits.
One would use the entire Co-Audit Series and its references to deliver
successful co-audits of any kind.
The GRADE CHART, HCO PL 23 July 1969, AUDITOR ASSIGNMENT POLICES and
HCOB 21 Dec 1979, C/S Series 107, AUDITOR ASSIGNMENT POLICIES, etc.,
provide the guidelines for pairing up co-auditors and for the co-audit
processes to be run.
Co-audits are for use. They spark immediate interest. They quickly
bring people up to doingness. There is no better exchange for the auditing
one gets than to deliver it to another and that in itself produces gain.
They're the fastest, most satisfying method of getting lots of auditing
delivered, of making lots of Releases and providing actual auditing
experience.
HCOB 28.5.80 - 7 -
If you want to turn your org scene into one of a bustling beehive of
activity, get your co-audits established and running. It is within the
means of any org to do so.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:bk
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=27/5/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Survival Rundown Series 15
SURVIVAL RD CORRECTION LIST (SRD-CL)
Survival RD
Co-Audit Supervisors
Review Auditors
C/Ses
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 27 MAY 1980
Survival RD
Co-Audit Supervisors
Review Auditors
C/Ses
Survival Rundown Series 15
SURVIVAL RD CORRECTION LIST (SRD-CL)
This is a correction list for errors that may be made during the
Survival Rundown. It can be assessed by the Co-Audit Supervisor (if fully
qualified to assess and handle this list) or in a session by a Review
Auditor. It is arranged so that it can be handled in the same sequence as
the list, and is usually done Method 3, but in the case of a heavy upset,
assess it Method 5. Each reading question is to be taken to an F/N per the
instructions. (Any further handling (as given in the list) can then be
done, after the reading questions have been F/Ned.)
This list has two main uses:
A. When difficulty is encountered during a co-audit session and the Co-
Audit Supervisor needs to get the session rolling again. In this instance
the list would be assessed and handled until the cause of the difficulty
had been handled and then the Co-Audit session would be continued. The
whole list need not be done, and shouldn't be continued past the point when
the co-audit could resume.
B. When used by a Review Auditor, in which case the whole list would be
done to insure that all possible sources of bypassed charge were found and
handled. (Should someone on the SRD feel unwilling to continue session or
the SRD, or actually discontinue, assess this list Method 5 and indicate
the largest read. Then handle the remaining reads.)
1. DID YOU GO EXTERIOR?
_______
(If so, find when, and rehab. Do not continue the same process that the
person went exterior on as it has EPed.)
2. HAVE YOU HAD DIFFICULTY BEING AUDITED AFTER HAVING GONE EXTERIOR?
_______
(Indicate that the person was audited after Exterior. Turn this over to
a Review Auditor to handle per Int Series HCOBs.)
3. IS THERE SOMETHING THAT HASN'T BEEN UNDERSTOOD?
_______
(Find out what, and clarify it. If a misunderstood word, clear it with
a Dictionary or the Tech Dictionary, to F/N. Then have the person study the
material again where the word was encountered. If it was a command that
was misunderstood, clear any MU words and reclear the command. (C/S is then
to adjudicate if the process should be taken up.))
4. IS THERE SOMETHING THAT WASN'T ACKNOWLEDGED?
_______
(Find out what it was and acknowledge it. If no F/N, find out if there
was an earlier similar time when something wasn't acknowledged, to F/N.)
HCOB 27.5.80 - 2 -
5. IS THERE AN UPSET WITH SOMEONE?
_______
(Find out what the upset is and who with, and assess it as an ARC Break
to F/N or E/Sim to F/N.)
6. IS THERE ANY PRESENT TIME WORRY?
_______
(Find out what it is, and handle it, or 2WC to F/N or E/Sim to F/N.)
7. IS THERE SOMETHING YOU THOUGHT OF THAT YOU DIDN'T TELL YOUR
AUDITOR?
_______ (Encourage the person to tell it, using the Prompters from HCOB 10
Dec 64. See Tech Dictionary. Handle to F/N.)
8. IS THERE SOMETHING YOU HAVE DONE THAT YOU SHOULDN'T HAVE?
_______
(Pull the overt to F/N or E/Sim to F/N.)
9. HAS THERE BEEN ANY INVALIDATION?
_______
(Find out what was invalidated, by whom, and how it was invalidated, to
F/N or E/Sim to F/N.)
10. HAS THERE BEEN ANY EVALUATION?
_______
(Find out what the evaluation was and by whom, to F/N or E/Sim to F/N.)
11. WERE THE AUDITING COMMANDS FLUBBED?
_______
(2WC to get data, and to get off the person's reaction to it, to F/N,
or E/Sim to F/N. Correct the auditor with the reference and get the process
run correctly.)
12. WAS A PROCESS RUN INCORRECTLY?
_______
(Handle as in #11.)
13. WAS A PROCESS LEFT UNFLAT?
_______
(Find out which process, and get the process continued to full EP.)
14. DID A REACTION TURN ON DURING A PROCESS?
_______
(Find out what process, and indicate that the process is unflat, to
F/N, or E/Sim to F/N. Ensure that the unflat process(es) gets flattened.)
15. WAS A PROCESS ENDED WHILE IT WAS STILL PRODUCING CHANGE?
_______
(Find out what process, and indicate that the process is unflat, to
F/N, or E/Sim to F/N. Ensure that the unflat process(es) gets flattened.)
16. WAS A PROCESS "2 WAY COMM'D TO AN F/N", INSTEAD OF RUNNING THE
PROCESS TO EP?
_______ (Indicate that the process is unflat. Get it flattened.)
17. DID YOU GET AN F/N BY TALKING ABOUT THE PROCESS, INSTEAD OF
RUNNING THE PROCESS?
_______ (Indicate that the process is unflat, as the process itself was not
run to EP. Get the process flattened.)
18. DID SOMEONE SUGGEST A PROCESS WAS UNNECESSARY OR SHOULDN'T BE RUN?
_______
(2WC to F/N, getting the data. Get the process run, so the pc doesn't
miss the gain available from it.)
19. DO YOU THINK THAT THESE PROCESSES ARE UNNECESSARY?
_______
(Get off the person's considerations about why he/ she thinks the
processes are unnecessary, to F/N, or E/Sim to F/N. If the pc is now ready
to continue the SRD let him do so. If not, turn this in to the C/S.)
HCOB 27.5.80 - 3 -
20. ARE YOU PROTESTING ANYTHING?
_______
(Find out what the pc is protesting, to F/N, or E/Sim to F/N.)
21. ARE YOU ASSERTING SOMETHING?
_______
(Find out what the pc is asserting, to F/N, or E/Sim to F/N.)
22. DID YOU HAVE A COGNITION THAT YOU DIDN'T MENTION?
_______
(Get the pc to tell the cognition. If it was the EP for a process
indicate that it was. If not the EP, acknowledge the cognition. and have
the process continued. Do not attempt to "2WC the process to F/N", as the
process itself must be run to F/N.)
23. WAS A COGNITION NOT ACCEPTED?
_______
(Handle as in #22.)
24. WAS A PROCESS CONTINUED AFTER IT WAS FLAT?
_______
(2WC to get the data. If the process was run to EP, rehab it.)
25. HAVE YOU ATTESTED OR DECLARED ANY STATE THAT YOU DIDN'T HONESTLY
AND FULLY ATTAIN?
_______ (Get off the withhold of the pc having done this, to F/N, or E/Sim
to F/N. If the pc is now willing to continue the SRD, continue it. If not,
turn the data in to the C/S.)
26. WERE YOU NOT SURE WHAT TO DO?
_______
(Find out by getting data and take it to F/N, or E/Sim to F/N. If a
process command, clear the command, and get the process correctly run and
flattened.)
27. WAS THERE ANY LACK OF UNDERSTANDING?
_______
(2WC to get data and take it to F/N or E/Sim to F/N. If it was an ARC
Break, assess it as an ARC Break.)
28. DID SOMEONE GIVE YOU VERBAL DATA?
_______
(2WC to F/N or E/Sim to F/N. Then handle with the correct
reference.)
29. DO YOU HAVE MUTUAL OUT RUDS WITH YOUR TWIN?
_______
(Fly mutual Out Ruds on both the pc and the twin.)
30. HAS THERE BEEN ANY ENTURBULATION ON COURSE?
_______
(2WC to F/N or E/Sim to F/N.)
31. ARE THERE ANY DISAGREEMENTS?
_______
(Get the disagreements off by 2WC to F/N, or E/Sim to F/N.)
32. HAS THE SAME PROCESS BEEN RUN AGAIN AFTER IT HAD BEEN FLATTENED
EARLIER?
_______ (Find out which process and when it was flattened and indicate the
overrun. Rehab.)
33. HAVE YOU BEEN GIVEN UNNECESSARY REVIEWS OR REPAIRS?
_______
(Indicate. Let pc tell you about it. If no F/N, E/Sim to F/N. Then
complete the SRD, or if earlier SRD processes were quickied, flatten them
from the earliest on forward.)
34. HAVE YOU BEEN AUDITED ON SUBJECTIVE PROCESSES, BEFORE THE SRD WAS
COMPLETE?
_______ (Indicate that this could be an error, as subjective processes are
best run after the SRD. Get off pc's considerations about it, to F/N, or
E/Sim to F/N. Complete the SRD.)
HCOB 27.5.80 - 4 -
35. WERE THERE ANY OTHER ERRORS IN THE AUDITING?
_______
(2WC to find out what, and get the person's reaction to these off to
F/N, or E/Sim to F/N.)
36. HAS ANYONE INVALIDATED YOUR GAINS OR PROGRESS?
_______
(Find out who and get the invalidation off to F/N, or E/Sim to F/N.
Send to an Ethics Officer for PTS handling.)
37. ARE YOU CONNECTED TO SOMEONE WHO IS ANTAGONISTIC TO YOU?
_______
(Find out who, and 2WC for data and take it to F/N. Turn the data over
to an Ethics Officer to handle.)
38. ARE YOU CONNECTED TO SOMEONE WHO DOESN'T APPROVE OF YOU DOING THE
SURVIVAL RUNDOWN OR SCIENTOLOGY?
_______ (2WC to get the data and take it to F/N. Turn the data over to an
Ethics Officer to handle.)
39. IS THERE SOMETHING WRONG WITH YOUR PURIFICATION RD?
_______
(2WC to get the data and take it to F/N. Turn the data over to a
Purification RD C/S to handle.)
40. HAVE YOU TAKEN DRUGS OR MEDICINE WHILE ON THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN?
_______
(2WC to F/N. Also find out why the person took the drugs or medicine,
and whether physically ill or other reason. Get the data to the C/S.)
41. ARE YOU PHYSICALLY TIRED OR HAD INSUFFICIENT REST?
_______
(2WC to get data. Indicate that one shouldn't be audited without
sufficient rest. Get a handling worked out so that the person does get
sufficient rest.)
42. HAVE YOU BEEN AUDITED WHILE HUNGRY OR IMPROPERLY FED?
_______
(2WC for data. Get the person to eat if hungry now.)
43. IS THERE ANY UNHANDLED ETHICS SITUATION?
_______
(Get the data, and take it to F/N, or E/Sim to F/N. Turn the data over
to an Ethics Officer to handle.)
44. ARE YOU INVOLVED IN SOMETHING UNETHICAL?
_______
(2WC for data and pull any withhold about it to F/N or E/Sim to F/N. If
ethics handling is needed, turn the data over to an Ethics Officer for
appropriate handling.)
45. WAS THERE REALLY NOTHING WRONG IN THE FIRST PLACE?
_______
(2WC and if there wasn't, indicate it, to F/N or E/Sim to F/N.)
46. IS THERE SOMETHING ELSE WRONG, NOT COVERED ON THIS LIST?
_______
(Indicate it. If the person knows what it is have him tell you about it
to F/N or E/Sim to F/N. Otherwise, get a C/S 53 done by a Review Auditor.)
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
As assisted by
Senior C/S Int
LRH:DM:dr
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
As assisted by
Senior C/S Int
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=21/5/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
PURIFICATION RUNDOWN CASE DATA
Remimeo
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 21 MAY 1980
Remimeo
All Staff
All Orgs
All Missions
C/Ses
MOs,
MLOs
Purif I/C
Tech
Qual
PURIFICATION RUNDOWN CASE DATA
References:
HCOB 6 Feb 78RA THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN
Re-rev. 4.12.7 REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM
HCOB 6 Feb 78RA-1 THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN-
Add. of 20.12.79 ERRATA AND ADDITIONS
HCOB 30 Dec 79 HOW TO BUILD A SAUNA
HCOB 3 Jan 80R PURIFICATION RUNDOWN AND
Rev. 10 Apr 80 ATOMIC WAR
HCOB/HCO PL of ILLEGAL PCs, ACCEPTANCE OF
11 Feb 80 ADDITION REGARDING
PURIFICATION RUNDOWN
HCOB 14 Feb 80 RESEARCH DATA ON NUTRITIONAL
VITAMIN INCREASES ON THE PURIFICATION
RUNDOWN
HCOB 29 Feb 80 THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN:
PREGNANCY AND BREAST-FEEDING
HCOB 7 Mar 80 DIET, COMMENTS UPON
The Purification Rundown is undertaken by those who wish to free
themselves from the restimulative effects of drug residues and biochemical
factors which would otherwise prevent or inhibit them from making the
spiritual improvement which is possible with Dianetic and Scientology
processing.
From the floods of highly enthusiastic letters and reports of glowing
results that continue to roll in, it accomplishes this with resounding
benefit and successes that are even beyond the original expectations.
Since the initial release of the research data, those who have
completed the Rundown number well up in the thousands. Along with the
numerous accounts received of wins and changes and gain have come requests
for more data on some aspects of the Rundown.
To satisfy these requests, several Case Supervisors who were doing
case supervision of the Purification Rundown and a number of people who
were on or had completed the program were interviewed so as to obtain more
information for your use in handling the rundown.
In all, six Case Supervisors from five major areas and a total of 120
persons from those areas were carefully surveyed. Their data is given in
this HCOB, along with additional data from unsolicited reports, where the
information was verified by folder study.
HCOB 21.5.80 - 2 -
These summarized findings are based on results from a wide spectrum of
cases, including those with heavy, medium or light strict drug history,
those with history of medical drugs in varying degrees, and some few with
minimal drugs of any kind reported.
This information is not intended to take the place of individual
medical advices given to persons by their doctors in doing the Rundown.
1. WHAT IS THE OPTIMUM DAILY LENGTH OF TIME ON THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN FOR
MOST PEOPLE?
From the many cases interviewed and from C/S data, five hours exercise
and sauna daily has been found to be ideal for the majority of people on
the Purification Rundown. The Rundown apparently works like a bomb when the
highest percentage of this time is spent in the sauna and a lesser
percentage in running. (Example: A good ratio has been found to be
approximately 20 to 30 minutes of running to get the circulation up, and
the remainder of the time in the sauna, for a total of five hours.)
Not everyone has gone immediately onto a full five hour stint right
from the start (and some have successfully done the entire program on a
shorter daily schedule, as covered later in this issue). In both the
running and the sauna, where the right gradient was applied, particularly
when beginning the program, it went very smoothly. Age and current physical
condition and stamina can all enter into it. Among the many surveyed were
those who required a few days to work up to five hours daily but once there
it proved to be the optimum daily period for them, as it has for so many
people.
Additionally, on such a schedule the Purification Rundown can and has
been completed effectively in the shortest possible amount of time.
Most people approached the 5 hour daily program eagerly and
enthusiastically. Some were found apt to plunge in a bit out-gradiently at
the start, and this was handled by having them work up gradually to where
they could run 20 to 30 minutes without strain and take the sauna time at
the rate they could handle it, especially to begin with.
One area reported a few people staying in the sauna too lung with no
break and turning on headaches and other unnecessary reactions that way.
The purpose should not be to see how long one can stay in the sauna for any
one stretch of time, and this had to be clarified with several such
enthusiasts. What worked best was when the person had a good sweat going
and had been in the sauna sweating for a while then coming out, getting
some fresh air and space and cooling off, as needed, and going right back
in for more sweating. When plenty of liquids (many people take water jugs
into the sauna), enough salt or potassium or Bioplasma were used the sauna
time went very well.
These are some of the points which were found to get and keep the
person winning.
2. CAN THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN BE SATISFACTORILY COMPLETED ON LESS THAN
FIVE HOURS DAILY?
This has been piloted where circumstances honestly prevented some
persons
from doing the Rundown 5 hours daily. It
HCOB 21.5.80 - 3 -
was found that the Rundown can be completed effectively by a good many
cases on less than five hours per day, provided the person is getting
benefit and change on the shorter schedule.
The shorter schedules ranged from 4 hours down to a minimum of 2 Ѕ
hours daily, always with a higher percentage of time spent in the sauna
than in running.
The absolute minimum daily period found to give good return on the
Rundown was 2 Ѕ hours total running and sauna time. This period would then
be spent as follows: Approximately 20 to 30 minutes of running and the
remaining two hours or so in the sauna.
The same gradients applied when the person was on or starting on a 2 Ѕ
hour daily schedule as on any other schedule.
C/S approval would be obtained for the person to do the Rundown on
this shorter schedule, as there are other factors that enter into it. Any
medical advice or order for the person to be on the shorter schedule would,
of course, need to be followed.
The Rundown can and in most cases has taken longer to complete on a
shortened daily schedule, but survey results show that it can be done
successfully by a good many people at a minimum of 2 Ѕ hours daily provided
all other points of the Rundown are standardly maintained.
3. DOES THE EXTENT OF A PERSON'S DRUG HISTORY SEEM TO BE A FACTOR IN HOW
MUCH
TIME WOULD BE SPENT DAILY ON THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN?
Per all the research and survey data thus far, the extent of drug
history is definitely a factor in determining how much time daily an
individual would spend on the Rundown.
Beyond any doubt the survey showed that those with heavy or even
mediumly-heavy drug histories benefited most from the 5 hour daily
schedule. This can apply to persons with heavy medical drug histories as
well as to those who have had heavy street drugs.
There are reports on record of persons with heavy drug histories who,
though they had done fairly well at the beginning of the Rundown on 2 Ѕ
hours a day (some phenomena turning on and blowing), did not begin to turn
on restimulation of actual "trips" and blow through them until they got
onto a 5 hour daily schedule.
Others reported that if something turned on while in the sauna they
made it a point to stick carefully to the sauna time (taking short breaks
as necessary for water, salt or potassium, or to cool off) until the
manifestation blew, and they then came out feeling good and refreshed.
These same persons reported that if they short-cut the sauna time because
something uncomfortable had turned on they came out feeling bad or dull and
it would then take longer to blow through the manifestation.
Even some people with very light drug histories reported feeling
calmer and more uptone after a stint in the sauna which was long enough to
permit them to get through any restim or discomfort that had turned on.
HCOB 21.5.80 - 4 -
There is everything to be said for putting a person on a schedule
which will permit him to handle these factors, and it was found
particularly important that those with heavy or mediumly-heavy drug
histories were scheduled properly so that they were able to get full return
from the action and wind up with the EP.
4. WHO DETERMINES WHAT DAILY LENGTH OF TIME THE PERSON SHOULD BE ON ON
THE RUNDOWN?
On any question as to daily schedule, the C/S would adjudicate as to
the daily time period for the individual.
In any case where the person was doing the Rundown on a special
medical program, the C/S would ensure any doctor's orders regarding
schedule were adhered to.
The C/S's first consideration would be what is going to give the
person the most gain. Wherever possible the person would do five hours
daily and most people have done this. In instances where a shorter daily
schedule was actually required for best results on some individuals, the
schedule was adjusted per C/S adjudication.
In cases where persons honestly had limited time, these were
considered for the minimum 2 Ѕ hour daily time period, as it would have
been altered importance to deny them the Rundown otherwise. But it was
necessary to ensure that each person could and did make progress on the
shorter daily schedule as he continued it and, if not, getting him onto the
proper regimen.
Some who started at 2 Ѕ hours daily later requested to move up to the
five hour period, and there have been cases where persons on the shorter
schedule were getting heavy restimulation of drugs which they could not
handle on the shorter period and when switched to the five hour period by
the C/S they did remarkably better. This can occur, apparently, with street
drug or medical drug users and is something for the C/S to bear in mind.
The heavier drug cases were, where possible, put on the five hour schedule
to begin with.
Again, per the survey data, correct gradient was the watch-word here,
as in all aspects of the Purification Rundown.
The C/Sing of cases on the Rundown would not be done rotely but always
done on an individual basis with the individual never pushed further or
faster than he could go. (To do otherwise would be a violation of the tech
of the Rundown and a violation of the tech on gradients.)
The successful action has been to get the person on a schedule where
he is winning and able to handle what comes up, and then ensure he gets in
that amount of time each day and preferably at the same time each day.
Regularity of schedule plays a big part in completing the Rundown smoothly
and effectively, with all the benefit to be had.
5. WHAT REACTIONS HAVE BEEN NOTED WHEN PARTS OF THE RUNDOWN WERE SKIMPED OR
WHEN THE RUNDOWN WAS DONE IRREGULARLY?
LIMITED GAIN PER HOUR
One of the factors examined closely in the course of this survey was
whether or not there was a common sauna time
HCOB 21.5.80 - 5 -
limit for most people (within the 5 hours) after which the person got tired
and the individual got less return for the remainder of the period.
In those cases where the Rundown was being carried out very
standardly there were no reports of such tiredness setting in before the 5
hours were up, which were due to length of time spent in the sauna. (Some
of these cases reported they experienced tiredness as part of a
restimulation of drug reactions, etc., but they were able to spot it as
such and blow through it within the 5 hour period.)
However, there were 24 reports from individuals stating they did get
tired in the sauna well within the 5 hours and get limited or no benefit
from it beyond that tiring point. The daily time limits for gain reported
by these 24 cases varied widely from person to person, the reported limits
ranging from 4 hours down to 2 Ѕ hours or less. The individual's drug
history did not seem to be a factor, as the reports came from persons whose
drug histories ranged from heavy down to few or no drugs, medical or
otherwise.
These 24 cases were looked into carefully and when all the pertinent
data was examined (some of it obtained by metered interview), what showed
up were departures from the standard procedure as given in the Purification
Rundown HCOBs.
The departures found were (in order of frequency):
a. Not enough sleep
b. Insufficient salt or potassium or Bioplasma taken while in the
sauna
or before running, OR a combination of a. and b.
c. Dropped out vitamins that day, skimping on vitamins or taking
vitamins sporadically
d. An undetected and/or unhandled vitamin deficiency.
In one case out of the 24 the person was found to be anemic and he
should not have put himself onto the program. This was handled by getting
the person onto a special medical program to be carried out under medical
supervision before the Rundown could be completed.
Correction of the other cases brought about smoother progress and
much improved results.
At best, any one of the above-listed outnesses or omissions could
result in the person tiring too quickly, experiencing unnecessary
discomfort, getting limited gain per hour and prolonging the Rundown
unnecessarily. The apparency would be that the Rundown was not working when
in actual fact it was not being applied standardly.
Where a person on any schedule reports he is tiring at a certain
point and getting little or no benefit per hour spent beyond that point,
one would need to determine if an adjustment of the daily time period was
needed. But, as has been found, additionally and always one would carefully
examine exactly what the person was doing on each section of the Rundown
and get any outnesses rectified.
Regardless of whether the person is on the maximum or minimum daily
schedule, departures from other aspects of the procedure would decrease the
benefits until these departures were handled.
HCOB 21.5.80 - 6 -
SLEEP
In the 24 cases mentioned above and in some other cases reporting
problems on the Rundown, by far the most common outness found was lack of
sufficient sleep.
This is covered in the original bulletin under the section on a
properly ordered personal schedule. However, it should be re-emphasized
here that adequate sleep has been found to be a vital factor in the correct
application of this Rundown. People function best when they are
sufficiently rested.
Some tiredness has not been uncommon at certain intervals during the
course of the Rundown, even when the procedure was being carried out
standardly. It can occur when the person first goes onto the program and
needs to build up to the full daily time period on a gradient. It can also
occur as part of the restimulation in connection with medical or street
drug residues or as part of restim of an old illness, etc., any of which
the person might run through while on this program. There are many cases on
record of persons on the Rundown turning on and blowing through periods of
tiredness or fatigue connected with past illness and/or medical or drug
experiences and coming through them far brighter and more energetic.
But it must be borne in mind that the Purification Rundown can be
strenuous. Trying to do it on too little sleep would be a severe violation.
A person observably needs enough sleep in order to cope with the changes he
is undergoing. Per C/S reports, where this has been violated the person has
often wound up having a rough time of it. Quite apart from any mere
tiredness, any reactions which are there to be restimulated by drug
residuals can (due to insufficient sleep) produce unnecessary and non-
optimum reactions.
Adequate sleep while on the Purification Rundown has proven to be
every bit as important as it is when one is on a routine auditing program
and is part of a properly ordered personal schedule. One obviously can't
expect to make the gains possible on the Purification Rundown unless this
point is in.
And one must be okay medically to go onto the Rundown in the first
place.
SAUNA VENTILATION
Correct ventilation of the sauna is covered in HCOB 30 Dec 79, HOW TO
BUILD A SAUNA, and it is reiterated here as a must.
Improper sauna ventilation is reported as a contributive factor in a
person tiring too quickly. It reportedly can bring on lassitude (weariness
of body or mind from harsh climate), air hunger or any number of other
symptoms which some persons have, in error, attributed to other causes.
This has in some cases prolonged the Rundown or given the appearance of the
Rundown being unflat when actually it was complete.
Those immediately responsible for delivering the Purification Rundown,
as well as the executives of the org, are responsible for ensuring the
sauna has been constructed and is being operated standardly, with a
sufficient oxygen supply for the number of persons using it. This also ties
in with correctly staggering the scheduling of people for the sauna. One
wouldn't jam too many people in the sauna at once, from the standpoint of
ordinary comfort as well as sufficient oxygen supply.
HCOB 21.5.80 - 7 -
OVERHEATING AND SALT DEPLETION
An R-factor on the effects of over-heating was found to be essential
for a person beginning the Rundown, as well as basic hatting on how to
handle this on an emergency basis should it occur.
The symptoms of overheating and/or salt or potassium depletion-
dizziness, feeling faint, weakness, clammy skin, becoming overheated, etc.-
are taken up in HCOB 6 Feb 78RA and HCOB 6 Feb 78RA-1, THE PURIFICATION
RUNDOWN, ERRATA AND ADDITIONS.
Beginning persons would need hatting on these points so as not to
confuse these symptoms with the manifestations that can turn on when
restimulation in connection with drug residuals is occurring. It is common
knowledge and a matter of good common sense that over-heating and/or salt
or potassium depletion can be prevented by sufficient salt, Potassium or
Bioplasma intake and by cooling off periodically as necessary during the
sauna period. But where these symptoms occurred they would be handled and
not considered something the person must "go through".
Additionally, if perspiration ceases while in the sauna-the body
suddenly stops sweating and the skin becomes hot and dry-it's an indicator
that needs immediate handling. This is a clamping down on the part of the
body, a resistance to expel, and it is the first sign of a heat stroke.
The Standard First Aid personal Safety booklet put out by the American
National Red Cross covers the symptoms of heat exhaustion/heat stroke and
the immediate aid to be given for such.
One would get the person out of the sauna at once and cool him off
with a cold or cool shower or sponging, or start with a lukewarm shower and
gradually make it cooler. Fluids, and salt, potassium or Bioplasma would be
given.
This reference would be kept on hand, readily available, in the sauna
location.
Hatting on all the above points would be included in the R-factor the
person is given when he begins the Rundown. Salt or potassium depletion as
a chronic condition would be handled in liaison with the person's doctor.
NUTRITION
What showed up throughout the survey data was the importance of the
daily nutritional vitamins, minerals, oil, Cal Mag and vegetables and the
role that these nutritional elements play in handling, on the Purification
Rundown, the traumatic effects of the restimulation of drugs, as covered in
some detail in the original bulletin.
In each area it was observed that dropping out any of these
supplements while on the program, skimping on them or taking them only
sporadically, contrary to the program as approved by the person's doctor,
could create or intensely deficiencies which would then throw a curve into
the Rundown that would show up in any number of ways-tiring quickly, lack
of energy, upset stomach, nausea, a general "not feeling good" or actually
getting sick in some way, to name a few.
HCOB 21.5.80 - 8 -
Any omissions of these standard elements were found to interfere with
the progress and purpose of the Rundown, which is to free up the individual
for spiritual improvement by handling the restimulative effects of
accumulated residual drugs and toxins.
With the increase in numbers of those doing the Rundown, many more
persons are now reported to have successfully completed it under close
supervision on the nutritional vitamin and mineral increases, including
Niacin, within the ranges given in the original research data published in
HCOB 14 Feb 1980 (RESEARCH DATA ON NUTRITIONAL VITAMIN INCREASES ON THE
PURIFICATION RUNDOWN), with approval for such supplements from a medical
doctor.
Many areas report it has also been helpful to have a good familiarity
with the Adelle Davis books on nutrition and diet, as listed by title in
HCOB 7 March 1980, DIETS, COMMENTS UPON.
Where individual tolerances were taken into consideration under
medical supervision and any vitamin imbalance or deficiency handled under
medical supervision, as stipulated in the bulletins on the Rundown, these
ranges as published in the issues on the original research were reported to
be highly workable for most.
In areas where the Rundown has been successfully delivered, the
person's originations regarding his tolerance for or reactions to certain
vitamins were never ignored. These would always be looked into and a
correct solution worked out in alignment with the data in the original
bulletin, with the assistance of the medical liaison officer in liaison
with the doctor or between the individual and his doctor.
In reported cases where the person was having some difficulty and some
nutrient imbalance was the actual cause of the upset, where the vitamins
and minerals were properly adjusted as above there was invariably
improvement.
But it was necessary to first determine that the person actually was
taking the vitamins and other nutritional elements he was supposedly taking
and in what amounts, or if he was taking them only sporadically.
It is the responsibility of the person who has undertaken to do the
Rundown to keep those overseeing the Rundown well informed as to his daily
actions and the results. It is also his responsibility to see his doctor
where any irregularity or upset indicates such. Naturally it is also his
option to see his doctor at any point he wishes on his progress on the
Rundown.
From all the reported data, it is not unusual at certain Points of the
Rundown for some to protest a bit at the large quantities of vitamins
taken. The protest is not in regard to results or benefits but simply in
regard to the quantities to get down. While the Niacin was always taken all
at one time, in several areas it was found most viable to take the
remainder of the vitamins at various intervals during the day, after meals
or with snacks. One medical doctor has suggested that absorption of the
needed nutrients is better accomplished in this way. The exception to this
would be where one or more of the vitamins or minerals had been
specifically suggested by the M.D. to be taken at certain set intervals.
Also reported was the datum that there is a hidden factor to look for
if
a person is having difficulty and that is the person is not eating but is
going along mainly on something like vitamins And Niacin and yoghurt alone.
Or
he has made
HCOB 21.5.80 - 9 -
some other major change in his eating habits. This was found in one area
and totally explained why the person was having trouble on the Rundown.
Departures such as this were found quite often to come about as the
result of exchange of verbal data among persons doing the Rundown, so this
line was watched to ensure the procedure was being followed as given, not
someone else's version of it or some experimentation of it on his own.
SCHEDULE IRREGULARITIES
Probably the biggest single factor found in keeping the person
progressing smoothly on through to successful completion of the program was
regularity of the actions. That included regularity of the timed schedule,
nutrition, sleep, and the whole works.
Where any one part of the procedure was being done erratically it
would throw the other parts out, or give that apparency, and the effect
could sometimes be quite puzzling to the C/S or to the person's doctor and
others assisting in the administration of the program.
Per C/S observation and other survey data, where people who had
otherwise been doing well began skipping a day here or there, skimping or
cutting down on the daily purification time or missing sleep, it usually
resulted in upset of some degree. They began to report "feeling bad" or
feeling "sickish" or actually getting sick following some irregularity or
disruption of the routine. Where this occurred, the discomfort or upset was
more severe among those with heavier drug histories.
A possible explanation of this is that the process has been
interrupted and one is getting a backlogging of the drug and other toxic
effects rather than a routine release of these at the same rate as when the
person was on schedule. Therefore the person could be subject to a piling
up of the restimulative effects of these at a rate not easily handled by
him, and this could be further compounded by any continuation of an erratic
schedule.
The handling was to get the person onto or back onto a proper and
predictable daily regimen and maintain it through to completion of the
Rundown.
What was stressed here was that in this, as well as all parts of the
Purification Rundown, it is a matter of the person following the normal and
generally accepted rules for good health. He would then be in the best
possible shape to attain the lasting spiritual benefits which are available
to him. This is, of course, the sole and ultimate objective of the
Purification Rundown.
DETERMINING AND HANDLING WHAT WAS WRONG
Here are some of the more successful actions reported from an area
with high Purification Rundown completions.
Any bad indicators, odd or strange indicators, upset, etc., would be
always picked up and handled at once.
If the person was in some heavy restimulation and just wanted to get
through it without interruption he was not forced or badgered but permitted
to go through it easily and gradually at his own rate and he would then
come out the other side all right. Per reports, most people know when they
are in a drug restimulation and will tell you.
HCOB 21.5.80 - 10 -
In a case where the cause of upset wasn't immediately obvious, the
Purif I/C or D of P would simply sit down with the person and talk it over
to find out what was going on.
What worked very well was to have the individual himself read over all
points of the Rundown as contained in the issues and he himself would then
very often spot and point out where he went off the rails. And in most
cases he would prove to he right. It was very often found to be a matter of
something having been altered or added or dropped out and this would be
resolved by getting him back on the correct regimen and doing it by the
book.
If it didn't appear to resolve, no guesswork or experimentation was
done. The person would be sent to his doctor for a medical check and any
necessary adjustment of his regimen.
In summary, it has been found that there are any number of ways in
which one can depart from the correct procedure and the effects of one such
departure can be similar to or appear to be similar to those of another,
which can make some cases look complicated indeed, and unnecessarily so. So
it has also been found that it is vital to indoctrinate the person on the
standard actions of the Rundown at the outset and then do everything
possible to preserve that standardness throughout.
6. ON THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN, HAS IT BEEN FOUND THAT THE ALL BLEND OIL
MUST BE TAKEN "STRAIGHT" OR CAN IT BE MIXED WITH SOME OTHER FOOD?
Per survey data, some individuals had reported difficulty taking the
All Blend Oil by itself, usually due more to the texture than to the actual
taste.
The handling, as there seemed to be no reason why the oil could not be
taken in orange juice or mixed with some other food of the person's choice
and taken that way, was to have many people on the Rundown do just that,
with good result. Others simply took the oil straight. (An exception, in
taking the oil mixed with other food, is that you would not cook food in
the oil and consider that the All Blend Oil ration for the day!)
As the oil will coat the stomach and intestinal walls for a certain
period, which can prevent the full assimilation of other nutrients,
especially the water soluble vitamins, one doctor has suggested that it is
probably best taken before going to bed or at least at a different meal
time than when the vitamins and minerals are taken.
Regarding the amount of oil to be taken, this did vary with the
individual. However, a medical doctor who is also a Scientology auditor and
Purification Rundown C/S and who has handled numerous people on the Rundown
has reported that the most standard oil dosage found to be required thus
far by most persons he has handled on the Rundown is between 2 and 4
tablespoonsful a day. Others (particularly some 250 pounders he has on the
Rundown) are on considerably more oil than this. The recommendation of this
medical doctor is that on any oil dosage one would reduce the intake if the
oil showed up in a bowel movement or in the body sweat, as in such case
there is an excess of oil which is not being put to use but simply
expelled.
HCOB 21.5.80 - 11 -
7. HAVE THERE BEEN ANY REPORTS OF A DIFFERENCE IN RESULTS WHEN NIACIN IS
TAKEN IN POWDER FORM INSTEAD OF IN TABLET FORM?
Per reports thus far, this seems to vary among different individuals.
The observation of one medical doctor supervising the Rundown is that
these variances are not unusual.
Some persons have reported more immediate and/or intense results when
Niacin was taken in powder form. This difference was most often reported by
persons who had reached the higher dosages, had little or no results from a
large, highly compressed tablet and then switched to the same dosage in
powder form and got more intense results.
However, at least two people report that they got results when taking
100, 200, 300, and 400 mgs of Niacin in tablets of 100 mg each; then, when
500 mgs were taken in a single 500 mg tablet nothing occurred. However,
next day when 500 mgs were taken in 5 tablets of 100 mg each results were
obtained at the 500 mg dosage.
Still others reported effective results from Niacin tablets of any
dosage including the larger tablets of higher dosage.
What has been done in one area is to use tablets of 100 mg Niacin each
until the 1000 Niacin dosage is reached and to use Niacin in powder form
thereafter. Where this is done, or where Niacin in powder form is used
exclusively, the measurement was and would need to be exactly done.
The label on a powdered Niacin container should carry instructions as
to how to measure the powder content. With the brands that have been used,
one teaspoon provides 3000 mg of pure Niacin. Note that this is per the
English System of Weights & Measures. One would need to use the standard
measuring teaspoon. In areas of the world where the Metric System is used
(and where "teaspoon" sizes vary), an amount equivalent to a standard
teaspoon measurement would be 4.9 milliliters.
8. WHAT HAS BEEN OBSERVED TO BE THE MOST SUCCESSFUL GRADIENT GENERALLY IN
INCREASING NIACIN ON THE RUNDOWN?
Within the boundaries of the medical doctor's advice for the
individual, the most workable gradient in the majority of cases observed
was generally found to be starting the person on 100 mgs of Niacin and
increasing it in increments of 100 mgs until the person was up to 1000 mgs
daily. A steeper gradient was then used as one went up to higher dosages.
It was found that many persons could take increases of from 300 to 500 mgs
at one time when they reached the higher dosage ranges. Note that this does
not refer to a daily increase, necessarily, but refers to the gradient in
which the dosage was upped when an increased dosage was indicated.
Any increase was always based on individual tolerance, and there were
exceptions to the "generally successful gradient" described above in every
area surveyed. Certain individuals would and did require moving up on a
lesser gradient according to their tolerances and according to individual
medical advices.
HCOB 21.5.80 - 12 -
On the other hand, in some instances a "grinding" phenomenon was
observed where the individual:
a. held to a certain Niacin dosage of say, 500 mgs day after day,
until nothing whatsoever was happening
or
b. held to an increase of only 100 mgs at a time in the higher ranges
of Niacin, even though he was getting only brief, mild results,
was very able to tolerate these effects and felt he could handle a steeper
gradient.
By "grinding" phenomenon is meant an effect similar to running an
engram late on the chain over and over without going earlier and the person
getting irritated and frustrated with the Rundown and reeling he is not
making the progress he could be making.
In these instances, it was observed that when the persons who could
progress at a faster rate with larger Niacin increases (always with the
other vitamins and minerals increased in correct ratio and by individual
tolerance) did so, they went smoothly along on the Rundown, handling what
did crop up.
In all surveyed areas, when to introduce an increase in Niacin was
found to be as important as the amount of increase.
When Niacin was increased:
a. after the effect of a certain dosage had diminished
(not vanished totally),
AND
b. when any other manifestations and restimulation which had turned
on at that dosage had blown or diminished (as covered in the
procedure given in the original bulletin),
good progress was made on the Rundown on a one for one basis, providing all
other points were standardly in.
In other words, it was recognized that there would very likely be
various reactions and restimulations (as covered in the original bulletin)
all of which would need to be taken into consideration when Niacin amounts
were increased.
When this was done correctly excellent results were obtained.
Questions arising on such increase were handled according to the person's
individual medical approval to do the Rundown and further individual
medical advices as needed.
It should be mentioned here that, along with this survey data,
reports have been received of persons found taking Niacin quietly on their
own without being on the Purification Rundown and without being under any
supervision, medical or otherwise, just to see what it would handle. This
is not advised in any HCOB. It could result in artificially created
deficiencies or in things turning on which are not then properly run out.
Also, where a pc being audited was at the same time experimenting on his
own with Niacin dosages, it could present some puzzling aspects of the case
to the Case Supervisor and could throw a curve into the C/Sing or
programming.
HCOB 21.5.80 - 13 -
The Purification Rundown has been carefully researched and piloted.
It is concerned with freeing up the individual for future spiritual
improvement. As such it is a programmed action carried out daily under C/S
supervision and with medical approval for the individual to be on the
Rundown and medical advices given as required. There is no issue which
advises or advocates a person experimenting with it on his own.
9. HAS ANYONE COMPLETED THE RUNDOWN TO FULL END PHENOMENA BEFORE REACHING
5000 MILLIGRAMS OF NIACIN?
Per the original research and all reported survey data, there are a
number of people who have completed the Rundown to full end phenomena on
dosages under 5000 mgs of Niacin. Others have gone as high as that dosage
before completing.
Apparently in some areas there was, earlier on, some
misinterpretation of the purification Rundown HCOBs to the effect that one
would be required to work up to a point where a 5000 mg Niacin dosage
produced no effect, in order to achieve the EP-which is not the case. There
is no statement in any HCOB to this effect.
The End Phenomena is reached when the individual is free of the
restimulative presence of residuals of past drugs and other toxic
substances. He will no longer be feeling the effects of these impurities
going into restimulation and there is a marked resurgence of overall
spiritual well being.
The fact of having a heavy drug history does not necessarily prolong
the Rundown. It can do so but it is not true in all cases. More important
than anything else is keeping all points of the Rundown in standardly,
maintaining a well-balanced personal schedule with enough rest and
nutrients, and getting as much exercise and sauna as possible on a routine
daily basis.
On such a schedule, persons of varying drug histories, some heavy,
some light, have completed the Rundown in 18 to 20 days at five hours a
day, reaching the EP at amounts of Niacin which differed with different
individuals. Some have done so in less time.
From reports based on direct observation, apparently what can happen
in some cases (not all) is that the residuals of past drugs and other
chemicals (sometimes every drug or medicine the person has taken) can
restimulate and turn on heavily in the first week or ten days of the
Rundown at lower dosages of, say, up to 1000 Niacin. It doesn't always
happen in an orderly fashion and it can be severe but the person will
handle these drug residuals, blow through any accompanying manifestations,
and after that it can go totally flat with no effects showing up on the
higher amounts of Niacin. Others will turn on these effects in a more
graduated sequence, one following the other, and it can take longer.
From the original research and piloting of the Rundown, and from the
reports of those currently delivering it and the personal reports from
those who have completed or are on it, one can expect any variety of
manifestations to crop up, not all of them comfortable by any means.
Where the person was on a sensible and well-kept schedule, with all
other parts of the Rundown fully in, these manifestations would de-
intensify and blow without undue discomfort or hang-up. As the toxic
substances became active, he would experience their restimulative effects
and come through these periods with nice wins. One would then see a gradual
brightening of the person as he progressed.
HCOB 21.5.80 - 14 -
Reported also was the fact that sometimes, especially on the lower
Niacin dosages, one could get a person coming through some drug experience
with such a sense of relief and release and such a big win that he would
report he had completed when he actually had more to do. Or a person would
have an auditing-type cognition or a whole string of such cognitions and
mistake that for the EP. These, of course, are excellent wins but not
necessarily the End phenomena. Big wins can be expected during the course
of the Rundown, but in cases where the person was discontinued on the
strength of such a win before all the toxic residuals had been handled, the
person would come up with more to be done and would have to be returned to
the Rundown to complete it. One must be able to recognize the difference
between a good win and the actual EP.
In all those areas surveyed, where a person was progressing well on
the program he could be observed to be becoming more uptone and aware. He
would start reporting exactly what was going on, what drug was turning on,
what impurities and restimulations he was running out. He could usually
tell if he had hit a tolerance level on a certain vitamin. All of these are
valid reactions throughout the run. As the person would release and blow
through whatever was there to turn on, the manifestations became less day
by day, and he would reach a point where no further manifestations were
coming up. He would look and feel remarkably better, brighter and more
alert; he would have come through good wins and he would often know and
state that he felt free of impurities and their associated restimulative
effects and originate on his own that he had done it. With all those
indicators one could be pretty sure he had done it.
The amount of vitamin and mineral nutrients, exercise and sweat out
it has taken and will take to accomplish this on the Purification Rundown
is an individual matter.
There is no hard and fast rule laid down anywhere that says a person
must work up to 5000 mgs Niacin before he is complete.
10. WHAT IS THE "WIND DOWN" THAT FOLLOWS PURIFICATION RUNDOWN COMPLETION?
There is no such thing, unless one would give that term to the action
of coming down off heavy vitamin and other nutrient dosages on a steep
gradient, rather than abruptly, following Purification Rundown completion,
as suggested in the original bulletin (HCOB 6 Feb 78RA, page 18).
In one area it was found that this section of the bulletin was being
misinterpreted to mean one gradiently did less of all the elements of the
Purification Rundown-i.e., less sauna, less exercise, less vitamins, etc.,
each day, and this was being called a "wind down". This is not stated in
any of the HCOBs, and is not a valid action.
The suggestion that is made is that one doesn't abruptly simply cease
the extra nutrients he has been taking, but comes down from high dosages on
a steep gradient to what would be a moderate daily normal requirement for
him, per medical advices. And that along with this some moderate daily
exercise will help him maintain good health.
Continuing all the elements of the Purification Rundown would amount
to
continuing the Rundown itself past the point of valid completion, and
further,
would delay the person getting
HCOB 21.5.80 - 15 -
onto the auditing he is programmed for as his next step.
ADDITIONAL QUESTIONS ON END PHENOMENA AND NIACIN
Certain additional questions have arisen regarding the End Phenomena
of the Rundown in relation to Niacin which should be taken up here so that
the data is broadly known.
The first of these is:
11. CAN THE RUNDOWN BE CONSIDERED FLAT IF THE PERSON SEEMS TO HAVE REACHED
THE EP AND IS GETTING NO MORE MANIFESTATIONS TURNING ON OR NO OTHER
CHANGE
OCCURRING BUT STILL GETS A SLIGHT RESULT FROM 5000 MGS NIACIN?
The person could very well be complete, but there are several factors
to be looked at regarding this point.
The person could be hung up on some outness in the early stages of
the Rundown, which would show up on a full review of his Purification
Rundown history. One could do a full inspection of his folder, particularly
in the area of minerals and vitamins, what effect they had, were these
dosages standard and kept in the proper balance, was the Rundown
administered standardly and done regularly. The person could be interviewed
as well, and you might find some outness such as he doesn't like
vegetables, he never eats vegetables, etc., etc. So parts of the Rundown
could have been violated, and this could be showing up in the manifestation
described above. It may be that he has some deficiency which has been
bypassed and thus some sort of hang-up was created. There is the
possibility that if the Rundown hasn't been done properly throughout, one
could get such a hang-up. And with that there's a possibility of some
deficiency alongside it which won't allow a complete discharge. A medical
check would be done if the folder shows irregularities to determine if this
is the case and, if so, to get it remedied. Getting any such deficiency
remedied and getting all points of the Rundown in standardly would bring it
to successful completion, in a case where such outnesses have existed.
There is also the possibility that the person simply has more to do
on the Rundown.
And there is the possibility, and this may be by far the most common,
that the person has reached the EP and is in overrun.
If he has done the Rundown standardly and has reached the End
Phenomena as described earlier in this bulletin and in HCOB 6 Feb 78RA, the
chances are he is complete on the Rundown despite the fact he is still
getting some slight result from 5000 mgs of Niacin.
It is possible to overrun the Purification Rundown if one is not well
aware of what is to be looked for in the End Phenomena. There have been
cases of overrun where the person was continued for some weeks at 5000 mgs
(5 grams) of Niacin with nothing more turning on than a slight effect. And
there have been cases of overrun that occurred at less than 5000 mgs of
Niacin.
The possibility exists here that if the point of completion of the
Rundown is reached and bypassed the person could begin to dramatize a
Niacin flush. It would be like any other bypassed condition, such as a
bypassed F/N.
The condition tends to hang
HCOB 21.5.80 - 16 -
up because it is not acknowledged or signalized to have ended. This is
simply an educated guess as to how this could occur, but it is also borne
out by careful study of several cases on record where bypass of the EP and
overrun did take place.
After the person has been on the regimen for some time, has come
through good changes and is handing you the indicators of the EP, carrying
him on the Rundown for six or seven days with no further effects at any
dosage is really an overrun. In some of these cases it appears that 5000
mgs Niacin isn't doing anything that 3500 mgs of Niacin didn't do.
To repeat, the End Phenomena can and has been reached on 5000 mgs of
Niacin and on dosages of lower than 5000 mgs. Once the drug and chemical
residuals are handled they're handled. The person will feel the difference.
Upping the dosage does not necessarily find more to be handled. And
continuing the person past the EP can hang the whole thing up and produce a
slight effect as a dramatization, either sporadically or each time the
Niacin is taken.
This can then become confusing to the person himself and to the C/S.
If the overrun is continued you'll see the person begin to go downtone,
even if only slightly. His indicators become a bit less bright, he may
become disheartened. He may now be efforting to produce some result that
isn't there to be had and begin to feel the action is interminable.
Certainly the person will appear less enthusiastic about the whole
procedure and may begin to protest it. The picture now looks as if the
Rundown is unflat whereas what has happened is that he achieved the EP,
reached a point where he felt great, was getting no further manifestation
of any kind (if even for only a day) and the fact was not acknowledged but
bypassed. Overrun phenomena then sets in.
C/Ses report there have been a few cases who "rabbited" (wanted to
run away from continuing the Rundown to its EP because it was
uncomfortable, or out of other considerations) and insisted they were
complete after a very few days at low Niacin dosage when little or nothing
had yet turned on. But these cases were few and easily detected and handled
by bringing them to a better understanding of the Rundown and its purpose
and what it does. In two such cases where the persons were allowed to
attest after too brief and skimpy a run, they both went into drug
restimulation which should and would have been handled routinely on the
Rundown. After full review of these cases, with medical participation, they
were put back on the Rundown and completed it properly.
Judging from reports, including the many personal reports received,
by far the majority are eager beavers who can't wait to turn on something
on the Rundown and blow through it. They report drugs, medicines,
anesthetics, alcohol, restimulation of various biochemical reactions,
somatics or other manifestations turning on and blowing, and they report
them all enthusiastically and with great relief and look for more! Such
cases will often know and tell you when they've honestly reached the EP.
One C/S also reported he had had cases on his lines where the person
from all indications was complete and stated he was complete but wanted to
continue a bit longer "just to make sure". Allowed to go on, these cases
promptly got into overrun Phenomena, went downtone and were getting no
change. In each case, when all was checked out, it was found the EP had
been reached at the point the person stated he was completed. So it appears
that on the Purification Rundown just as in other Rundowns it doesn't do to
continue past a valid EP. Should it happen it is handled simply by having
the person spot when he did complete and acknowledging it.
HCOB 21.5.80 - 17 -
What also showed up in the survey data was the rare bird who would
try to handle his whole case on the Rundown and who looked for some result
above and beyond the EP of this Rundown. Such a case would need to be given
a very thorough R-factor on the Rundown and be carefully C/Sed, with
medical liaison as necessary, throughout.
It was found important to make real the fact that all that is being
looked for here is the person free of the restimulative effects of past
drug and toxic residuals so that the person can then be audited with
optimum gain and spiritual enlightenment.
It is up to the Case Supervisor to know each case, to be familiar
with the progress of each case, to keep the medical liaison lines in, and
to know well the indicators to expect when the End Phenomena has been
reached so that it can be acknowledged and validated.
Another question that has come up with some frequency is:
12. WHAT COULD ACCOUNT FOR A PERSON WHO HAS GENUINELY COMPLETED THE RUNDOWN
WITH NO NIACIN REACTION AT 5000 MGS (OR LESS) THEN GETTING A REACTION
LATER AT LOWER NIACIN DOSAGES?
Such a reaction, where the person has actually done the Rundown
standardly to its End phenomena, does not mean the Rundown is unflat.
To understand this reaction one needs a good understanding of the
bank and how it works. The specifics of what has happened in these
instances can be quite variable, but what you are looking at here in
general is that there has been an environmental shift or change which
produced another type of bank key-in.
To begin with, we are living in a two-pole, a two-terminal universe.
(Ref: HCOB 8 June 63R, Rev. 3.10.77, THE TIME TRACK AND ENGRAM RUNNING BY
CHAINS, Bulletin 2: HANDLING THE TIME TRACK). It takes a two-terminal
situation to hang something up.
On the Purification Rundown we are looking at two things: one, the
actual drugs and toxic residuals in the body (and medical autopsies have
shown that they are there), and two, the bank mock-up or facsimile of the
drugs, drug residuals and their effects.
These two conditions are hung up-one of them playing against the
other, in perfect balance. What the person is feeling is the two
conditions, one of them the actual presence of the drug residuals, the
other the bank mock-up of them. The thetan can actually, via his bank, mock
up a perfect synthesis or a counterfeit of drugs. So you are getting two
reactions here, one of them a total counterfeit but no less real to the
person, nevertheless. The counterfeit is just bank restimulating and,
oddly enough, the bank can approximate practically every drug there is
under the sun. The bank can also approximate the effects of radiation and
it will look just exactly like a physiologically caused effect.
I don't think the bank can necessarily key in a physiological
reaction where an actual physical basis for such has not existed somewhere
on the person's track. It can deform or change positions or rates of
metabolism. It can change endocrine conditions and therefore can change
various bodily conditions. And it is true that a thetan can mock up a
facsimile strongly enough so that it hurts.
HCOB 21.5.80 - 18 -
Probably the reason why the Purification Rundown works is that it
handles the one side of it and thus fixes the person up so that the other
side, the bank facsimile side of it, is no longer restimulative or in
constant restimulation. It's as simple as that.
What, amongst other things, is happening on the Purification Rundown
is that you cause an upset of this perfect balance and suddenly this
balance goes b-z-z-z-t! The balance isn't there anymore so you don't get
the cross reaction anymore. But it takes auditing to totally erase the
bank. In other words, while the balance has been upset, all of the bank
facsimiles are not gone. They're not keying in and they're not being
reinforced by the presence of drug residuals but they're not necessarily
blown.
A thetan can mock up anything. Thus, as the person is coming down off
the Rundown on gradient Niacin and other vitamin dosages, he can hit an
area where some factor in the environment can cause the facsimile to go
into restimulation again. You can get a bank reaction which, so far as
anyone could tell, would be absolutely identical to what the physiological
reaction would be.
It doesn't mean there are still accumulated residuals. It is that the
bank or facsimile side of this two-terminal hang-up isn't necessarily flat.
It was flat for that period of time. Now the person drops back, moves into
another environment, another period of time, probably goes out in the sun
and gets himself a nice sunburn or something of this sort, and his bank
cross-reacts.
That is the basic theory behind this type of manifestation.
Upon completion of the Purification Rundown, the person is now in
good shape to receive auditing and get optimum gain from it. Auditing is
what handles the bank. When the Purification Rundown is completed and the
person has fully flattened Objectives, the Drug Rundown is his next step,
and it is on the Drug Rundown that one handles the mental and spiritual
reactions from drugs. An OT would (after OT III) be given the OT Drug
Rundown. Or, if the person is on NED for OTs, he would receive the NED for
OTs Drug Rundown.
Thus, we are not looking at an endless run on the Purification
Rundown. We're seeking simply to handle the drug deposits and toxic
residues in their restimulation and reinforcement of the bank, and vice
versa. And by breaking up the balance of these two and handling the one
side of it on the Purification Rundown we are freeing up the person to
handle the other side of it, the bank facsimile side of it, in auditing-and
successfully.
With these factors handled the individual is now ready for all the
spiritual gain that can be achieved in his future processing.
If these summarized findings are of interest and helpful to those in
the many, many areas where the Purification Rundown is being delivered, I
am pleased to be able to give you this data.
HCOB 21.5.80 - 19 -
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
As assisted by
LRH Technical
Compilations Unit
LRH:RTCU:nsp
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
The Purification Rundown has as its sole purpose the handling of the
restimulative effects of drugs and toxic residuals on a Spiritual Being.
The Purification Rundown is a Spiritual activity based on and administered
according to the doctrine and practices of the religion of Scientology as
set forth in the writings of L. Ron Hubbard and adopted by the Church. No
part of the Rundown is intended as the diagnosis, prescription for, or
treatment of any bodily or physical condition or ill. The Church is not
responsible for the handling of any bodily or physical condition or ill, it
being the responsibility of the individual to seek the competent medical
advice and treatment of his doctor in such matters.
THE BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
As assisted by
LRH Technical
Compilations Unit
THE BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=20/5/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
CANCELLATION OF BTB 11 AUGUST 1974
REGISTRAR SALESMANSHIP DRILLS
Type = 12
iDate=11/8/74
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Remimeo
All Orgs
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 20 MAY 1980
Remimeo
All Orgs
Also issued as an HCO PL of the same date and same title.
CANCELLATION OF BTB 11 AUGUST 1974
REGISTRAR SALESMANSHIP DRILLS
BTB 11 August 1974, REGISTRAR SALESMANSHIP DRILLS is hereby
cancelled. The drills given as Registrar Salesmanship Drills omitted the
basic LRH policies and tech that make a successful Registrar.
These would include such basics as the Dissemination Drill, use of
the Tone Scale and the communication formula.
There are now new Registrar Drills which incorporate the LRH policies
and tech of basic Registrar skills. These are issued in HCO PL 27 May 1980,
REGISTRAR DRILLS.
There is also a new series-"Big League" Registration Series-issued as
HCO PLs so Registrars now have all the techniques they need to have
tremendous success.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by Kathy Stewart
CS-4
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:KS:bk
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by Kathy Stewart
CS-4
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=18/5/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
START-CHANGE-STOP
COMMANDS
Remimeo
Tech
Qual
Survival RD
NED
Academy Levels
SHSBC
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 18 MAY 1980
Remimeo
Tech
Qual
Survival RD
NED
Academy Levels
SHSBC
START-CHANGE-STOP
COMMANDS
(Ref: HCOB 28 Jul 58 CLEAR PROCEDURE
PAB 97 1 Oct 56 START-CHANGE-STOP CONTROL AND
THE MECHANICS OF S.C.S.
SCIENTOLOGY: CLEAR PROCEDURE-ISSUE ONE)
Start, Change and Stop is the anatomy of control.
This is the cycle of action.
There is no such thing as bad control, only nonpositive control. Good
control is positive control and positive control is not bad control.
Start-Change-Stop is the name of an Objective process. It has two
stages, both of which are designed to gradiently raise the pc's ability to
control.
The process is often abbreviated as "SCS".
SCS ON AN OBJECT
The first stage of running Start-Change-Stop is "SCS ON AN OBJECT".
Starting, changing and stopping an object is a lower level than
moving the body.
The following are the commands for SCS ON AN OBJECT. (This has been
taken from parts of the LRH film script "SCS" which is scheduled for
academy showing.)
COMMANDS-SCS ON AN OBJECT
START:
1. "I am going to ask you to start the (object) and when I tell you to
start, you start the (object) in that direction (Auditor indicates a
direction with his hand). Do you understand that?"
2. "Start."
3. "Did you start the (object) ?"
(Repeat commands 1,2,3,1,2, etc. until pc is easily doing the commands on
that object.)
CHANGE:
1. "This spot we are going to call 'A'." (Auditor indicates
HCOB 18.5.80 - 2 -
spot "A" with a piece of marked tape on the table or a marked piece of
paper on the floor as appropriate.)
2. "This spot we are going to call 'B'." (Auditor indicates spot "B" with
a
piece of marked tape on the table or a marked piece of paper on the
floor as appropriate.)
3. "This spot we are going to call 'C'." (Auditor indicates spot "C" with
a
piece of marked tape on the table or a marked piece of paper on the
floor as appropriate.)
4. "This spot we are going to call 'D'." (Auditor indicates spot "D" with
a
piece of marked tape on the table or a marked piece of paper on the
floor as appropriate.)
5. "When I ask you to change the (object), I want you to change the
(object's) position from 'A' to 'B'. Do you understand that?"
6. "Change."
7. "Did you change the (object)?"
8. "When I ask you to change the (object), I want you to change the
(object's) position from 'B' to 'C'. Do you understand that.
9. "Change."
10. "Did you change the (object)?"
11. "When I ask you to change the (object), I want you to change the
(object's) position from 'C' to 'D'. Do you understand that?"
12. "Change."
13. "Did you change the (object)?"
(Repeat commands 1-13, 1-13, etc. until pc is easily doing the commands on
that object.)
(Note: When the commands 1-13 are repeated, the locations of the
designated spots do not have to be the same as the previous time as it
makes the process too much like duplication, brings the preclear to predict
the process too easily and he will do it machine-wise.)
STOP:
1. "I am going to tell you to get the (object) moving in that direction
(Auditor indicates direction with his hand). Somewhere along the line I
will tell you to stop. Then you stop the (object). Do you understand?"
2. "Get the (object) moving."
3. "Stop!"
4. "Did you stop the (object)?" (Repeat commands 1,2,3,4,1,2,3, etc. until
pc is easily doing the commands on that object.)
The auditor would now run Start again on the same object and so on,
until neither Start, Change nor Stop produces any change.
HCOB 18.5.80 - 3 -
The auditor starts SCS ON AN OBJECT by running commands on a small
gradient object (such as a paper clip).
When the first object is flat, the auditor runs SCS on an object that
is larger (such as a brick, a beach ball, etc.) until this is flat and then
goes to a larger object and so on until the pc has a realization about
Starting, Changing and Stopping objects and can do so easily. (This can
happen at any point while running SCS ON AN OBJECT.)
SCS ON THE BODY
The second stage of running Start-Change-Stop is "SCS ON THE BODY".
The pc is at this point, processed towards the ability to be in
control of his body.
The following are the commands for SCS ON THE BODY. (This has been
taken from parts of the LRH film script "SCS" which is scheduled for
academy showing.)
COMMANDS-SCS ON THE BODY
START:
1. "I am going to ask you to start the body. I am not going to ask you to
stop."
2. "When I ask you to start the body, start the body. OK?"
8. "Start!"
4. "Did you start the body?"
(Repeat commands 1,2,8,4,1,2,3,4, etc. until the pc is easily doing the
commands.)
CHANGE:
1. "This spot we are going to call 'A'." (Auditor indicates spot "A" with
a
piece of marked paper on the floor.)
2. "This spot we are going to call 'B'." (Auditor indicates spot "B" with
a
piece of marked paper on the floor.)
3. "This spot we are going to call 'C'." (Auditor indicates spot with a
piece
of marked paper on the floor.)
4. "This spot we are going to call 'D'." (Auditor indicates spot with a
piece
of marked paper on the floor.)
5. "When I ask you to change the body, I want you to change the body's
position from 'A' to 'B'. Do you understand that?"
6. "Change."
7. "Did you change the body?"
8. "When I ask you to change the body, I want you to change the body's
position from 'B' to 'C'. Do you understand that?"
9. "Change."
10. "Did you change the body?"
HCOB 18.5.80 - 4 -
11. "When I ask you to change the body, I want you to change the body's
position from 'C' to 'D'. Do you understand that?"
12. "Change."
13. "Did you change the body?"
(Repeat commands 1-13, 1-13, etc. until pc is easily doing the commands.)
STOP:
1. "I am going to tell you to get the body moving in that direction
(Auditor
indicates direction with his hand). Somewhere along the line I will
tell you to stop. Then you will stop the body. Do you understand?"
2. "Get the body moving."
3. "Stop!"
4. "Did you stop the body?"
(Repeat commands 1,2,3,4,1,2,8,4, etc. until pc is easily doing the
commands.)
STOP SUPREME:
1. "I'm going to ask you to get the body moving. And at some point I am
going
to tell you to stop. And when I do, I want you to stop the body as fast
as you can and hold it as still as you can. OK?"
2. "Get the body moving."
3. "Stop!"
4. "Did you do it?"
(Repeat commands 1,2,3,4,1,2,3, etc. until pc is easily doing the
commands.)
The auditor would now run Start again on the body and so on, until
neither Start, Change, Stop nor Stop Supreme produces change. The pc will
be able to do the steps of SCS easily and will have a realization about
Starting, Changing and Stopping the body. (This can happen at any point
while running SCS ON THE BODY.)
Whenever the pc is standing to execute a command, the auditor is
standing next to the pc. He also ensures that he is touching the pc (hand
lightly on pc's arm or elbow etc.) when he gives the pc the R-factor such
as in steps 5, 8 and 11 above.
The auditor of course always acknowledges the pc for every execution
of an auditing command.
The only way to err on running SCS is to run it with imprecision and
bad ARC. It is perfectly easy to be precise with high ARC.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:MM:bk
Copyright $c 1980 As assisted by
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED TECHNICAL PROJECT I/C
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
As assisted by
TECHNICAL PROJECT I/C
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=17/5/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
ADMINISTRATIVE TRAINING DRILLS
ADMIN TRs
Type = 12
iDate=7/2/71
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Remimeo
Survival RD
SO Orgs
Scn Orgs
Staff Training Colleges
Tech
Qual
SSOs
FEBC Course
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 17 MAY 1980
Remimeo
Survival RD Cancels BTB 7 Feb 71
SO Orgs Reissued 16 Jul 74 same title
Scn Orgs
Staff Training Colleges
Tech
Qual
SSOs
FEBC Course
ADMINISTRATIVE TRAINING DRILLS
ADMIN TRs
These training drills were originally developed as a training aid for
administrators for the purpose of training them to get compliances and
complete cycles of action concerning administrative actions and orders.
The Admin TRs (training routines) are designed towards increasing
one's causativeness over the everyday confusions, randomities,
justifications, excuses, traps and insanities of the physical universe
(Matter, Energy, Space and Time) and people (groups). They enable one to
comfortably confront such things when encountered.
Needless to say, such abilities, if attained, would greatly increase
any individual's survival in this world and since these Admin TRs do
produce these abilities they are of extreme value.
These drills start off very gradiently and work up to a high pitch of
confront and handling by the individual.
They are done with a twin and they must be coached with full
understanding of the need to give the individual doing them wins. He must
not be driven out the bottom or into overwhelm due to forcing him to
confront too much too quickly.
Each drill is run to a win where the individual is doing the drill
comfortably and without effort and is happy about his ability to do it.
Even if an individual feels he will experience little change on some
of the beginning drills, he will upon doing them, become aware of an
increase in awareness or just a good feeling about doing them.
On the later drills the individual (when coached on a gradient of
getting tougher and tougher) will find that he can confront and handle any
such activities or randomities he may encounter.
These drills must be coached with positive, knowing, predictable
control towards the individual's willingness to be at cause concerning the
things and activities being addressed.
Do these drills well and you will witness a tenfold increase in
SURVIVAL POTENTIAL for individuals as well as administrators!
HCOB 17.5.80 - 2 -
TR MEST 0
NAME: Confronting MEST.
COMMANDS: "Confront that _______ ." (names object.)
POSITION: Student and Coach sitting or standing a comfortable distance
apart.
PURPOSE: To accustom Student to confront MEST and to hold a position in
relation to it. To be there and not do anything else but be there.
TRAINING STRESS: To teach Student to confront exactly what is indicated
without vias and without additive gestures or emotional reactions. The
Coach chooses a small object connected to the Student's post. Coach points
to the object and gives Command, "Confront that _______ (names object)".
Student does so. Coach makes no comments. As soon as Student is comfortable
confronting the object with no reaction, the Coach acknowledges, chooses a
new object and repeats the cycle. The Drill continues using gradiently
larger objects for gradiently longer periods of time. Flunks are given for
breaks of confront, additive actions and reactions. pass when the Student
can confront any object comfortably without reaction and has Good
Indicators on the Drill.
NOTE: Do NOT flunk the Student if sudden GIs come in and he feels good
about the Drill. This is a desired change.
TR MEST 1
NAME: MEST Intention.
COMMANDS: "Move that _______ (object)".
POSITION: Student and Coach sitting or standing a comfortable distance
apart.
PURPOSE: To train Student to deliver an order and intention concerning the
control and handling of MEST.
TRAINING STRESS: To teach the Student that his own intention has something
to do with the handling of MEST in his environment. The Student must
deliver the command clearly and with sufficient intention to carry through
and accomplish the moving of the MEST object by the Coach. The Coach does
NOT Bull-Bait but only carries out the order if it is received clearly and
with good intention. A selection of objects from the student's post is
used. The Student acks the Coach for carrying out the command. Flunks are
given for failure to get the object moved, failure to confront the action
or failure to confront the MEST involved. The Drill is passed when the
Student can do the Drill easily and comfortably with no back-off from the
action of getting the MEST moved by another.
TR MEST 2
NAME: Acknowledging MEST Cycles.
COMMANDS: None. Coach originates handling of MEST. POSITION: Student and
Coach standing or sitting a comfortable distance apart.
PURPOSE: To train Student to recognize, accept and thoroughly
HCOB 17.5.80 - 3 -
acknowledge the completion of an action in the MEST universe.
TRAINING STRESS: To teach the Student that his acknowledgement can end a
cycle of action and that his intention to end it is senior to effort. The
Coach originates a cycle of action such as giving the Student a small
object, moving an object to another location or picking up an object to
look at. Student acknowledges the action when it is complete. Student may
do anything at first to get his acknowledgement across but gradiently is
smoothed out until he can end cycle effortlessly. Coach flunks for failure
to recognize when an action is complete, failure to freely accept the
action and failure to end the cycle with good intention. Pass when the
Student can do the Drill easily and comfortably.
TR MEST 3
NAME: MEST Duplicative Command.
COMMANDS: "Pick up that _______ (named object)".
"Hand it to me please."
"Put it down there." (Student indicates place.)
POSITION: Student and Coach standing or sitting a comfortable distance
apart.
PURPOSE: To train the Student to not give up but to continue his intention
to complete a cycle of action in the physical universe. To do each cycle in
a new unit time and not as a blur with other cycles.
TRAINING STRESS: To teach the Student not to be thrown off and not to Q & A
if he doesn't get immediate compliance to his command, and to keep on until
he does get the cycle of action completed in the physical universe.
The Coach may stop complying with the cycle of action at any point
and hold the cycle frozen at that point. The Student must repeat the last
given command until he gets the cycle of action started again and follow it
through to completion. No verbal Bull-Baiting or physical originations by
Coach.
Flunks are given for poor intentions, failure to repeat the exact
command, failure to confront the MEST or confront and get the cycle of
action completed in the physical universe.
Pass when the Student can do the drill comfortably and easily.
TR MEST 4
NAME: MEST Cycle Alter-Is.
COMMANDS: Same as MEST 3.
POSITION: Student and Coach standing or sitting a comfortable distance
apart.
PURPOSE: To train the Student to get his intended cycle of action carried
out in the physical universe in spite of counter-intention and alter-is and
to distinguish between a genuine attempt to comply and a deliberate non-
compliance or alter-is.
TRAINING STRESS: To teach Student not to be startled or thrown off and not
to
give up or Q & A with non-compliance, inaccurate or incompetent attempts to
complete cycles of action in the physical universe. The Drill is the same
as
TR MEST 3 with the addition that the Coach may deliberately perform the
wrong
action at any time or may attempt to pass the object to the Student when he
has not asked for it. The Student repeats the order
HCOB 17.5.80 - 4 -
whenever the Coach freezes the cycle of action or deliberately does a wrong
command. The Student acknowledges the Coach and
repeats the order when the Coach does the command almost correctly or
attempts to hand the object to the Student when it is not so ordered.
Flunks are given as in MEST TR 3 and also for acknowledging a
deliberate non-compliance or alter-is and for failing to acknowledge a
genuine attempt at compliance and eventual completion. If the Student
accepts the object on the Coach's origination it is also a flunk.
Pass when the Student can do the Drill comfortably and easily with no
confusion or non-confront.
TR PEOPLE 0
NAME: Confronting People.
COMMANDS: "Confront that person.
or
"Confront those people."
POSITION: Coach and Student ambulatory.
PURPOSE: To accustom Student to confronting people and to hold a position
in relation to them. To be there and not do anything but be there.
TRAINING STRESS: To teach Student to confront people singly and in groups
without vias or additive gestures and without reacting or being afraid or
embarrassed. The Coach and Student walk round to where various people or
groups of people are located at work etc. The Coach indicates a person or
group of people to the Student and gives him the appropriate command. The
Student complies. The Coach has the Student confront larger and larger
groups of people on a gradient. Flunks are given for breaking confront or
for being disturbed when people stop what they are doing and become
interested in the Student.
Pass when the Student can confront people easily and feels good doing the
Drill.
TR PEOPLE 1
NAME: People Intention.
COMMANDS: "Hello."
POSITION: Student and Coach both standing and sitting or one standing and
the other sitting, at varying distances apart. Coach doing some action such
as reading, writing, sorting papers, tying shoelace, etc.
PURPOSE: To teach the Student that he can get an order and intention across
to another person under varying conditions and when they have their
attention elsewhere, so that it is received.
TRAINING STRESS: To teach the Student that he can get through to others no
matter where their attention may be and that his intention to reach them is
the senior factor. The Coach takes up a position and occupies himself with
another action. The Student approaches and says, "Hello". The hello must
be delivered so that it reaches the Coach and gets his full attention. The
distance between the Student and Coach is increased on a gradient up to 20
feet away. Stress is on correct intention not on volume or force. The Coach
acks when the Student reaches him.
HCOB 17.5.80 - 5 -
Flunks are given for failure to confront or for failing to reach with
good intention.
Pass when the Student can do the Drill easily without effort and can
get the Coach's attention from 20 feet away.
TR PEOPLE 2
NAME: People Acknowledgements.
COMMANDS: None. Coach originates.
POSITION: Various. Student and Coach standing and sitting. The Student may
occupy himself with another simple action and Coach approaches Student to
give origination.
PURPOSE: To train a Student to use an acknowledgement as a method of
correctly ending a cycle of action for other people.
TRAINING STRESS: The Student is trained to acknowledge a report or message
given so that the person knows it was heard and understood. The Coach
approaches or gives from a distance a sensible report or message concerning
the completion of some simple post cycle. The Student acknowledges Coach so
that Coach knows he has been heard and that the cycle is ended. The Coach
may then employ one or two other people to give reports to the Student in
succession. Flunks are given for Student non-confront or for failure to end
the cycle with his acknowledgement.
Pass when the Student can comfortably be receipt of a report on a
complete cycle of action and can end cycle on the action without under or
over acknowledgement.
TR PEOPLE 3
NAME: Group Command.
COMMANDS: "Hello."
POSITION: Student and Coach ambulatory.
PURPOSE: To teach the Student to get an order and intention across to a
group of people when their attention is elsewhere, to get an answer and to
acknowledge it.
TRAINING STRESS: To teach a Student that a group of people can be
approached without upsetting them, and that an order can be given, and
compliance acknowledged. Coach indicates a group of people chatting or some
such activity (not engaged in important cycles of action) and directs
Student, "Say 'Hello' to that group." Student does so without upsetting the
group. He repeats the "Hello" if necessary to get a reply from the majority
of the group. Student then acknowledges the group.
Flunks are given for failure to confront, failure to get the
attention of the group, failure to get an answer from the group (majority)
and failure to acknowledge the answer. (If necessary, other students can be
used and can pose as a group occupied with other actions.) Pass when
Student can do the Drill comfortably and successfully without back-off or
strain and without upsetting a group.
TR PEOPLE 4
NAME: Selected Group Command.
COMMAND: "Hello."
HCOB 17.5.80 - 6 -
POSITION: Coach and Student ambulatory, plus selected group of three or
more persons standing or sitting.
PURPOSE: To train Student to get an order and intention across to a group
of people, to get an answer and to acknowledge despite counter-intention
from the group.
TRAINING STRESS: The same as for TR PEOPLE 3 except that a selected group
of people are used who are instructed only to look up and answer the
Student when his intention really reaches them. (No Bull-Baiting is
allowed.) Student repeats the order until he gets compliance and then
acknowledges the group.
Flunks are given for back-off, poor intention, failure to get the
order complied with and failure to correctly acknowledge the execution of
the order. (The reply to the "Hello".)
Pass when the Student is really getting his intention through easily
and he is getting compliance and acknowledging.
TR MEST BULL-BAIT
TR MEST BB 0
NAME: Confronting MEST with distractions.
COMMANDS: "Confront that _______ (named object)."
POSITION: Student and Coach standing or sitting at a desk with a stack of
papers or objects on the desk.
PURPOSE: To accustom Student to confronting MEST and to hold a position in
relation to it. To be there and not do anything but be there despite
attempts to distract him and prevent him from confronting.
TRAINING STRESS: Same as TR MEST 0 with the addition that the Coach Bull-
Baits and verbally attempts to distract the Student from confronting the
paper or objects. When the Student can do this comfortably without breaking
his confront of the MEST, the Coach may start moving and changing the MEST,
adding other objects and taking them away and shifting them. (Do not get
too wild.) Verbal Bull-Baiting is kept in also.
Flunks are given for failure to confront the MEST or the Bull-Baiting.
Pass when the Student can do the Drill comfortably without flunking.
TR MEST BB 1:
NAME: MEST Intention with Distraction.
COMMANDS: "Hand me that book."
POSITION: Student and Coach seated a comfortable distance apart. Coach has
a book on his knees.
PURPOSE: To train the Student to deliver an order and intention concerning
the control and handling of MEST and get compliance despite distractions
and attempts to prevent him doing so.
TRAINING STRESS: Student is trained to get his intention concerning the
control and handling of MEST across to the Coach and get compliance in
spite of Bull-Baiting and resistance by the Coach.
HCOB 17.5.80 - 7 -
The Coach only gives the Student the book when the intention gets across to
him strongly enough that he wants to comply.
Flunks are given for breaks of confront, giving up and poor
intention. Pass when Student can do the Drill comfortably, getting his
intention across without being affected by the Bull-Baiting and getting
compliance to the command.
TR MEST BB 2
NAME: MEST Cycle Acknowledgement with Distractions.
COMMANDS: None. Coach originates handling of MEST.
POSITION: Student and Coach standing or sitting a comfortable distance
apart.
PURPOSE: To train Student to recognize, accept and thoroughly acknowledge
the completion of an action in the physical universe despite distractions
and attempts to prevent him doing so.
TRAINING STRESS: To teach the Student to recognize and acknowledge the
completion of a cycle of action in the physical universe in spite of
distraction and "noise" and attempts to prevent recognition of the fact
that the cycle has occurred. And that his acknowledgement can end a cycle
of action in spite of noise, and that his intention to do so is senior to
effort. The Coach originates a cycle of action such as moving an object
from one location to another. Before, during, and after doing so he
attempts to distract the Student by Bull-Baiting and chatter so as to
prevent the Student realizing that the cycle has occurred or to prevent him
from acknowledging it. Student learns to observe the cycle in the MEST
universe rather than listen to the Coach. Coach flunks for Student failure
to recognize and acknowledge when the cycle is completed, failure to accept
the cycle freely and failure to end the cycle with good intention. Also for
becoming the effect of Bull-Baiting. Pass when the Student can do the drill
easily without flunks.
TR MEST BB 3
NAME: MEST Duplication Command with Distractions.
COMMANDS: Any orders composed of 2 or 3 separate simple actions such as
"Pick up that pen and put it on the chair then place it beside the paper in
the middle of the desk."
POSITION: Student and Coach standing or sitting a comfortable distance
apart.
PURPOSE: To train the Student to not give up but to continue his intention
to complete a cycle of action in the physical universe despite attempts to
distract him and prevent him from doing so. To do each cycle in a new unit
of time and not as a blur with other cycles.
TRAINING STRESS: To teach the Student not to be thrown off and not to Q & A
if he doesn't get immediate compliance with his order. To continue to
repeat the order with full intention until he gets the cycle completed in
the physical universe. The Coach tries to throw the Student off with Bull-
Baiting or by not completing the cycle of action.
Flunks are given for earlier TR failures, for poor intention and for
failing to get compliance.
Pass when the Student can comfortably do the Drill.
HCOB 17.5.80 - 8 -
TR MEST BB 4
NAME: MEST Cycle Alter-Is and Distraction.
COMMANDS: Same as in MEST BB 3.
POSITION: Student or Coach standing or sitting a comfortable distance
apart.
PURPOSE: To train the Student to get his intended cycle of action carried
out in the physical universe despite counter-intentions, alter-is and other
distractions and excuses.
TRAINING STRESS: Same as in MEST BB 3 with the addition that student must
acknowledge originations concerning the cycle being performed by the Coach
when necessary to get the order complied with accurately. The Coach may
muddle up the sequence of the actions and also do verbal Bull-Baiting,
reasons why the cycle is impossible, etc.
Flunks are given for failure in earlier TRs of this series and
particularly for poor intention or failure to get the cycle completed.
Pass when Student can successfully do the Drill comfortably, using
intention but not effort.
TR PEOPLE BB 0
NAME: Confronting people with Distractions.
COMMANDS: "Confront that Person."
POSITION: Coach and 3rd person standing or sitting a comfortable distance
apart. Student a comfortable distance to the side of them.
PURPOSE: To train the Student to get one person to confront another at his
order and not be thrown off or Q & A with reactions, excuses and reasons
why this should not be done.
TRAINING STRESS: To train the Student to use his confront and intention
through the "via" of another person where the one person may not be willing
to confront and the other not willing to be confronted. The Student gives
the order to the Coach who complies or gives reasons or excuses why he
should not. The other person may give the Coach reasons why he should not
be confronted but may not speak to the Student. The Student must succeed in
getting the Coach to confront the 3rd person despite that person's
objections.
The Coach complies when the Student's confront and intention makes
him want to do so.
The Coach flunks Student for failure to get the Coach to confront the
third person.
Pass when the Student can do Drill without flunks.
TR PEOPLE BB 1
NAME: People Intention with Distractions.
COMMANDS: "Give that book to _______ (person's name)."
POSITION: Coach standing or sitting close to the Student, observing him.
The
Student and a 2nd person are standing or sitting a comfortable distance
apart
with a 3rd person a little
HCOB 17.5.80 - 9 -
way off. Student has a book.
PURPOSE: To train the Student to get his intention across on the via of
another person and to get the Command through despite distractions.
TRAINING STRESS: To teach Student that he can get his intention to carry
through to a 3rd person or persons via a relay terminal. Student gives 2nd
person the order, ""Give that book to _______ ." The 2nd person may give
excuses and reasons not to do it and the 3rd person can do the same. The
2nd person may return to the Student with the book and "explain" how the
3rd person won't accept or let him carry out the command. Stress is on
getting the Student to improve his intention and get compliance to his
orders.
Flunks are given by the Coach for failure to get the 2nd person to
comply, for Q & A, for giving up and for an earlier TR outness.
Pass is given by the Coach when the Student can easily get the
command complied with by the 2nd person.
TR PEOPLE BB 2
NAME: Return Compliance and Acknowledgement.
COMMANDS: "Tell _______ (3rd person's name) to bring me that book."
POSITION: Coach standing or sitting close to the Student, observing him.
The Student and a 2nd person are standing or sitting a comfortable distance
apart with a 3rd person a little way off.
PURPOSE: To train Student to get a command carried out in the physical
universe via another person.
TRAINING STRESS: To teach Student that he can get physical actions complied
with via another person, regardless of the excuses or reasons why of both
persons. The Student hands the 2nd person the book and gives the order,
"Tell _______ to bring me that book." Command with intention is repeated
until the 3rd person complies at which time the Student acknowledges him
fully. The 2nd person may Q & A with the 3rd person's unwillingness and
attempts to alter-is and non-comply.
Flunks are given by the Coach for any failure of earlier TRs and for
failing to have enough intention to get the 2nd person to get the 3rd
person to comply and for failure to acknowledge the completed cycle of
action.
Pass is given by the Coach when the Student can get a command carried
out in the physical universe via another person.
TR PEOPLE BB 3
NAME: Command Relay.
COMMANDS: "Tell _______ to give that book to _______ "(3rd and 4th persons
named).
POSITION: Coach standing or sitting close to the Student, observing him.
Student and 2nd person standing or sitting a
HCOB 17.5.80 - 10 -
comfortable distance apart and a 3rd person standing a few steps further
off holding a book and a 4th person a few steps further off still.
PURPOSE: To train Student to get a command complied with on a relay.
TRAINING STRESS: To teach Student that his intention can be stepped up to a
point where it will carry through terminals on a relay. The Student gives
the command to the 2nd person who orders the 3rd person to give the book to
the 4th person. The 2nd person may Q & A with the command, with the 3rd
person's unwillingness to do it and with the 4th person's inattention or
unwillingness to receive the book.
Flunks are given by the Coach for any break up of the Student's TRs or
failure to persist and get full compliance.
Pass is given by the Coach when the Student can get all persons on a
relay to carry out the command.
TR PEOPLE BB 4
NAME: Group Compliance.
COMMAND: "Give that paper to those people and tell them to put it on their
table."
POSITION: Student standing. Coach standing close to the Student, observing
him. A 2nd and 3rd or more other people are seated in two groups at two
tables a few paces apart.
PURPOSE: To train the Student to get compliance with his orders and
intentions between groups of people and to teach him that intention is
senior to effort.
TRAINING STRESS: To teach the Student that his persistent intention can
overcome the counter-intentions of groups of people and that he can get
them to comply with his orders despite group think, counter effort and
other distractions. The Student gives the people at one table the command
and has them comply and gets the cycle completed. He may order only one
group. These may give excuses and argue between themselves and give reasons
why it can't be done-so may the second group when the paper is taken to
them. The Student repeats the order with full intention to the first group
or a person from the first group until it is fully complied with.
Flunks are given by the Coach for Student failure to persist, for
breaking-up or any other TR outness.
Pass is given by the Coach when Student has succeeded in getting full
compliance with ease and knows he can handle groups intention.
TR R/W MEST
NAME: Reach and Withdraw MEST.
COMMANDS: "Reach that _______ ." (named object)
"Withdraw from that _______ ." (named object)
Coach acknowledging Student for execution of command.
HCOB 17.5.80 - 11 -
POSITION: Student and Coach ambulatory.
PURPOSE: To put the Student at cause over the MEST of his post and area.
TRAINING STRESS: The Coach indicates different objects on a gradiently
larger scale and sees that the Student executes the commands. The Coach
asks from time to time, "How are you doing?" The Coach handles any physical
manifestations of the Student by asking "What is happening?"
The TR is run to a win for the Student.
TR R/W PEOPLE
NAME: Reach and Withdraw from People.
COMMANDS: "Touch that _______ ." (named object)
POSITION: Student and Coach and third person ambulatory.
PURPOSE: To familiarize the person with handling people.
TRAINING STRESS: Student must get the third person to comply with his
command in spite of the Coach's physical attempts to block the person from
doing so. The Student may in turn block the Coach so he can't interfere or
may move him out of the way so that the third person can comply with the
command. Stress should be on intention not on force. The Drill is run until
the Student can quite comfortably take whatever action is necessary to get
his command complied with and feels easy about the necessary Reach and
Withdraw from the Coach and third person in order to do so. The Coach and
third person in order to do so. The Coach may use verbal Bull-Baiting also.
The TR is run to a win and Cog for the Student.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Developed and Piloted
aboard
Flag with the assistance
of
Training & Services Aide
Revision assisted by
Tech Project I/C
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:MM:TSA:djm
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Developed and Piloted aboard
Flag with the assistance of
Training & Services Aide
Revision assisted by
Tech Project I/C
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=16/5/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
PREPARING AN OBJECTIVES TABLE
Remimeo
Survival RD
Tech
Qual
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 16 MAY 1980
Remimeo
Survival RD
Tech
Qual
PREPARING AN OBJECTIVES TABLE
OBJECTIVES: Objective processes deal with the real and observable.
They
are processes which call for the preclear to spot or find something
exterior
to himself in order to carry out the auditing command.
TABLE: An arrangement of data in a definite and compact form for
convenient reference.
If your preclear or co-audit twin has previously received any
Objective
Processing, you may need to prepare an OBJECTIVES TABLE to aid the case
supervisor. This table will provide an easy-to-refer-to list of the
Objective
processes that have been run, when they were run, how long they were run
each
session and what occurred while they were run.
This is the format that is followed when writing up an Objectives
Table:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
| PROCESS | DATE | TIME | WHAT OCCURRED |
| | (When it was run) | (How long it was run | |
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
| (name of | 17 Apr 76 | 30 minutes | PC brightened up
and |
| process) | | | originated "I just |
| | | | came totally into |
| | | | Present Time. This |
| | | | is incredible!" |
| | | | VGIs |
| | | | |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
Under the process section you write down the exact Objectives that
have
been run starting with the first Objective run and you fill in the table
(in
date order) for all that have been run (or verified as having been done).
It
is possible that a pc has had some Objectives run more than once, so make
sure
that you note each time the process was run. You can look in the Folder
Summary to find out when any Objective was run and which of his Pc folders
the
session will be in. (Your supervisor can help you on this.)
For each Objective Process session given, note the process run stating
its exact name, the date, the time (excluding session time spent on other
actions) and a summary of what occurred. The summary of what occurred must
include any cognitions the pc had, any changes in the pc that were noted
and
especially any data concerning the end result of the process.
HCOB 16.5.80 - 2 -
Don't attempt to rewrite the entire worksheet when filling in an Objectives
Table, but do include brief statements of any cognitions, pc indicators and
any other relevant data. Include any evident auditor errors.
The attached Objectives Table sample will give you an idea of what the
Objectives Table should include.
The case supervisor will then use the Objectives Table in conjunction
with proper folder study, as an aid in case supervising and programming.
This
table can save the C/S valuable hours and has the additional benefit of
familiarizing the co-auditor or auditor with his pc's previously run
Objective
Processing.
Once the Objectives Table is fully filled in and the case supervisor
has
studied it, it is placed in the back of the pc's current folder. It can
then
be referred to at any time during a pc's Objective Processing or for the
programming of the case.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
as assisted by
TECH PROJECT I/C
LRH:MM:mz
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HCOB 16.5.80
ATTACHMENT
SAMPLE OBJECTIVES TABLE
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
PROCESS DATE TIME WHAT OCCURRED
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
(Objective
process run) 9 Sept 68 2:35 Pc experienced changes in emotion.
At end of process pc said "I feel
(2 hours 3 feet behind my head! It's great
35 minutes) to be able to control your body from
an exterior viewpoint"
Exam: F/N, VGIs
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
(Objective
process run) 11 Sept 68 1:30 Pc was bored for first half hour,
said he must be flat on the process.
(1 hour Then he realized he had been out of
30 min) present time and somewhat stuck in
the past. Auditor continued and pc
brightened up even more, gave
cognition that he saw the difference
between the MEST universe in present
time and his mental image pictures
from the past. Pc was very bright.
Exam: F/N, VGIs
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
(Objective
process run) 18 Sept 68 :45 Pc had lots of comm lags for the first
20 minutes. Comm lag reduced after
(45 min) this. Got to a flat point and auditor
ended off. No cognitions.
Exam: F/N, GIs
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
(Objective
process run) 19 Sept 68 1:30 Process from last session was
continued. Pc went through several
(1 hour periods of dopiness, then alertness
30 min) and then came out of it. Pc cognited
he'd been in a fog from his days of
taking drugs. Felt at end of process
that he really was more here and
could confront life better. Very,
very good indicators.
Exam: F/N, VVGIs
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
HCOB 16.5.80 - 2 -
ATTACHMENT
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
PROCESS DATE TIME WHAT OCCURRED
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
(Objective
process run) 12 June 75 :05 Process command was only given a
few
times, then the pc said "I feel good."
(5 min) Auditor ended off.
Exam: no F/N.
Co-Audit Supervisor checks to see if
the process is unflat and finds it
is.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
(Objective 12 June 75 2:45 Same process continued. Pc's leg
process run) which had always hurt him got better
-- he volunteers an excellent success
story after session and states he
feels he has regained the ability to
be at cause over his body.
Exam: F/N, VGIs
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
(Objective 13 June 75 1:15 Pc has a nice win of feeling more
in
process run) communication and cause over his
environment. The session is
continued. Then auditor ended for
supervisor assistance, as the session
wasn't going as well.
Co-Audit Supervisor checked if the
process had been overrun, finds that
it had, and rehabilitates the win the
pc had.
Exam: F/N, VGIs
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
ETC ...
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
as assisted by
TECH PROJECT I/C
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=15/5/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
HOW TO WRITE UP A SESSION
(FOR NEW AUDITORS)
Survival RD
Co-Audit Courses
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 15 MAY 1980
Survival RD
Co-Audit Courses
HOW TO WRITE UP A SESSION
(FOR NEW AUDITORS)
Every auditing session is carefully kept track of and reported on by
the
auditor.
This issue lays out how to write up a session and gives examples of
the
forms that are used. Look at the forms attached to the back of this issue
as
often as you like, so that you have a proper balance of mass with the
significance you are being presented with.
The following are terms that are used in connection with auditing and
writing up an auditing session:
ADMINISTRATION: The action or fact of keeping auditor's reports and
other
records related to an auditing session. (Abbreviation: Admin)
CO-AUDIT: A team of any two people who are helping each other reach a
better life with Scientology or Dianetic processing.
CO-AUDITOR: One who audits another co-auditor under supervision and
after
training at a given level.
PC EXAMINER: That person in a Scientology church assigned to the
duties
of noting pc's statements, E-Meter phenomena and pc indicators after a
session
or when a pc wishes to volunteer information.
CASE SUPERVISOR: That person in a Scientology church who gives
instruction regarding the auditing of preclears and supervises the auditing
of
preclears. (Abbreviation: C/S)
Proper session admin is a very important activity. As a co-auditor,
you
are part of a team including the case supervisor, the co-audit supervisor
and
the pc examiner. Every member of this team has his separate duties in
ensuring
your co-auditing sessions are technically correct and that accurate and
agreed-upon administration procedures are followed.
Part of your duties concerning the admin of your auditing sessions is
to
make it clear what happened in the session itself so that the session can
be
properly supervised by the C/S and so that an accurate record exists of
what
occurred. These records are kept in the pc's folder.
Here are the things that are always included in your session write-up:
WORKSHEET: A worksheet is supposed to he the complete running record
of
the session from beginning to end. (Abbreviation: W/S)
HCOB 15.5.80 - 2 -
AUDITOR REPORT FORM: An auditor's report form is made out at the end
of
each session. It gives an outline of what actions were taken during the
session and the exact process commands used. (Abbreviation: ARF)
SUMMARY REPORT FORM: A report written after the session on a fill-in
type standard form which is simply a summarized record of what happened and
what was observed during the session. (Abbreviation: SRF)
EXAM REPORT: A report made out by the Examiner when the pc goes to the
pc examiner after session or goes on his own volition. It contains the
meter
details, pc's indicators and the pc's statement.
C/S: A case supervisor's direction of what to audit on a pc. C/S also
stands for the action of writing the direction, meaning to "case
supervise".
An example of each of the above session admin terms is attached to the
back of this issue.
The order in which these reports are clipped together and put into the
pc's folder for presentation to the case supervisor is as follows:
------------------
| 1. C/S FORM (placed on top)
|
| 2. EXAM REPORT
|
paper | 3. SUMMARY REPORT FORM
clip --- | --------
| | 4. AUDITOR REPORT FORM
| staple-|
| | 5. WORKSHEETS (placed on bottom)
| --------
------------------
The case supervisor usually writes the C/S (case supervisor directions
of
what to audit on a pc) for the next session. If the co-auditor is certain
of
what the next session action should be, he can fill it in himself and the
case
supervisor will OK it providing the co-auditor has recommended the correct
next action for the pc. The case supervisor also grades the session just
given. He lets the auditor know how well done the session was based on how
standardly it was delivered.
FOLDER SUMMARY: The folder summary is a white piece of paper stapled
to
the left inside front cover of the pc's folder. The folder summary is a
list
of all of the auditing actions that have been done on a pc. It is in
consecutive date order and shows what processes were audited and their end
results. It includes each session's date, total time and the exam result.
(Abbreviation: FS)
Attached is an example of what the folder summary should look like.
Extra copies of all of these forms will be available from your course
admin or the organization's bookstore.
HCOB 15.5.80 - 3 -
All of these reports (except the session worksheets) are filled out at
the end of each session. They must be written very legibly so that the case
supervisor can read them and see what occurred in the session.
The worksheet is written as the session is going on. It is a running
record of the session and what happens during the session. The auditor does
not, by any means, pay more attention to his admin than he does to his pc
or
to his communication cycle with his pc. He must, however, write down the
main
occurrences of the session. The most convenient way of keeping worksheets
in a
non-metered co-audit session is to have your worksheet paper on a clipboard
and available for notations during the session.
After the session, the co-auditor can fill in (with red ink) any
details
he may have missed writing down during the session. He also goes over the
worksheets he wrote during the session, and clarifies any words that are
not
easily readable, by BLOCK PRINTING the word above the one that is hard to
read, as in the following example:
VERY
The pc was xxxxx happy.
The block printing (as with any after session clarification of a
worksheet) is done in red ink. The original worksheets are never thrown
away,
copied, erased, deleted from, etc. in any way other than as described
above.
Standard admin is a vital part of the technology of auditing and is
something that every good auditor adheres to and takes pride in.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
as assisted by
TECH PROJECT I/C
LRH:MM:mz
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HCOB 15.5.80
ATTACHMENT #1
C/S FORM
PAT SMITH (red) 22 Feb 80 (red)
JAN JONES (red)
SESSION GRADE ______________ (red)
Session went very well. (red)
Next C/S:
1. Reach and Withdraw on Outdoor Environment (blue)
2. Reach and Withdraw on Pc's Personal Living Area and MEST (blue)
3. Reach and Withdraw on Pc's Working Area (blue)
Jan Jones (red)
HCOB 15.5.80
ATTACHMENT #2
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 MARCH 1971
Remimeo
Examiners Hat
Tech Services
Hat (Replaces and Revises HCO PLs of 9 May 69 and
Mimeo on 16 26 Jan AD 20, "Exam Form".)
sub paper
EXAMINERS FORM
(Important Note: This form is handled exactly as per HCO PL of 26 Jan
AD20
AND NO EXAMINER MAY EXAMINE UNLESS STARRATE ON THAT PL, and HCO B 5 Mar 71
(C/S Series 25) AND AN E-METER COURSE. Students and pcs can be very upset
if
this post's duties are not done correctly and org pc and course results
ruined.)
X FLAG
After Session _________________________ Qual Div ______________________
(Place)
22Feb80
Volunteered ___________________________ Date
__________________________________
12:00 pm
Medical _______________________________ Time
__________________________________
PC or Pre-OT Name
_____________________________________________________________
Purification R/D
Last Grade Attained
___________________________________________________________
Grade, Course or Action Being Attested
________________________________________
PC's Statement (write down exactly what PC says)
I had a great session!
____________________________________________________________________________
___
____________________________________________________________________________
___
____________________________________________________________________________
___
____________________________________________________________________________
___
____________________________________________________________________________
___
____________________________________________________________________________
___
____________________________________________________________________________
___
____________________________________________________________________________
___
2.3 VGIs
TA Position & any BD ___________________ PC Indicators
________________________
F/N (Wide)
State of Needle
_______________________________________________________________
Yes
F/N Indicated to PC
___________________________________________________________
Mark Brown
_______________________________________
Signature of Examiner
ROUTE THIS FORM TO TECH SERVICES WHICH ROUTES IT INTO THE FOLDER.
WHEN ILLNESS REPORTED MAKE THIS OUT WITH A CARBON UNDER IT AND ROUTE ORIG
TO
T/S AND FOLDER AND CARBON TO MO OR QUAL SEC. RUSH ROUTE ANY ROLLER COASTER
LATER REPORT OR SICK RPT TO FOLDER TO PREVENT C/S ERRORS.
L. RON HUBBARD
LRH:mes:wa:rs:nt:dr:jk:mz FOUNDER
Copyright $c 1971, 1974, 1977, 1978, 1979, 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HCOB 15.5.80
ATTACHMENT #3
CO-AUDIT
SESSION SUMMARY REPORT FORM
The auditor checks each one off and fills in the appropriate data.
DATE: 22 Feb 80
PC: Pat Smith AUDITOR: Jan Jones
PROCESS RUN: Environment Locational
PC GAINS: PC got into PT.
SESSION OBSERVATIONS:
1. How did pc do in relation to what was run? Great.
2. Effectiveness of process: Excellent.
3. Emotional state of the pc and whether this improved:
Bored. Improved to happy.
4. Any misemotion: No.
5. Preclear appearance: Neat. Well groomed.
6. Mannerisms: Twitches in mouth occasionally.
7. Mannerism changes: Stopped twitching his mouth.
8. Any change in skin tone: Got pinker.
9. Did color of eyes change? Yes Get brighter? Yes Get dull?
10. Any comm lags: Yes.
11. Any cognitions: Yes.
12. Any pains turn on? No Pains turn off?
13. Any sensations turn on? No Sensations turn off?
14. Any difficulties: No.
15. Did you complete the C/S instructions? Yes.
16. Was the pc happy at session end? Yes.
HCOB 15.8.80
ATTACHMENT #4
CO-AUDIT
AUDITOR'S REPORT FORM
DATE 22 Feb 80
PRECLEAR Pat Smith TOTAL SESSION TIME 18 minutes
AUDITOR Jan Jones
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
| PROCESS | TIME | RESULTS AND COMMENTS |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
| Start of Session | 11:50 | PC VGIs |
| | | |
| Environment Locational | | |
| | | |
| Clear Command-"Look | | |
| at that (object)" | | PC understood command
|
| | | |
| Start of Process | 11:52 | |
| | | |
| 1. Look at that (object). | | |
| | | |
| | | PC cognited "I feel much more in
|
| | | present time!" |
| | | |
| End of Session | 12:08 | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | F/N VGIs at Exam |
| | | |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
HCOB 15.5.80
ATTACHMENT #5
WORKSHEET
Pat Smith 22 Feb 80
------------------
Jan Jones (1)
PC is well fed and rested | Clear command:
-- yes |
| "Look at that (object)"
|
11:50 |
|
Start of Session |
|
PC-VGIs | PC-I would view EYES
| object with my xxxx
|
Clear definitions of | 11:52 Start of Process
command: |
|
that X | Look at that (object).
(PC gives |
correct definition) | Command given repetitively
| about 25 times first in the
| course room and then outside.
|
at X |
(PC gives correct | PC looks at objects, becoming
definition) | brighter.
|
| Then originates-I feel
| much more in Present Time!
|
| INDICATORS
look X | Very good xxxxxxxxxxx
(PC gives correct |
definition) |
|
| PC very bright
|
| End of Session
| 12:08
|
|
|
HCOB 15.5.80 page #1
ATTACHMENT #6
FOLDER SUMMARY
PC: Pat Smith
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
| | |
18 Mar 71 | (Name of Objective | |
| process) | |
time: 1 Hr | | |
| Process unflat | |
| | |
| Exam: F/N | |
| GIs | |
----------------|-----------------------|---------------|-------------------
---
| | |
20 Mar 71 | (Name of Objective | |
| process) | |
| | |
time: 2 Hrs | | |
20 min | Process run to its | |
| End Phenomena | |
| | |
| Exam: F/N | |
| VGIs | |
| | |
----------------|-----------------------|---------------|-------------------
---
| | |
21 Mar 71 | PC Declares | |
| Completion of | |
| (Name of Objective | |
| Process | |
| | |
----------------|-----------------------|---------------|-------------------
---
| | |
22 Feb 80 | Environment | |
| Locational-run | |
time: 18 min | to E/P. | |
| | |
| Exam: F/N | |
| VGIs | |
| | |
| | |
----------------|-----------------------|---------------|-------------------
---
| | |
| | |
| | |
| | |
HCOB 15.5.80
ATTACHMENT #7
NON-METERED
CO-AUDIT
AUDITOR'S REPORT FORM
PRECLEAR _________________________ DATE ______________
AUDITOR _________________________ TOTAL SESSION TIME
______________
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
| | | |
| PROCESS | TIME | RESULTS AND COMMENTS |
| | | |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
| | | |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
HCOB 15.5.80
ATTACHMENT #8
NON-METERED
CO-AUDIT
SESSION SUMMARY REPORT FORM
The auditor checks each one off and fills in the appropriate data:
DATE: ________________
PC: ___________________________________ AUDITOR:
_____________________________
PROCESS RUN:
__________________________________________________________________
PC GAINS:
SESSION OBSERVATIONS:
1. How did pc do in relation to what was run?
2. Effectiveness of process:
3. Emotional state of the pc and whether this improved:
4. Any misemotion:
5. Preclear appearance:
6. Mannerisms:
7. Mannerism changes:
8. Any change in skin tone:
9. Did color of eyes change? Get brighter? Get dull?
10. Any comm lags:
11. Any cognitions:
12. Any pains turn on? Pains turn off?
13. Any sensations turn on? Sensations turn off?
14. Any difficulties:
15. Did you complete the C/S instructions?
16. Was the pc happy at session end?
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
as assisted by
TECH PROJECT I/C
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=14/5/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=16/11/81
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
DEMONSTRATIONS
Survival RD
Basic Courses
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 14 MAY 1980
Survival RD
Basic Courses
CORRECTED & REISSUED
16 November 1981
Correction in Script.
DEMONSTRATIONS
DEMONSTRATION-Showing something by examples.
DEMO-Abbreviation for "demonstration".
Part of Scientology study technology is the use of "demonstration"
when a
student is studying concepts and ideas.
The student is often asked to show such things as definitions of
terms,
basic principles, etc.
Two ways of demonstration that are commonly used are:.
1. Demo Kit Demonstration-meaning the use of various small objects
such as corks, caps, paper clips, batteries, etc. These objects are kept in
a
box or container called a "demo kit". Each student should have one. The
Pieces
are used while studying, to represent the things in the material being
read.
Demonstrating helps make concepts and ideas more real. A demo kit adds mass
(physical matter), reality and doingness to the significance and so helps
the
student to study.
When a student is required to do a demonstration using his demo kit,
he
simply takes whatever demo kit items he wishes and has them represent the
ideas he is studying.
An example of this is:
The student is reading about how a student and his twin should sit
across
from each other, each with a dictionary and a demo kit.
To demonstrate this, he picks a blue battery and decides that that
represents the student. He picks out a red battery and decides that
represents
his twin. He places the batteries across from each other. He then picks out
two pennies which he decides will represent the demo kits and he places a
penny (demo kit) beside each of the batteries (students). He then picks out
two paper clips which he decides will represent dictionaries and places
them
next to each of the batteries (students).
The student now has sitting in front of him some actual objects that
represent what he has read and he feels much better because the information
isn't just in his head.
The demo kit pieces can be moved around by the student if he is
studying
about an activity or an action.
If a demo is being done for a twin or the supervisor, the student
explains what the objects represent and what he is doing with them (but the
idea is to actually have the objects showing any action, not the student's
explanations).
2. Clay Demonstration-meaning the use of clay in demonstrating or
representing facts, ideas, procedures, etc. that the student is studying
about. Clay demos also
HCOB 14.5.80 - 2 -
add mass, reality and doingness to the significance and so help the student
to
study.
Clay demos give a proper balance of mass and significance. They are
used to teach a student to apply.
The student is given a word or auditing action or situation to
demonstrate. He then does this in clay, labeling each part. The clay SHOWS
the
thing. It is not just a blob of clay with a label on it. Use small strips
of
paper for labels. The whole demonstration then has a label of what it is.
On the checkout, the student removes the overall label. The student
must be silent. The examiner must not ask any questions.
The examiner just looks and figures out what it is. He then tells the
student who then shows the examiner the label. If the examiner did not see
what it was, it is a flunk.
Clay table must not be reduced to significance by the student
explaining
or answering questions. Nor is it reduced to significance by long-winded
labels of individual parts. The clay shows it, not the label.
The clay demonstrates it. The student must learn the difference
between
mass and significance.
For example, the student has to demonstrate a pencil. He makes a thin
roll of clay which is surrounded by another layer of clay-the thin roll
sticking slightly out of one end. On the other end goes a small cylinder of
clay. The roll is labeled "lead". The outer layer is labeled "wood". The
small cylinder is labeled "rubber". Then a label is made for the whole
thing:
"pencil". On checkout, the student removes "pencil" before the examiner can
see it. If the examiner can look at it and say, "It's a pencil," the
student
passes.
If clay table training is not brightening that student up, then the
above is NOT being done. Someone is in such a rush that real learning is
being
put aside for the sake of speed.
"Demo" on a checksheet usually refers to using a demo kit.
"Clay Demo" on a checksheet refers to using clay to demonstrate per
the
Procedure given above.
A well done demonstration, which actually does demonstrate, will
produce
a marvellous change in a student. And he will retain the data.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
as assisted by
Technical Project I/C
LRH:MM:nsp
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
as assisted by
Technical Project I/C
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=12/5/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
DRUGS AND OBJECTIVE PROCESSES
DRUGS AND THE BACKTRACK
Remimeo
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 12 MAY 1980
Remimeo
DRUGS AND OBJECTIVE PROCESSES
DRUGS AND THE BACKTRACK
There was a discovery about a decade ago that drug withdrawal symptoms
could be eased by objective processes. Such processes as the CCHs, 8-C,
remedies of havingness and even TRs were found to aid a person in coming
off
drugs and became part of standard routines to accomplish this.
In 1973 another observation was made, that the current civilization
seemed to be regressing. "Regression" means a "return to earlier or more
infantile behavior patterns". Men's shoe styles had become little boy shoe
styles; the most popular women singers were singing lullabies; cars were
being
treated like toys and abused rather than maintained. More recently it was
observed that life attitudes had become less responsible, that "playing"
took
a higher value, that productivity was declining steeply, that people seemed
to
require more and more care by the state-and all of these things seemed to
indicate that people were getting stuck at or going back to childhood or
infancy.
There is another observation: people taking drugs tend to go
backtrack.
Sometimes, when seeking to get a druggie to run engrams, he will balk
and adversely react; apparently he has already hit the backtrack while on
"trips" and it terrified him.
On such evidences one could construct a theory that drugs tend to
throw
people out of present time and park them on the backtrack. Experiments of
the
late forties did show that certain drugs and gases did throw people
backtrack
and into engrams. The "visions" that turn on under the influence of such a
drug as peyote or when inhaling volcanic gases are probably simply the
restimulation of backtrack. (It should be noted in passing that inducing
engrams with drugs and gases in the hope of running them out does NOT work
--
one only runs them IN.) So it can workably be assumed that drugs do throw
people out of present time.
OBJECTIVE PROCESSES
The thing that characterizes OBJECTIVE processes is that they bring
about
interaction between the individual and the existing physical universe. This
is
different than SUBJECTIVE processes in that these interact between the
individual and his part or himself.
Objective processes do several things: they remedy havingness, they
locate the person in his environment, they establish direct communication
with
the auditor and, last but not least, they bring a person to present time.
"Present time" is a very important factor in mental and spiritual
sanity
and ability. A human being can be stuck in literally thousands of different
past moments. His behavior
HCOB 12.5.80 - 2 -
and attitudes are influenced by such past incidents and experiences. As a
matter of fact a person can be totally regressed and can be in an incident
of
the past to the entire exclusion of present time.
As an example, if you were to walk through an insane asylum and say,
to
each patient you met, "Come up to present time", as an authoritative
command,
you would get a small percentage of complete recoveries. In one instance
when
this was done, those on whom this had been done got up in "group session"
that
night and volunteered how glad they were to be here. What would have
happened
is that the person would have come out of his past track incident or
incidents
and would have moved up to present time and sanity. While this process is
not
a "sure cure" for all insane, it does demonstrate the point. Those on whom
it
did not work can be supposed to have been just too mired down in their
backtrack.
Drugs, of course, do not only regress a person. They do other things.
And
amongst these is a communication dulling. This is best observed when drugs
are
seen to reduce pain. This is simple a communication shut off. Drugs can
also
temporarily restimulate (before they ruin them) body glands and produce
momentary feelings of well being. Part of this is probably a communication
shut off from the bank. Drugs can also speed up the burning of reserves of
vitamins; alcohol probably burns up rapidly all reserves of Vitamin B1;
other
drugs also burn up all available niacin and C. This speeded burn up can
also
bring about a temporary feeling of well being. But when the reserves are
gone,
the delusions called delirium tremens (D.T.s) and withdrawal symptoms are
nightmares indeed. But this again is simply the bank caving in on someone
and
he is now parked back on the track, not only with the nightmare but with
the
incidents in the past which caused them.
CONCLUSION
Objective processes, properly chosen and run, bring the person
gradually
more and more into present time.
As the process is orienting the person in the present time of the
physical universe and as this present time is not threatening, he has a
time
point and a location point from which to sort out his confusions. His
attention has been pulled out of his bank and has been placed on the
physical
universe around him.
Because it is the backtrack that is causing his aberration, putting
his
attention on the physical universe tends to de-aberrate him.
The backtrack contains mass and taking his attention off of this
backtrack mass tends to lose it for him. But the masses around him in the
physical universe substitute for the track mass and he receives a remedy of
havingness.
Objective processes are not in themselves a total answer; a certain
amount of subjective processes must be run to remove the reasons he is
being
called back into the past. Vitamin,
HCOB 12.5.80 - 3 -
mineral and nutrition reserves must also be replaced or the body also pulls
him in and affects him.
This tells you as well why "mest work" and exercise have a de-
aberrating
effect upon a person. They are a sort of objective process in themselves
even
though they do not replace objectives.
Objectives also by-pass misunderstood words and significances. This
makes them runnable with a minimum of word clearing and error.
Having an idea of why objective processes work assists one in
applying
them. One can see the person change masses, become located, and above that
coma bit by bit more and more into present time.
It is not that the physical universe itself is therapeutic. It is
that
it provides a single reference point including time, location and mass.
Without objectives, no being is likely to recover in his infinity of
future.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:bk
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=11/5/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Survival Rundown Series 11
FINAL REACH AND WITHDRAW STEP
Survival RD Only
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 11 MAY 1980
Survival RD Only
Survival Rundown Series 11
FINAL REACH AND WITHDRAW STEP
The Order Versus Disorder step of the Survival RD, which precedes
this
R/W step, 8-Cs the individual into putting order into any disorder
encountered. This final Reach and Withdraw step will then raise the pc's
Havingness and ARC towards the objects/areas he has now put into order.
It is run exactly as laid out in HCOB 7 May 1980 Survival RD Series 7
REACH AND WITHDRAW ON MEST LOCATIONS.
The difference between this R/W step and the earlier one on this
rundown
is what the R/W is run on, as laid out below:
0. Upon completion of the Order Versus Disorder step of the Survival
Rundown, the C/S inspects the pc folder and lists any MEST objects
or
areas that showed up during the Survival RD as being disorganized or
disorderly.
(NOTE: The C/S should list the above items of step 0 in order of
charge
or disorganization/disorder if at all possible.)
1. Reach and Withdraw is then run on the first item on the list drawn
up
by the C/S, to EP.
2. The pc is taken to exams.
3. Steps #1 & 2 are repeated for each item listed.
Although it is optimum to have the pc verified as F/Ning at Exams
after
each Reach & Withdraw process run on this step, the auditor may find that
it
is inconvenient to travel back to where the Examiner is after each R/W is
run.
In this case it is not necessary to have the pc get an exam each time, as
long
as no problems arise.
It may also become too repetitious to have the pc get an exam after
each
final R/W if there is a list of 3 or more items. In this case use your
judgement. If it is convenient and the pc seems fine about it then have him
go
to the Examiner each time. Otherwise, apply the above.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
As assisted by
Technical Project I/C
LRH:MM:djm
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
As assisted by
Technical Project I/C
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=9/5/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Survival Rundown Series 9
HANDLING OF DISORGANIZATION
PROCESS
Survival RD Only
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 9 MAY 1980
Survival RD Only
Survival Rundown Series 9
HANDLING OF DISORGANIZATION
PROCESS
This process enables a pc to see how he can easily put organization
into
disorganization.
R2-69 and R2-22 bring a pc up to causatively placing an object
somewhere
and being able to have his attention on more than one object at a time.
The Handling of Disorganization Process has two steps.
Step A is geared towards the realization that (a) objects can exist in
an
orderly fashion, (b) one can do something with objects and (c) it is a
simple
task to return an object to its original location after doing something
with
it.
Step B of this process leads the pc to the realization that he can
self
determinedly organize and locate MEST objects and return them to their
original location once used.
PROCESS #1
0. Auditor and pc are seated at a table with a container of at least 8
objects.
1A. The auditor puts the objects on the table in front of the pc in a
neatly
arranged order.
1B. Auditor points to one of the objects and tells the pc to pick it up and
do something with it.
1C. The auditor acknowledges the pc and holds out his hand for the pc to
return the object to the auditor's hand.
1D. The auditor then returns the object to exactly the same place the pc
originally picked it up from.
1E. Repeat steps B through D until the pc has a realization.
PROCESS #2
0. Auditor and pc are seated at a table with a container of at least 5
objects.
2A. The auditor has the pc put the objects on the table in a neatly
arranged
order. (NOTE: The pc chooses where and and how the objects are
arranged.)
2B. The auditor tells the pc to choose one object.
2C. The auditor tells the pc to pick it up and do something with it.
2D. The auditor tells the pc to put the object back in exactly the same
place
he originally picked it up from.
HCOB 9.5.80 - 2 -
2E. Repeat steps 2B through 2D until the pc has a realization.
This process is very easy to run.
Your pc may turn on yawning and go through some slight dopiness but
this
is common. Just continue the process until this turns off. You may also see
your pc experience various emotions from boredom up to playing games.
You should have a very interesting time of it.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
As assisted by
Technical Project I/C
LRH:MM:nsp
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
As assisted by
Technical Project I/C
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=8/5/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Survival Rundown Series 8
CCH 0 LOCATIONAL PROCESSING STEP
Survival RD Only
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 8 MAY 1980
Survival RD Only
Survival Rundown Series 8
CCH 0 LOCATIONAL PROCESSING STEP
(Ref: Professional Auditors Bulletin #133
PROCEDURE CCH-under "CCH 0")
This is step 4 of the Survival Rundown.
CCH 0 is to be done in the first CCH session you give, before you
start
Objective ARC. It can be used in following sessions if needed but it is not
a
substitute for Ruds and if your pc has out ruds that would interfere with
any
session and prevent your properly running the Objectives, you should send
your
pc to your Co-Audit Supervisor.
The process commands for the Locational Processing step of CCH 0 which
you will be running are:
1. Call the pc's attention to the room
a. Have the pc look around the room.
b. Ask the pc if it's all right with him to be audited in the room.
c. If it's OK go onto the next step; if it's not OK, find out why
and handle it.
2. Call the pc's attention to the auditing environment
a. Have the pc locate his auditor.
b. R-Fac the pc that you are going to be running an Objective
Process on him and you will now begin the process.
You would then proceed with the exact process steps of whatever
Objective
you are C/Sed to run on your pc for that session.
If you have any questions or run into any trouble, go see your Co-
Audit
Supervisor for assistance.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
as assisted by
Tech Project I/C
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:MM:nsp
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
as assisted by
Tech Project I/C
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=7/5/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Survival Rundown Series 7
REACH AND WITHDRAW
ON MEST LOCATIONS
Survival RD Only
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 7 MAY 1980
Survival RD Only
Survival Rundown Series 7
REACH AND WITHDRAW
ON MEST LOCATIONS
Reach and Withdraw is a very simple but extremely powerful method of
getting a person familiarized and in communication with things so that he
can
be more at cause over and in control of them.
One would not expect a person to be at cause over or to have much
control or understanding of or skill in something with which he was not
familiar. The keynote of familiarity is communication.
Reaching and withdrawing are two very fundamental actions in this
universe.
By REACH we mean touching or taking hold of. It is defined as "to get
to", "come to" and/or "arrive at".
By WITHDRAW we mean move back from, let go.
Life itself is composed of reaching and withdrawing.
Communication is actually based on reach and withdraw.
A person is out of communication with something because he is
withdrawing from it and is not about to reach out or contact any part of
it.
If a person cannot reach and withdraw from a thing he will be the
effect
of that thing.
A person who cannot reach and withdraw has no space. Everything is
caved in on him. And this is awfully true in these druggie contemporary
times.
If a person can reach for something and withdraw from it he could be
said to be in communication with that thing.
To be in communication with something is to be at cause over it.
A highly effective action called "Reach and Withdraw" has been
developed
to bring a person into communication with and more at cause over objects,
people, spaces, boundaries and situations.
It also extroverts a person from something he tends to be introverted
into.
The commands for Reach and Withdraw are:
1. "Reach that _______ ."
2. "Withdraw from that _______ ."
The following commands may be substituted if the wording is more
appropriate to the particular person, place or thing being addressed:
1. "Touch that _______ ."
2. "Let go of that _______ ."
HCOB 7.5.80 - 2 -
A person, place or thing is named in the blank and the commands are
given alternately (1, 2, 1, 2, and so on) repetitively, with an
acknowledgement given after the execution of each command.
This is done on that one thing until the person has a minor win or 3
consecutive sets of commands with no change in the person's motions or
attitude. Then another person, place or thing is chosen and the commands
are
taken to a win on that item and so on.
When the person has a win or cognition (sudden realization about
something) and good indicators on the whole area being addressed, the Reach
and Withdraw process is ended.
When running Reach and Withdraw on another, always point to the
object
(or person, space, etc.) each time you give a command so that there will be
no
mistake made by the person you are giving the command to. You also walk
around
with the person you are doing the Reach and Withdraw on, ensuring that he
actually does get in physical contact with the points or areas of objects,
spaces and boundaries.
In choosing objects, you usually progress from the smaller to the
larger
objects available. You can also include walls and floors and other parts of
the environment.
We used to do Reach and Withdraw on ship stewards by having them walk
into the dining room and walk out of the dining room over and over. This is
used when you're running Reach and Withdraw on a room or a space rather
than
an object. Of course, we also included doing Reach and Withdraw on the
other
objects connected with the steward's duties.
REACH AND WITHDRAW ON THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN
On the Survival Rundown there are three specific areas that you will
be
doing Reach and Withdraw on. These are the steps that you follow:
1. Clear the words "Reach" and "Withdraw" with the person, using the
definitions given on page 1 of this issue. This is done by you defining
the words for the person and actually physically demonstrating them for
him so that he will understand what he is supposed to do.
2. Do reach and withdraw on the following:
A. The outdoor environment
B. The person's personal living area and belongings
C. The person's working area.
You do the Reach and Withdraw on the first one of the above until the
person has a win or cognition and good indicators on the whole area being
addressed and then you take him to the examiner, write up what occurred and
turn it in to your co-audit supervisor and if all is OK, you then go on to
the
next area listed above, etc.
If you need any help while doing the above, go to your Co-Audit
Supervisor.
Reach and Withdraw is very easy to do. It is enjoyable for both the
person receiving it and the person administering it and has very valuable
results.
HCOB 7.5.80 - 3 -
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:nsp
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=6/5/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Survival Rundown Series 6
ENVIRONMENT LOCATIONAL
Survival RD Only
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 6 MAY 1980
Survival RD Only
Survival Rundown Series 6
ENVIRONMENT LOCATIONAL
(Ref: ABILITY 73 May 58 ASSISTS IN SCIENTOLOGY
PAB 153 1 Feb 59 CCH
SCIENTOLOGY CLEAR PROCEDURE Issue I-STEP EIGHT
HCOB 2 Nov 57RA AN OBJECTIVE RUNDOWN)
Rev. 22.2.75
The purpose of this process is to help the individual locate things
and
himself in his environment, thus it is called an "environment locational".
This process will get the preclear into communication with his environment
and
will extrovert him.
This is an Objective process.
"OBJECTIVE: (Dictionary Definition) 'Of or having to do with a
material
object as distinguished from a mental concept, idea or belief.' Means here
and now objects in PT....
"SUBJECTIVE: (Dictionary Definition 2nd meaning) 'Proceeding from or
taking place in an individual's mind.'
"Look around or physical contact processes are obviously 'Objective'.
Recall, think, remember or return on the time track processes are obviously
'Subjective'.
"Pcs who have been on drugs obviously have to be run on Objective, not
Subjective, processes.
"Anyone can be brought more into present time with Objective
processes."
(HCOB 2 Nov 57RA AN OBJECTIVE RUNDOWN.)
CLEARING THE COMMAND
It is important in any processing that the preclear understand the
words
being used and the command itself.
Therefore the first step in using any command for the first time is
the
clearing of it. This is simply done by clearing each word in the command,
starting with the last word, and then clearing the command itself.
In this process for example, the auditor clears the word "that" then
"at"
then "look" by asking the pc "What is the definition of the word _______
?".
If the pc is not sure or incorrect (he need only know the definition of how
it
is being used in the command you are clearing), you have him clear the
appropriate definition in the dictionary. You then clear the command by
asking
"What does the command (question) _______ mean to you?".
THE PROCESS
1. Take your pc to any place in his environment.
2. Tell your pc that you are going to run a Locational Process on him
and that he is free to tell you anything that may occur while the
process is being run.
HCOB 6.5.80 - 2 -
3. a. Run the command "LOOK AT THAT (something visible in his
environment)."
b. Indicate each thing you are telling the pc to look at by pointing
to it.
4. When the pc has done the command, acknowledge him and repeat the
command, indicating a different thing.
5. Repeat steps 3 & 4 until the pc has a cognition and VGIs. (Various
locations may be used as desired.)
6. Bring your pc to the examiner.
7. Write up what occurred while running the process and hand it in to
your co-audit supervisor.
This process may take just several minutes or it may take a number of
sessions.
"If running a Locational turns on a somatic it must be run until the
somatic is flat. Therefore, the auditor has no business attempting
Locational
or getting the pc involved unless he intends to do something about it."
If you have any questions as to what to do or how to handle something
that
has come up while running the process, go to your co-audit supervisor for
assistance.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
as assisted by
TECH PROJECT I/C
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:MM:nsp
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
as assisted by
TECH PROJECT I/C
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=5/5/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Survival Rundown Series 5
CONTINUATION OF DAILY
VITAMINS & EXERCISE
Survival RD Only
MLOs
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 5 MAY 1980
Survival RD Only
MLOs
Survival Rundown Series 5
CONTINUATION OF DAILY
VITAMINS & EXERCISE
(Ref: HCOB 6 Feb 78RA THE PURIFICATION
RUNDOWN REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM
HCOB 1 May 80 SRD Series 1
THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN
HCOB 2 May 80 I SRD Series 2
SURVIVAL RUNDOWN PC PROGRAM)
VITAMINS
A continuation of the vitamins, minerals, oil vegetables and Cal-Mag,
at
least at the rate of recommended daily requirements in balanced amounts is
continued after the purification Rundown on the Survival Rundown per the
above
referenced HCOB (HCOB 6 Feb 78RA), page 18 under "End phenomena".
The vitamins taken should be determined on an individual basis based
on
what the person needs physically to remain healthy. It has been found for
example, that some do not need to continue the intake of oil and Cal-Mag
throughout the Survival Rundown.
EXERCISE
A continuation of the daily exercise discipline is also carried out on
the Survival Rundown. The daily time spent exercising will vary, depending
on
what the individual feels he needs to stay healthy.
During the piloting of the Survival Rundown the minimum time spent
daily
was 15-30 minutes and the exercise consisted of activities such as running,
brisk walks, hand ball, swimming and weight-lifting.
Twinning on these daily exercises is advised.
DAILY REPORTS
Daily Reports are filled in by everyone on the Survival Rundown for
Case
Supervision data and full information on the continuation of the daily
vitamins and exercise is reported. This also should include any comments
the
individual has on how these activities are going and any difficulties or
wins
that are experienced.
The idea is to continue to lead a healthy life with proper nutrition,
sleep and exercise. When an individual has a properly cared for, well
exercised body his attention is to that degree freed up for spiritual
gains.
HCOB 5.5.80 - 2 -
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
As Assisted by
Technical Pjt In Charge
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:MM:nsp
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
As Assisted by
Technical Pjt In Charge
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=4/5/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Survival Rundown Series 4
C/S Series 110
C/SING THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN
SURVIVAL RD C/Ses
Co-Audit Sups
Review Auditors
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 4 MAY 1980
SURVIVAL RD C/Ses
Co-Audit Sups
Review Auditors
Survival Rundown Series 4
C/S Series 110
C/SING THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN
Ref: HCOB 1 May 1980 SRD Series 1
THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN
HCOB 2 May 80 I SRD Series 2
SURVIVAL RUNDOWN PC PROGRAM
HCOB 2 May 80 II SRD Series 3
SURVIVAL RUNDOWN ADMINISTRATION
HCOB 19 Mar 78 "QUICKIE OBJECTIVES"
PROGRAMMING
The C/S does not robotically program pcs for the Survival Rundown.
The
majority of pcs do need it and should get it at an appropriate place in
their
program, the best time being immediately following the Purification
Rundown.
In some cases it is best to continue a pc on his current program. The
full use of the C/S Series will be necessary to determine this.
It is not the intent on the Survival Rundown to run already EPed
objectives and grind the pc into the ground.
Objectives are verified and rehabbed or run in the correct program
sequence.
PURIFICATION RD VERIFICATION
It is essential to the success of the Survival RD that any pc routed
onto it is a SUCCESSFUL Purification Rundown completion. By successful is
meant-he has had the EP of the Purif RD per HCOB 6 Feb 78RA PURIFICATION
RUNDOWN REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM. Check the pc's completion routing form
and
success story to verify he's an actual completion. If things look very
amiss,
get the pc's purif RD FESed by a trained, competent purif C/S.
REVIEW
The conditional review step of the Survival RD is fully covered in
C/S
Series 109. If this step is needed it must not he brushed off. Do thorough
folder studies. Make sure the
HCOB 4.5.80 - 2 -
FES is in PT and that you can see what actions the case may need. Get
whatever
is reading on repair lists handled fully. Get any incomplete processes
completed. Fully handle any PTSness as the pc won't make it on the Survival
RD
with unhandled PTSness.
Review actions may also need to be done once the pc has gotten into
the
Survival RD Co-Audit actions. Several of the pilot cases had various past
BPC
show up while on the later RD actions. This happens because the Objective
Processes themselves unburden the case further and BPC that may not have
been
available when first put onto the Survival RD can show up as the case is in
essence becoming "auditable" for the first time. This must be watched for.
OBJECTIVES TABLES
The Co-Auditors on the Survival RD are trained on the action of
making
up Objectives Tables. This is covered in HCOB 16 May 80 PREPARING AN
OBJECTIVES TABLE. The Co-Auditor whose pc has previously received
Objectives
can be requested to make up an Objectives Table for the C/S, listing each
Objective Process run, when it was run, what occurred on the process, etc.
The
C/S can use the Objectives Table along with studying the sessions where
needed, to program the pc's Objectives on the Survival RD. Objectives that
were obviously not quickied would be rehabbed if necessary. If the pc has a
lot of charge on his Objective Auditing you may need to C/S for an L1C on
his
Objectives before having the verify & rehab/ flatten step done.
The Objectives Table is a very useful tool for C/Ses but must not be
used in the place of folder study. The C/S must be familiar with all of the
Objective process references listed on the attachment to HCOB 1 May 80 THE
SURVIVAL RUNDOWN so that he can correctly adjudicate whether any previously
run Objectives were taken to their proper End Phenomena.
PCs WHO PROTEST THE RD
You may encounter some Purification grads who protest doing the
Survival
RD.
These will usually fall into 3 categories:
1. Those who need case repair.
The first step after the completion of the Purification Rundown is a
Review cycle (where needed) and it is certain that when a pc has any past
bad
auditing or cramming, any incomplete process or unacknowledged state, he
will
need that handled. Whatever it may be, you can easily locate it as a C/S by
folder study and a C/S 53 assessment.
If this is the case and the review cycle is done correctly, the pc
will
then feel fine about doing the Survival RD.
2. Those who have been previously run or O/R on Objectives or O/R on
Objective processes as a whole.
The first thing that must be done is to R-factor the pc that he will
NOT
be receiving any Objectives he has already EPed.
HCOB 4.5.80 - 3 -
There are some cases who have had several batteries of Objectives run
on
them. If this is the case with any pc you have who is protesting doing the
Survival RD you must check for any O/R on Objectives and/or any
unacknowledged
state attained on Objectives and rehab or Date/Locate as needed.
It may just require an indication of the fact that the pc's Objectives
have been O/R, if this is obvious by folder study. The important factor is
that you will have no success with the Survival RD unless any outnesses on
previously run Objectives get indicated and handled appropriately.
3. Those who are totally set up for Solo Auditing and have been
programmed for the Solo Levels as their next step.
If a pc in this category protests the Survival RD, don't push him.
Continue him on the program he has already been R-factored on.
ACKNOWLEDGING WINS AND STATES ATTAINED
C/Ses are going to have to consciously shift their approach on cases
that
have completed the Purification Rundown. The main thing that you have to
realize is that you are now dealing with unsuppressed cases. They respond
exactly the way they are supposed to. They make gains much more rapidly
than
they did before the Purif RD and this has to be watched for.
In the piloting of the Survival Rundown, it was found that many pcs
began
originating wins or states of release which they had achieved earlier in
auditing that were never properly acknowledged. On the Survival RD steps
themselves, the pcs experienced life-changing wins and also began going
exterior with exceptional ease. All of these things must be watched for
closely by the C/S. They show up in the student's DRs, exam statements and
session worksheets.
Per HCOB 21 July 73 RECOVERING STUDENTS AND PCs-"Invalidation of case
or gains includes being made to go on past a win. This acts as an
invalidation. Some pcs who made it are hung up from then on out because no
one
asked them to declare it. Remedy is to get it declared."
CAUTIONS
The following is a list of situations which may crop uP during the
Survival RD that must be watched for and handled:
1. Int going out
2. Unhandled PTSness
3. Unhandled Repair
4. Previous incomplete processes needing completion
5. Past unhandled ethics situations needing handling (The Survival RD
raises one's ethics level which sometimes brings to light some past
out-ethics which the individual then needs to handle.)
HCOB 4.5.80 - 4 -
6. A Survival RD step acting as an O/R or unnecessary action
7. Mutual Out Ruds/Ethics between co-audit twins
(Handled per HCOB 17 Feb 74 C/S Series 91 MUTUAL OUT RUDS and
HCOB 21 Aug 79 TWINNING.)
UNFLAT OBJECTIVES
Although it may not be commonly recognized, unflat Objectives really
take
their toll on a case. The Survival RD picks up unflat Objectives and sets a
case straight. In the piloting of the Survival RD there were several cases
where the pc felt that he had some unexplainable case problem and had gone
into apathy about moving up the Bridge. Once the unflat Objectives were
fully
flattened, the cases experienced full case resurgences and pc originations
of
"I now feel I can move up the Bridge!"
So don't underestimate the power of Objective processing: It is an
essential step of full case handling for all cases.
C/SING CO-AUDITORS
When you C/S the Survival RD for co-auditors you must ensure you are
familiar with the tech on co-audits and how they are run. Realize that
these
auditors are green and are co-auditing on this RD on a "read-it, drill-it,
do-it" basis. The co-auditors must not be put down with invalidations and
accusations and injustices but handled with patience and validation per
HCOB
22 Jan 77 IN-TECH, THE ONLY WAY TO ACHIEVE IT.
When a co-auditor makes an auditing error, you correct him with the
use
of Pink Sheets from the approach of how one handles a green auditor (per
C/S
Series 63 C/SING FOR NEW AUDITORS OR VETERANS). Be very familiar with the
materials on the Survival RD TRs AND CO-AUDIT CHECKSHEET so that you know
what
data the co-auditors can be held responsible for.
The Survival Rundown is a fabulous new RD.
Get yourself familiar with all of the materials it encompasses and C/S
it
standardly. You can change lives with it. And you will!
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
as assisted by
TECH PROJECT I/C
LRH:MM:mz
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
as assisted by
TECH PROJECT I/C
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=3/5/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
PC INDICATORS
Type = 12
iDate=26/4/69
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Remimeo
Tech
Qual
All Auditors
C/Ses
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 3 MAY 1980
(Cancels BTB 26 April 1969, Reiss. 7.7.74, BAD INDICATORS)
Remimeo
Tech
Qual
All Auditors
C/Ses
PC INDICATORS
References:
HCOB 3 May 1962R ARC BREAKS, MISSED WITHHOLDS
Rev. 5.9.78
HCOB 28 Dec 196S ROUTINE VI, INDICATORS,
PART ONE: GOOD INDICATORS
HCOB 29 Jul 1964 SCN I to IV, GOOD INDICATORS
AT LOWER LEVELS
HCOB 7 May 1969R FLOATING NEEDLE Iss. V,
Rev. 15.7.77
HCOB 14 May 1969 F/N AND ERASURE
HCOB 21 Jul 1978 WHAT IS A FLOATING NEEDLE?
HCOB 16 Jun 1970 WHAT THE C/S IS DOING
C/S Series 6
HCOB 23 May 71R RECOGNITION OF RIGHTNESS
Iss. VIII OF THE BEING
HCOB 22 Sep 1971 THE THREE GOLDEN RULES OF
C/S Series 61 THE C/S, HANDLING AUDITORS
HCOB 25 Sep 1971RA TONE SCALE IN FULL
Rev. 4.4.74
HCOB 18 Sep 1967 SCALES
BTB 6 Nov 1972RA Auditor Admin Series 11RA
Iss. IV THE EXAM REPORT
HCO PL 8 Mar 1971 EXAMINER FORM
HCOB 18 Mar 1974R E-METERS, SENSITIVITY ERRORS
BTB 7 Nov 72R Auditor Admin Series 20R,
Iss. V MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS
In this new issue, Bad Indicators have been reviewed and reorganized,
and
an entirely new list of Good Indicators has been introduced.
INDICATORS: DEFINITION AND USE
INDICATE: To direct attention to, point to or point out; show.
-- Webster's New World Dictionary
of the American Language
INDICATOR: A person or thing that indicates.
-- Webster's New World Dictionary
of the American Language
AN "INDICATOR" IS A CONDITION OR CIRCUMSTANCE ARISING IN A SESSION (OR
BEFORE OR AFTER IT FOR THAT MATTER) WHICH INDICATES WHETHER THE
SESSION
(OR CASE) IS RUNNING WELL OR BADLY.
IT IS SOMETHING ONE OBSERVES.
OBNOSIS means observing the obvious. It is something you do with your
eyes. And your meter.
HCOB 3.5.80 - 2 -
Indicators are used to program the case. Good indicators mean keep it
going. Bad indicators mean correction must be done.
You have to be able to SEE them, KNOW what they are and write them
down
in the worksheets when they occur.
BAD INDICATORS
1. CHART OF HUMAN EVALUATION. Pc not moving up the Tone Scale in an
intensive
or during a program.
2. CHART OF HUMAN EVALUATION. Pc's chronic tone unchanging despite one or
more
intensives.
3. CHART OF HUMAN EVALUATION. Pc's chronic tone dropping despite
intensives.
4. WORKSHEETS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. Pc not wanting more auditing.
5. WORKSHEETS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. Pc protesting another session.
6. EXAM REPORTS. OBNOSIS. Pc looking worse after session.
7. WORKSHEETS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. Pc doesn't seem to have time to get
audited.
8. WORKSHEETS. METER. Pc not able to locate incidents easily.
9. CHART OF HUMAN EVALUATION. WORKSHEETS. OBNOSIS. Pc less certain about
things than he/she was formerly.
10. HUMAN CHART OF EVALUATION. WORKSHEETS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. Pc not
doing
as well in life as he/she was.
11. METER. WORKSHEETS. Pc's somatics don't seem to blow or erase.
12. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. ETHICS REPORTS. Pc in ethics trouble after last
auditing.
13. WORKSHEETS. METER. Pc protesting auditing actions.
14. WORKSHEETS. OBNOSIS. Pc wandering all over the track, unable to stay
with
an incident to handle.
15. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. OBNOSIS. Pc misemotional at session end.
16. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. Pc demanding unusual
solutions.
17. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. Pc trying to explain
condition to auditor or others, either verbally or by writing notes.
18. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. Pc continuing to complain of somatics after
they
have been run.
19. WORKSHEETS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. EXAM REPORTS. Pc self-auditing after
session.
20. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. Pc dependence on
medicine
not lessening.
HCOB 3.5.80 - 3 -
21. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. Pc continuing other
practices.
22. OBNOSIS. EXAM REPORTS. Skin tone dull.
23. OBNOSIS. EXAM REPORTS. Eyes dull.
24. OBNOSIS. EXAM REPORTS. Pc lethargic.
25. TONE SCALE. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. OBNOSIS. Pc not becoming more
cheerful under auditing.
26. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. Pc wanting special
auditing.
27. METER. WORKSHEETS. No Tone Arm action on running incidents or getting
audited.
28. WORKSHEETS. Pc not cogniting.
29. OBNOSIS. WORKSHEETS. Pc dispersed.
30. OBNOSIS. METER. WORKSHEETS. Pc overwhelmed.
31. OBNOSIS. WORKSHEETS. Pc bored with auditing.
32. OBNOSIS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. Pc not available for sessions.
33. OBNOSIS. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. Pc tired.
34. OBNOSIS. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. Pc has attention on auditor.
35. WORKSHEETS. OBNOSIS. Pc not wanting to run process or incident.
36. WORKSHEETS. OBNOSIS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. Pc taking drugs or
excessive
alcohol.
37. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. Pc not sure auditing
works for him/her.
38. CHART OF HUMAN EVALUATION. WORKSHEETS. Pc not handling environment more
easily.
39. MEDICAL OFFICER REPORTS. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. MISCELLANEOUS
REPORTS.
Pc ill after last session. (Usually a list error.)
40. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. OBNOSIS. Pc critical of auditor or
organizations.
(Means Missed Withholds.)
41. WORKSHEETS. OBNOSIS. Pc dopey or boiling off.
42. GRADE CHART. Pc not going up to the next grade or level.
43. METER. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. Pc has dirty needle.
44. METER. WORKSHEETS. Pc gets no reads on the meter or has a stuck needle.
45. METER. WORKSHEETS. Despite corrections for False TA, the pc has a
chronic
high TA.
46. METER. WORKSHEETS. Despite corrections for low TA, pc has a chronic low
TA.
HCOB 3.5.80 - 4 -
47. METER. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. No F/Ns.
48. METER. WORKSHEETS. No change of meter characteristic.
49. EXAM REPORTS. No change in Exam Reports.
50. CHART OF HUMAN EVALUATION. OBNOSIS. WORKSHEETS. No change.
(Note: There is additional data on indicators in HCOB 3 May 1962R,
ARC BREAKS, MISSED WITHHOLDS, where indicators concern Missed
Withholds.)
GOOD INDICATORS
1. WORKSHEETS. OBNOSIS. Pc willing to talk to the auditor.
2. WORKSHEETS. OBNOSIS. While in session, pc interested in own case.
3. METER. WORKSHEETS. A good read on the breath test shows pc is eating
and
sleeping well.
4. WORKSHEETS. Rudiments, session to session, easier to get in and stay
in.
5. OBNOSIS. TONE SCALE. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. Pc cheerful.
6. METER. WORKSHEETS. Needle F/Ning at session start.
7. METER. Tone Arm moving in the range of 8.0 to 2.0.
8. METER. Needle moving easily as pc does the process.
9. METER. WORKSHEETS. Blowdowns occur on right items and cognitions.
10. METER. Tone Arm counter showing normal or better TA for the session.
11. METER. WORKSHEETS. Change of characteristic in meter behavior every few
sessions.
12. METER. WORKSHEETS. Tone Arm blows down on cognitions.
13. METER. WORKSHEETS. Cognitions and F/Ns go together.
14. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. Somatics vanish in processing.
15. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. Pc blowing somatics and aberrations more
easily.
16. WORKSHEETS. METER. CHART OF HUMAN EVALUATION. Pc responses associated
with
what is being run.
17. TONE SCALE. CHART OF HUMAN EVALUATION. Pc moves on the Tone Scale.
18. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. CHART OF HUMAN EVALUATION. Pc understanding
self
better.
19. OBNOSIS. EXAM REPORTS. Eyes are brighter.
20. OBNOSIS. EXAM REPORTS. Improved skin tone.
21. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. Ears pop more open.
HCOB 3.5.80 - 5 -
22. WORKSHEETS. Pc cogniting.
23. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. CHART OF HUMAN EVALUATION. Life problems
lessening.
24. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. Pc getting through the program okay with
wins.
25. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. CHART OF HUMAN EVALUATION. Pc's havingness in
life and livingness is improving.
26. WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. CHART OF HUMAN EVALUATION. Pc getting case
gain.
27. EXAM REPORTS. Change of characteristic of Exam Reports.
28. WORKSHEETS. MISCELLANEOUS REPORTS. Pc wanting more auditing.
29. GRADE CHART. SUCCESS STORIES, WORKSHEETS. EXAM REPORTS. Pc going on up
the
Grade Chart not quickied and winning.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:nsp
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=2/5/80
Volnum=0
Issue=2
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Survival Rundown Series 3
SURVIVAL RUNDOWN ADMINISTRATION
Survival RD I/Cs
C/Ses
Review Auditors
Co-Audit Supervisors
Theory Supervisors
Administrators
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 2 MAY 1980
ISSUE II
Survival RD I/Cs
C/Ses
Review Auditors
Co-Audit Supervisors
Theory Supervisors
Administrators
Survival Rundown Series 3
SURVIVAL RUNDOWN ADMINISTRATION
(Ref: HCOB 1 May 80 SURVIVAL RUNDOWN
HCOB 29 May 80 CO-AUDITS: HOW TO RUN THEM)
Vital to the administration of the Survival Rundown is having adequate
terminals to keep the lines moving quickly so that there are no stops or
slows.
This issue lays out the hats that need to be worn for smooth Survival
RD
delivery.
In a smaller org or mission, some of these can be double-hatted but a
larger course will need each post single-hatted in order to successfully
handle
the load.
SURVIVAL RD I/C
A Survival RD Co-Audit of any size must have a Survival RD I/C. He has
the overall responsibility for Co-Audit's success and the success of the
Survival Rundown. He is senior over the Co-Audit Supervisor, Theory
Supervisor, Review Auditing Section and the Survival RD Admin. It is
optimum
that he has done the Survival RD himself. (If this function is held from
above, it would most likely be held by the D of T or Tech Sec but could be
held by the Survival RD Co-Audit Supervisor as a last resort.)
He is in charge of overseeing the routing of pcs/students through
their
Review cycles to completion.
He spot checks the Survival RD student DRs every day to ensure all is
going well and makes sure any outnesses are corrected by the proper
terminals.
The stat of the I/C is Survival RD PC Comps, Review Comps and Student
Comps.
The Survival RD I/C ensures the Co-Audit Supervisor, Theory Supervisor
and Admin wear their hats at all times. If anything comes on his lines that
is
another's hat, he pushes it down to them to handle. He writes crams on any
goofs the supervisors may make and ensures the C/S issues pink sheets on
the
co-auditors as needed. He also ensures the supervisors pink sheet any
outnesses.
The I/C really makes sure WHAT IS A COURSE PL is IN. He slams in all
points. He makes sure HCOB 30 Oct 78 COURSES THEIR IDEAL SCENE is in. He
isn't
reasonable and doesn't tolerate Q & A, non-compliance or out-ethics. He 8-
Cs
things with ARC and an uncompromising attitude. He is a stable terminal in
the
delivery of the Survival RD.
HCOB 2.5.80 II - 2 -
A tight line with the Dir Review or the Qual Sec should be kept
concerning the Reviews getting scheduled and done. Having people "waiting
for
Review" is not OK and the line must be 8-Ced by the Survival RD I/C.
He ensures all steps of the RD are being followed to the letter
including
the continuation of daily vitamins and exercise.
PUBLIC AND STAFF SURVIVAL RUNDOWN I/Cs
As with the Purification RD, many orgs have an I/C for the public and
an
I/C for the staff. This system can be applied to the Survival RD as well.
(In
this case the Staff I/C, if held from above, would most likely be held by
the
SSO. See HCO PL 29 Oct 79 SSO RESPONSIBILITY FOR STANDARD STAFF COURSES
while
the Public I/C would be held as covered on page 1.)
It is certain that orgs and missions will get their public through the
Survival RD. It is just as essential though, that staff members are gotten
through the Survival RD.
The most workable way to organize the staff onto and through the
Survival
RD is for the Survival RD I/C (whether he is handling only staff or both
staff
and public) to make up a master list of the org's staff members who have
successfully completed the Purification RD and any that are currently on
the
Purif RD. This can be in a log or, better yet, on a board. He uses this as
his
guide to where individuals are at. He then knows who should be routed onto
the
Survival RD, who is on the Review step, who is on the Co-Audit steps, etc.
This would look something like this:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
| NAME | ON PURIF | PURIF COMP | (Conditional) | SURVIVAL RD | SURVIVAL RD
|
| | | | REVIEW STEP | CO-AUDIT STEPS | COMP |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
---
The above is not a substitute for the course progress board but
enables
the I/C to keep track of where the staff members all are. There are plenty
of
org terminals keeping track of where the public are and 8-Cing them on to
their next services, but staff members tend to get neglected. I want all
staff
members to receive the benefits of the Survival RD and I am charging the
Qual
Sec or SSO or Staff Survival RD I/C-whoever is assigned the hat-with
getting their staff
HCOB 2.5.80 II - 3 -
members through this RD. Liaise with the C/S and get my staffs (including
yourselves) through the Purif RD, the Survival RD and on up the bridge.
It's
time someone gets concerned about staff members' enhancement. I am
especially
making these new rundowns easy to deliver to staff and I expect them gotten
through them and on up to Clear and OT:
CASE SUPERVISOR
The C/S reads the DRs every day and C/Ses every step of the Rundown.
He
makes sure the Rundown is done in the exact sequence and with no
interjected
or off-line case actions (Ref. C/S Series 29 & 38).
This includes such actions as Post Purpose Clearing, Debug Checklist,
False Data Stripping and Crashing MU Finding. These should be done before
the
Rundown is started. If needed during the Rundown for the person's post, the
C/S would have to OK it and it would be limited to FDSing, Word Clearing
and
Debug actions not requiring L & N or other case handlings such as Service
Fac
Handling.
Rudiments and word clearing in Cramming do not require C/S OK.
The best action is to just get the pc through the program and he'll
then
be easier to debug.
The Case Supervisor should be available during the co-audit course
time
if at all possible. The actions sometimes EP rapidly and if the Case
Supervisor is not available, the co-auditors lose valuable auditing hours
due
to waiting for their next C/S. (If the Co-Audit Supervisor is qualified, he
can C/S a co-auditor's session rather than having his co-auditors wait
several
hours or overnight for the Case Supervisor to get to the folders-this is
only a cope action though.)
REVIEW AUDITORS
The Survival RD Review Auditors must be Graduate Class IVs so that
they
can audit all of the required review steps.
The Review Auditors deliver the Repair step of the Survival RD, step
00.
They also do any review actions that come up during the Rundown that cannot
be
handled easily by the Co-Audit Supervisor. They handle students needing
extensive word clearing per TWINNING HCOB.
When you start the Rundown in an org, you would get the pcs who need
the
least Review in session first so that the co-audit can get rolling right
away.
The way you get the reviews done is you take your available Senior
Class
IV auditors (if you don't have enough, you better recruit and train them in
a
TTC), and assign as many pcs to each auditor as they can handle in one day.
Then those pcs go in every day until their repair is complete. As you
complete
pcs, you start new ones and finish their repairs in the same way.
You complete cycles of actions on pcs. Don't start everybody at once
and
leave them hanging in the middle for weeks.
HCOB 2.5.80 II - 4 -
By finishing programs, running co-audits and recruiting and training
auditors, you will get your public and staff up the bridge.
THEORY SUPERVISOR
The Theory Supervisor is responsible for keeping WHAT IS A COURSE PL
in
on his Survival Rundown students. He calls roll for all the students (to
ensure maximum 8-C) and after the roll call those who are working on
practical
report to the Co-Audit Supervisor.
The Theory Supervisor makes sure that the twins study together and do
any
necessary M3s, M9s, theory coaching, etc. on each other to get through the
course's theory materials.
If both are doing fine on theory, they would not twin on the theory of
course, but in the event one hits a rough spot, he would be coached through
it
by his twin.
When holding the final muster for the day, enough time must be allowed
the students to fully fill out their DRs. If this is not done you will end
up
with very little DR data as they will be hurriedly written. (This applies
to
the Co-Audit Super also.)
CO-AUDIT SUPERVISOR
The Co-Audit Supervisor is in charge of the Practical Section of the
Survival Rundown TRs and Objectives Course.
He supervises the drilling of TRs, processes, and the co-auditing of
the
Survival RD steps.
In the morning before course starts he reviews all the folders which
came
out from the C/S. He separates them out and puts them on the proper stacks
(D
of P, Declare, to Co-Auditor, Co-Audit Sup handling, Ethics, to MO, to
Review).
Every student on the Rundown writes a Daily Report which the Survival
RD
Co-Audit Sup reads every day. The Survival RD Admin places these DRs in the
folders after the Co-Audit Sup has read them and handled any BIs (he notes
his
handlings on the DR). They then go to the C/S, who also reviews them. The
Co-Audit Sup is responsible for the quality of the DRs and keeping the
students winning.
He handles any Bad Indicators such as no wins or cogs mentioned or
difficulties mentioned, by 2-way comm with the student and standard
handling
in liaison with the Theory Sup, Word Clearer and C/S as appropriate. He
involves the twin in the handling per the TWINNING HCOB.
The Co-Audit Sup should be a Survival RD completion or at least have
received his Objectives. The Co-Audit Sup must be qualified to fly ruds,
rehab
overruns and do Interviews. He can be trained on all of these actions on
the
new Co-Audit Supervisor Checksheet (HCO PL 2 June 1980 CO-AUDIT SUPERVISOR
COURSE).
HCOB 2.5.80 II - 5 -
If a co-audit session bogs, the co-auditor alerts the Co-Audit Sup
before
ending session and the Co-Audit Sup takes over and handles the pc exactly
per
CS Series 1 and HCOB 19 Mar 78 QUICKIE OBJECTIVES.
If the pc was in the middle of an unflat process and not at a good
flat
point, the Co-Audit Sup, after repairing the pc, would quickly correct the
auditor and the session would resume. Then both twins would be thoroughly
corrected as needed, after the session was over.
TIGHT SCHEDULING
The Rundown must not be done on a loose schedule. Tight scheduling is
very important. A proper personal schedule is also vital to the Rundown's
success.
Getting enough sleep, enough exercise and enough food and vitamins are
obviously necessary for proper bio-physical handling. You don't want the
body
being a PTP to the thetan.
SURVIVAL RUNDOWN ADMIN
The Survival Rundown Admin has the responsibilities outlined in HCO PL
16
Mar 71R WHAT IS A COURSE as regards course materials. (If this function is
double-hatted, it would most likely be held by the Co-Audit Supervisor.)
As the student only needs one pack for the course and a few books, it
is
not hard to have numerous complete packs for the students and there is no
excuse not to.
A Progress Board must be kept up to show progress through the
checksheet.
This progress board should show the dates that the students are targetted
to
complete the various sections.
The Admin sees that each student turns in a DR every day. When the
Co-Audit Sup and the I/C have finished with the DRs, the Admin files the
DRs
in the pc folders and sends the folders to the C/S.
The Survival Rundown Admin is the Folder Page for the Co-Audit and is
the
only one allowed to go into the C/S Office.
When the Co-Audit Sup or a co-auditor needs a pc folder, the Admin
rapidly locates and delivers it.
The following is a list of some of the successful actions done by the
SRD
Admin on the pilot:
1. Using good 8-C on the students.
2. Keeping the progress board in PT.
3. Making sure that the DRs are gotten into the folders and the folders
are
gotten to the C/S in time, so that the folder is C/Sed for the next
day.
4. Keeping the area in order (HCO PL 14 Feb 80 ORDER VERSUS DISORDER).
5. Keeping the files accurate and up to date.
HCOB 2.5.80 II - 6 -
6. Ensuring admin supplies and course materials are readily available.
7. Keeping Dev-T off the lines.
8. Maintaining a high level of particle flow.
9. Grooving in each new student on the admin lines which consist of Daily
Reports, where to report student points, where pc folders go, etc.
10. Rounding up students that didn't show up for course.
11. Keeping close track of all students, especially when in Qual or Ethics,
allowing none to fall off the line.
12. Keeping up a daily log that lists each student enrolled on the course
and
shows:
a. that the student has turned in his DR
b. that the DR has been filed in the pc folder and the folder has
been turned in to the C/S
SAMPLE LOG
[GRAPHICS INSERTED]
A = Absent
NR = No Report
X = Student not scheduled for that day
The sequence or flow line of handling DRs is:
HCOB 2.5.80 II - 7 -
1. Students write their DRs and turn them in to the basket marked SRD DRs.
(SRD = Survival Rundown)
2. a. The Admin picks up the DRs and logs them.
b. If any student has not turned in a DR the Admin would write up a
short report with the student's name at the top of the page and "No
Report" written clearly in large letters in the middle of the page.
This then takes the place of the student's omitted DR.
c. If the student was absent the Admin would similarly write up a
report. He would include data as to why the student was absent, if
anyone tried to call him and any bad indicators that were noted.
In this way there is a report for every student scheduled for class
that day, whether the student wrote one or not.
3. The Admin hand routes the reports to the Co-Audit Sup.
4. The Co-Audit Sup reads the DRs and spots any with bad indicators.
5. a. Any bad indicator is plainly circled in red, by the Co-Audit Sup.
b. If the bad indicator has to do with the student's auditing, the
Co-Audit Sup makes note of it and ensures the student is available
for
a session the next day (even if the student was not scheduled to come
in the next day).
c. If the bad indicator is on study, the Co-Audit Sup makes a note
of the report and writes in red on the report any other relevant
data. The Co-Audit Sup would then ensure that the student is handled
first thing the next day. This may necessitate word clearing, or the
student may need to see the MO about his vitamins or his exercise.
But
whatever it is it is always handled as a first action. The full
handling is then reported on the next day's student DR.
6. The Admin hand-routes the DRs to the I/C.
7. The I/C spot checks the DRs.
8. The Admin picks up all the DRs and files them in their respective pc
folders, logs the folders as "to the C/S" and then immediately takes
the
folders to the C/S's IN stack.
9. The folders are C/Sed.
10. After the folders are C/Sed they are picked up from the C/S OUT stack
by
the Admin and are taken to the Co-Audit Sup.
Drill these lines and get a smooth operation going.
Really deliver!
LRH:MM:mz L. RON HUBBARD
Copyright $c 1980 FOUNDER
by L. Ron Hubbard As assisted by
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Tech Project I/C
HCOB 2.5.80 II
ATTACHMENT
SURVIVAL RD
DAILY REPORT
DATE: _______________________
NAME: __________________________________
POST: __________________________________
CASE LEVEL: ____________________________
TRAINING LEVEL: ________________________
DATE YOU STARTED THE RD: __________________________
RD STEP YOU ARE CURRENTLY ON:
_________________________________________________
WINS OR COGS:
_________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
___
____________________________________________________________________________
___
____________________________________________________________________________
___
ANY DIFFICULTIES:
_____________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
___
____________________________________________________________________________
___
ANY COMMENTS CONCERNING THE RD OR A RD STEP:
__________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
___
____________________________________________________________________________
___
____________________________________________________________________________
___
HOW ARE YOU DOING ON CONTINUING YOUR DAILY EXERCISE AND VITAMINS?
____________________________________________________________________________
___
____________________________________________________________________________
___
____________________________________________________________________________
___
WHAT VITAMINS TAKEN?
__________________________________________________________
WHAT EXERCISE DONE? HOW LONG?
_________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
___
_______________________________
Signature
Supervisor Comments: __________________________
_______________________________________________
_______________________________________________
_______________________________________________
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
As assisted by
Tech Project I/C
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=2/5/80
Volnum=0
Issue=1
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Survival Rundown Series 2
SURVIVAL RUNDOWN
PC PROGRAM
Survival RD
Only
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 2 MAY 1980
Survival RD ISSUE I
Only
Survival Rundown Series 2
SURVIVAL RUNDOWN
PC PROGRAM
(REF: HCOB 1 May 80 SRD Series 1
SURVIVAL RUNDOWN
HCOB 2 May 80 II SRD Series 3
SURVIVAL RUNDOWN ADMINISTRATION
HCOB 4 May 80 SRD Series 4
C/SING THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN)
This program lays out the steps of the Survival RD. It is to be put in
the front inside cover or the pc's PT folder and is to be used as the
program
for the RD. Its sequence is not to be altered in any way.
The Survival RD is to be run only on SUCCESSFUL Purification RD
completions and the C/S is responsible for verifying this before he begins
anyone on his Survival RD Pgm.
IF THE PC HAS RECEIVED ANY OF THE FOLLOWING STEPS PREVIOUSLY, THEY
SHOULD
BE VERIFIED/FLATTENED AT THE APPROPRIATE PLACE OP THE RD.
0. The pc continues daily vitamins and exercise _______
00. A. Any needed correction of auditing repair given before the
Purif RD _______
B. Any needed repair or completion of any failed auditing process
given before the Purif RD _______
C. Any needed repair of cramming, correction or ESTO actions given
before or during the Purif RD _______
1. ENVIRONMENT LOCATIONAL _______
2. REACH/WITHDRAW ON MEST LOCATIONS:
A. OUTDOOR ENVIRONMENT _______
B. PC'S PERSONAL LIVING AREA AND MEST _______
C. PC'S WORKING AREA _______
3. TRs (TRs 0-4, TRs 6-9) _______
4. CCH 0 (Locational Processing Step) _______
5. OBJECTIVE ARC _______
6. CCH I-IV _______
7. CCH V _______
8. CCH VI _______
9. CCH VII _______
10. CCH VIII _______
11. CCH IX _______
HCOB 2.5.80 I - 2 -
12. CCH X _______
13. SCS ON AN OBJECT _______
14. SCS ON THE BODY _______
15. SOP S-C (omit if pc's next step is the Dianetic Drug RD) _______
16. OP PRO BY DUP (omit if pc's next step is the Dianetic Drug RD) _______
17. R2-69 PLEASE PASS THE OBJECT _______
18. R2-22 SPANNING ATTENTION _______
19. HANDLING DISORGANIZATION PROCESS _______
20. ORDER VERSUS DISORDER PL STEPS _______
21. FINAL REACH/WITHDRAW STEP _______
22. ADMIN TRs _______
______________________________________
Case Supervisor
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:mz
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=1/5/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Survival Rundown Series 1
THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN
Remimeo
Survival RD I/C
Survival RD C/S
Survival RD Supers
Survival RD Review Auditors
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 1 MAY 1980
Remimeo
Survival RD I/C
Survival RD C/S
Survival RD Supers
Survival RD Review Auditors
Survival Rundown Series 1
THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN
Ref: HCOB 2 May 80 SURVIVAL RUNDOWN
PC PROGRAM SRD Series 2
HCOB 2 May 80 SURVIVAL RUNDOWN Issue II
ADMINISTRATION
SRD Series 3
HCOB 6 Feb 78RA THE PURIFICATION
RD REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM
When a person has fully completed the Purification Rundown he is in
shape
to get the most possible gain from his auditing.
We needed a rundown that would be exactly the right action after the
Purification Rundown and so I have developed the SURVIVAL RUNDOWN, a very
highly effective, life changing rundown!
Done properly on successful Purification RD graduates, the Survival RD
puts the being in a position where he can be at cause and really survive in
this universe.
It was quite obvious from the beginning that the next step after the
Purification RD would be Objective Processing and this was stated in HCOB 6
Feb 78RA THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM. It was also
found though that a thetan, upon completion of the Purif RD, feels he is on
the road towards increased survival potential if this physical universe.
The
idea of giving Objective processing was then expanded upon, resulting in
the
overwhelmingly successful Survival Rundown which has been fully piloted and
results in an individual with greatly increased survival potential who is
in
PT and able to control and put order into his environment.
It is important that one understands just how the Purification RD and
the
Survival RD are related.
The Purification Rundown is a BIOCHEMICAL handling. By this is meant
"the
interaction of life forms and chemical substances." It handles those
factors
which produce a constant restimulation or drugs and drug related pictures.
Thus, when it is completed, gains from mental and spiritual processing can
fully occur.
The Survival RD is a BIOPHYSICAL handling. By biophysical we mean "the
interaction and relationship of the being to the physical universe and the
material things of the environment or universe."
BIO means: life, of living things. (From the Greek "BIOS" which means
life, or way of life.)
PHYSICAL means: of or pertaining to the body or thing of a material
nature, or to the material universe perceived by the senses; pertaining to
or
connected with matter; material.
HCOB 1.5.80 - 2 -
Thus, biophysical handling would be auditing the person on those
processes which get him, as a thetan, better aware of his body and his
physical surroundings, in better communication with these things and in
better
control of them.
We have had, since the early years of Scientology, the Objective
processes which accomplish this. That they now accomplish it more
successfully
than ever before when preceded by the handling of the effects of drugs and
toxins on the being on the purification Rundown is a very rewarding
discovery,
but there is more than that that has been discovered.
On the Survival Rundown this is amplified by the addition of brand new
technology on the handling of disorganization and disorder. This is coupled
with Objective Processes, a full battery of TRs and an array of drills
which
put a thetan at cause over handling MEST cycles of action and people (the
Admin TRs). It is very simple but, after the Purification RD, it has
produced
very very dynamic results on all levels of cases.
DEFINITION OF OBJECTIVES
If the word "Objective" is not properly defined and is not understood,
then one will not have any inkling as to why these processes work.
DEFINITION OF OBJECTIVE:
Noun: 1. Something real and observable.
Adjective: 2. Existing outside the mind as an actual object and not
merely in the mind as an idea; real.
3. About outward things, not about the thoughts or
feelings of the speaker, etc.
"Subjective" has to do with feelings and thoughts and internal mind
things. OBJECTIVE is the reverse of subjective. Objectives are the reverse
of
thinking and significance.
Thus, Objective Processes deal with the real and observable. They are
processes which call for the preclear to spot or find something exterior to
himself in order to carry out the auditing command.
Broadly, Objective Processes also include:
1. Control Processes, which place the preclear's body and actions
under
the Auditor's control and which then invite the preclear's own
control
of his body and actions.
2. Duplication Processes, in which communication is established by
having the preclear mimic and duplicate physical actions.
There is a wide range of Objective Processes to use to accomplish the
handling of biophysical factors for any pc.
WHY OBJECTIVES FOLLOW PURIFICATION
When one has taken a searching look at the biochemical scene, it
becomes
obvious how and why Objectives quite naturally
HCOB 1.5.80 - 3 -
follow the biochemical handling the person has had on the Purification
Rundown.
As covered in the original issue on the Purification Rundown, large
segments of today's society have been subjected to drugs, medical or
otherwise, and the intake of other biochemical poisons which are so much a
part of our current scene.
Effects of these substances can and do prevent the person from making
case gain, or optimum case gain, from any type of processing, including
Objective processing.
One does not need to be a "druggie" in the common sense of the word to
be
affected by this. It is a factor to be dealt with by practically anyone who
has been around and living in our biochemical-oriented society in recent
past
years.
It is known that drugs, pain-killers, tranquilizers, etc. block off
sensations. Any drug may be taken to drive a person out of an unbearable
present time or out of consciousness altogether. In most cases, people who
have taken street drugs or medical drugs have done so to avoid the pain of
a
sick or injured body or to avoid painful situations in the environment.
Drugs however (whether alcohol, tranquilizers, marijuana, LSD or other
biochemical substances) produce a,threat to the person like any other
poison.
This can be due to the blocking off of sensation and awareness or to their
direct effect on the nervous system, cells or tissues, but is also in great
extent due to the fact that they deplete the body of needed and important
vitamins and minerals. They can and do create nutritional deficiencies and
these can be severe and continuing.
The immediate threat is to the body, but under threat the thetan often
reacts by going out of present time. Anyone forced into a dangerous
environment tends to go either fully into present time or retreat from
present
time. Without benefit of processing, the likelihood is the person goes out
of
P.T. in more cases than not.
Residuals of these poisonous substances lodged in the body tend to
have
much the same effect. They can contribute to a continuation of any
nutritional
deficiency caused by the drug in the first place. They tend to put the
person
out of communication with his body or at the very least with those parts of
the body most severely affected by toxic deposits. Hence, they also tend to
put the person out of communication with his environment and with present
time
to a greater or lesser degree.
Therefore, when one has handled the biochemical effects of such a
situation on the Purification Rundown, the next logical step is the
biophysical handling which gets the person into present time and in control
of
his body and in good communication with the things of his environment. It
is
done with Objective Processes. These processes can also work to un-fixate
attention from the body where, for some, it may have been stuck for some
time.
REPAIR OF BRAIN DAMAGE
OR OTHER CELLULAR DAMAGE FROM DRUGS
There is another factor here, which is that many people are concerned
over the possibility that marijuana, LSD and other drugs so damage the
brain
or the nervous system and cells as to make complete recovery impossible.
HCOB 1.5.80 - 4 -
There is probably more hope to be had here than was originally
considered.
There are soldiers who have experienced bullet wounds in the brain who
totally lost the power of speech or some other facility, but it is a matter
of
record that, when carefully schooled and exercised, other new brain cells
have
become usable and the lost ability has been regained.
Research may show that, even when drugs have damaged the nervous
system
or cells, the ability to think and act and react may probably be regained:
a. if the residual effects of these drugs are handled,
and
b. if any damage is repaired by diet, vitamins, etc.
Whether the drugs have harmed the body directly or harmed it by creating
vitamin and mineral deficiencies, once the original drug poisons are
handled
and the damage bypassed or handled with correct nutrition, it is entirely
possible that such recovery could take place.
Thus, though many are worried about drug and poison damage being
irreversible, based on the above research this may not necessarily be the
case.
Taking all possibilities into consideration, it may be that, with the
proper spiritual handlings being done on the biochemical level (as with the
Purification Rundown) and the biophysical level (as with the Survival
Rundown)
thoroughly and well, there could be considerable hope for a full resurgence
of
physical health and spiritual well-being for someone who has suffered from
the
harmful effects of drugs and toxins.
WHO GETS AUDITED ON THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN?
For any starting pc, the beginning of the Bridge now consists of:
1. The Purification Rundown
2. The Survival Rundown
3. Full Drug Rundown
And following that would come all of the remainder of the Dianetics
and
Scientology processes, mental and spiritual, in proper sequence, which make
up
the full Bridge.
It is the responsibility of the C/S to ensure that any new pc is
programmed and handled according to these steps, and to ensure that pcs
already on the Bridge are not being prevented from making case gain due to
any
of the above having been omitted or quickied.
Any person who has never had Objectives must be C/Sed for this Rundown
as
his next step after the Purification Rundown is completed.
For those who have had Objectives prior to the Purification Rundown,
it
must be a matter of C/S adjudication as to whether the person would then be
given further Objectives or not. (Those Objective Processes that were
previously received would of course be verified at the proper place on the
Survival RD and either rehabbed or flattened.)
HCOB 1.5.80 - 5 -
Many pcs now doing the Purification Rundown may have had many hours of
Objectives and had valid and lasting gain from them. The C/S must establish
whether this is the case and, if so, he would simply rehab each Objective
run
or, as needed in some cases, any overall EP of Objective processing is
rehabbed or Date/Located.
Many may have missed Objectives totally, or been quickied on them. For
such cases, the Survival Rundown (preceded by successful completion of the
Purif Rundown) is the point at which a lack of Objectives or quickied
Objectives would be remedied.
There will also be those who have had Objectives which were done over
the
effects of heavy drug and toxic restimulation, which could have prevented
case
gain even from Objectives if these were done before the Purification
Rundown.
In these cases the Objectives previously run would be verified and
flattened
as needed.
Obviously, if there is evidence that Objectives have been quickied or
omitted or if the person did not do well on them, the C/S would need to
ensure
that this was handled on the Survival Rundown.
STEPS OF THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN
0. CONTINUATION OF DAILY VITAMINS AND EXERCISE
Not only does the continuation of daily vitamins and exercise make
sense
but this was in high demand by Purification RD graduates. They wanted to
continue the daily regimen of properly maintaining their bodies after their
completion of the Purif and so this is therefore included in the Survival
RD.
It is suggested that the minimum daily requirements of vitamins and
minerals be continued while on the Survival RD, per HCOB 6 Feb 78RA THE
PURIFICATION RUNDOWN REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM, page 18 under "End
Phenomena"
and HCOB 5 May 80 CONTINUATION OF DAILY VITAMINS AND EXERCISE.
It is also recommended that the system of twinning on the daily
exercising is followed on the Survival RD. This is for two reasons: (1)
twins
8-C each other on maintaining the daily schedule and regimen and (2) it is
a
good safety precaution.
Due to individual schedules, the person's course twin may not always
be
his exercise twin but it is usually preferred.
00. REPAIR OF PAST REPAIRS IN AUDITING
With the benefit of increased case gain potential one receives from
the
Purification RD, you will find that cases who had bugged repair cycles,
incomplete case actions, apparently failed case actions and botched or
apparently unsuccessful Qual correction actions can now be set straight and
swiftly repaired.
This step of the RD is fully laid out in HCOB C/S Ser 109 CONDITIONAL
STEP AFTER PURIF and HCOB 13 Jan 70 C/S Ser 3 SESSION PRIORITIES-REPAIR
PROGRAMS AND THEIR PRIORITIES.
1. ENVIRONMENT LOCATIONAL
This step is extremely simple to do but produces very big wins on
Purif
grads. They are in a state of now having
HCOB 1.5.80 - 6 -
their attention unfixated from the body and this locational moves them
right
into communication with their present time environment. You'll be amazed at
the responses this step gets! This step is laid out in HCOB 6 May 80
ENVIRONMENT LOCATIONAL.
2. REACH AND WITHDRAW ON MEST LOCATIONS
The Survival RD issue which covers this step includes data about Reach
and Withdraw that I discovered had never been broadly released. The theory
of
this action is contained in HCOB 7 May 80 REACH AND WITHDRAW ON MEST
LOCATIONS.
Once the thetan has been gotten into communication with his
environment,
his reach and confront is then raised on this step of the Survival RD.
Three
areas are covered-the outdoor environment, the individual's personal living
area & MEST, and his work space. This step alone has produced some of the
most
dramatic changes which occur on this Rundown.
The Reach and Withdraw and the Environment Locational are not to be
underestimated because of their simplicity. You must realize that, after
the
Purif, you have a thetan with a fresh clean viewpoint and an anxiousness to
become reacquainted and causative over the physical universe which he is
operating in. This Reach and Withdraw step does just that. (NOTE: Those
co-auditing the Survival RD are purposely gotten onto the Locational and
Reach
and Withdraw steps before any admin hatting, TRs, etc. so that they get
immediate wins on the course. It also improves their study.)
3. OT TR 0 - TR 4 and TRs 6 - 9
The TRs on the Survival RD are done on either Section II of the
SURVIVAL
RUNDOWN TRs AND CO-AUDIT COURSE CHECKSHEET (HCO PL 12 May 80) or on
sections
II - III of the SURVIVAL RUNDOWN TRs COURSE CHECKSHEET (HCO PL 13 May 80)
(for
HGC pcs on the Survival Rundown).
The TRs 0-4 on the Survival RD incorporate some of the most recent
technical breakthroughs in the area of TRs. Theory on the communication
formula, ARC and TR basics is included.
These are not Professional Auditor's TRs (Hard TRs) but are a gradient
below that. The Training Drills on the Survival RD are done towards the
purpose of improving an individual's understanding of communication, his
ability to communicate and to raise his level of intention. They can be
cycled
through if necessary per study tech on gradients.
It has been found that at this step of the Survival RD, many
individuals
truly duplicate the data about communication for the first time regardless
of
how many times they read it previously. Also, life ruins in the area of
communication have been handled. Doing TRs at this point in an individual's
auditing is actually very therapeutic.
For those co-auditing the Survival RD, the above TRs of course are
necessary drilling for their auditing of their twin.
4-16. OBJECTIVES
The Objective Processes run at this point of the Survival Rundown are
as
follows:
HCOB 1.5.80 - 7 -
4. CCH 0 (Locational processing Step-per HCOB CCH 0 --
LOCATIONAL PROCESSING STEP)
5. Objective ARC
6. CCHs 1-4
7. CCH 5
8. CCH 6
9. CCH 7
10. CCH 8
11. CCH 9
12. CCH 10
13. Start-Change-Stop On An Object
14. Start-Change-Stop (Body)
These are run in the above sequence, each fully to its EP.
The remainder of these basics:
15. SOP 8-C
16. Opening Procedure by Duplication (Op Pro By Dup)
are then given the person as the final part of his next auditing step, the
NED
Drug Rundown.
In other words, when the person has not yet had a Dianetic Drug
Rundown,
SOP 8-C and Op Pro By Dup are the Objectives given after all of the steps
of
the NED Drug Handling are complete. (Ref: HCOB 15 July 71RC, Revised
31.1.79,
C/S Series 48RD, NED Series 9RB, DRUG HANDLING.)
Exception: If the pc is Clear or OT he would not be given the NED Drug RD
or
any other Dianetics but would simply get all of the above Objectives 4 -
16,
in sequence, as part of the Survival RD.
Any pc who is on or between R6EW, Clearing Course, OT I, OT II, OT
III
or who is a NED for OTs pc would not receive any other auditing action than
the one he is on as he is in the Non-Interference Zone.
Also, in other cases where the preclear has completed a Drug Rundown
but
is getting additional Objectives following his Purification Rundown, SOP 8-
C
and Op Pro By Dup are verified or run as part of the Survival Rundown.
The list above comprises those Objective processes which have been
chosen as the basic objective rundown. This does not mean that other
objectives cannot be run. There are many, many more objective processes in
Scientology, and these are covered extensively in HCOBs, PABs, books and
tapes. The C/S is at liberty to get the pc run on other objectives if
needed
after the specified processes have been run to their full End Phenomena.
Note: Objectives are also used early on when a person is first coming off
drugs to prevent withdrawal symptoms, but that is not a full Objectives
handling and such persons have
HCOB 1.5.80 - 8 -
to be fully completed on Objectives after Purification and TRs have been
done.
Note: A full list of Source references for the basic Objectives is given on
the Attachment accompanying this bulletin.
17. R2-69 PLEASE PASS THE OBJECT
This process is fully presented in the book CREATION OF HUMAN ABILITY.
It is placed at this point on the Survival RD as a gradient to the
Order
versus Disorder step. On R2-69 the thetan is allowed to place an object in
various locations. He even comes up to "games" on the subject and will
regain
the ability to causatively put an object somewhere.
18. R2-22 SPANNING ATTENTION
This is also a CREATION OF HUMAN ABILITY process.
The preclear now increases his attention concerning objects. He will
be
able to causatively put his attention on numerous objects and thus increase
his ability to handle the MEST UNIVERSE.
19. HANDLING OF DISORGANIZATION
I have developed this process just for the Survival RD. It is not run
outside of the Survival RD or in any other place on this RD.
R2-69 and R2-22 gives us a pc who knows he can causatively place an
object somewhere and who can have his attention on more than one object at
a
time.
Step A of the Handling of Disorganization process is geared towards
the
realization that (a) objects can exist in an orderly fashion, (b) one can
do
something with objects and, (c) it is a simple task to return an object to
its
original location after doing something with it.
On step B of this process, the pc will realize that (a) he can
self-determinedly organize objects,(b)the key to handling disorganization
is
to organize and locate MEST objects and return them to their original
location
once used, which is the EP of the process. It is laid out in HCOB 9 May 80
HANDLING OF DISORGANIZATION.
The Handling of Disorganization Process was tailor-made to precede the
Order Versus Disorder step. It is the gradient that really ensures the
Order
Versus Disorder step is completely effective.
20. ORDER VERSUS DISORDER PL STEPS
The full theory of this step is' covered in HCO PL 14 Feb 80 ORDER
VERSUS
DISORDER. It is done exactly per the above PL with the exception of step #2
which has been expanded in HCO PL 10 May 80 ORDER VERSUS DISORDER-STEP #2
EXPANDED.
This step, quite obviously, gets an individual's personal and working
environment into order. It increases his organization and helps him to
causatively produce whatever his products are. It also would include the
handling of anyone in the condition of Confusion (per page 7 of the Order
Versus Disorder PL and per HCO PL 9 Feb 74R THE EXPANDED CONFUSION .
FORMULA).
HCOB 1.5.80 - 9 -
An individual's survival depends to a large degree on his ability to
put
order into things and produce a valuable product. Without this, the
individual
is out exchange with his environment and other people. An individual who is
not producing is not surviving and in fact becomes mentally or physically
ill.
He is incompetent. His morale is out the bottom and he is not expanding.
An individual who can bring about order and who can produce a valuable
product has high morale. He is in exchange with his environment and other
people, and it is exchange which maintains the inflow and outflow that
gives a
person space around him and keeps the bank off of him. Such an individual
has
a high survival potential, indeed!
21. FINAL REACH AND WITHDRAW STEP
The Order Versus Disorder step of the Survival RD can seem to be a bit
of
an other-determined action as the individual's working and living areas are
inspected, he is 8-Ced into putting order into any disorder encountered and
then re-inspected. (This is covered in HCOB 11 May 80 FINAL REACH AND
WITHDRAW
STEP.)
This final Reach and Withdraw step raises the individual's Havingness
and
ARC towards the objects/areas he has now put into order. This also
increases
his causativeness in these areas so that he will maintain the order he has
put
them into.
22. ADMIN TRs
The Admin TRs (HCOB 17 May 80 ADMINISTRATIVE TRs) increase one's
causativeness over the everyday confusions, randomities, justifications,
excuses, traps and insanities of MEST and people. They enable one to
comfortably confront such things when encountered.
All of the Admin TRs should be done at the end of the Survival RD even
if
previously done as the individual will get increased benefits from them
after
the gradient steps of the Survival RD. (The only exception is the fact that
TR
R/W MEST is not done on the Survival RD as its purpose is accomplished on
an
earlier RD step-R/W ON MEST LOCATIONS.)
At this point on the Survival RD, one's potential to handle the MEST
Universe and other people is raised out the roof!
EP
The EP of the Survival Rundown is "Feeling in Present Time and able to
control and put order into the environment. Greatly increased survival
potential."
CO-AUDIT VS HGC AUDITING
The Survival RD is set up so that it can easily be delivered in any
org
or mission, on a co-audit basis or in an HGC.
I do want you to know that in the piloting of the Survival RD, some of
the biggest wins expressed were auditor wins from those co-auditing this
Rundown. The Survival RD is now one of the first places an individual
learns
to audit. The issues and the checksheet are specially designed to make it
very easy gradient for even the newest Scientologists.
HCOB 1.5.80 - 10 -
Becoming an auditor raises a person's self-respect and feeling of
value.
He becomes more effective as a being because he knows he can help others.
His
confront is higher. His case gain is twice that of someone who only
receives
auditing.
THE SURVIVAL RD AND STAFF
I want to make it very clear that the Survival RD is intended for
staff
as well as public. All staff that complete the Purification RD should be
programmed for the Survival RD. They can easily co-audit it and should. It
has
everything to do with enhancing our staff members, making them into
auditors,
getting them up the Bridge and improving their production.
Without able staff members we have no hope of flourishing and
prospering. And besides, who more deserves to get up the Bridge than our
staff?
C/SING THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN
To C/S the Survival RD one must be a Graduate C1 IV C/S. He must be
familiar with the co-audit technology and high crimed on all Survival
Rundown
issues and related tech. It is advised that he himself do the Survival RD
at
the soonest opportunity.
Specific data concerning C/Sing the Survival RD is found in HCOB 4
May
80 C/SING THE SURVIVAL RUNDOWN.
The Survival Rundown is the key to increased survival for your
public,
staff and the org. Run standardly it changes conditions beyond belief. It
will
directly affect stats and production and morale will soar, both for the
individual and the org.
Most importantly, it is a big step on the Bridge and opens the way to
mental and spiritual processing with more gains than ever before. You will
also be training auditors and paving the way for more people to get up the
Bridge.
Here's to the best, biggest and widest Bridge ever!
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
as assisted by
TECH PROJECT I/C
LRH:MM:nsp
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HCOB 1.5.80 - 11 -
The Purification Rundown referred to in the above issue has as its sole
purpose the handling of the restimulative effects of drugs and toxic
residuals
on a Spiritual Being. The Purification Rundown is a Spiritual activity
based
on and administered according to the doctrine and practices of the religion
of
Scientology as set forth in the writings of L. Ron Hubbard and adopted by
the
Church. No part of the Rundown is intended as the diagnosis, prescription
for,
or treatment of any bodily or physical condition or ill. The Church is not
responsible for the handling of any bodily or physical condition or ill, it
being the responsibility of the individual to seek the competent medical
advice and treatment of his doctor in such matters.
THE BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
HCOB 1.5.80
ATTACHMENT
MATERIALS ON OBJECTIVES
There is a wealth of data on Objectives in earlier Scientology
materials, and these materials must be well known by any C/S or HGC auditor
or
Co-audit Supervisor attempting to deliver this Rundown.
References for the basic Objectives are given here under each of the
processes:
CCH 0
HCOB 8 May 80 CCH 0 -- LOCATIONAL PROCESSING STEP
HCOB 4 Dec 57 CLEAR PROCEDURE CONTINUED
STEP ONE: PARTICIPATION IN SESSION BY THE PC
PAB No. 133 1 Apr 58 PROCEDURE CCH
HCOB 15 Oct 58 ACC CLEAR PROCEDURE
OBJECTIVE ARC
HCOB 19 Jun 78 NED Series 3 OBJECTIVE ARC
CCHs 1-4
HCOB 1 Dec 65 CCHs
HCOB 5 Apr 62 CCHs AUDITING ATTITUDE
PAB 133 PROCEDURE CCH (Tech Vol III, pg 238)
PAB 134 PROCEDURE CCH CONTINUED (Vol III, pg 247)
HCOB 15 Oct 58 ACC CLEAR PROCEDURE PAB 150
DUMMY AUDITING STEP THREE:
DUPLICATION (Vol III, pg 354)
PAB 151 DUMMY AUDITING STEP FOUR:
HANDLING ORIGINATIONS (Vol III, pg 370)
PAB 154 CCH CONCLUDED (Vol III, pg 400)
HCOB 5 Jun 81 PROCESSES ALLOWED
HCOB 23 Jun 61 RUNNING CCHs
HCOB 27 Jun 61 ROUTINE ONE
HCOB 29 Mar 62 CCHs AGAIN. WHEN TO USE THE CCHs
Tapes:
5707C05 FC-4 BASIC THEORY OF CCHs
5707C07 FC-15 CCH-STEPS 1 THROUGH 4: DEMONSTRATION
6106C22 SH Spec 18 RUNNING CCHs
6203C29 SH Spec 126 CCHs
CCHs 5-10
HCOB 11 Jun 57 TRAINING AND CCH PROCESSES
PAB 135 PROCEDURE CCH CONTINUED (Vol III, pg 254)
PAB 131 THE SCALE OF WITHHOLD (Vol III, pg 230)
PAB 87 SCIENTOLOGY PROCESSING (Vol II, pg 441)
HCOB 1.5.80 - 2 -
ATTACHMENT
CCHs IN GENERAL
PAB 122 THE FIVE LEVELS OF INDOCTRINATION AND
PROCEDURE CCH (Vol III, Pg 128)
HCOB 4 Dec 57 CLEAR PROCEDURE CONTINUED
BOOK: Scientology Clear Procedure Issue One (Vol III, pgs 172-193)
HCOB 3 Jul 59 GENERAL INFORMATION
HCOB 11 Apr 62 DETERMINING WHAT TO RUN
HCOB 12 Apr 62 CCHs PURPOSE
HCOB 26 Apr 62 RECOMMENDED PROCESSES HGC
START-CHANGE-STOP
BOOK: Control and the Mechanics of S-C-S PAB 97 START-CHANGE-STOP
(Vol II, pg 521)
HCOB 28 Jul 58 CLEAR PROCEDURE
HCOB 2 Feb 81 UK CASES DIFFERENT
SOP 8-C
PAB 34 OPENING PROCEDURE SOP 8C
(Vol II, Pg 76)
PAB 47 OPENING PROCEDURE 8-C (Vol II,
pg 146)
BOOK: Creation of Human Ability, R2-18
BOOK: Phoenix Lectures, Chapter 18
BOOK: Dianetics 55!, Chapter XII
OP PRO BY DUP
HCOB 4 Feb 59 OP PRO BY DUP
BOOK: Creation of Human Ability, R2-17
BOOK: Phoenix Lectures, Chapters 19 & 20
BOOK: Dianetics 55!, Chapter XII
OBJECTIVES IN GENERAL
HCOB 14 May 82 CASE REPAIR
HCO PL 17 May 65 CCHs
HCOB 19 Mar 78 QUICKIE OBJECTIVES
HCOB 26 Aug 78 MORE ON DRUGS
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
as assisted by
TECH PROJECT I/C
THE BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=29/4/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
PREPARED LISTS, THEIR VALUE
AND PURPOSE
Remimeo
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 29 APRIL 1980
Remimeo
PREPARED LISTS, THEIR VALUE
AND PURPOSE
No matter how complicated or confusing the environment is getting, if
you have a stable datum of exact action it can see you through.
The Prepared List provides the auditor with a stable action when a
session or case is confusing and can bring things under control.
The idea of such lists and their development are original to
Dianetics
and Scientology. They are made possible because these subjects embrace the
full extent of thought, the spirit and actual and potential aberration.
Thousands of hours of research and development have gone into these lists.
Thousands of case histories have been reviewed and condensed to make the
lists
possible. They are, in themselves, a considerable tour de force.
They have often meant the difference between a failed case and a
spectacular result. Just as they are important, a knowledge of them and
skill
in their use is vital to auditing success.
HISTORY
Probably the oldest "prepared list" is the White Form, (now called
THE
ORIGINAL ASSESSMENT SHEET-HCOB 24 Jun 78R). This provided a series of
questions which would give one the background of the preclear. It dates
from
1950. By it one can get the probable this life areas of the preclear's
heaviest charge.
SELF ANALYSIS was written in 1951. It contains processing lists a
preclear could run on himself.
Group Auditing materials of the middle 80s contained lists of
commands
which were run on groups. Done on a meter, it provides a case entrance.
The "Joburg" of 1961 is probably the next historical point. It was a
list of the possible withholds a preclear might have. It was called the
"Joburg" because it was developed in Johannesburg, South Africa.
The "L1" was probably next. The original gave a list of session
rudiments which might have gone out and enabled the auditor to get the
session
rudiments back in. It is still in use as "L1C" or "List One C".
The "Green Form" was developed in the early 60s so that Qual Review
at
Saint Hill would have a tool to analyze a case.
Correction lists for various auditing actions began to appear. These
corrected an action in progress that had gone awry.
In 1973, the famous "C/S 53" (meaning "Case Supervisor Series 53")
was
devised and continued to be improved and reissued.
HCOB 29.4.80 - 2 -
Today there are dozens of Prepared Lists. There is even a prepared
list
to repair repaired lists in general.
THEORY OF PREPARED LISTS
A Prepared List is an assembly of the majority of things which can be
wrong in a case, an auditing action or a session.
Such lists are quite remarkable, actually. Only a thorough knowledge
of
aberration makes such a list possible. When you look over the extent of
Prepared Lists, you will see that they contain a grasp of the subject of
aberration never before available.
USE
While an auditor is expected to have studied and mastered all this
theory, it is a bit much to expect that in the confusion of a case or
session
gone wrong he will be able to spot instantly, without help, exactly WHAT
has
gone wrong. Prepared Lists, where they exist, and his E-Meter will sort
this
out for him. All the auditor has to have is a general insight that
something
is going wrong, know in general what is being handled in the case, knows
what
list to use and then, with good TRs and metering, do an assessment of the
Prepared List. Usually the trouble will come right, since the exact point
will
have been located. It is sometimes enough to merely indicate the point
found
to discharge it somewhat. One can F/N what is found or one can go into very
wide, extensive handling. The point is, the use of the Prepared List has
spotted the trouble. What is demanded of the auditor or C/S is WHICH
Prepared
List to use, but this is determined by what has been going on.
TYPES OF PREPARED LISTS
There are four general types of Prepared Lists. These are:
A. An ANALYSIS list. This is a type of Prepared List which analyzes a
case broadly or analyzes a session. The purpose of it is to find out what
to
address in the case in order to program it. The White Form, the Green Form
and
the C/S 53 can all be used for this purpose. There are other such lists and
there is even a Prepared List to debug production.
B. A direct AUDITING list. Prepared Lists exist which deliver direct
auditing commands or questions which, run on the oc, produce an auditing
result. The lists of SELF ANALYSIS and the various Confessional Lists form
this type of Prepared List.
C. A CORRECTION list. This type of list corrects an ongoing action.
Examples are the Word Clearing Correction List, the Int Rundown Correction
List, the Dianetic Correction List. There is a bit of a grey area in this
type of list as one can also use some of them for analysis as in the case
of a
Course Supervisor Correction List or a Student Correction List. The C/S 53
can
also serve as a correction list. The real difference is what the list is
being
used for-to analyze to find out what to program or start or to correct
something already in progress.
D. DRILL lists. These are used in training as dummy lists to get an
auditor used to handling the meter and Prepared Lists. Such lists are
contained in the Book of E-Meter Drills.
HCOB 29.4.80 - 3 -
METHOD OF HANDLING
There are three methods of handling Prepared Lists, depending on the
type
of list.
There is simply the method of asking the questions in sequence and
getting the answer from the preclear. This would apply to a White Form or
to
auditing Prepared Lists as in Self Analysis or in Group Auditing. Very few
lists are handled in this way.
The second way is called "Method 3" wherein the list is assessed on a
meter and when a read is noted, the meter-reading question is taken up with
the preclear and F/Ned. Method 3 is covered in HCOB 3 Jul 71 AUDITING BY
LISTS.
The third way is called "Method 5". This type of assessment assesses
the
whole Prepared List rapidly without getting the preclear to talk and the
reads
are then noted. The largest read or reads are then taken up and F/Ned.
Method
5 is covered in HCOB 3 Jul 71 AUDITING BY LISTS.
TRS AND METERING
Whether or not a Prepared List reads depends upon the auditor's TRs
and
Metering. At one time or another Case Supervisors have had a great deal of
trouble with this. Accuracy as to what really read was greatly in question.
This came to view on Flag in the early 70s when Prepared Lists that had
been
assessed by Class IV trainees were then reassessed, same list, sane pc
shortly
after the first list assessment, by Class XIIs. Totally different results
were
found-lists on which few or no reads were obtained by the Class Class IV
trainees were found to be very live by the Class XIIs. The difference of
quality of TRs and metering were what made the difference with the prepared
list response. HCOB 22 April 1980 contains the drills which remedy this. It
is
the TRs and metering of the auditor that makes a prepared list reliable,
not
the list itself.
The champion list of all time is the C/S 53. On one page, any general
thing that can be aberrated in a thetan has been assembled. There are two
forms of it-Short Form for preclears who know the terms and Long Form for
preclears who are unindoctrinated (they are the same lists but the Short
Form
is in single word and the Long Form is a full question).
A Director of Processing giving a D of P Interview can use one of
these
and obtain enough material to enormously help a Case Supervisor. It is not
the
only D of P Interview action but it is very helpful when used.
An auditor can debug a program or a session with it.
It can analyze a case for programming and it can also be used to
correct
a program or to correct a session.
Originally it was developed to handle high and low Tone Arm cases and
although it still says this, it also says it can "correct case outnesses".
And
today, this is its greatest use.
PRIORITY of handling outnesses is a vital part of C/S 53. The first
three groups of items -- (Interiorization outnesses), B (List errors) and C
(rudiments) -- give the necessary order of handling. If Int is reading,
nothing else can be handled until it is. List errors take the next
priority.
Then rudiments. If one were to try to repair a case out of sequence, a mess
could occur. So this Prepared List also gives the sequence in which
outnesses
must be handled.
HCOB 29.4.80 - 4 -
The main fault is using a C/S 53 is overuse-an auditor reaching for it
when he gets in trouble instead of improving the auditor's own TRs,
metering
or knowledge of programming in the first place.
But the C/S 53 is one of the most valuable tools an Auditor or a Case
Supervisor has.
GENERAL CASE HANDLING
The Prepared Lists of all types place in the hands of the Case
Supervisor
and the auditor a procedure by which a case can be analyzed and programmed.
Some auditing can be done direct from Prepared Lists.
WORD CLEARING PREPARED LISTS
It can happen that a Prepared List gets stalled on misunderstood
words.
For many Prepared Lists there are also full word clearing lists which
can
be done on the pc.
At one time it was thought that before one did a list one should
ALWAYS
word clear it. However, this has the liability that a pc who is in one kind
of
trouble can't sit still until a full word clearing action is done.
The amount of trouble which came from Prepared Lists came more from
assessing and metering errors than it did from misunderstood words.
When one is using a prepared list on a pc who has never had it word
cleared, it is usually enough to check that the read isn't coming from a
Mis U.
Early in a pc's auditing, about the time he gets a CS-1, the more
critical prepared lists should be word cleared and the fact noted in his
folder. But when one is doing this word clearing, tone arm action or
significant reads should also be noted. One is liable to think he is word
clearing whereas he is actually assessing.
True, there are a lot of tech words on a prepared list that the pc
isn't
likely to know. Unfortunately, the discoveries of Scientology exceed common
language and require terms of their own. But a pc catches on to this quite
rapidly. They are new ideas to him (even though he was been living with
them
all the eons of his existence). When the word is cleared, the idea is also
thrown into action. So it is important to note meter reads and and tone arm
actions when clearing the words of prepared lists.
No hard and fast rules can be drawn on this point of word clearing
Prepared Lists. If you have already word cleared the key words of a key
Prepared List before you need it, thank your stars. Otherwise, carry on and
hope.
SUMMARY
A Case Supervisor and an auditor owe it to themselves to have a good
command of this subject of Prepared Lists. There are many issues on the
subject. There are dozens of Prepared Lists.
HCOB 29.4.80 - 5 -
Knowing what Prepared Lists exist is a vital step for a Case
Supervisor
and auditor. Knowing what each is used for is equally important. Knowing
which
lists have word clearing lists already prepared is of assistance.
One has to know enough general tech in order to select what Prepared
List
to use.
The ability to assess, as it applies to TRs and metering is extremely
important in using Prepared Lists.
When it comes to analyzing, auditing and correcting cases and actions,
the Prepared Lists are a jewel box that glitters with potential success.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:dr
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=22/4/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
ASSESSMENT DRILLS
Remimeo
Auditors
Surveyors
Examiners
Ethics Officers
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 22 April 1980
Remimeo
Auditors
Surveyors
Examiners
Ethics Officers
ASSESSMENT DRILLS
Ref: HCOB 6 Dec 73 C/S Series 90
THE PRIMARY FAILURE
HCOB 28 Feb 71 C/S Series 24
METERING READING ITEMS
HCOB 15 Oct 73 C/S Series S7
NULLING AND F/NING PREPARED LISTS
HCOB 22 Jul 78 ASSESSMENT TRs
THE BOOK OF E-METER DRILLS
(Note: It is required that anyone doing the following drills shall
have
done a TR course, an Upper Indoc course and the drills of the E-Meter Drill
Book.)
According to HCOB 6 Dec 73, the make or break point of an auditor was
his
ability to get reads on a prepared list. This depended upon (a) His TR 1
and
(b) His Metering.
In 1978 this was further studied and in HCOB 22 Jul 78 ASSESSMENT TRs,
it
was found that correct voice pitches had everything to do with assessment.
I have just developed drills which improve this ability to make lists
read and to improve an auditor's auditing in general.
These drills will also be found to have great value to people who do
surveys, to Examiners and to Ethics Officers.
E-METER
To begin, an auditor should review his E-Meter drills and practice
E-Meter Drill 27 on page 82 of the Book of E-Meter Drills, E-Meter Drill
CR0000-4 and, if found necessary, E-Meter Drill CR0000-3. It is called to
attention that E-Meter Drill 5 of the Book of E-Meter Drills has been
replaced
with E-Meter Drill 5RA and if not done, should be done. This E-Meter Drill
5RA
is the only change in the original book. Further, it applies to the Mark VI
just as well as it applied to the Mark V for which the book was written-the
controls and actions of the Mark V and Mark VI are practically identical,
though the Mark VI moves up to higher level cases.
Being able to see and read and operate an E-Meter has everything to do
with getting reads off a prepared list. Where an auditor misses it is
simply
that he has not adequately done the drills in the Book of E-Meter Drills
and
has not practiced up to a point of full, easy familiarity with the E-Meter.
The point of being able to make lists read is pointless unless the auditor
can
set up, handle and read an E-Meter. But the skill is easily acquired.
ASSESSMENT TRAINING DRILLS
The following drills have the letter "Q" after them to mean that they
are
used for QUESTIONS. The Q is followed by a number to show that they are
drilled in that sequence.
HCOB 22.4.80 - 2 -
In these Q drills, the practice of twinning and any other TP tech
normal
to TRs is followed.
TR 1-Q1
NUMBER: TR 1-Q1
NAME: Pitch of the Question.
POSITION: Coach sitting at the keyboard of a piano or organ or any useable
instrument, student standing beside instrument.
PURPOSE: To establish the pitch differences of statements and questions.
DATA:
[GRAPHICS INSERTED]
TRAINING PROCEDURE: If the student is a girl, the coach asks her to say
"Apple" as a statement. The coach then strikes the C above middle C (as
given
in the data above) and then the C above middle C. If the student is a man,
the
coach asks him to say "Apple" as a statement and then strikes middle C and
then the F below middle C. This is repeated-saying "apple" and striking the
two notes until the pitch of a statement can be duplicated by the student.
(In the event, the student has a voice pitch at variance with these notes,
other notes can be found and used by the coach so long as the higher note
is
first and the second note is four or five whole notes below the first note.
It
must sound like a statement with the higher, then lower note.) Once the
student has grasped this and can duplicate it, have the student use other
two
syllable words (or single syllable words preceded by an article), using
these
notes of the statement. Then, using these two notes, have the student make
up
sentences as statements, the bulk of the sentence said at the pitch of the
higher note, but the end of the sentence at the pitch of the lower note.
Once
the student has this down and can easily do it and it sounds natural and he
is
satisfied that it does, go on to the question step.
The coach has the student say "apple" as a question. Then the coach
(for
a male student) strikes the F below middle C and then middle C. For a woman
the coach strikes the A above middle C and then the D an octave above
middle
C. (In case this does not agree with the voice pitch of the student, the
coach
must work it out providing only that the upper note is three or four whole
notes above the lower note. It must sound natural and must sound like a
question.) The coach has the student say "apple" as a question and then
strikes the lower and higher note until the student can duplicate it. Now
take
other two syllable words (or single syllable words preceded by an article)
and
have the student say these as a question, following each one with the two
instrument notes, lower to higher. When the student can do this, is
satisfied
that it sounds natural and doesn't have to think about doing it, go on to
the
next step. Here the student makes up banal questions. The first part of the
question is said at the lower note and the last part is said at the higher
note. At each question, the coach strikes the lower note and then the upper
note. When this sounds natural and the student does not have to think to do
it
and is satisfied with it, the drill is ended.
HCOB 22.4.80 - 3 -
END PHENOMENA: A person who can state statements and questions that sound
like statements or questions.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard, April 1980, while doing the script
for
the soon to be produced training film "Tone 40 Assessment".
TR 1-Q2
NUMBER: TR 1-Q2
NAME: Walkabout Questions.
POSITION: There is no coach. Two students separate and walk around their
neighborhood and then meet and compare notes. The object is to detect
personal
habits in questioning.
PURPOSE: To enlighten the student as to his own communication habits and
people's reactions to his questions.
COMMANDS: The most common everyday social questions such as "How's it
going?"
"Do you like the weather?", etc. appropriate to the activities and
circumstances of the person. Only one or two questions to a separate
person.
The questions must be banal, social and ordinary but they must be
questions.
TRAINING STRESS: The two students agree on the areas they will cover and
the
time they will meet again. They then go off individually, not together. The
student pauses next to people encountered and asks a social question,
listens
to his OWN voice tones and notes the reaction of the person asked. In this
drill the student does not necessarily try to use TR 1-Q1 but is just
himself,
speaking as he would normally speak. The students then meet and compare
notes
and discuss what they have discovered about themselves on the subject of
asking questions. If they have not learned or observed anything, the drill
must be repeated.
END PHENOMENA: A person who has detected any habits he has in handling
pitch
of voice in asking questions so that he can cure these in subsequent
drills.
HISTORY: Recommended by L. Ron Hubbard in February 1978, in the pilot for
HCOB 22 Jul 78 ASSESSMENT TRs. Developed into a TR in April 1980, by L. Ron
Hubbard.
TR 1-Q3
NUMBER: TR 1-Q3
NAME: Single Word Question.
POSITION: Student and coach facing each other with a table in between them.
The E-Meter is not used. The Book of E-Meter Drills used by student and
another copy by coach.
PURPOSE: To be able to ask questions using a single word read from a list.
COMMANDS: The coach uses the usual TR directions of start, flunk, that's
it.
The student uses single words from the prepared lists of the Book of E-
Meter
Drills, pages 66 to 72 of the Appendix.
HCOB 22.4.80 - 4 -
TRAINING STRESS: To get the student to use the pitch of his voice to
deliver
a question consisting of a single word. It must sound like a question per
TR
1-Q1 and use similar pitches to TR 1-Q1. The student is flunked for out TR-
1,
for keeping his eyes glued to the list, for sounding unnatural. The student
is
also flunked for slow or comm laggy delivery or pauses. The coach
designates
the list to be used, changes lists. When the student can do this easily, a
second part of the drill is entered and the coach begins to use the PC
Origination List on Page 58 so as to interrupt the student and make him
combine his questions with TR 4. In this case the student acknowledges
appropriately, uses "I will repeat the Question." and does so.
END PHENOMENA: The ability to ask single word questions that will be
responded to as questions and to be able to handle pc origins while doing
so.
HISTORY: Developed in April 1980, by L. Ron Hubbard.
TR 1-Q4
NUMBER: TR 1-Q4
NAME: Whole Sentence Questions.
POSITION: Student and coach sit facing each other across a table. The
E-Meter is set up and used. Copies of the Book of E-Meter Drills are used.
PURPOSE: To train the student to ask whole questions that sound like
questions, read an E-Meter and handle a session at the same time.
COMMANDS: The usual coach commands of TR drills. The Prepared Lists of the
Appendix of the Book of E-Meter Drills; the questions in these drills are
reworded so that the item occurs as the last word; Example: List 2, pg 85
of
the Book of E-Meter Drills states that the Assessment Question is "Which
tree
do you like best?". This is converted, for each question, to "Do you like
_______ ?"; Prepared List 4 is converted to "Do you dislike _______ ?";
etc. A
whole sentence is used in every case.
TRAINING STRESS: The usual TR commands are used by the coach. E-Meter Drill
#5RA must be used to start. Any TR errors or Metering errors may be
flunked,
but special attention is paid to the student's ability to ask a question
that
sounds like a question in accordance to TR 1-Q1 and that sounds natural.
The
drill has three parts. In the first part, although the coach is on the
meter,
the ability to ask the question is concentrated upon. The second part
concentrates upon the student's ability to look at the written question and
then ask the coach directly without undue comm lag or hesitation. The third
part is to do the first two parts and read the meter (in accordance with
E-Meter Drills 27 and CR0000-4 which may have to be reviewed if flubby) and
to
keep session admin, all smoothly and accurately. If a question arises about
meter accuracy, a third person who can read a meter or a video tape is
employed to ensure that the student is actually not missing or dubbing in
reads.
END PHENOMENA: A person who can do all the necessary actions of asking
questions from a prepared list and run a session smoothly without errors or
confusions and be confident he can.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in April 1980.
HCOB 22.4.80 - 5 -
TR 8-Q
NUMBER: TR 8-Q
NAME: TONE 40 ASSESSMENT
POSITION: Same as TR 8 where the student is in one chair facing another
chair
on which sits an ashtray, the coach sitting beside the student in a third
chair. A square four-cornered ashtray is used.
PURPOSE: To deliver the THOUGHT of a question into an exact position, wide
or
narrow at decision, that is a question, with or without words.
COMMANDS: For the first part of the drill: Are you an ashtray? Are you made
of glass? Are you sitting there? Second part of drill: Same questions
silently. Third part of drill: Are you a corner? to each corner of the
ashtray, verbal and with intention at the same time. Fourth part of drill:
Any applicable question, verbal and with intention at the same time put
broad
and narrow at choice into the ashtray, exact parts of it and the
surroundings.
TRAINING STRESS: The coach uses usual TR coaching commands. There are four
stages to the drill. The first stage is to land a verbal command into the
ashtray. The second stage is to put the question with full intention
silently
into the ashtray. The third stage is to put verbal command and silent
intention at the same time into exact parts of the ashtray. The fourth
stage
is to put any applicable question both verbally and with intention into any
narrow or any broad portion of the ashtray or its surrounds at choice and
at
will. At the conclusion of the whole drill imagine the ashtray saying
"Yes, yes, yes, yes" in an avalanche of yeses to balance the flow (in
actual
life, people, pcs and meters do respond and return the flow).
END PHENOMENA: The ability to land a question with full intention into an
exact target area, broad or narrow, at will and effectively, whether
verbally
or silently.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in April 1980, as an extension of all
earlier work on intention and Tone 40, as now applied to questions and
assessments.
TR 4/8-Q1
NUMBER: TR 4/8-Q1 (TR 4 for Pc Origin, TR 8 Intention + Q for Question, 1
for
first part.)
NAME: Tone 40 Assessment Prepared List Session Drill.
POSITION: Student and coach sitting across from each other at a table,
E-Meter set up and in use, session admin, using prepared lists.
PURPOSE: To train a student to do all the actions necessary to a full,
smooth,
accurate session using prepared lists and to do Tone 40 Assessment of them.
COMMANDS: Coach commands are the usual TR commands of start, flunk, that's
it.
For the student, all commands relating to starting a session, giving an R
factor, assessing a prepared list, keeping the admin, indicating any item
found and ending a session. The Book of E-Meter Drills for Prepared Lists
as
in TR 1-Q4. Origins for coach as per pages 58, 59 and 60 of that book.
"Squeeze the
HCOB 22.4.80 - 6 -
cans", "Take a deep breath and let it out", "This is the session", "We are
going to assess a prepared list" (assessment), "Your item is _______ "
(indicate any F/N) "End of Assessment" "End of Session".
TRAINING STRESS: Permit the student to continue to his first error, then
have
him drill and correct that error and continue. Finally, to conclude, let
the
student go through the entire sequence of the drill beginning to end three
times without error or flunk for a final pass. It is expected that the
student
will not flub any TRs or metering or session patter. Metering may be
finally
verified by a third student or video. All assessing must be in proper Tone
40
with full intention exactly placed. The student must not walk to see if the
meter read but catch the read of the last question as he starts the next
one.
His vision may shift from list to pc but at all times must embrace list,
meter
and pc.
(This drill also would be the one used for tape or video passes as it
includes
all elements of metering and TRs.)
END PHENOMENA: A person who can do a flawless and productive assessment
session, Tone 40.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard, April 1980.
TR 4/8-Q2
NUMBER: TR 4/8-Q2
NAME: Listing and Nulling Tone 40 Assessment.
POSITION: Same as TR 4/8-Q1.
PURPOSE: To teach a student to do the action of Listing and Nulling with
all
metering and admin, using Tone 40 Assessment.
COMMANDS: The usual coach TR commands. Two copies of the Book of E-Meter
Drills. A prepared list is chosen by the coach and both use the same
prepared
list. The student reads the question and asks it and the coach reads the
replies from the same list but in his own copy. The student must write down
the answers in a proper session worksheet and note and write down any
reads.
(An F/N terminates the listing if it occurs.) The coach need not use the
whole
list of replies but only half a dozen chosen at random. The sequence of
commands is the same as TR 4/8-Q1 except that the R factor is "We are going
to
list a question." And, if no item F/Ns and no significant read has
occurred,
the additional action of nulling the list is undertaken with the command,
"I
will now assess the list."
TRAINING STRESS: The laws of Listing and Nulling HCOB 1 Aug 68 apply in
full
as these are very important laws and ignoring them can result in severe ARC
breaks not so much in this drill but in actual sessions. The coach may also
require suppress and invalidate buttons be put in on the whole list. All
errors, omissions, hesitations and lapses from Tone 40 on the part of the
student are flunked. Coach similarly to TR 4/8-Q1. Pass when the student
can
do it flawlessly three consecutive times. (This drill may be used for
Interneship tapes and videos for assessing and metering passes.)
END PHENOMENA: A person able to do a flawless L & N list as the session or
as
part of a session, with all TRs in, with perfect metering and proper admin
and
using Tone 40 in his listing and assessing.
HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in April, 1980.
HCOB 22.4.80 - 7 -
SUMMARY
The purpose of these drills is to train the student to ask questions
that
will get answers and to assess prepared lists that will get accurate reads.
If
a student doing these drills has difficulty it will be traced to false
data,
misunderstood words or not having passed earlier TRs including Upper Indoc
or
his metering drills as contained in the Book of E-Meter Drills. If a
satisfactory result is not obtained, the faults in the above items should
be
located and remedied and these drills repeated. If any earlier omissions
are
found and repaired and if these drills are honestly done, heightened
success
as an auditor (or a surveyor or examiner or ethics officer) is assured.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:dr
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=21/4/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
EXAMINER
Type = 22
iDate=26/1/70
Issue=0
Rev=1
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Remimeo
Exam Hat
Qual
Tech
All Auditors
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 21 APRIL 1980
Remimeo
Exam Hat (Also issued as HCO PL 13 Oct 68R
Qual Rev. 21 Apr 80)
Tech
All Auditors
CANCELS BPL 26 Jan 70R EXAMINER AND FLOATING NEEDLE
(Revisions in Script)
EXAMINER
An examination is given the preclear after each session, or when the
pc
wants to make any statement concerning his case, or when data is requested
by
the C/S.
The preclear exam is done by the pc examiner in Qual.
It is done on a meter.
The whole duty of the examiner is to note the TA and needle behavior
of
the pc.
This duty is done muzzled. No talk or chatter.
The pc comes in. The examiner smiles, indicates for the pc to sit
down.
The examiner hands the pc the cans.
If the pc says or asks something social that has nothing to do with
the
exam the examiner nods or acks politely.
The examiner notes the TA and the needle and looks up at the pc for
his
statement.
When the pc says what he wants to say, the examiner says "Thank you
very
much", and he indicates an F/N if he sees one.
The examiner then indicates with an arm gesture the way out.
This is the whole drill.
To do, say, anything else will invalidate the pc and or lose the F/N
he
or she got in session. You don't as an examiner care about anything except
TA,
needle behavior, statement and pc indicators. The pc will tell you what he
wants to. You don't have to ask for it.
The only addition to the above would be that, should the pc have a
Floating TA, the examiner would indicate it.
The examiner should know the exact definition of Floating Ta, per the
Tech Dictionary, and be drilled in being able to recognize such.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Revision assisted by
Dan Osborne
CMO Mission: Issues
Revisions 2nd
for the
BDCS:LRH:DO:bk BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
Copyright $c 1968, 1980 of the
by L. Ron Hubbard CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Revision assisted by
Dan Osborne
CMO Mission: Issues
Revisions 2nd
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=18/4/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
TR CRITICISM
Remimeo
TR Supervisors
Cramming Officers
Auditors
C/Ses
Ds of T
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 18 APRIL 1980
Remimeo
TR Supervisors
Cramming Officers
Auditors
C/Ses
Ds of T
TR CRITICISM
Ref: HCOB 24 Dec 79 TRs BASICS RESURRECTED
HCOB 5 Apr 80 Q & A, THE REAL DEFINITION
HCOB 10 Apr 80 AUDITOR BEINGNESS
HCOB 16 Aug 71RA TRs REMODERNIZED
During 1979, Ron made a thorough study of current TR training,
examining
the materials and checksheets in use, conducting TR course pilots, and
critiquing video-recorded TRs done by students. He isolated and handled the
difficulties that TR supervisors and students had been having. His
reorganization of TR training is represented in HCOB 24 Dec 79 TRs BASICS
RESURRECTED. During this period while Ron was sorting out TR training I had
the privilege of working with him and being trained by him in criticizing
TRs.
This Paper summarizes what I learned from Ron, and my own experience in
teaching TRs and getting them done from a C/S (Case Supervisor) point of
view.
COMMENTS ON FAULTS WITH STUDENTS ON TRs
OT TR-0
Because this TR is so simple, students tend to make it complicated. It
requires that the student do this TR in its simplicity and not add to it.
All
sorts of hidden standards get interjected into it by students, coaches and
supervisors. One handling is to clear misunderstood words in the TR,
restudy
the TR and get them doing it again.
An important clarification is that OT TR-0 is just being there-the
confront part is left until TR-0.
The coaching on OT TR-0 is mostly done by the supervisor. It is an
actual waste of time to have two students coaching each other on it as
there
is very little to do. A supervisor can note somebody twitching. Even if the
supervisor ignores it and just insists that the class go on doing OT TR-0,
the
guy will come through. The supervisor can cover a whole classroom of OT TR-
0.
The students don't do any coaching, the supervisor does. Even an isolated
student when the rest of the class has gone on-the supervisor would keep
his eye on him in spite of whatever else the supervisor was doing. And if
he
went to sleep or started boiling off or whatever, the supervisor would get
him
back onto it again. (But if a student flunked on a later TR and was
returned
to OT TR-0 it would be up to his twin to get him through. The twin does a
lot
of coaching only after somebody has been returned to it when the rest of
the
class is doing something else.)
TR-0
All too often students and coaches tend to get into trying to get the
student to do something with his body, like trying to
HCOB 18.4.80 - 2 -
hold it still, trying not to blink, trying to hold a poker face, etc. These
of
course violate TR-0, as then the student is not confronting the coach, but
has
attention fixated on his body (to such a degree sometimes that he can be
oblivious of the coach). Not that the student should be allowed to writhe
and
twitch on TR-0, but the emphasis needs to be first and foremost on getting
the
student to confront the person opposite him (the coach). Then later in the
TR,
iron out physical manifestations, twitches, blinks, etc. (but if physical
manifestations persist, OT TR-0 is unflat and must be flattened).
Although OT TR-0 isn't coached by the coach, TR-0 does require some
coaching, in order to get the student to sit there and confront-which is
the purpose of TR-0.
TR-0 BULL-BAIT
The purpose of TR-0 is just to get the guy to sit there and confront.
But
the purpose of TR-0 Bull-bait is to get the student able to confront a
preclear. The purpose of these TRs must be stressed. OT TR-0 gets the
student
able to just be there. TR-0 gets the student able to be there and confront.
TR-0 Bull-bait gets the student able to confront a preclear.
The coach must use some sense and reality in his bull-baiting of the
student, in order to present situations which test or could throw the
student
off his confront. Then the coach must flatten each of the student's buttons
as
it is encountered.
A gradient scale of toughness is essential. First the coach presents
the
student with lighter situations to confront, flattens that, then steps it
up
gradiently until finally the student can confront anything that the coach
(or
a preclear) might say or do. Don't overwhelm the student at the start. Use
a
gradient. Always flatten each button encountered. Then step it up and make
it
tougher. Unfortunately coaches sometimes lose sight of the purpose of this
TR-to make the student able to confront a preclear-and get off into doing
something else such as dramatizing their own banks or trying to entertain
or
impress the rest of the class, neither of which has anything to do with
coaching TR-0 Bull-bait. In fact on TR-0 Bull-bait, the coach must be in PT
and be very alert in what he is doing, and in observing the student so that
he
can spot any break in the student's confront and flatten it. A coach who
goes
off into his own dramatizations is actually unflat on OT TR-0 and TR-0
himself
and should be put back to flatten them; he won't be able to coach TR-0
Bull-bait, much less be able to drill it himself, until his own OT TR-0 and
TR-0 are in.
The coach must use a gradient scale of toughness in his bull-baiting,
must be alert for and flatten any button of the student's that he
encounters,
and must get the student up to being able to confront a preclear. This
requires good coaching with reality and with the purpose of this TR in
mind.
It is very much the supervisor's job to ensure that this gets done.
TR-1
Most troubles on TR-1 go straight back to out earlier TRs (i.e., OT TR-
0,
TR-0, and TR-0 Bull-bait); for example, the student mumbles to himself as
he
is unaware of or unable to confront the person he is talking to. Or, does
the
reverse and talks loudly, harshly, mechanically, which is also a
HCOB 18.4.80 - 3 -
non-confront of the person to whom he is talking.
Affinity level of the student-auditor is very important, and all too
often the student or auditor whose TR-1 is out lacks affinity. He can't
reach
or be the other person (coach or pc), so has difficulty communicating.
Sounding like a machine or robot is very not OK on TR-1. The
student-auditor must be able to communicate naturally, with affinity, and
reach
the person he is talking to.
TR-2
This used to be abused by an ultramechanical "Good", or "Thank you" to
everything the pc or coach said. This was largely handled by the mid-78
revision of TR-2, in which it is stated that the auditor should acknowledge
with a statement appropriate to what the pc said.
A recognition of what would be an appropriate acknowledgement depends
on
the student's or auditor's reality. It isn't just a matter of clearing the
words "appropriate" and "acknowledgement" (though this would help); it is
also
necessary that the student-auditor have a sufficiently high reality level
that
he can recognize what is, and what is not, appropriate. But this isn't
really
too difficult. If someone were to tell you that he had broken his leg, it
would not be appropriate to say "Good"! Reality is important in TR-2.
TR-3
Here most trouble comes from lack of understanding of what is meant by
the term "Q & A", coupled with lack of understanding of the term "cycle of
action" and why one should complete each cycle of action. Additionally,
there
is the bank tendency not to complete cycles but to Q & A instead. part of
the
trouble here is that the term "Q & A" has various different definitions and
descriptions, like: "failure to complete a cycle of action", "changing when
the pc changes", "accepting orders from the pc", and "question and answer".
The materials on the subject of Q & A are contained in many different HCOBs
and articles and tapes and unless a student takes the time and trouble to
look
up and study and work out all the various references (which very few people
will do), he/she winds up with a misconception of what "Q & A" is. E.g., an
auditor fixates on "not accepting orders from the pc about what to run on
him"
as a definition for "Q & A". The pc says "the room is too hot", and the
auditor doesn't handle the room temperature as it would be (he thinks)
"accepting an order"; or pc gets upset and suggests "Why don't you assess a
BPC list?", and the auditor freezes because he feels that if he does so he
will have Q & Aed. These may seem offbeat but I've seen them happen all too
often. And yet these are usually accompanied by the auditor Q & Aing madly
with every misdirection from the pc's bank and never getting a question
answered-or a cycle completed on the pc.
I think this would be handled by: (a) a compilation of all the various
texts on the subject of Q & A and on cycles of action into one
comprehensive
text; (b) an announcement to the effect that duplication processes (such as
Opening Procedure by Duplication) cure the tendency to Q & A by increasing
the
ability to duplicate and to complete cycles of action.
Run has now released HCOB 5 Apr 80 Q & A, THE REAL DEFINITION, which
clarifies exactly what Q & A is.
HCOB 18.4.80 - 4 -
TR-4
The errors on this TR are most commonly either too abrupt a shift of
attention or too slow a shift of attention back to the process (including
no
shift back to the process!). Beginning students love to get a pat phrase or
set of phrases to use to mechanically/robotically "handle" all originations
with. Then later they tend to get into all kinds of Q & A with
originations.
Basically it depends upon the student-auditor's ability to understand,
which
comes straight back to the student-auditor's own ARC level, as well as
whether
the student-auditor understands what he/she is supposed to be doing on the
TR,
and why.
UPPER INDOC TRs
TRs 8 - 9 (Upper Indoc TRs) are also essential to professional auditor
training.
TR-6
Here again the coach plays a vital role in that the coach must start
off
with a light gradient, and must ensure on this TR that the student becomes
fully accustomed to, familiar with, and relaxed about controlling another's
body. A lot of confusion is likely to blow off on this TR and the coach
must
get the student through it and to a point where the student learns that it
is
perfectly OK to run 8-C on another's body. The coaching here should be in
the
direction of encouragement and getting the student to do it. The coach
should
not present opposition as that is the subject of a later TR. This TR should
concentrate on getting the student to do it, and showing him the importance
of
precision, accuracy and positiveness when running 8-C.
TR-7
In this TR the coach starts presenting opposition on a gradient and
getting the student more and more capable of continuing to run perfect
control
without being thrown or sinking to a lower tone level when faced with
opposition. Hence the importance of getting the student very expert in TR-6
before embarking on this TR. And if the student has a hard time of it on
this
TR then drop back to and flatten TR-6, or any earlier out TR.
Here again (as in TR-0 Bull-bait), the coach must be a coach, and not
get
carried away with his own dramatizations. Dramatization by the coach has
nothing to do with coaching. (This doesn't mean that the coach shouldn't
present dramatizations to the student, but the coach has to be in PT and
not
in his own bank.) Supervisors need to ensure that coaches do coach and
neither overwhelm the student utterly, nor be so namby-pamby that the
student's confront isn't raised. Hence the necessity for good coaching and
for
the supervisor to be on the ball and ensuring that the students and coaches
are working on the TR.
TR-8
An error on this is to fail to ensure that the term "tone 40" is well
cleared, also the word "intention" as these terms are often subject to
misinterpretation.
HCOB 18.4.80 - 5 -
The coach needs to ensure that the student does do the TR and doesn't
become mechanical and just go through the motions. This is necessary
because
this TR has to do with intentions. It is however easy to observe whether
the
student is using intention or not, and to coax and persuade the student
into
doing so. The coach does have to get the student to do it. It is often a
good
idea to have the student and coach take turns in doing and coaching this
TR,
to increase reality on it. (The same is true of other TRs too.)
TR-9
As this TR depends for its success on the student having mastered the
earlier TRs 0-4, 6-8, any weaknesses in earlier TRs will show up here. The
remedy for failure on this TR is to get the earlier unflat TRs fully in.
The student and coach could err in either too readily quitting on TR-
9,
and drop back to earlier TRs rather than persist and get the student
through
and able to do it. Or, they will err in going on and on with the student
failing.
It is a point of supervisor judgement as to whether to keep them at it
and get them through, or whether to return to and get in earlier TRs. The
supervisor decides this on the basis of whether the student is making
progress
on the TR, whether the coach is coaching correctly, and handles
accordingly.
Earlier in TR training students were cycled through the TRs several
times
over. The idea here was to increase the gradient each time through, with
the
student getting better at it each time. This was to get the student more
familiar with the TRs and to prevent the student from being stuck in a lose
by
miscoaching. The Professional TR Course is not run this way. The liability
of
cycling the student through the TRs is that the TR training then becomes
permissive and doesn't result in professional auditors.
Most auditors entering the Professional TR Course have already done
lower
level TR courses and have had objective processes. And where they haven't,
cycling is an answer (but it isn't THE answer).
Permissiveness in professional TR training is the main way that TR
training for pro auditors went out. There are various purposes and uses for
TRs. There are permissive TRs for new public, public Comm Course TRs, a
therapeutic TR course as contained in the Survival Rundown, and there is
the
Professional TR Course. The uses and purposes of these various TR courses
need
to be kept separate. On the Professional TR Course we make a real pro
auditor.
The way to run the Professional TR Course is by getting the student to
do
it, one TR at a time, to a full pass on each TR. It is up to the twins to
get
each other through with professional coaching and high standards. The
supervisor's job becomes very crucial. The supervisor is there to get them
through to a full pass on each TR and graduated from the course as pro
auditors. A supervisor who does his part in this diligently and effectively
is
worth his weight in gold as he is
HCOB 18.4.80 - 6 -
making pro auditors whose TRs will stand by them through the years of
auditing
ahead.
Should the student fail on a TR on the Professional TR Course, he is
started over from the beginning of the line-up, this time getting in each
TR
to a full pass, with his coach ensuring that he does, and the supervisor
very
actively in there making sure that the student becomes a real pro.
COPYING
It could be said with some humor that students on TR courses tend to
obsessively copy. Unfortunately they do. They copy other students, they
copy
(or try to) what their auditor sounded like, or what they think he sounded
like. And not infrequently, I have caught out students getting hold of
another student's passing tape and trying to copy it. On TR critiquing
there
are repeating waves of all the students' TRs suddenly starting to sound
alike.
This usually traces to either an opinion leader (not someone who can get
results as an auditor, but one who pretends to be an authority), or it
traces
to a bunch of students going out-ethics and trying to copy what they think
students who passed sounded like.
Invariably these copy the worst traits or characteristics in others'
TRs,
and after all that isn't surprising as if they understood the TRs materials
in
the first place, they wouldn't be compelled to try to copy others. It
probably
stems from some impulse to beat the system by attempting to steal the
beingness of another whom they consider to be a winning valence = no
beingness
of their own.
DRUGS
I am convinced that most of the trouble with TR training in recent
years
is due to the increased incidence of heavy druggies arriving on TR courses.
Now there is the point that doing TRs is therapeutic to druggies, helping
them
get over withdrawal symptoms as practiced by Narconon and in HGCs, and as
an
essential part of an effective Drug RD. But we need to differentiate
between
the use of TRs to help a druggie get over drugs, and the use of TRs in
training a professional auditor. Of course TRs do give case gain even to
nondruggies.
One of the more obvious case gains visible on a lower level case from
TRs
is physical changes such as increased whiteness of the whites of the eyes,
color changes in the iris, reduction or disappearance of creases and
wrinkles
from frowning and facial ridges, cessation of obsessive and continual body
motion, and on many the awareness of a mind or bank as separate from
themselves or their body. In order to avoid students on TR courses being
cases
and to preserve these two different uses of TRs, a delineation could be
made
of these two different uses, both valid in their own right: TRs for case
gain,
and TRs for pro auditor training.
Heavy druggies have invariably failed in auditor training on TRs
courses
until their drugs were handled, the minimum being a Purification RD, but I
think that many would also need Objectives and a Drug RD in order to
succeed
on a Professional TRs Course.
OBJECTIVES
Partly covered above under TRs 6-9, and under Drugs.
HCOB 18.4.80 - 7 -
A very successful action was done on Flag, on Ron's advice, of putting
all tech trainees through a checksheet and course called the "Tech TRs
Course
and Objectives Co-audit". On that course the students did all TRs 0 - 4, 6
-
9, and co-audited a full battery of objective processes on each other (on a
read it, drill it, do it basis). After this, they actually studied and
drilled
TRs 0-4, and did their electronic attest (getting TRs tapes passed on
actual
auditing sessions during their interneship). Those working on getting their
TR
tape passed had already co-audited a full battery of objective processes on
each other. (And the additional advantage of co-auditing these processes is
that they got it both ways, on themselves as a pc, and they learned the
discipline of running Objectives as an auditor, both being important.)
(This whole line-up of TRs 0-4, Upper Indocs, co-auditing Objectives
and much more, is now available on the Survival Rundown.)
In 1979 while viewing a batch of student TR videos, Ron analyzed the
difficulty these students were having with TRs as due to their lack of "R"
(Reality) and "A" (Affinity). He pointed out that they were trying to
Communicate ("C"), but their own "A" and "R" were so depressed, that their
"C"
couldn't be brought up (without raising their "A" and "R"). In other words
these students hadn't made the case gains available from objective
processes
and ARC Straightwire. Until a person has been audited on objective
processes
and ARC Straightwire, he can't see, and he is out "R" and out "A". Ron also
stressed that these are essential to the making of a Scientologist, as on
these processes a pc will make quite a breakthrough. He/she will realize
the
communication formula, and that something is really real, affinity goes up,
and the pc goes into ARC with the environment and life. This is an
important
step in becoming a Scientologist. And these gains are a very necessary
prerequisite to pro auditor training. (SOED 1367 INT, 14 Jan 80 SPEEDING UP
SLOW OR BOGGED STUDENT AUDITORS AND INTERNES implements and gives a
supervisor
the ways to handle these points above when they are found out on tech
trainees
and Professional TR Course students.)
AFFINITY, REALITY, COMMUNICATION & UNDERSTANDING
As pointed out above, unless the student-auditor can rise to a high
enough level of ARC, then he won't succeed on a pro TRs course (nor in
sessions as an auditor). He probably needs to be at least 3.0 or 3.5 on the
tone scale to be able to do pro TRs successfully (or to audit
successfully).
If he is lower on the tone scale, his own ARC level is insufficient to be
able
to engage in a positive or theta exchange of communication with another
being.
There is an essential basic that needs greater stress, and that is
that
we are seeking in TR training to bring about the ability in a being to be
able
to communicate (in ARC) with another being, to complete communication
cycles,
not to get sidetracked into another subject, etc. The fundamental being the
ability to get into ARC with another person, and to maintain that ARC.
That ability is partly acquired by case gain and partly by training.
ESSENTIAL MATERIALS FOR STUDY IN TR TRAINING
The following materials (which haven't always been on TR
HCOB 18.4.80 - 8 -
course checksheets) are essential in that the student must study and
understand and be able to apply them to succeed on pro TR training:
The ARC Triangle
The Cycle of Action
The Communication Formula
Materials on Q & A
The Axioms 21 - 28 (especially Axiom 28)
Book: THE FUNDAMENTALS OF THOUGHT
Book: DIANETICS '55! (chapters on communication)
Book: THE PROBLEMS OF WORK (on A, R, and C)
Book: THE MECHANICS OF CONTROL AND S-C-S
Material on "Beingness", especially HCOB 10 Apr 80 AUDITOR
BEINGNESS
These materials above are in addition to the HCOBs on TRs.
ESSENTIAL STUDY ACTIONS
1. Study of the ARC triangle.
2. Study of the cycle of action and the cycle of communication.
3. Study of the communication formula.
4. Representing the communication formula in clay.
5. Representing Chapter VII of DIANETICS '55! in clay.
6. Study of each TR, including clearing misunderstoods and getting off
false
data.
7. Work out how each TR relates to the communication formula.
(Note: This is only useful when the student knows what the comm formula
is and understands it.)
8. Study of the end phenomena and valuable final products of TRs (as given
in
HCOB 24 Dec 79 TRs BASICS RESURRECTED).
OTHER DATUMS
It is up to the supervisor to get the students to do the TRs, and to
get
them through each TR to a pass. This is the make-break point of any TR
course-the supervisor getting the students to do the TRs.
Only supervisors who have done a Professional TRs Course and have
themselves gotten a pass on TRs, have succeeded in running a TRs course.
In practice I have had to dig the supervisor out of the video room. By
which is meant that the TR supervisor starts spending all his time looking
at
videos that students have made of their TRs, to see if there is a video
good
enough to send up for a pass, instead of the supervisor spending most of
his
time on the floor in the course room getting the students' TRs in, and then
when the student has made it on TRs, then and only then, make a video.
Otherwise the supervisor gets glued to the TV screen. (This is also a kind
of
stat push instead of going for quality products.)
TR courses have been subject to corruption in stat pushes in that
different items on TR checksheets have different amounts of points and
there
have been certain items that give higher
HCOB 18.4.80 - 9 -
points than other items and in times of stat push the students are gotten
to
do or redo the items that yield higher points to get the student points up
before Thursday 2:00 p.m., without any regard for training these students
to
be able to do TRs and thereby producing graduates who can apply what they
have
learned (i.e., quality products). Such a course can appear "upstat" due to
"power" stats-student points-while crippling tech training in academy,
internship and messing up the HGC with failed auditors. (A point of some
bitterness with me.)
Maybe a genuine desire to make auditors who can audit, on the part of
the
supervisors and executives in a training org, is amore important factor
than I
have realized, and possibly more of the difficulties over the past year on
TR
training are due to its lack.
I think with some derision of a fellow who claimed ineffectiveness due
to
out tech on his case, but omitted to mention that he was audited and C/Sed
by
those he was responsible for training. So a possible solution is to permit
the
executives and supervisors over a tech training area to only be audited and
C/Sed by those they have trained in order to give them more incentive to
train
auditors who will be able to audit successfully.
TR CRITIQUING
I feel there is a wide gap between being able to do TRs successfully
oneself and being able to successfully critique another's TRs. It's quite
another level of skill.
Points in my experience in learning to critique TRs under Ron are:
1. There's a danger of not being certain enough and seeing an auditor or TR
student do something that I wouldn't have done, but dismissing it on the
basis
that what I would or wouldn't do is not a valid criterion. That has always
been a mistake as the reason I didn't like what I saw or heard was because
it
was a TR outness-otherwise it wouldn't have jarred my attention. The
handling I found for this was (whenever I saw or heard something I didn't
like
on a TR tape/video) to replay it until I could isolate exactly which of the
TRs 0 - 4 had been violated and how exactly. Or, how it violated or omitted
part of the comm formula or the ARC triangle. In other words, by comparing
it
to the basic technical data, reviewing the basic tech data, and isolating
the
exact departure from those basics.
2. Writing up critiques of TR videos before they were critiqued by Ron, and
then after he had critiqued them, comparing his and my critiques, and on
any
that differed replaying the video and watching it again until I clearly saw
what I had missed previously. Then again reviewing the basic tech data on
that
area.
3. Working out the ideal scene for a session (see definition of "in
session"), and the auditor's TRs in relation to this.
4. Working out the purpose of TRs and of each TR. Comparing this to the
purpose of auditing, the definition of "in session" and how these relate.
5. Having high ARC for auditors and for pcs generally and an earnest desire
to help them succeed.
HCOB 18.4.80 - 10 -
6. Not letting an auditor go on failing on a TR course but getting the guy
debugged, or some act of compassion even if as little as a letter to let
him
know that someone cared and to get some hope back up, getting O/Ws pulled,
word clearing done, inspection of the course for WIAC PL outnesses, coming
down on any dilettante attitude, verbal tech, or out-ethics.
7. A measure of humility borne of awareness of goofs I have made so as not
to
become authoritarian or out of reach and thus communication, with the
students
and supervisors.
8. Asking myself the question: "Would I want to be audited by this TR
student
or auditor?", and if not, establishing why not, and what would have to be
done
to correct it.
9. Always narrowing down and establishing the tech data or tech basic that
was violated in any error and getting the guy onto the HCOB or book that
covered this point so as to get him on source and avoid verbal tech or
interpretation.
10. Withstanding the make-wrongs or bids-for-sympathy from those not up to
a
pass, seeking another way through than by achieving competence.
11. Knowing that it is possible to do the TRs and to do them right and an
awareness of how valuable correct TRs are in auditing, both from my own
experiences as an auditor and as a pc, on both good TRs and flubbed TRs.
EXAMPLES AND REMEDIES
1. Student and coach don't seem to know what they are supposed to be doing
on
any TR, or are doing something they ought not to be doing, or are omitting
part of the TR. Remedy: Get them both word cleared on the TR, and, have
them
both restudy the TR materials. Then get them back onto and doing the TR.
2. Despite word clearing and restudy of the TR, the student and coach can't
apply what they have studied or are misapplying the data, or get confused
and
can't think with the basic data. Remedy: Get any verbal tech off per
HCOB/PL
9 Feb 79 HOW TO DEFEAT VERBAL TECH. Get FALSE DATA STRIPPING done on both
student and coach.
3. Despite drilling, the student cannot seem to be brought up to
confronting.
Or the student sounds and acts "dead". Or the student is nattery, critical
or
gets into "joking and degrading". Remedy: See HCOB 3 Feb 79 Issue II
CONFRONT TECH HAS TO BE PART OF THE TR CHECKSHEET. Get the person's O/Ws
pulled, especially tech O/Ws.
4. Student is displaying roller-coaster, or is NCG (no case gain) as a
student, or is being out-ethics. Remedy: Route to ethics for handling (per
HCO PL 5 Apr 65 THE NO-GAIN-CASE STUDENT).
5. Student is showing a lack of perception, is wooden, out of PT, stuck
back
on the track or in drug pictures, can't learn despite word clearing, is
dull,
lacks self-determinism. Remedy: Put the person onto and through the
Purification RD.
HCOB 18.4.80 - 11 -
6. Student has done the Purification RD, but is not fully in PT, lacks
perception or coordination. Doesn't perceive PT environment rapidly and
with
clarity. Or, lacks experience on TRs and objective processes. Remedy: Put
him
onto the Survival Rundown.
7. Student is lacking in Affinity, Reality, Communication or Understanding.
Remedy: Get the student to do the parts of and the whole ARC triangle in
clay.
(Use the books: THE PROBLEMS OF WORK, THE FUNDAMENTALS OF THOUGHT, and
DIANETICS '55! as references.)
8. If after the above the student is still lacking in ARC, or doesn't seem
sufficiently high toned to have and maintain ARC. Remedy: Have the
student's
ARC Straightwire Grade looked into and repaired and completed to its full
result. Or get the Expanded ARC Straightwire Grade run if not previously
run.
9. The student doesn't understand or can't apply the communication formula,
or
doesn't see how the TRs relate to the comm formula. Remedy: Get the student
word cleared on the comm formula, then restudy it and demonstrate it in
clay.
(Note: After doing the comm formula in clay, the student can work out how
each
TR relates to the comm formula, and how the TRs relate to auditing. But
this
comes after doing the comm formula in clay, as otherwise he may not have
sufficient comprehension of the comm formula.
10. The student doesn't understand or can't apply the comm formula and
communication cycle, or the mechanics of communication. Remedy: Get the
student to demonstrate in clay, Chapter VII, of DIANETICS '55!
11. Students or coaches not working or coaching in the direction of getting
the TRs in better, or coaching without reality; unaware of how the TRs
relate
to auditing. Remedy: Thoroughly word clear and study the primary and
secondary
valuable final products of TRs and the end phenomenon of TRs (HCOB 24 Dec
79
TRs BASICS RESURRECTED). Work out the ideal scene for a session (see def:
"in
session"), and how each TR contributes to this when in, and detracts from
it
when out.
12. Student feels that he has gotten a TR done correctly once or twice or
very
briefly, and is afraid of "overrunning" it or that he might not get it
right
the next time or thereafter. Remedy: Pro auditor training is not a case
action, but drilling to consistent and continual perfection of TR
rendition.
Once a person's TRs have been gotten in, they don't go out. A real pro can
audit from there on out with perfect TRs. Point this out as the standard
and
get the student to continue the drill until fully and consistently
competent.
13. The student gets part-way through the TRs and hangs up on a TR and
can't
make it to a pass on that TR. Or, the student has undue difficulty on a
later
TR. Remedy: Realize that the reason for the trouble is an outness an an
earlier TR (or TRs). put the student back to the earliest TR that is out,
and
get these in fully.
14. The student gets through to the end of the TRs but hasn't made it
fully,
or cannot get a tape pass. Remedy: Realize that this is due to earlier TR
outnesses and that he won't succeed until all earlier TRs are fully in. Put
the student back to the beginning of the line-up (by which is
HCOB 18.4.80 - 12 -
meant he re-word clears, restudies the materials, does the clay demos again
and starts at OT TR-0). Take each TR, from OT TR-0 on up, to a full pass.
15. Student failing and other remedies haven't handled. Remedy: Get the "TR
Debug Assessment" assessed and handled to and F/N on each line. Do any
additional handlings indicated as needed by this assessment.
16. For any lack of progress at an acceptable speed and to an excellent
result. Remedy: Get the supervisor out on the floor in the course room
actively and energetically getting the students to DO THE TRs!
17. After having done all the above, and the student's TR rendition is
mechanically correct, and he has been very thoroughly drilled in all the
TRs,
including Upper Indoc TRs, there is something lacking in his attitude or
presence that leaves him short of being a pro auditor. Remedy: Have him
study
and apply the data on auditor beingness. (Note: This data may only be
studied
or attempted after the student has become very proficient in and is
thoroughly
drilled in all the TRs including Upper Indocs. To attempt this action
earlier
would be a waste of the tech as it would be premature and out gradient. But
when the student has been very thoroughly drilled in the TRs and has fully
mastered them, then this action of doing the "Auditor Beingness" step will
put
the final polish on his TRs and will make him into a real professional
auditor
whose pcs go "into session" on his TRs alone and stay in session throughout
the session. His pcs will rave about his auditing and the case gains they
make. And there is the final reward for honestly and thoroughly doing each
of
the TRs, exactly the way Ron has laid them out in the materials, each to a
full pass!)
IDEAL TR TRAINING LINE-UP
1. Beginning or public TR training course, Comm Course.
2. The Purification Rundown.
3. The Survival Rundown.
4. A Drug Rundown.
5. Method One Word Clearing (preferably co-audited).
6. Expanded ARC Straightwire Grade (again preferably co-audited).
7. THE PROFESSIONAL TR COURSE.
(Done to professional auditor standard, but not only for auditors, as
the
quality of having TRs of pro auditor standard is of great value to any
Scientologist and will last with him as an ability from here on out.)
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
As assisted by
Senior C/S Int
LRH:DM:bk
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
As assisted by
Senior C/S Int
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=10/4/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
AUDITOR BEINGNESS
Remimeo
C1 IV Auditors and above
Acad Supers and above
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 10 APRIL 1980
Remimeo RELEASED 31 JULY 1981
C1 IV Auditors and above
Acad Supers and above
AUDITOR BEINGNESS
Ref: HCOB 18 Aug 71RA II TRAINING DRILLS REMODERNIZED
Re-rev. 4 Sep 80
HCOB 24 Dec 79 TRS BASICS RESURRECTED
HCOB 18 Apr 80 TR CRITICISM
HCOB 26 Apr 71 I TRS AND COGNITIONS
HCOB 10 Jun 79 Art Series 8
A PROFESSIONAL
The data in this bulletin is for use by a student auditor or an
auditor
only after he has been thoroughly trained and drilled in TRs including
Upper
Indoc TRs, and after he has been trained in metering.
When one is free of uncertainties on the technical basics of his
profession and has mastered the mechanics of those technical basics he can
move up into another strata and assume the full beingness of a professional
in
his field.
So an auditor applies the Auditor Beingness step after he has acquired
a
good mastery of his basics, TRs and metering. To do otherwise would be out
gradient, out sequence and would rarely, if ever, be successful.
BEINGNESS, correctly defined, is: THE RESULT OF HAVING ASSUMED AN
IDENTITY.
ATTITUDE IS: THE OPINION ONE HOLDS OR THE BEHAVIOR ONE EXPRESSES
TOWARD
SOME PERSON, PLACE, THING OR SYMBOL AS A RESULT OF THE CONCEPT HE HAS OF
IT.
TRs reflect an auditor's attitude.
And what is back of attitude? It is certainty and beingness.
Your beingness and attitude toward the pc are the things which your
TRs
measure. If you as an auditor simply go into a robotic imitation of a tone
level or attitude or identity you aren't there at all. It will be apparent
in
your TRs.
It is the beingness which comes first and that gets reflected in your
attitude and your attitude, in turn, is then reflected in your TRs.
And what directly influences beingness? Certainty. Before one can
assume
the beingness of an auditor he must have certainty on the materials of
auditing. That means certainty on TRs and certainty on the meter and his
own
metering.
The importance of all these factors is based on the fact that they,
each
one, immediately and directly affect the pc's "in-sessionness."
HCOB 10.4.80 - 2 -
TRS AND METERING: THE TWO FOREMOST ACTIONS
There is a very good reason why you do TRs and metering as your two
foremost actions. It has to do with the pc being "in session."
Any auditor worthy of the title has the goal of his pc achieving case
gain. Toward that end, the first aim of the auditor is to put the pc in
session. Until and unless that happens, nothing else is going to happen in
the
way of case gain for the pc.
With your TRs in, the pc is confident that he is being listened to and
that he is getting the attention that is desirable for the resolution of
his
case. Therefore he's willing to talk to you.
If your metering is very exact and you're not leaving the pc up in the
air or plowed in with mis-reads or false reads, he has confidence in what
you're saying because what you say reads is what he feels. There's a
coordination there.
So between these two things we get the definition of "in session" for
a
pc which is: INTERESTED IN OWN CASE AND WILLING TO TALK TO THE AUDITOR.
If your TRs are rough and your metering is bad you won't get that
reaction in a pc and you won't get enough case gain to bother with.
THE BASIC THING THAT MONITORS CASE GAIN IS: PC INTERESTED IN OWN CASE
AND WILLING TO TALK TO THE AUDITOR.
Without that, you won't get any case gain on a pc. With it, given that
he
is audited on the correct processes, the pc's case progress is assured.
TRs And In-Sessionness
There is some interesting data which points up this matter of TRs and
in-sessionness.
Back in the days before we had TRs I had a funny phenomenon occurring.
I
would audit somebody in London, then go away and time would march on. I'd
come
back, pick up the same pc and find him at the exact point where I'd left
him,
even though he had been audited by a lot of other auditors. That would be 6
or
8 months and lots of auditing hours later. It would be explained away with,
"Well, of course, Ron is a good auditor," and naturally they were saying
that.
Actually, that would be quite a critical thing to say about the other
auditors
as, while we didn't have pc programs then, we did have processes that
advanced
a pc's case. That being true, how did it happen that that pc stayed parked
right where I had left him? The answer is elementary. When I was auditing
him
he was interested in his own case and willing to talk to the auditor. That
was
all.
The phenomenon was pronounced and it showed up in other ways. Every
now
and then I would arrive at the London Org and people would come in from the
surrounding cities or areas and hang around in the hall. I was moving
around
the org a lot and as I would move out into the hall someone would rush up
to
me and tell me an awful tale of woe. This person's husband had just left
her,
or that person had just gone through a bankruptcy or something horrible.
They
would give me these stories and I would acknowledge them and then start to
say
something about
HCOB 10.4.80 - 3 -
what we might do about it. But they didn't listen any further to what I was
saying after the acknowledgement; at that point they would go off and seem
perfectly happy.
It didn't just happen once; it wan rather a consistent phenomenon. I
never did anything to solve any of those problems, and they were legion --
there were hordes of them. Very peculiar. I began wondering what exactly
this
phenomenon was and the HCO Area Secretary at the time volunteered: "They
just
want you to know about it and that makes them feel better." But the truth
of
the matter was that it was simply TR-2.
They were willing to talk to me about their troubles and I was
concerned,
I was interested in them, and I did acknowledge that it was a rough scene,
etc. And apparently that was adequate to convey to them that they had now
talked about their troubles and been heard, and that was it. Somebody was
willing to listen to them and acknowledge and that, apparently, would blow
it.
That's TR-2.
I am not holding myself up here as the last word in TRs. The whole
point
I am making is the fact that if your TRs were good enough you could almost
bypass processes and get a surface level of case gain. You wouldn't get
anything in depth but you would get a surface level of case gain.
The phenomenon described above has been going on for a long time. It's
been going on since the earliest days of Christianity and I'm sure the
Christians picked it up from somebody before that. It's a basic mechanism
so
somebody picked up this confessional idea somewhere along the line. It's
very
far from the only mechanism there is in the mind, but it in itself was good
enough to carry the Roman Catholic Church through hundreds of years over
the
out TRs of those father confessors. (There is no way that confront and TR 0
could be construed as in when the father confessor goes into his box, pulls
the curtain and then listens to a confessional.)
Also, anything that Freudian analysis ever had to offer depends
exclusively upon this same mechanism-the person feeling that he has been
listened to. But there is not a psychoanalyst in the business who ever
heard
of TR-2. You want to know how someone being analyzed can sit there and talk
for hours and hours on the same subject? Obviously the psychoanalyst's TR-2
is
out because he's making the pc overrun.
And all the psychiatrists know how to do is give the person another
pound
of tranquilizers or electric shock. That is lousy TR-2. It is not even a
substitute.
Some years ago I didn't even know TRs existed, that they were anything
special or could be broken down into anything. But in Phoenix, Arizona,
when
I was giving live demonstrations on closed circuit TV for students, one
staff
member came out very, very excited about a discovery he had made. His
discovery was: "You acknowledge what the pc says!" There apparently wasn't
another auditor the length and breadth of the world who was doing that, so
I
decided I had better study this. It led into, over the years, a very deep
analysis of the cycle of communication. Apparently nobody had ever analyzed
this before but there is a very full analysis of cycles of communication
now
and the bulk of it is contained in the early Saint Hill lectures.
You are now studying the near ultimate of this strata of auditing.
HCOB 10.4.80 - 4 -
The whole point here is: if your TRs were good enough you would be
known
as a great auditor without doing a single thing. I'm not advising that you
shouldn't do another single thing but I want to point up that just this
factor
alone-good TRs-makes people feel better. It becomes safe to talk to the
auditor and they become willing to talk to the auditor with confidence they
will be listened to and acknowledged.
It comes down to the definition of "in session": interested in own
case
and willing to talk to the auditor. That definition of in session is such
that
I can C/S and spot, even from fragmentary worksheets, whether or not the pc
is
in session. When I am first C/Sing on a new line that is really all I look
for. If it's out, I mend it. When I've got it mended then we can begin to
get
someplace.
If you've got thousands of years of background history where they were
getting along without knowing a blasted thing about TRs and it still had a
workability, you can see where you could get if you really knew your TRs.
The potential is there and it is up to every auditor to realize it.
Metering And In-Sessionness
The pc's in-sessionness is going to be influenced by your
understanding
of the meter and your metering. When you have confidence in the meter and
your
metering ability you build greater confidence on the part of the pc.
First, it's got to be real to you as an auditor that the meter has
something to do with the being you have it attached to, that it does
connect
up with that person's bank and that the meter works. It is important for
the
pc to realize that too.
There is a drill which makes this real to both auditor and pc. It's
called the pinch test.
Whenever I have a new meter to test I put someone on the cans, give
him
an R-factor on what I'm going to do, and then I just reach over and pinch
the
person. Then I ask him to recall the pinch and when he does I see a meter
read
occur. I know then whether that meter works or not.
The theory behind this is quite simple. Life has the ability to
register
an impingement and to retain it or reduplicate it. Life has that ability
and
that is all the meter measures.
So, when you do a pinch test you'll see the meter read. You can
actually
see the meter read before you pinch if you reach up and then don't pinch.
It
is simply a matter of reactions. The meter is measuring reactions to
impingements in life. That is all there is to it. In a pinch test it is
measuring the reaction to the impingement of the pinch.
There is another datum that can be stated here to make it even clearer
to
an auditor how the meter connects up with the pc's bank. The E-Meter is an
interlocking device with the electrons of the bank. With the bank you have
a
sheet of energy there and it is made out of electricity. When you pass a
current of electricity near the thing it is going to monitor that current
of
electricity and that is what shows up on the meter.
HCOB 10.4.80 - 5 -
The auditor who understands that datum will have certainty on the fact
that when the meter reads it is reading on something.
If the meter reads when you ask about "ARC break" it is reading either
on
the fact that the pc has an ARC break or that he is startled to be asked if
he
has an ARC break when he really has a problem, but it is reading on
something.
You don't just walk on by it.
This is what I had to teach Class VIIIs: that you check Suppress and
False when all is not running well. Because for a meter to read something
must
exist for it to read on. And normally it is exactly what you said. You said
"Do fish fly?" and it read. There is something there. An accurate meter
does
not idly read.
Your knowledge of the meter and Four skill with a good operating meter
has to be such that you have certainty on this and can't be given a sales
talk
and sold on the idea that "There's nothing there, really; it just happened
to
read."
Without that certainty it goes off the rails. Instead of asking, "What
was that withhold?" and really cleaning it up, you'll say, "Well, maybe. .
.
All right, maybe it was in some part life or something so let's go on to
the
next question ...." NO! There goes your pc out of session. That's it. He
can't be interested in his own case now. His own case has just been
alter-ised.
Without certainty on the fact that when the meter reads it reads on
something, you're going to waffle on what you ask the pc. That will
deteriorate your beingness and your attitude and put the pc out of session.
An auditor must also be a technician on meter interpretation.
He observes the meter reaction; that's an observation. After
observation
there is a point of interpretation.
Those are two different steps. You have to get observation down pat
before you get into interpretation. So sandwiched in between your auditing
question and interpretation is observation.
What the auditor must not miss is his observation of the needle on the
dial, that it moves and that it reacts and that it does so because it is
connected to the pc. So there is a point of action in there which is
observation.
An auditor determines to find out something. That is an interrogation.
It
is followed by an observation, and that is followed by an interpretation.
You've got to single out the observation as to what it is, and then
the
interpretation as to what it is, and the causation that makes the meter
read
as to what it is. You will then have these things unstuck and separated out
from each other.
There is nothing complicated about any of this unless someone makes it
complicated. You can have a million interpretations and one truth. What
makes
the road hard to travel is that the interpretations (or alter-ises) are,
every
one of them, liable to be given the same importance as the truth.
HCOB 10.4.80 - 6 -
There can be an infinity of "facts" and only one truth, so that one truth
gets
lost like a drop of water in the ocean. Which is the drop of water? I'll
tell you what the drop of water is: it is the point of observation. And
part
of that observation is the fact that the meter is connected to the pc and
the
pc does have a bank. It then becomes clear that the meter reads because
there
is something there for it to read on.
So there is an area of confidence in the meter for the auditor which
contributes to his auditor beingness. This results in greater confidence on
the part of the pc which, in turn, contributes to the pc's ability to be in
session.
BEINGNESS AND ATTITUDE
Once you have acquired certainty on your TRs and metering, the next
step
is beingness.
This can give rise to an infinity of questions: "What is this
'beingness'?" "How do I assume a beingness?" "Is it an artificial beingness
I'm
wearing?" "Do I need to adopt a different beingness?"
It is NOT a matter of a listing question, such as "what am I being?"
It
is something you simply have to work out for yourself; there isn't anybody
who
can do it for you.
In sorting this out, one can get into such matters as interesting and
interested. It should help to realize there is nothing worse than an
interesting auditor. It's a wrong beingness.
If you're disturbed by having to sit on a hard chair as an auditor, it
will color your beingness. It will color your attitude. If your confront of
evil is very low it will show up especially on your TR 0 and will cause you
to
do all sorts of odd-ball things with your TRs.
What does confront of evil have to do with beingness? Well, what being
can confront evil? It is not necessarily an evil being. Let us say a pc
comes
in and says, "I have just strangled a dog and took a great deal of pleasure
in
it," and you say "WHAT???!!!" You are never going to get him in the kind of
shape where he doesn't go around strangling dogs. Why? Because he has just
learned that he shouldn't talk to the auditor.
Whatever you're doing as an auditor, if you're doing it through a
colored
beingness you've got a mis-attitude and your pc becomes unwilling. You
start
developing session withholds in the pc. These will be innocent withholds,
such
as "I don't have any interest in that but I won't tell him so," or "I
didn't
really think that read......" They will most likely be innocent withholds,
but
you now have a pc who isn't in there pitching. And that's the point at
which
the session deteriorates.
If you're not sure of your beingness, if you haven't decided upon your
beingness, if your beingness is wobbly, then your attitude toward the pc
will
be uncertain and wobbly. And your attitude toward the pc will then color
your
TRs. In that case you can ask "Do fish fly?" until hell freezes over and
drill
and drill and drill continuously and religiously.
HCOB 10.4.80 - 7 -
And you are not going to get anywhere until you get your beingness and your
attitude settled.
What IS auditor beingness? Well, what are you being as you sit in the
auditing chair auditing the pc? Are you a beingness somebody would be
willing
to talk to? The general attitude connected with your TRs is what signals
this.
Your beingness as an auditor is something you yourself must DECIDE
upon.
It's a step to be taken when you are certain of your auditing basics. It
could
be done in minutes or it could require hours or days. But if you take a
look
at all of this data and apply it, you actually could simply decide "What is
my
beingness as an auditor?" and "Exactly what is my attitude toward pcs?" and
your beingness as an auditor might suddenly go click. Your attitude then
will
fall comfortably into place, and that will be reflected in your TRs.
These are the skills you need to acquire. But it is basic simplicities
you are after, as I have described them here.
I've given you an analysis of the scene that hasn't been stated quite
this way before. It begins with certainty on technical basics, TRs and
metering. It's then a matter of assuming an auditor beingness which comes
across in your attitude. At that point your TRs, already well drilled, can
be
brought up easily to a point of flawlessness.
And from there it's a short step to your pcs, each and every one,
interested in own case and willing to talk to the auditor.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
of CALIFORNIA
BDCSC:LRH:bk
Copyright $c 1980, 1981
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
of CALIFORNIA
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=5/4/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Q & A, THE REAL DIFFERENCE
TR Courses
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 5 APRIL 1980
TR Courses
Q & A, THE REAL DIFFERENCE
There are several definitions for the term "Q & A".
In Scientologese it is often used to mean "undecisive", not making up
one's mind.
Q stands for "Question". A stands for "Answer". In "perfect
duplication"
the answer to a Question would be the Question.
The real definition as it applies to TRs is "The Question proceeding
from the last Answer."
Example:
Question: How are you?
Answer: I'm fine.
Question: How fine?
Answer: My stomach hurts.
Question: When did your stomach begin hurting?
Answer: About four.
Question: Where were you at four?
etc., etc.
The above example is a grievous auditing fault. As each question is
based on the last answer, it is called "Q and A". It could also be called
"Q
based on last A".
It never completes any cycle. It tangles pcs up. It violates TR 8.
Don't
do it.
I trust the above handles any confusion on this subject.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:dr
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=13/3/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=1
rDate=22/11/81
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
C/S Series 109R
CONDITIONAL STEP FOLLOWING
THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN AND OBJECTIVES
Remimeo
C/Ses
Qual
Tech
Auditors
Cramming Officers
Supervisors
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 13 MARCH 1980R
Remimeo REVISED 22 NOVEMBER 1981
C/Ses
Qual (Revisions not in Script)
Tech
Auditors
Cramming Officers
Supervisors
C/S Series 109R
CONDITIONAL STEP FOLLOWING
THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN AND OBJECTIVES
(REF: HCOB 6 Feb 78RA THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN
REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM
HCOB 16 Oct 78 REPAIR CORRECTION LIST
HCOB 24 Nov 73RD C/S Series 53RL SF or LF
HCOB 2 Jun 78RA CRAMMING REPAIR ASSESSMENT LIST
HCOB 12 May 80 DRUGS AND OBJECTIVE PROCESSES)
This bulletin has been revised to position its conditional repair
step
more correctly after the Purification Rundown and Objectives have been
done,
as that is where the majority of those who need the step will benefit from
it
most.
The technical reason for this lies in the fact that Objective
processing
is a lower gradient than Subjective processing. The following from HCOB 12
May
80, DRUGS AND OBJECTIVE PROCESSES, gives an even more precise statement as
to
why this is so:
"As the (Objective) process is orienting the person in the present
time
of the physical universe and as this present time is not threatening,
he
has a time point and a location point from which to sort out his
confusions."
HCOB 12 May 80 should be studied in its entirety for an understanding
of
the effects of drugs and of Objective Processes. But the statement above
clarifies at once why most pcs who need repair and who have not flattened
Objectives are not yet up to being audited on subjective repair actions (or
at
least not with maximum gain) until Objectives are handled. Such repair,
attempted over undone but needed Objectives, can drag on, be ineffective
and
delay a pc from getting onto his next step and up the Bridge. It has done
so
in several reported cases.
Occasionally a pc might need some type of repair following his
Purification RD and before Objectives (such as Int or Out Lists). And
certainly not all Purification pcs who need repair of earlier actions are
incapable of handling subjective processes. These are points for C/S
adjudication, and the C/S is guided in this by his understanding of how and
why Objectives work and what they accomplish.
When a person has completed the Purification Rundown and has had full
Objectives, before he then goes onto or back onto a subjective auditing
program of any kind, it may be necessary to:
HCOB 13.3.80R - 2 -
Rev. 22.11.81
1. CORRECT ANY FAILED AUDITING REPAIR HE WAS GIVEN BEFORE THE PURIFICATION
RUNDOWN.
2. REPAIR AND COMPLETE ANY FAILED AUDITING PROCESS HE WAS GIVEN BEFORE THE
PURIFICATION RUNDOWN.
3. REPAIR ANY FAILED CRAMMING, CORRECTION OR ESTO ACTIONS HE WAS GIVEN
BEFORE
OR DURING THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN.
These are not necessarily actions that would be done on every pc, one
for one. They are steps to be considered by the C/S in each such case he
programs, particularly if the person has had a rough auditing history or a
rough study or training history.
THE WHY FOR REPAIR OF REPAIR
FOLLOWING PURIFICATION AND OBJECTIVES
We know that deposits of drugs and biochemical substances in the body
can prevent or inhibit case gain. Thus, where a case has been in rough
shape
and/or had extensive repair before the Purification Rundown, it is possible
he
could receive limited gain at that time. He may be hung up in failed
auditing
actions or errors in the repair from that period. To simply continue to
give
him subjective auditing over such hang-ups could give him losses or limited
benefit.
But when he has eliminated the debilitating effects of drug residuals
on
the Purification Rundown and when Objective Processing has brought him into
present time, in better control and in better communication with his
environment, auditing repair and other actions can be effectively carried
out
with full realization and/or resurgence of case gain.
Additionally, we know that mental auditing actions and even sometimes
Objectives do not work in the presence of drugs or other harmful deposits.
We
also know that drugs and drug residues impede learning. So it is obvious
that
persons loaded up with street or medical drugs or other harmful toxins
would
not be able to be crammed or repaired before or during the Purification
Rundown or Objective Processing with the same effectiveness as they would
be
once these actions were complete.
Thus you are likely to find cases around who were mis-crammed or
messed
up on cramming who now, after Purification and Objectives, need a sort-out
on
those actions and the errors in all of it handled.
A civilization on drugs or made up of unhandled ex-druggies cannot
learn. The Purification Rundown, coupled with well-run Objectives, can
reverse
that.
What has now been borne out conclusively (and quite resoundingly in
some
cases) is that once a person is free of these harmful residues and is
well-oriented in present time he can now study more efficiently and learn,
perhaps for the first time. He is now better able to absorb and use
information, and he often can also better appreciate what is going on
around
him. For our purposes in programming cases this tells us that any failed
cramming or correction actions undertaken prior to or during Purification
can
now be effectively handled to get the person back on the rails and winning.
HCOB 13.3.80R - 3 -
Rev. 22.11.81
Failed cramming or correction can hang a person up and affect his
auditing gain as well as his post performance. Mishandled auditing or
mishandled auditing repair and auditing losses can affect the person's post
performance as well as his case gain. So one checks both areas (auditing
and
cramming) for any failed handling that may need repair.
SEQUENCE OF ACTIONS TO TAKE
When the person has completed the Purification Rundown, and has gone
on
to receive full Objectives or filled in any Objective Processes previously
missed, these are the steps one would follow:
1. Ensure the person is maintaining a proper personal schedule and has not
dropped out any supplementary nutrition, exercise or adequate sleep in
the
amounts he needs now to function best. (Ref: HCOB 6.2.78RA THE
PURIFICATION RUNDOWN REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM, page 18.)
2. A. Check, by folder study or FES, to determine whether or not
correction
of auditing repairs, or the repair or completion of auditing
processes
given prior to the Purification Rundown, is needed. (Note: As
auditing
is not done concurrently with the Purification Rundown, these would
be
actions that preceded the Rundown. However, if any such action was
done
during the Rundown, this would also need to be checked for result.)
B. If case repair is indicated, use:
HCOB 16 Oct 78 REPAIR CORRECTION LIST and/or
HCOB 24 Nov 73RD C/S Series 53RL Short or Long Form
or other appropriate list
to detect and get handled the exact outness.
3. A. Determine if cramming or correction repair would be needed by a
review
of any cramming, correction, Esto or hatting action the person was
given before or during the Purification Rundown, and the results of
these.
B. If, per folder study, cramming or correction repair is indicated,
use:
1. HCOB 2 Jun 78RA Cramming Series 18R
Rev. 30.8.81 CRAMMING REPAIR ASSESSMENT LIST
to detect and get handled the exact outness.
4. When any past failed actions are fully handled to VGIs, re-program.
One wouldn't harass or hold up a pc with any unnecessary repair or
over-repair or overrun, either in auditing or cramming. But to omit or
ignore
any of these actions where they are needed would be to lead the person into
losses in his future auditing or losses and failure on his post or in his
job.
So let's not risk that, as it's totally avoidable.
A person complete on the Purification Rundown and Objectives, with
his
long-standing barriers to successful auditing, study or training removed
and
his confront and awareness up, is ripe for all the gains to be had,
repair-wise or otherwise. He'll get all the gains to be had if he's handled
and programmed correctly.
HCOB 13.3.80R - 4 -
Rev. 22.11.81
A wise and skilled C/S will get the needed actions and only the
needed
actions done, on a spot-on basis.
There are now hundreds of completed preclears rolling off the
Purification Rundown and through the SRD, many of them ready to take off
and
fly on their next auditing. The others may only need one or more of the
actions listed in this bulletin to clear the way for all the latent and
potential gains awaiting them.
I count on you to get each and every one of them flying!
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Research and Technical
Compilations Unit
Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
OF CALIFORNIA
BDCSC:LRH:RTC:drm
Copyright $c 1980, 1981
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
Research and Technical
Compilations Unit
Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
OF CALIFORNIA
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=7/3/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
DIETS, COMMENTS UPON
Remimeo
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 7 MARCH 1980
Remimeo
DIETS, COMMENTS UPON
(Nothing in this HCOB should be interpreted as prescribing or
recommending dieting or diets. It is a summary of personal opinions
reached after research into the field.)
Locating and remedying deficiencies and excesses in vitamins,
minerals,
enzymes, sugar, protein, oil and fats, carbohydrates and bulk fiber as well
as
other dietary elements is the keynote of dieting. No special substance or
food
or abstinence from it is a whole answer.
Diet should be considered a subject where one seeks a balance of body
support elements and determines quantity.
The problem of weight is resolved by counting daily calories of
consumption of the diet as a whole. This is the only contemporary
successful
method which proves itself. Fasting, magic foods eaten to the exclusion of
others, dozens of dietary fads alike tend to be more harmful than
beneficial.
At times, personal allergies have to be taken into account. In some
persons, disease or illness has to be allowed for. But in both cases the
artificial creation of deficiencies in vitamins, minerals and other
elements
must be guarded against and made up for in some other way.
When large dosages of certain vitamins, minerals or foodstuffs are
given,
an artificial deficiency can apparently be created in others not given.
Increase of some elements, just by the fact of being increased, demands
increases in others. When intake of some elements is markedly increased,
balance must be maintained by proportionately increasing others. vitamin or
mineral does not work alone-it must be accompanied by other elements with
which it combines to do its work. It will even rob bones, muscles and
tissue
to obtain the missing elements. Artificial deficiencies can be so created.
Any vital substance on which body support depends, when too reduced or
omitted from consumption, can be depended upon to result in a nonoptimum
physical condition.
When very obvious, it becomes a "disease". And when less obvious and
even
undetected, it becomes a "not feeling good".
There is a distinct possibility (after mental and spiritual factors)
that
the largest distinctive contributive factor in aging is the composite of
cumulative deficiencies.
Predisposition to other types of illness is in many instances
occasioned
by these deficiencies even when the precipitation is viral or bacterial.
Prolongation of illness is guaranteed when deficiencies remain present
and unremedied.
HCOB 7.3.80 - 2 -
A lot of people probably go on drugs because they feel so terrible due
to
dietary deficiencies. And drugs, themselves, cause wholesale vitamin and
mineral deficiencies, which then progressively worsen. Recovery from drugs
requires a full repair of these deficiencies.
The bugbear is that man does not know what man's optimum diet really
is.
And another difficulty arises in that not all essential elements to life
support have been isolated.
Improvement in these two areas of research is what will produce
greater
longevity and better health for man, barring mental factors, which of
course
we have now isolated and resolved.
As we are dealing with a being in an organism, our work is impeded by
man's slow progress in biochemical and physiological spheres and the
attendant
authoritarianisms and faddisms which always arise around uncodified or
little
known subjects.
The most useful published, popular compilations on the subject of
diets
and biochemistry to date were done by the late Adelle Davis in her four
books: "Let's Get Well", "Let's Eat Right To Keep Fit", "Let's Cook It
Right"
and "Let's Have Healthy Children".
An improperly fed and cared for body is a kind of trap. And as long as
one is pushing a body around, he should make a sincere attempt, without
becoming its slave, to provide it with the fuel, care and exercise required
to
keep it functioning.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:pb:gal
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=29/2/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN:
PREGNANCY AND BREAST-FEEDING
Remimeo
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 29 FEBRUARY 1980
Remimeo
THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN:
PREGNANCY AND BREAST-FEEDING
(Ref: HCOB 6 Feb 78RA THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN
Rev. 4.12.79 REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM
BOOK: DIANETICS: THE MODERN SCIENCE OF MENTAL HEALTH)
Pregnant women should not be routed onto the Purification Rundown.
During pregnancy there is a certain amount of fluid exchange between
the
mother and the fetus, via the placenta. It has been found that on the
Purification Rundown, toxins which might have been lying dormant in the
body
are released and eliminated via sweat-out. In the case of pregnancy, some
of
these toxins, instead of being eliminated, could be transmitted to the
fetus
in a flow of fluids from the mother to the unborn child. There is no reason
to
risk the possibility of subjecting the unborn child to the effects of such
toxins which, even if present but remaining dormant, might not otherwise
reach
him.
Similarly, mothers who are breast-feeding their babies should not do
the
Purification Rundown until the baby is no longer being breast-fed, as any
toxins released during the Rundown could be imparted to the baby in the
mother's milk.
The Purification Rundown would be done by the mother after the birth
of
the child and after any final medical check which pronounced the mother in
good health, and, in the case of breast-feeding, when the baby had been
completely weaned and was on his own formula.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
LRH Technical Compilations
Unit
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
BDCS:LRH:RTC:gal CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Assisted by
LRH Technical Compilations
Unit
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=14/2/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
RESEARCH DATA ON NUTRITIONAL VITAMIN INCREASES
ON THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN
Remimeo
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 14 FEBRUARY 1980
Remimeo
RESEARCH DATA ON NUTRITIONAL VITAMIN INCREASES
ON THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN
(Ref: HCOB 6 Feb 78RA THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN
Re-rev. 4.12.79 REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM
HCOB 6 Feb 78RA-1 THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN
Add of 20.12.79 -- ERRATA & ADDITIONS
HCOB 3 Jan 80 PURIFICATION RUNDOWN AND ATOMIC WAR)
The original bulletin on the Purification Rundown (HCOB 6 Feb 78RA THE
PURIFICATION RUNDOWN REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM) contains, as a record of
researches and results, the approximate amounts of the various nutritional
vitamins on which most persons were started on the Rundown.
The table below gives further research data on approximately how these
vitamins were increased, in ratio, when the Niacin was increased as the
person
progressed on the Rundown.
VIT VIT VIT VIT VIT B VIT MINERAL
NIACIN A D C E COMPLEX B1 TABLETS
100 5,000 400 250 800 2 350 1 to 2
to to I.U. to I.U. Capsules to tabs
400 mg 10 000 1000 600 mg
I.U. mg
500 20,000 800 2 1200 3 400 2 to 3
to I.U. I.U. to I.U. Capsules to
1400 mg 3 gm 650 mg
1500 30,000 1200 3 1600 4 450 3 to 4
to I.U. I.U. to I.U. Capsules to
2400 mg 4 gm 700 mg
2500 50,000 2000 4 2000 5 750 4 to 5
to I.U. I.U. to I.U. Capsules to
3400 mg 5 gm 1250 mg
3500 50,000 2000 5 2400 6 800 5 to 6
to I.U. I.U. to I.U. Capsules to
5000 mg 6 gm 1300 mg
Cal Mag was increased from 1 to 1 Ѕ to 2 glasses daily, depending upon
individual need.
The dosages in the table above show the variations of individual
tolerances encountered and the ranges of increase which proved most
effective
in the majority of cases.
The table does not include any additional vitamins which might be
needed
in cases of other specific vitamin deficiencies an individual may have,
which
may need to be determined by a medical doctor.
HCOB 14.2.80 - 2 -
It should be stressed here that individual tolerances were and always
must be taken into consideration in each case. Quantities of Vitamin C
especially would need to be carefully increased according to the person's
tolerance of it, as too much Vitamin C results in stomach upsets or
diarrhea
for some people.
The Vitamin B Complex used was one which contained:
B1 - 50 mg Folic Acid - 100 mcg
B2 - 50 mg Biotin - 50 mcg
B6 - 50 mg Choline - 50 mg
B12 - 50 mcg (Bitartrate)
Pantothenic Acid - 50 mg Niacinamide - 50 mg
PABA - 50 mg Inositol - 50 mg
all in a base of Lecithin, parsley, rice bran, watercress and alfalfa.
NOTE: The majority of Vitamin B Complex tablets on the market include
Niacinamide in small amounts, which is the substance invented to keep from
turning on the Niacin flush and as such is worthless. (Ref: HCOB 6 Feb 78RA
THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM, page 11.) The
likelihood
is that this amount of Niacinamide in a B Complex tablet acts only upon its
own Niacin content to eliminate any flush from its own content. Results
from
the piloting of the Rundown, where plenty of Niacin flush was experienced
on
different dosages of Niacin itself, in combination with other vitamins and
minerals, indicate that the inclusion of the Niacinamide in the B Complex
had
little if any effect upon the flush that resulted from the additional
dosages
of Niacin taken. However, where a B Complex tablet can be found that
includes
Niacin rather than Niacinamide, that would be the preferable tablet to use.
It
is also possible to have a B Complex tablet especially made up that
includes
actual Niacin in amounts equal to the B1 and B6 amounts instead of
Niacinamide, particularly if one is ordering it in fairly large amounts.
Where a B Complex tablet that includes Niacin is used this adds that
much more to the daily Niacin intake and this must be taken into
consideration
when increasing Niacin and B Complex dosages.
The multi-mineral tablet used contained the following mineral amounts
per each 9 tablets (in other words, one tablet would provide only 1/9 of
the
following mineral amounts):
500 mg calcium
250 mg magnesium
18 mg iron
15 mg zinc
4 mg manganese
2 mg copper
45 mg potassium (protein complex)
.225 mg iodine (kelp).
In this tablet the minerals, except the potassium and iodine, were
"chelated"* (bonded with) super amino acids*, in a base of selenium, yeast,
DNA, RNA, ginseng, alfalfa leaf flour, parsley, watercress and cabbage.
*AMINO ACIDS, to define them very simply, are basic organic compounds
which are essential to the body's breakdown and absorption of foods.
*"CHELATION" is taken from a Greek word meaning "claw". It is a
process
by which minerals are held, as if by a claw, by amino acids. This bonding
of a
mineral with an amino acid exists in nature as a necessary step for the
mineral to be absorbed and used by the body. Thus, with this step already
provided, the mineral is more easily absorbed and used.
HCOB 14.2.80 - 3 -
Most multiple mineral formulas include the major mineral elements
required by the body but not all of the trace minerals. "Trace" minerals
are
those minerals which have been found essential to maintaining life even
though
they are found in the body in very small-i.e. "trace"-amounts. The main
trace minerals currently include: cobalt, copper, iodine, manganese,
molybdenum, zinc, selenium, chromium and lithium. Tin was also added as an
essential trace mineral as late as 1970. Nutritional researchists are the
first to admit that the work in this field is very far from complete, and
there
will undoubtedly be other trace minerals added to the list as such research
is
continued.
Currently, also, there are fairly wide differences of opinion among
nutritionists as to the minimum daily requirements of the various minerals
and
especially the trace minerals.
Minerals are found in a wide variety of foods. Natural foods,
undamaged
by processing, are the best sources of minerals as they exist in
unprocessed
foods in the combinations in which they are most effective. But minerals
can
also be lacking in foods grown in mineral-depleted soil. Additionally, of
course, there is no one food that supplies them all.
Therefore, it may be necessary to use more than one type of
multi-mineral tablet to ensure one is getting all of the minerals,
including
the trace minerals, that are required by the body.
The additional research data released in this issue is not to be
construed as a recommendation of medical treatment or medication. It is
given
here as a record of the food supplements in the form of nutritional
vitamins
and minerals which were found effective in the piloting and development of
the
Purification Rundown.
Three of the more informative books on the subject of nutritional
vitamins and minerals are:
"Let's Get Well", by Adelle Davis.
Published by Harcourt, Brace & World,
New York, N.Y.
"Body, Mind and The B Vitamins", by Ruth Adams and Frank Murray.
Published by Larchmont Books,
25 W. 145th Street,
New York, N.Y. 10036
"New Life Through Nutrition", by Dr. Sheldon C. Deal.
Published by New Life Publishing,
1001 North Swan Road, Tucson,
Arizona, 85711.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
As assisted by
LRH Technical Compilations
Unit
BDCS:LRH:RTCU:gal for the
Copyright $c 1980 BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
by L. Ron Hubbard of the
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
As assisted by
LRH Technical Compilations
Unit
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=11/2/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
ILLEGAL PCS, ACCEPTANCE OF
ADDITION REGARDING PURIFICATION RD
Remimeo
All Registrars
All Case Supervisors
All Ds of P
All Auditors
All Ethics Officers
GO
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 11 FEBRUARY 1980
(Also issued as HCO PL of 11 Feb 80, same title)
Remimeo
All Registrars
All Case Supervisors
All Ds of P
All Auditors
All Ethics Officers
GO
ILLEGAL PCS, ACCEPTANCE OF
ADDITION REGARDING PURIFICATION RD
Ref: HCOB/PL 6 Dec 76 ILLEGAL PCS, ACCEPTANCE OF,
HIGH CRIME BULLETIN
HCOB 6 Feb 78RA THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN
Rev. 4.12.79 REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM
This bulletin enforces Church Policy of not accepting psychiatric
cases
for services and makes it known that this includes the Purification
Rundown.
(These policies are stated in HCO PL/HCOB 6 Dec 76, ILLEGAL PCS, ACCEPTANCE
OF, HIGH CRIME BULLETIN and these policies apply in full to the
Purification
Rundown as well as other services currently being delivered, and to any
future
services.)
While psychiatric cases could possibly benefit from the Purification
Rundown, it would have to be administered under clinical conditions and
medical supervision and at the signed responsibility of those responsible
for
the case. Such cases could not be included in the general normal run of
persons undergoing the Purification Rundown.
This is issued not because of any inability to help such persons, but
because of the fact that such persons are often, after psychiatric
treatment,
in a state of risk to themselves, to others and to their environments.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
As assisted by
Senior C/S Int
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:DM:dr
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
As assisted by
Senior C/S Int
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=12/1/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Art Series 9
Remimeo
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 12 JANUARY 1980
Remimeo
Art Series 9
To do a montage, shot or work of art that talks one must:
1. Figure out what your message is.
2. Decide to communicate the message.
3. Put things or arrangements in that contribute to the message.
4. Take out or exclude things or arrangements which don't
contribute
to it.
It also helps to know what is meant by "message". (Def: Message-is a
unit communication of a significance.)
It also helps to know the definition of "montage" which is-a series of
shots with one message.
One should also know the definition of a shot and should understand
that
a short cut or glimpse of something is just a blip or some frames as
opposed
to a scene or a "picture" and there is really a missing word for this in
the
English language.
A scene is a picture with a message in its own right.
A shot is anything and it has no message in its own right and doesn't
talk unless connected to other shots or scenes.
One should also know what is a sequence and what is an action
sequence.
A sequence is a series of scenes related by location or general
subject.
In films or a photo story it is comparable to a chapter in a book.
An action sequence is often fast cut to give the appearance of rapid
movement and will never be a montage as each picture in it is a scene and
therefore has its own message.
Individual shots in a montage have little meaning in themselves
individually but when cut together deliver a single message.
By confusing an action sequence and a montage or a montage shot and a
scene, one gets very little audience reaction and after all, that's the
name
of the game.
Doing things for self-satisfaction is for professors who can't.
All of this comes under the heading of integration. Integration
consists
of uniting the similar.
If you try to unite the totally dissimilar and unrelated you don't
have
integration and you don't have art. You have chaos.
HCOB 12.1.80 - 2 -
The principle of integration applies to all editing and composition in
all fields.
The above 1, 2, 3 and 4 is a formula that helps one to achieve clear
aesthetic communication of art.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:gal
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=11/1/80
Volnum=0
Issue=1
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
C/S Series 108
Cramming Series 21
QUAL CORRECTIVE ACTIONS ON OTs
Remimeo
Cramming Officers
C/Ses
Tech/Qual
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 11 JANUARY 1980
Remimeo ISSUE I
Cramming Officers
C/Ses
Tech/Qual
C/S Series 108
Cramming Series 21
QUAL CORRECTIVE ACTIONS ON OTs
References: C/S Series 107 AUDITOR ASSIGNMENT POLICIES,
CRAMMING ASSIGNMENT POLICIES
C/S Series 98 "AUDITING FOLDERS, OMISSIONS
IN COMPLETENESS"
The reason why it is necessary to have OT versions of the various Qual
corrective actions is that an OT's case can be messed up if mis-audited or
mis-crammed, and the purpose of Qual corrective actions is to improve or
correct the staff member.
The major cause of trouble in seeking to correct OTs has been
violations
of the auditor assignment policy, whereby a person of lower case level than
the OT was trying to audit or cram the OT. Not only does this put the OT on
a
withhold of confidential data, but a person of lower case level has no
reality
on the materials of the case level of the OT and can easily stir up aspects
of
the case that should have been left alone, or, if taken up handled fully.
Additionally if the OT did get messed up, then he could only be repaired by
using repair actions appropriate to his case level. A non-OT III Cramming
Officer or auditor could not possibly repair BPC on an OT III.
Where Cramming Officers have limited their actions to simply word
clearing the materials that the person had gone past misunderstoods on, it
has
worked out OK. But if the action being done led into the person's case then
there is a liability of a messed up case and ineffective staff member.
Some of the Qual corrective actions such as False Data Stripping and
some
of the questions on the Product Debug Checklist are not directed toward the
person's post alone but are directed towards the person's case by asking
about
intentions or reactions or considerations or directing the person to recall
past events. The statement: "I'm not auditing you.", doesn't prevent a case
action from occurring if one then proceeds to ask auditing questions.
The worst repercussions of all have stemmed from offline case actions
done as some sort of squirrelly "2WC" which wasn't a valid part of the
cramming action anyway.
When subjective questions are asked one invariably is into a case
action.
Definition of "Subjective": "Consultation with the preclear's own universe,
with his mock ups, and with his own thoughts and considerations." (Book:
The
Creation of Human Ability, p. 167.) "Recall, think, remember or return on
the time track processes are subjective." (HCOB 2 Nov 57RA.)
HCOB 11.1.80 I - 2 -
Subjective actions, especially when metered, lead into the person's
case.
If mis-done, particularly if mis-metered, these can ball the case up.
OTs when correctly handled with the correct tech appropriate to their
case level, handle very quickly and easily. So it is important to know what
to
do and what not to do.
The solution to this is in having specialized lists for OTs, and
forbidding the use of non-OT actions on OTs, and forbidding non-OTs from
seeking to audit or cram OTs.
HOW TO DETECT FLUBBED CRAMMING
There are ways to detect and isolate what happened in a mis-done
cramming:
- The person crammed has any BIs about the cramming action;
- The person continues to goof in the same area or subject;
- The person Red Tags on the cramming or within three days after the
cramming action;
- The person gets sick, misemotional on the subject of the cram, or
turns
on somatics, within three days of the cramming action;
- The person is introverted on the subject of the cram;
- The person comes to next session after the cram with TA or needle
behavior worsened from what it was prior to the cram (such as TA
used
to be in normal range and now is high or low, or Sens setting for
1/3rd
dial drop on can squeeze is now higher due to tighter needle, an
unusual needle pattern has now appeared, etc.).
A sharp C/S can usually spot a mis-done cram from the worksheets of
the
cramming action and must insist that these are legible and accurate (ref:
HCOB C/8 Series 98, AUDITING FOLDERS, OMISSIONS IN COMPLETENESS).
These indicators above apply to flubbed cramming at any case level,
(not
just OTs), and must be repaired within 24 hours. Where the person is of an
upper case level, the C/S and auditor must be of comparable case Level (C/S
Series 107).
ACTIONS THAT CAN BE DONE
There are actions that are OK to do in Cramming and will not get into
the
person's case. These relate to his post or study and are objective.
Definition of "objective": "Of or having to do with a material object
as
distinguished from a mental concept, idea or belief" (dictionary). "Means
here
and now objects in PT as opposed to 'subjective'." (HCOB 2 Nov 57RA.)
Questions or actions by the Cramming Officer which are objective and
pertain to the person's post, the materials which cover his post, the
materials he is studying, clearing words misunderstood, hatting actions and
post or product debugs (provided subjective questions are not asked on OTs)
are all OK.
HCOB 11.1.80 I - 3 -
The most usual and successful cramming action is simply to take the
materials or text that covers the subject of the cramming order and word
clear
and cram those materials. This is always safe and OK to do. (The only other
caution is not to give verbal data, nor to evaluate or invalidate or throw
the
person's Ruds out while doing the cram!)
Word Clearing Methods 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 and 9 are OK to do on OTs
(but
not Method One, which asks for "earlier similar?").
Finding and clearing Crashing Misunderstood Words is OK.
Demonstrating meanings of words and terms and principles either with a
Demo Kit or on Clay Table are OK.
Starrate checkouts on materials are OK.
Product Debug Tech is OK to do on OTs (provided the subjective
questions
on the assessments are omitted).
All of the actions given in this section can and should be used in
Cramming, and these have no liability.
OTs when handled correctly in Cramming (or in auditing) are very fast
and
easy to handle, and correct very readily.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
As assisted by
Senior C/S Int
LRH:DM:nc
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
As assisted by
Senior C/S Int
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=3/1/80
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=1
rDate=10/4/80
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
PURIFICATION RUNDOWN AND ATOMIC WAR
Remimeo
All Staff
BPI
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 3 JANUARY 1980R
Remimeo REVISED 10 APRIL 1980
All Staff
BPI
(Revisions in Script)
(Ellipses indicate Deletions)
PURIFICATION RUNDOWN AND ATOMIC WAR
References: HCOB 6 Feb 78RA THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN REPLACES
Rev. 4.12.79 THE SWEAT PROGRAM
HCOB 6 Feb 78RA-1 THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN --
Add. 20.12.79 ERRATA AND ADDITIONS
PAB 74, 6 Mar 56 OFFICE IN IRELAND
Technical Bulletins Vol II, pg 376
ABILITY 47, 1957, ca THE RADIATION PICTURE AND
mid-May SCIENTOLOGY
Technical Bulletins Vol III, pg 44
HCOB 3 Jun 57 EXPLANATION OF THE ABERRATIVE
CHARACTER OF RADIATION
Technical Bulletins Vol III, pg 52
PAB 119, 1 Sep 57 THE BIG AUDITING PROBLEM
Technical Bulletins Vol III, pg 107
HCOB 27 Dec 65 VITAMINS
Technical Bulletins Vol VI, pg 123
BOOK: ALL ABOUT RADIATION, May 1957
I want Scientologists to live through World War III.
And I want them to be able to continue to make all the spiritual gain
which is there to be had in their Dianetics and Scientology guidance and
counseling.
There are factors in the society today which contribute to the
restimulation of the effects of toxic substances in the environment upon
the
thetan, the being himself.
Atomic War has been more or less neglected as a news subject since
the
late '50s. But that doesn't make it any less a threat. All it takes is one
psychopath politician with access to the war-peace button. And today there
are
a dozen atomic armed nations.
Further, the increased use of atomic power for electrical supply
(without also developing proper tech and safeguards in its use) poses a
non-military threat.
And the deterioration of the upper atmosphere of the planet, by jets
and
pollutants, is year by year letting more and more sun radiation through to
the
planetary surface.
Apparently, radiation can cause a cumulative effect. And, like an
engram;
has earlier similars back to a basic engram. It would seem therefore, that
the
more one is exposed to radiation the greater the restimulation and the less
resistance he has and the more effect the radiation has on him. In other
words, a build up occurs.
The primary purpose of the Purification Rundown is the Spiritual
improvement of the person by handling the restimulative effects of the
accumulation of drugs and toxic substances.... And, according to the
success stories pouring in, it certainly does that.
HCOB 3 Jan 80R - 2 -
Rev. 10.4.80
One of the parts of the Purification Rundown is Niacin. The
discoveries
I made with this vitamin in the '50s began with its apparent effect on the
restimulation of the being by radiation exposure. At that time there was a
lot
of bomb testing and general radiation exposure and we had lots and lots of
preclears who had been subjected to atomic tests, atomic accidents and, in
at
least one case, to materials that had been part of an old atomic explosion.
We
were engaged in the spiritual salvaging of these people and we succeeded in
that.
As radiation would seem to be cumulative, once one has gotten rid of
the
cumulative effect of it and the restimulation of the spiritual being that
this
engenders, one could be far less subject to new blasts of it and their
restimulative effects. In other words, once a basic has been run out or
handled, new incidents of a similar kind become very minor. While there is
no
claim that one would be made wholly immune to new incidents, he could be
far
less spiritually affected by them and freer spiritually as an individual to
cope with them.
...
Bombarded by radiation from atomic plant fallout, from lessened
atmosphere protection, people today are far more subject to being victims
in
the time of atomic war. The cumulative effect of radiation has set them up
to
a rapid demise in the face of heavy atomic fallout.
With individuals thus far more subject to being spiritually affected
by
all of this, it brings us to the interesting probability that those who
have
had a full and competent Purification Rundown could fare better than others
not so fortunate....
And that poses the interesting possibility that only Scientologists
will
have had the spiritual gain that would enable them to function in areas
experiencing heavy fallout in an Atomic War.
I want all Scientologists to have the benefit of such spiritual
improvement.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
The Purification Rundown has as its sole purpose the handling of the
restimulative effects of drugs and toxic residuals on a Spiritual
Being.
The Purification Rundown is a Spiritual activity based on and
administered according to the doctrine and practices of the religion
of
Scientology as set forth by L. Ron Hubbard. No part of the Rundown is
intended as the diagnosis, prescription for, or treatment of any
bodily
or physical condition or ill. The Church is not responsible for the
handling of any bodily or physical condition or ill, it being the
responsibility of the individual to seek the competent medical advice
and treatment of his doctor in such matters.
THE BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:dr
Copyright $c 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
THE BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=24/9/79
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=1
rDate=26/8/81
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Cramming Series 19R
FLYING RUDS IN CRAMMING
Remimeo
Cramming Officers
C/Ses
Review Auditors
Qual
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 24 SEPTEMBER 1979R
Remimeo REVISED 26 AUGUST 1981
Cramming Officers (Revisions in Script)
C/Ses (Ellipses Indicate Deletions)
Review Auditors
Qual
Cramming Series 19R
FLYING RUDS IN CRAMMING
Ref: HCOB 15 Oct 74 Cramming Series 14
CRAMMING OVER OUT RUDS
HCOB 2 Jun 78RA Cramming Series 18RA
Re-rev. 30.8.81 CRAMMING REPAIR ASSESSMENT LIST
HCOB 21 Dec 79 C/S Series 107, Cramming Series 20
AUDITOR ASSIGNMENT POLICIES.
CRAMMING ASSIGNMENT POLICIES
HCOB 11 Jan 80 I C/S Series 108, Cramming Series 21
QUAL CORRECTIVE ACTIONS ON OTS
HCOB 11 Aug 78 I RUDIMENTS DEFINITIONS AND PATTER
BEFORE BEGINNING THE CRAMMING CYCLE:
FIRST CHECK THE PERSON'S PC FOLDER TO ENSURE HE IS NOT IN THE MIDDLE OF (OR
C/SED FOR) INT REPAIR, INT HANDLING OR THE HANDLING OF OUT LISTS. IF INT OR
LISTS ARE OUT THESE MUST BE HANDLED BEFORE ANY OTHER METERED ACTION IS
DONE.
ALSO CHECK TO ENSURE THE PERSON IS NOT IN THE MIDDLE OF AN ENGRAM CHAIN OR
ANOTHER QUAL CORRECTIVE ACTION SUCH AS PRODUCT DEBUG OR CRASHING MU
FINDING,
ETC. AND THAT THE PC IS NOT C/SED TO GET A FLUBBED ACTION REPAIRED.
IF YOU FIND ANY OF THE ABOVE, ENSURE THE PERSON IS GOTTEN INTO CRAMMING AS
SOON AS THE INCOMPLETE CASE OR CORRECTIVE ACTIONS ARE COMPLETED.
Per HCOB 15 Oct 74 CRAMMING OVER OUT RUDS, a Cramming Officer must not
try to cram over out-ruds. Despite this, there still have been instances of
persons being "handled" in cramming without the ruds having been gotten in,
so
no handling got done at all.
HOW TO FLY RUDS IN CRAMMING
TO BEGIN ... CRAMMING ..., ASSESS THE RUDS INCLUDING OVERTS,
INVALIDATION
AND EVALUATION AND FLY ANY THAT READ. THEN WHEN YOU HAVE CLEARED UP THE
READS
TO F/Ns AND HAVE AN F/N. BEGIN THE EXACT CRAMMING ORDERS INDICATED.
You can mimeo a small form on which to assess these and mark reads
which
will save time. The form would look like this:
"Is there ....... (normally used when flying ruds
at the beginning of cramming)
or,
(used when the Cramming
"On (subject) , is there ....... Officer wishes to address the
rudiments to a specific subject)
an ARC break?" _______
a present time problem?" _______
a withhold?" _______
an overt?" _______
HCOB 24.9.79R - 2 -
Rev. 26.8.81
"Is there an .......
Invalidation?" _______
Evaluation?" _______
The Cramming Officer would assess on the form above and clip it to
the
worksheets. (If no reads on the list but person is not F/Ning, check
Suppress
or Invalidate on the list and handle.)
Note: A person's ruds can also go out during a cram, at which point
they must be put in.
PREVIOUSLY MIS-DONE CRAMMING
Mis-done crammings and failure to fly the ruds in cramming will mess
up
staff members, and undisclosed overts and withholds will prevent any gain,
not
just in auditing but in word clearing or cramming or other Qual corrective
actions.
Resistance to cramming, protest of cramming or natter about cramming,
or
other Qual corrective actions are indicative of out-ruds, especially overts
and withholds against cramming or Qual or on the subject on which the
cramming
order was written. These symptoms of resistance or natter can also stem
from
having been crammed over out-ruds in the past, or having been mishandled in
cramming.
The way to handle someone who has been crammed over out-ruds in the
past
is to assess the following and fly each reading line to F/N (check Suppress
or
Invalidate if no reads on the list):
"Has cramming been done over .......
an ARC break?" _______
a present time problem?" _______
a withhold?" _______
an overt?" _______
an Invalidation?" _______
an Evaluation?" _______
If someone is nattery or upset about Cramming, Qual correction
actions,
or Qual, use the assessment above on the subject of their complaint. E.g.
you
could assess: "Has word clearing been done over ....... ?"
If the above does not resolve the matter fully, use the Cramming
Repair
Assessment List (HCOB 2 Jun 78RA), or other specific lists such as the Word
Clearing Correction List (WCCL).
CRAMMING OFFICER QUALIFICATIONS
Because the Cramming Officer is required to do these actions, he or
she
must get checked out on how to do them. Possibly a reason why some did not
fly the ruds despite HCOB 15 Oct 74 CRAMMING OVER OUT RUDS, is that the
Cramming Officer did not know how to fly ruds and had not gotten himself
trained to do so, then either didn't fly ruds before he attempted to do the
cramming order, or did not do the cramming order at all "because the ruds
were
out." Both or these errors show an effect attitude that no real Cramming
Officer (or Scientologist
HCOB 24.9.79R - 3 -
Rev. 26.8.81
for that matter) would be guilty of. Cramming Officers get tech in and
being
applied, staff members successful and winning on their post and are
therefore
very causative.
A CRAMMING OFFICER MUST GET CHECKED OUT ON FLYING RUDS AND OVERTS AS
THESE ARE VITAL TECH OF THE CRAMMING HAT. IF A CLASSED AUDITOR, HE MUST GET
CHECKED OUT ON USE OF CORRECTION LISTS SUCH AS THE CRAMMING REPAIR
ASSESSMENT
LIST, WCCL, ETC. FAILURE TO CHECK OUT ON AND USE THE TECH OF THE POST IS AN
ETHICS MATTER.
CAUTION
It has happened that Cramming Officers have made flying someone's
ruds
overly complex. Formal sessions have been done to get a person's ruds in
before a cram when the person was already F/N, VGIs. This and other
complications stem from not understanding what rudiments are, how to
recognize
when they are out and how to put them in.
The definition of rudiment as "that which is used to get the pc in
shape
to be audited that session" could be applied to cramming to mean "that
which
is used to get the person in shape to be crammed." If the person is not in
shape to be crammed you must get him in shape to be crammed or you risk
getting no result or even messing the person up. But when the person is
F/Ning
and ready to get on with it, get on with it.
Additionally, a Cramming Officer who knows how to fly ruds should
also
know to check that the person has had enough food and rest and to check the
person's metabolism. (Done by having the person take a deep breath and let
it
out. The needle should give a latent fall in order to fly ruds. Ref. HCOB 4
Dec 77, CHECKLIST FOR SETTING UP SESSIONS AND AN E-METER)
WORKSHEETS
The worksheets (W/Ses) of all such actions (i.e. ruds, word clearing,
crammings, Cramming Repair Lists, Product Debug Assessments and any other
Qual
corrective action), are put in the pc folder and sent to the Case
Supervisor
(C/S). The C/S will correct any out-tech or failure to fully handle, and in
the case of no F/N at Exams or other out-tech, red tags the folder, until
the
matter is fully repaired.
These worksheets must be complete, accurate and legible. In the case
of
a non-F/N Exam or other Bad Indicator, these have rush priority and must be
handled fast. All the rules regarding worksheets apply to cramming and any
other Qual corrective actions.
IS A C/S NEEDED BEFORE FLYING RUDS IN CRAMMING?
Someone may wonder if he needs to get a C/S to fly the ruds before
doing
so in a cramming action. The answer is: no. You do not need to get the pc's
folder to the C/S before you fly the ruds in cramming. To do so would make
an
unnecessary delay, and you don't need a C/S to fly somebody's ruds.
The C/S (Case Supervisor instruction) is contained in this issue, and
that is what you do.
HCOB 24.9.79R - 4 -
Rev. 26.8.81
FOLDER CHECK BEFORE CRAMMING
Sometimes a staff member has been known to have been started on and
left
incomplete on several different actions. E.g. the staff member is started
on
a cramming order, but before this is complete, someone starts doing a
Crashing
Misunderstood handling on him, they end for lunch and after lunch someone
tries to start yet another action on the staff member. This is a serious
situation indeed and it could be enough to spin somebody. So it is
mandatory
that before starting an action, you must check the folder first. Cramming
orders and flying ruds in cramming and other Qual corrective actions do not
require C/S OK before doing them as this would put an unnecessary and
arbitrary delay on the line, and could be used as an excuse not to do the
action. (E.g. "I couldn't fly his ruds because I didn't have a C/S to 'Fly
the Ruds,' so I didn't do anything.") But since one would not start a new
cycle in the middle of another incomplete cycle, and would not try to fly
ruds
or word clear over out-Int or out-lists (provided these really were out and
not just a False or Protest read), the folder must be checked by the person
who is going to do the action (this only takes a minute to do).
BEFORE STARTING A CRAMMING OR OTHER QUAL CORRECTIVE ACTION, LOOK IN
THE
FOLDER TO ENSURE THE PERSON ISN'T IN THE MIDDLE OF ANOTHER QUAL CORRECTIVE
ACTION, OR C/SED TO GET A FLUBBED ACTION REPAIRED. AFTER THE CRAMMING OR
OTHER
QUAL CORRECTIVE ACTION, SEND THE FOLDER TO THE CASE SUPERVISOR WITH LEGIBLE
WORKSHEETS ON WHAT YOU DID AND THE EXAM FORM.
FESing
If a person has been "crammed" or has had other Qual corrective
actions
and has gotten worse, or made no improvement, then get all Qual corrective
actions done on the person FESed by the Case Supervisor, and a program and
C/S
to repair these, and get that program done. Comm Ev anyone who interrupts
or
cross-orders or prevents such a program from being done, as that would be
suppressive. Such a program has the priority of repairing a flubbed session
and the folder is red tagged, until handled.
USE THE TECH
There are several new Qual corrective actions as well as all the
earlier
tools of cramming. These produce spectacular results when done correctly.
Use
this tech to make greatly enhanced staff members.
YOUR CRAMMING WILL BE MANY TIMES MORE EFFECTIVE AND POPULAR IF YOU DO
IT
WITH THE CORRECT TECH.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
As assisted by
Snr C/S Int
Revision assisted by
Research and Technical
Compilations Unit
BDCSC:LRH:RTC:DM:bk Accepted by the
Copyright $c 1979, 1981 BOARD OF DIRECTORS of the
by L. Ron Hubbard CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED of CALIFORNIA
HCOB 24.9.79R
Rev. 26.8.81
ATTACHMENT 1
You can mimeo a small form on which to assess these and mark reads
which
will save time. The form would look like this:
"Is there .......
or,
"On (subject) , is there .......
an ARC break?" _______
a present time problem?" _______
a withhold?" _______
an overt?" _______
"Is there an ........
Invalidation?" _______
Evaluation?" _______
The Cramming Officer would assess on the form above and clip it to the
worksheets. (If no reads on the list but the person is not F/Ning, check
Suppress or Invalidate on the list and handle.)
HCOB 24.9.79R
Rev. 26.8.81
ATTACHMENT 2
The way to handle someone who has been crammed over out-ruds in the
past
is to assess the following and fly each reading line to F/N. (Check
Suppress
or Invalidate if no reads the list):
"Has cramming been done over .......
an ARC break?" _______
a present time problem?" _______
a withhold?" _______
an overt?" _______
an Invalidation?" _______
an Evaluation?" _______
If someone is nattery about Cramming, Qual Correction actions, or
Qual,
use the assessment above on the subject of their complaint. E.g. you could
assess: "Has word clearing been done over ........?"
If the above does not resolve the matter fully, use the Cramming
Repair
Assessment List (HCOB 2 June 78RA), or other specific list such as the Word
Clearing Correction List (WCCL).
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
As assisted by
Snr C/S Int
Revision assisted by
Research and Technical
Compilations Unit
Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS of the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
of CALIFORNIA
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=19/8/79
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=1
rDate=30/6/80
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
HIGH CRIME-ADDITION
HIGH CRIME CHECKOUTS AND WORD CLEARING
Remimeo
Exec Hats
Tech & Qual
Hats
HAS Hat
Dir I&R
LRH Comm Hats
Interns
KOTs
All Orgs
All Missions
All Auditors
All C/Ses
All Cramming Officers
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 19 AUGUST 1979R
Remimeo REVISED 30 JUNE 1980
Exec Hats
Tech & Qual (Also issued as an HCO PL of same date, same title.)
Hats
HAS Hat
Dir I&R (Revisions in Script)
LRH Comm Hats
Interns
KOTs
All Orgs
All Missions
All Auditors
All C/Ses
All Cramming Officers
(With the revision of this issue, Method 9 Word Clearing is no
longer mandatory in High Crime checkouts or on Internships. As the
requirement of M9 resulted in High Crime checkouts taking too long
and being backlogged or completely omitted, a new and highly
successful method of word clearing and doing High Crime checkouts
has been developed. This new method has been thoroughly tested and
takes 80% less time to do but has resulted in zero flubs and crams
on materials checked out in this way.)
HIGH CRIME-ADDITION
HIGH CRIME CHECKOUTS AND WORD CLEARING
Ref: HCOB 24 Oct 76R C/S Series 96R
(Modified by this HCOB/PL)
HCOB 30 Jan 73RB Word Clearing Series 48RB
METHOD 9 WORD CLEARING THE RIGHT WAY
HCOB/PL 26 Mar 79R Esto Series 35R
Rev. 25.5.79 Word Clearing Series 60R
MISUNDERSTOOD WORDS AND CYCLES OF ACTION
HCOB 16 Jul 79 Product Debug Series 5
Word Clearing Series 63
THE "ELUSIVE" MIS-U OR CRASHING MIS-U
HCO PL 8 Mar 66 HIGH CRIME
HCO PL 4 Apr 72R III ETHICS AND STUDY TECH
HCO PL 24 Sep 64 INSTRUCTION AND EXAMINATION,
RAISING THE STANDARD OF
HCO PL 4 Oct 64 THEORY CHECKOUT DATA
Reiss. 21.5.67
For many years the top Auditors, Case Supervisors and Supervisors have
used word clearing in their High Crime Checkouts, but until now there has
not
been an issue that makes this a mandatory action.
From now on, High Crime Checkouts require word clearing in addition to
starrates. The miracle results of word clearing make all the difference in
the
world to the quality of technical delivery.
HCOB 19.8.79R - 2 -
Rev. 30.6.80
CONSEQUENCES OF NO WORD CLEARING
Lack of word clearing has recently brought about some false declares
and
a return of Quickie Grades.
In many orgs it was found that new HCOBs were not being word cleared
AT
ALL.
The right thing to do is make full use of Word Clearing Technology.
If a persons goes past a misunderstood in the materials he is trying
to
study, he will go blank on the following section of the materials, he will
not
understand the materials, will not be able to apply them, will often get
very
confused ideas about what he thinks the materials stated, and will alter
tech!
WORD CLEARING REQUIREMENTS
The purpose of High Crime Checkouts on anyone doing Tech or Qual
functions, is to ensure that the materials have been studied, duplicated,
understood and will be applied exactly. This is done in order to guarantee
100% Standard Tech in training and processing.
From now on the following is required in all High Crime Checkouts:
1. Go through the material, look for and clear the definitions of each word
or
term you do not fully understand, and use the word or term in sentences
until you understand it conceptually.
2. Then study the material for understanding, and for how you are going to
apply it.
3. With your twin, demonstrate the important theory principles and rules.
Drill commands, questions and actions.
4. Get a meter check done on each page of the material to find out if there
is
any misunderstood on it (Method 4). If there is any misunderstood or
confusion, it is to be cleared, and then study that page again (as the
section following the misunderstood would have been a blank in the
student's memory). Each page of the material is to be handled this way.
5. Then get a starrated checkout, done in accordance with: HCO PL 24 Sep 64
INSTRUCTION AND EXAMINATION, RAISING THE STANDARD OF; HCO PL 4 Oct 64,
Reiss. 21 May 67, THEORY CHECKOUT DATA; HCO PL & Mar 66 HIGH CRIME.
If this checkout is flunked, repeat steps 1 through 5.
MATERIALS STUDIED MUST BE FULLY CLEARED OF MISUNDERSTOODS, AND STUDIED
AND DEMONSTRATED TO FULL CONCEPTUAL UNDERSTANDING. COMMANDS AND ACTIONS
MUST
BE DRILLS UNTIL FLUBLESS.
When the checkout has been passed it is recorded on the intern's
checksheet, or in the case of Tech/Qual personnel, in the High Crime log,
in
the Qualifications Division.
HCOB 19.8.79R
Rev. 30.6.80
Should anyone bog doing the steps 1 through 5 above, then Qual
personnel
are expected to handle with False Data Stripping, Crashing Misunderstood
handling, Method 9 Word Clearing, Debug Tech, Word Clearing Correction
List,
Cramming Repair List, Study or Student Correction Lists.
ETHICS PENALTY
Violations of High Crime policy are High Crimes per the Justice Code.
High Crime Checkouts are required of Tech and Qual staff in order to
safeguard
Technology and to Keep Scientology Working. Therefore, the following are
actionable:
1. WHENEVER A CASE IS FOUND TO HAVE BEEN LOUSED UP AND THE AUDITOR AND/OR
CASE SUPERVISOR HAS NOT DONE HIS HIGH CRIME CHECKOUTS ON THE ACTIONS
BEING
AUDITED, AND/OR C/Sed ON THE CASE, THE AUDITOR AND/OR CASE SUPERVISOR IS
SUBJECT TO AN IMMEDIATE COMM EV.
2. IF THE HIGH CRIME LOG IS NOT KEPT UP TO DATE THEN THE CRAMMING OFFICER
IS
SUBJECT TO AN IMMEDIATE COURT OF ETHICS, AND IF REPEATED, TO A COMM EV.
3. IF ANY STUDENT BLOWS OR IS LATER FOUND TO BE UNABLE TO APPLY THE
MATERIALS
HE HAS STUDIED, THEN THE SUPERVISOR RESPONSIBLE IS LIABLE TO COMM EV IF
HIS/HER HIGH CRIMES ON SUPERVISION HAVEN'T BEEN DONE.
4. ALL TECH/QUAL EXECUTIVES SHARE RESPONSIBILITY FOR ENSURING THAT HIGH
CRIMES
ARE DONE BY THEIR STAFF, AND MAY BE NAMED AS INTERESTED PARTIES IN ANY
JUSTICE ACTION TAKEN ON HIGH CRIME POLICY VIOLATIONS.
5. ANY FAILURE TO KEEP HIGH CRIME POLICY IN, OR ANY NEGLIGENCE ABOUT IT, OR
PERMITTING HIGH CRIME CHECKOUTS TO BACKLOG, CAN RESULT IN A JUSTICE
ACTION
NOT ONLY ON THE TECH/QUAL PERSONNEL INVOLVED, BUT ALSO ON THE EXECUTIVES
THAT ARE SENIOR TO THE TECH/QUAL DIVISIONS, THE LOCAL KEEPER OF TECH,
AND
THE EXECUTIVES OF THE ORGANIZATION. WHETHER TECHNICALLY TRAINED OR NOT,
ALL
OF THE ABOVE ARE SUBJECT TO SUCH A JUSTICE ACTION.
FORMER HIGH CRIME CHECKOUTS
Where High Crime Checkouts have been done previously and attested they
remain valid. But, if the Auditor, Case Supervisor or Word Clearer is later
crammed on those materials the cramming must include full use of Word
Clearing, Student Corrective actions and Qual Corrective actions.
Where False Data Stripping, Crashing Mis-U Tech, O/W handling and
Service
Facsimile Tech are available and in use, these are to be employed in Qual
(but
not as part of a High Crime Checkout, as the "checkout" is done to ensure
that
the person has studied, does understand and can apply the material).
A new method of doing High Crime Checkouts has been given in this
issue.
This does not relieve Qual of its usual function of fully using Word
Clearing,
Study Tech, and other Qual Corrective actions. And when Qual finds that any
of
these actions have been flubbed, Qual ensures that the person who flubbed
the
action is corrected, as well as correcting the person the action was
flubbed
on.
HCOB 19.8.79R - 4 -
Rev. 30.6.80
TECHNICAL RESULTS
The Technology works when it is applied exactly.
Exact application depends on complete understanding.
Complete understanding depends on freedom from misunderstood words.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Revision assisted by
Senior C/S Int
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
BDCS:LRH:DM:gal:dr
Copyright $c 1979, 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Revision assisted by
Senior C/S Int
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=17/7/79
Volnum=0
Issue=1
Rev=1
rDate=2/9/81
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Word Clearing Series 64R
THE MISUNDERSTOOD WORD
DEFINED
Remimeo
Word Clearers
Tech
Qual
Staff
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
Remimeo HCO BULLETIN OF 17 JULY 1979R
Word Clearers ISSUE I
Tech REVISED 2 SEPTEMBER 1981
Qual
Staff
(The only revision is to clarify, in the first paragraph, how any
error or omission in the comprehension of status classifies as a
misunderstood, by giving examples of misunderstood status.)
(Revision in Script)
Word Clearing Series 64R
THE MISUNDERSTOOD WORD
DEFINED
Ref: HCOB 23 Mar 78RA Word Clearing Series 59RA
Rev. 14.11.79 CLEARING WORDS
HCOB 25 Jun 71R Word Clearing Series 3R
Rev. 25.11.74 BARRIERS TO STUDY
HCOB 26 Mar 79RB Esto Series 35RB
Rev. 2.9.79 Word Clearing Series 60RB
Product Debug Series 7R
MISUNDERSTOOD WORDS AND CYCLES OF ACTION
"MIS-UNDERSTOOD" or "NOT-UNDERSTOOD" are terms used to define any
error
or omission in comprehension of a word, concept, symbol or status. (As
examples of misunderstood status, one could misunderstand an object's
location
or its time factor, or the state or condition of someone or something.)
Most people go around thinking that a misunderstood is just something
they obviously don't know-a "not-understood".
A "not-understood" is a misunderstood but there are additional ways a
person can misunderstand a word.
A MISUNDERSTOOD WORD OR SYMBOL IS DEFINED AS A WORD OR SYMBOL FOR
WHICH THE STUDENT HAS:
1. A FALSE (TOTALLY WRONG) DEFINITION: A definition that has has no
relationship to the actual meaning of the word or symbol whatsoever.
Example: The person reads or hears the word "cat" and thinks that
"cat"
means "box". You can't get more wrong.
Example: A person sees an equals sign (=) and thinks it means to
subtract something twice.
2. AN INVENTED DEFINITION: An invented definition is a version of a false
definition. The person has made it up himself or has been given an invented
definition. Not knowing the actual definition he invents one for it. This
is
sometimes difficult to detect because he is certain he knows it, after all
he
invented it himself. There is enough protest preceding his invention of it
to
make it read on a meter. In such a case he will be certain he knows the
definition of the word or symbol.
HCOB 17.7.79R I - 2 -
Rev. 2.9.81
Example: The person when very young was always called "a girl" by his
pals when he refused to do anything daring. He invents the definition
of
"girl" to be "a cowardly person".
Example: A person never knew the meaning of the symbol for an
exclamation point (!) but seeing it in comic strips as representing
swear words invents the definition for it "a foul curse" and regards
it
accordingly in everything he reads.
3. AN INCORRECT DEFINITION: A definition that is not right but may have
some
relationship to the word or symbol or be in a similar category.
Example: The person reads or hears the word "computer" and thinks it
is
"typewriter". This is an incorrect meaning for "computer" even though
a
typewriter and a computer are both types of machines.
Example: A person thinks a period (.) after an abbreviation means that
you halt in reading at that point.
4. AN INCOMPLETE DEFINITION: A definition that is inadequate.
Example: The person reads the word "office" and thinks it means
"room".
The definition of the word "office" is: "a room or building in which a
person transacts his business or carries on his stated occupation".
(Ref:
Funk and Wagnalls Standard Dictionary of the English Language) The
person's definition is incomplete for the word "office".
Example: The person sees an apostrophe (') and knows that it means
that
something is owned ('s) but does not know that it also is used to show
that a letter has been left out of a word. He sees the word "can't"
and
immediately tries to figure out who can is.
5. AN UNSUITABLE DEFINITION: A definition that does not fit the word as it
is used in the context of the sentence one has heard or read.
Example: The person hears the sentence: "I am dressing a turkey". The
person's understanding of "dressing" is "putting clothes on". That is
one
definition of "dressing" but it is an unsuitable definition for the
word
as it is used in the sentence he has heard. Because he has an
unsuitable
definition he thinks someone is putting clothes on a turkey. As a
result
the sentence he has heard doesn't really make sense to him. The
definition of "dressing" that correctly applies in the sentence he has
heard is: "to prepare for use as food, by making ready to cook, or by
cooking". (Ref: The Oxford English Dictionary)
The person will only truly understand what he is hearing when he
has
fully cleared the word "dressing" in all its meanings, as he will then
also have the definition that correctly applies in the context.
Example: The person sees a dash (-) in the sentence: "I finished
numbers 3 - 7 today". He thinks a dash is a minus sign, realizes you
cannot subtract 7 from 3 and so cannot understand it.
HCOB 17.7.79R I - 3 -
Rev. 2.9.81
6. A HOMONYMIC (one word which has two or more distinctly separate
meanings)
DEFINITION: A homonym is a word that is used to designate several different
things which have totally different meanings; or a homonym can be one of
two
or more words that have the same sound, sometimes the same spelling, but
differ in meaning.
Example: The person reads the sentence: "I like to box". The person
understands this sentence to mean that someone likes to put things in
"containers".
The person has the right meaning for the word "box", but he has the
wrong word! There is another word "box" which is being used in the
sentence he has just read and means: "to fight another in a boxing
match". (Ref: Funk and Wagnalls Standard Dictionary of the English
Language)
The person has a misunderstood because he has a homonymic
definition
for the word "box" and will have to clear the second word "box" before
he
understands the sentence.
Example: The person sees a plus sign (+) and as it resembles a cross
he
thinks it is something religious.
Example: The person hears the word "period" in the sentence: "It was a
disorderly period in history" and knowing that "period" comes at the
end
of a sentence and means stop, supposes that the world ended at that
point.
Example: Homonymic misunderstoods can also occur when a person does
not
know the informal or slang usage of a word. The person hears someone
on
the radio singing: "When my Honey walks down the street". The person
thinks "a thick, sweet, yellow or golden liquid, good to eat, that
bees
make out of the nectar they collect from flowers" is walking down the
street! He doesn't know the informal definition of "honey" which is:
"sweet one: a pet name", which is how it is being used in the song.
(Ref: Funk and Wagnalls Standard Dictionary of the English Language)
7. A SUBSTITUTE (SYNONYM-a word which has a similar but not the same
meaning) DEFINITION: A substitute definition occurs when a person uses a
synonym for the definition of a word. A synonym is not a definition. A
synonym
is a word having a meaning similar to that of another word.
Example: The person reads the word "portly" and thinks the definition
of
the word is "fat". "Fat" is a synonym for the word "portly". The
person,
has a misunderstood because the word "portly" means: "of a stately
appearance and carriage; impressive, especially on account of size".
(Ref: Funk and Wagnalls Standard Dictionary of the English Language)
The
person does not have the full meaning of "portly" if he thinks it just
means "fat".
Knowing synonyms for words increases your vocabulary but it does
not
mean you understand the meaning of a word. Learn the full definition
for
a word as well as its synonyms.
8. AN OMITTED (MISSING) DEFINITION: An omitted definition is a definition
of
a word that the person is missing or is omitted from the dictionary he is
using.
HCOB 17.7.79R I - 4 -
Rev. 2.9.81
Example: The person hears the line "The food here is too rich". This
person knows two definitions for the word "rich". He knows that "rich"
means "having much money, land, goods, etc." and "wealthy people".
Neither of these definitions make much sense to him in the sentence he
has just heard. He cannot understand what food could have to do with
having a lot of money.
Omitted definitions can come about from using dinky dictionaries.
If
the person had looked up "rich" in a small paperback dictionary, he
would
probably still be stuck with his misunderstood. A dinky dictionary
probably will not give him the definition he needs. In order to
understand the word he would have to get a good sized dictionary to
ensure it gives him the omitted definition which is: "having in a high
degree qualities pleasing to the senses; luscious to the taste: often
implying an unwholesome excess of butter, fats, flavoring, etc." (Ref:
Funk and Wagnalls Standard Dictionary of the English Language)
Example: The person reads "He estimated the light at f 5.6." He can't
figure what this "f" is, so he looks up "f" in the American Heritage
Dictionary and wonders if it is temperature or money or sports for
"foul"
or maybe the money "franc". The text doesn't refer to France so he
can't
figure it out. Omitted in the American Heritage is the photography
definition of "f" which simply means "the number which shows the width
of
the hole the light goes through in the lens". The moral of this is to
have enough dictionaries around.
NOTE: It can occur that an accurate definition for a word is not given
in any dictionary which is an error in the language itself.
9. A NO-DEFINITION: A no-definition is a "not-understood" word or symbol.
Example: The person reads the sentence "The business produced no
lucre".
No understanding occurs, as he has no definition for "lucre". The word
means: "money, especially as the object of greed; gain". (Ref: Funk
and
Wagnalls Standard Dictionary of the English Language) It isn't that he
has the word incorrectly, unsuitable or any other way defined, he has
no
definition for it at all. He has never looked it up and gotten it
defined. Thus he does not understand it. The definition does not exist
for him until he looks it up and gets it clearly understood.
Example: The person sees a dot at the end of a word on a printed page
and having no definition for "a period (.)" tends to run all of his
sentences together.
10. A REJECTED DEFINITION: A rejected definition is a definition of a word
which the person will not accept. The reasons why he will not accept it are
usually based on emotional reactions connected with it. The person finds
the
definition degrading to himself or his friends or group in some imagined
way
or restimulative to him in some fashion. Although he may have a total
misunderstood on the word he may refuse to have it explained or look it up.
HCOB 17.7.79R I - 5 -
Rev. 2.9.81
Example: The person refuses to look up the word "mathematics". He
doesn't know what it means, he doesn't want to know what it means, and
he
won't have anything to do with it. A discussion of why he refuses to
look
it up discloses that he was expelled from school because he flunked
with
violence his first month of his first course in mathematics. If he
were
to realize that he flunked because he didn't know what he was supposed
to
study he would then be willing to look the word up.
Example: The person refuses to look up the definition of asterisk (*).
On discussion it turns out that every time he sees an asterisk on the
page he knows the material will be "very hard to read" and is
"literary",
"difficult" and "highbrow".
Discussion of why he won't look it up usually reveals and releases
the
emotional charge connected with it which he may never have looked at
before. Properly handled he will now want to look it up, having gained
an insight into why he wouldn't.
Any word you come across which fits one or more of the above
definitions
of a misunderstood word or symbol must be cleared up, using a good size
dictionary or more than one dictionary or text book or encyclopedia.
It is catastrophic to go on past or ignore a misunderstood word or
symbol
as one simply will not understand what he is studying.
A student must discipline himself not to go past misunderstood words.
He
should learn to recognize from his reaction to what he is reading,
especially
the mental blankness which usually ensues right after one, that he has gone
by
a misunderstood. He should look them up and get them fully defined before
going on with his reading. Students must be persuaded to do this. It is a
self-discipline that has to be learned.
The definitions of "misunderstood" and "not-understood" and their
different types, must be clearly understood by a person seeking to clear
them
in himself and others. The commonest error in word clearing is for the
person
being word cleared to believe that a misunderstood is something he simply
does
not know. With this limited definition he cannot adequately be word cleared
nor can he adequately word clear others. So these definitions of
"misunderstood" and "not-understood" should be very well known as it will
often be necessary to clarify them to the person being word cleared.
Good reading.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
As Accepted by the
BDCSC:LRH:gal:dr BOARD OF DIRECTORS
Copyright $c 1979, 1981 of the
by L. Ron Hubbard CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED OF CALIFORNIA
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
As Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
OF CALIFORNIA
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=30/4/79
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=1
rDate=31/3/81
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Dianetic Clear Series 12
C/S Series 106R
AUDITING THE DIANETIC CLEAR
All Orgs &
Missions
All C/Ses
NED Auditors
Scn Auditors
Qual/Tech Staff
HCO
KOTs
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 30 APRIL 1979R
REVISED 31 MARCH 81
All Orgs &
Missions
All C/Ses
NED Auditors
Scn Auditors
Qual/Tech Staff
HCO
KOTs
(This bulletin has been revised to update its references, extend
its distribution and to include the issue as part of the Dianetic
Clear Series.)
(Revisions in Script)
Dianetic Clear Series 12
C/S Series 106R
AUDITING THE DIANETIC CLEAR
REF: HCOB 1 Dec 78R Dianetic Clear Series 10
Rev. 31 Mar 81 PROGRAMMING THE DIANETIC CLEAR FOR HIS NEXT STEP
HCOB 8 Oct 70 C/S Series 20
PERSISTENT F/N
HCOB 19 Apr 72 C/S Series 77
"QUICKIE" DEFINED
It has recently come to my attention that some auditors are delivering
Grades in outrageously short periods of time to Dianetic Clear pcs and only
giving Quad Grades to the Dianetic Clear without making full use of the
Expanded Grades. Such pcs are being denied the full gains of the grade
processes due to Quickie Grades-out-tech.
From this point forward, anyone auditing Grades on a pc who has
attested
to Clear before Clearing Course level must:
1) M9 and starrate HCOB 8 Oct 70 C/S Series 20 PERSISTENT F/N,
2) M9 and starrate HCOB 19 Apr 72 C/S Series 77 "QUICKIE" DEFINED,
and
3) Clay Demo the consequences of Quickie Grades.
It is the responsibility of the C/S to see that the above checkouts
occur
without stopping or slowing delivery lines.
These actions will ensure that the Dianetic Clear has the opportunity
to
attain all the benefits of the Grades. In addition to the immediate
abilities
gained from the Grades being properly delivered, having his Grades really
IN
will prevent the pre-OT from running into difficulties on the OT Levels.
The Grades are a very essential part of the Grade Chart and must not
be
delivered over a persistent F/N or skimped on in any way. Let's Keep
Scientology Working!
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
BDCSC:LRH:jk:bk Approved & Accepted by the
Copyright $c 1979, 1981 BOARD OF DIRECTORS of the
by L. Ron Hubbard CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY of
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED CALIFORNIA
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Approved & Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS of the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY of
CALIFORNIA
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=5/3/79
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=2
rDate=31/3/81
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Dianetic Clear Series 11
DIANETIC CLEAR FALSE DECLARES
Remimeo
All Orgs
All Missions
C/Ses
Auditors
Ds of P
Tech
Qual
HCO
Ethics Officers
KOTs
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 5 MARCH 1979RA
RE-REVISED 31 MARCH 1981
Remimeo
All Orgs
All Missions
C/Ses
Auditors
Ds of P
Tech
Qual
HCO
Ethics Officers
KOTs
(Revised to clarify paragraph 5, to give references which apply to this
issue and to include this issue as part of the Dianetic Clear Series.)
(Revisions in Script)
Dianetic Clear Series 11
DIANETIC CLEAR FALSE DECLARES
REF: HCOB 29 Aug 80 KSW Series 23
HOW NOT TO MISS OUT ON GAINS FROM YOUR AUDITING
HCOB 19 Jun 71 C/S Series 46
DECLARES
Any org or mission staff declaring a Dianetic Clear "achieved in other
practices" is subject to expulsion from the Church.
Technically, a very few thetans have never been anything but Clear.
These
few didn't "go Clear" on anything; they have simply always been Clear. When
a
natural Clear is found it should be so stated. To assign this condition to
some other practice is a suppression of Dianetics and Scientology.
Anyone evaluating for or feeding a preclear data to persuade him to
declare Dianetic Clear is also actionable.
Anyone suppressively validating squirrel practices or groups by
stating
they are producing Dianetic Clears is also actionable as above, as it is
not
possible. It requires the exact application of Scientology and/or Dianetic
technology to bring a preclear up to the state of Clear.
Falsely declaring a person Clear, Dianetic Clear or natural Clear who
isn't, and failing to declare one who made it on Dianetics or the Clearing
Course or who has always been Clear, are also actionable.
People don't go Clear in garbage eating or psychiatry-they perish.
Thus herding people into their hands by falsely validating them is
suppressive.
Any and all such false declares are cancelled.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:kjm:bk
Copyright $c 1979, 1981
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=9/2/79
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Keeping Scientology Working Series 23
HOW TO DEFEAT VERBAL TECH
Remimeo
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 9 FEBRUARY 1979
Remimeo REISSUED 12 APRIL 1988
(Reissued as part of the Keeping Scientology Working Series.)
(Also issued as HCO PL 9 Feb 79, Issue II, same title.)
Keeping Scientology Working Series 23
HOW TO DEFEAT VERBAL TECH
1. If it isn't written it isn't true.
2. If it's written, read it.
3. If you can't understand it, clarify it.
4. If you can't clarify it, clear the Mis Us.
5. If the Mis Us won't clear, query it.
6. Get it validated as a written order.
7. Force others to read it.
IF IT CAN'T BE RUN THROUGH AS ABOVE IT'S FALSE!
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:dg:kc:ch:clb:ks
Copyright $c 1979, 1983
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=15/2/79
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Keeping Scientology Working Series 24
VERBAL TECH: PENALTIES
Remimeo
Tech
Qual
HCO
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 15 FEBRUARY 1979
Remimeo REISSUED 12 APRIL 1983
Tech
Qual (Reissued as part of the Keeping Scientology Working Series.)
HCO
(Also issued as HCO PL 15 Feb 79, same title.)
Keeping Scientology Working Series 24
VERBAL TECH: PENALTIES
(Ref: HCOB/HCO PL 9 Feb 79, HOW TO DEFEAT VERBAL TECH)
ANY PERSON FOUND TO BE USING VERBAL TECH SHALL BE SUBJECT TO A COURT
OF
ETHICS.
THE CHARGES ARE: GIVING OUT DATA WHICH IS CONTRARY TO HCO BULLETINS OR
POLICY LETTERS, OR OBSTRUCTING THEIR USE OR APPLICATION. CORRUPTING THEIR
INTENT, ALTERING THEIR CONTENT IN ANY WAY. INTERPRETING THEM VERBALLY OR
OTHERWISE FOR ANOTHER, OR PRETENDING TO QUOTE THEM WITHOUT SHOWING THE
ACTUAL
ISSUE.
ANY ONE OF THESE CATEGORIES CONSTITUTES VERBAL TECH AND IS ACTIONABLE
PER
THE ABOVE.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:jk:ks
Copyright $c 1979, 1983
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=5/12/78
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=1
rDate=31/3/81
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
C/S Series 105R
Dianetic Clear Series 9
DIANETIC CLEAR ATTESTS-ADDITIONAL DATA
All C/Ses
Auditors
D of P
Tech/Qual
HCO
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 5 DECEMBER 1978R
All C/Ses REVISED 31 MARCH 1981
Auditors
D of P
Tech/Qual
HCO
(This bulletin has been revised to delete actions given originally for
the verification of Dianetic Clear and its rehabilitation, as the
actions
for verifying and rehabilitating the state are now done in a more exact
sequence of steps on the Dianetic Clear Special Intensive; to correct
the
statement that indicated a Floating TA would be present in all cases
when
Clear is successfully rehabbed, and to include additional technical
references from the Keeping Scientology Working and Dianetic Clear
Series. This bulletin is also now incorporated as a part of the
Dianetic
Clear Series.)
(Revisions Not in Script)
C/S Series 105R
Dianetic Clear Series 9
DIANETIC CLEAR ATTESTS-ADDITIONAL DATA
REFS: HCOB 24 Sep 78R III Dianetic Clear Series 1
Rev. 31.3.81 DIANETIC CLEAR
HCOB 2 May 79R Dianetic Clear Series 4
Rev. 25.3.81 DIANETIC CLEAR SPECIAL INTENSIVE
HCOB 29 Nov 78R Dianetic Clear Series 8
Rev. 31.3.81 C/S Series 104R
DIANETIC CLEAR ATTESTS
HCOB 19 Jun 71 II C/S Series 46
DECLARES
HCOB 5 Mar 79RA Dianetic Clear Series 11
Re-rev. 31.3.81 DIANETIC CLEAR FALSE DECLARES
Keeping Scientology Working Series 21 through 25
Since the HCOBs on Dianetic Clear have come out there have been many
attests and many cases unbugged, and there will continue to be more
Dianetic
Clears as pcs continue to get standard processing. This bulletin gives some
additional guidelines to help smooth the lines and prevent needless stops
for
the person who has made Dianetic Clear. Used in conjunction with the
Dianetic
Clear Special Intensive and the issues referenced above, it will also help
handle the person who hasn't made it so that he may achieve all the gains
available to him.
UNACKNOWLEDGED DIANETIC CLEARS
A person who has reached the State of Dianetic Clear without it being
acknowledged can run into difficulties afterwards. You may find that he's
been
in ethics trouble or had a low OCA or poor case gain since that point.
It's not only lack of acknowledgement but also invalidation by running
certain processes that a Clear wouldn't respond to, such as engrams, or
continuing to run a Grade on which the person went Clear, or continuing
goals
processing, etc.
HCOB 5.12.78R - 2 -
Rev. 31.3.81
Also, with Clears and OTs who went Clear before they did the Clearing
Course and never knew it or spotted it, by-passed charge results because
they
are running something which is trying to achieve what they have already
achieved. It serves as an overrun.
In the case where a pc has this unacknowledged, invalidated Dianetic
Clear state, you would most likely find a point in his auditing where it
looks
as if he had made it and a slump occurred afterwards. This point could have
occurred many years back.
The appropriate list or lists used to clean up such a case (C/S 53,
Green
Form, L3RG, etc.) could show up a valid read on a question concerning
Dianetic
Clear. Or the person might simply originate this himself. In any of these
instances, the handling is to program the pc for the Dianetic Clear Special
Intensive and ensure each needed step of the Intensive is standardly done.
This Intensive is designed to fully rehabilitate the state of Clear when it
validly exists.
NOTE: The Dianetic Clear Special Intensive (HCOB 2 May 79R I, Dianetic
Clear
Series 4, DIANETIC CLEAR SPECIAL INTENSIVE) may only be delivered by duly
authorized orgs who have C/Ses and auditors qualified to deliver this tech.
ETHICS
The fact that a person may currently be in ethics trouble is no basis
on
which to adjudicate whether or not he has achieved the State of Clear. It
is
not a criterion to be used to refuse to allow the person to attest. Clear
is
Clear. When a Clear is audited on R3RA, when the state is invalidated or
goes
unacknowledged, he can get into trouble. If you have ethics trouble during
or
immediately after auditing it is an indicator of possible by-passed charge
or
out tech on the case. So apply this to your understanding and analysis of
cases.
The MAA interview and A to J Check on the Dianetic Clear Routing Form,
which is done prior to the Dianetic Clear Special Intensive, is not to
imply
he's out-ethics but will furnish the C/S with data on the case which may or
may not come up otherwise. It will also detect the rare case where the
person
is attempting to attest in order to save money or for status reasons. In
one
instance it was discovered that the person routing through was actually a
plant. These last examples are a very, very small percentage of the cases.
METER PHENOMENA
When the state of Dianetic Clear has been verified, with any
invalidation
or other by-passed charge cleaned off the line, and when it has been fully
rehabbed to end phenomena on the Dianetic Clear Special Intensive, you'll
see
a very floppy needle, at low sensitivity, an F/N that nothing can break up
and, in many cases, a floating TA. A low sensitivity setting (1 to 4) will
often be needed to even keep the needle on the dial, and the TA will be
riding
between 2.0 and 3.0
You'll find in many cases that the meter now reads on the pc's
postulates-i.e., a Clear's postulates read as a surge. A read therefore
does not mean
invariably "Yes" or that the question is charged. "No" can read if the pc
says
it or thinks it to himself as an answer to a question. (Ref. HCOB 18 Apr 68
NEEDLE REACTIONS ABOVE GRADE IV)
HCOB 5.12.78R - 3 -
Rev. 31.3.81
Bear in mind that you might not get the above meter phenomena
immediately
on a Dianetic Clear where the state has been by-passed, even though the
state
is valid.
In some cases the TA and needle can be packed up prior to cleaning up
any
by-passed charge or Date/Locating the exact time the pc went Clear, all of
which would be handled on the DCSI. The pc may have out-Int to be handled.
(The handling of out-Int on a person who may be Dianetic Clear is THE END
OF
ENDLESS INT REPAIR RD, HCOB 24 Sep 78RA I Re-rev. 21.2.79 Int RD Series
4RA.)
The person may still be hung up on misrun R3R or Dianetics run after he
went
Clear, or on some point of eval or inval that has occurred.
The steps of the Dianetic Clear Special Intensive provide for the full
handling of all such cases, and when they are properly done they result in
the
full resurgence of the state of Clear, when it validly exists.
PRIOR DIANETIC CLEARS AND KEYED-OUT CLEARS
The definitions of Dianetic Clear and Keyed-Out Clear in HCOB 24 Sep
78R
III, Dianetic Clear Series 1, DIANETIC CLEAR, replace the definitions in
the
Tech Dictionary. The person who attested to Dianetic Clear or Keyed-Out
Clear
in past years would not necessarily qualify as a Dianetic Clear now, though
the chances are good he did make it. Any pc who has attested to Dianetic
Clear
or Keyed-Out Clear in the past should be called in for correct case
handling,
including a DCSI, as indicated, to ascertain the state. This would only be
done by an AO C/S or by an org C/S who is Clear and fully trained and
qualified to C/S the DCSI. (Ref. HCOB 8 May 79R, Dianetic Clear Series 7,
DIANETIC CLEAR SPECIAL INTENSIVE C/S AND AUDITOR REQUIREMENTS)
You will find that many of those who attested to Dianetic Clear
earlier
on actually did make it, and after confirmation of this they will need to
be
issued Clear Certs and Clear numbers and be properly programmed to move on
up
the Bridge. (See HCOB 1 Dec 78R, Dn Clear Series 10, C/S Series 113,
PROGRAMMING THE DIANETIC CLEAR FOR HIS NEXT STEP.)
Additionally, where a qualified DCSI C/S knows of a case where it
looks
very likely, from folder study, that the pc went Dianetic Clear but it was
unsuspected at the time and never originated, he should have such pcs
called
in for full clean-up and programming for a DCSI.
THE PERSON WHO HASN'T MADE IT
Where it is obvious from the results of a standardly done DCSI that a
person who has already been allowed to attest hasn't attained Dianetic
Clear,
the pc would be given a good R-factor that the person handling the attest
cycle didn't have all the data. He is also handled on any loss he
experiences.
He must also be given the R-factor that he is being programmed so as not to
be
denied any of the gains on the Grade Chart and so that he will be
adequately
prepared to do the OT Levels. The DCSI-trained C/S then programs the case
so
that this can occur and the pc is informed he should continue with his
auditing program.
In the case where the person wanting to attest clearly hasn't made it
(as
evidenced from results or the DCSI steps), he would be told so. There may
be
some ability or state of being he did achieve that he may wish to attest to
and he should be allowed to do so.
HCOB 5.12.78R - 4 -
Rev. 31.3.81
In both the above cases the person very likely has made some big gain
or
achieved a new ability, so this would be validated and he would be given an
appropriate acknowledgement on his win.
(Refs: HCOB/PL 29 Aug 80, KSW Series 23, HOW NOT TO MISS OUT ON
GAINS FROM YOUR AUDITING
HCOB/PL 30 Aug 80, KSW Series 24, WINS, "STATES", AND GRADE
CHART DECLARES)
NEXT STEP FOR DIANETIC CLEARS
Use HCOB 1 Dec 78R, Dianetic Clear Series 10, PROGRAMMING THE DIANETIC
CLEAR FOR HIS NEXT STEP, as a guide when programming the Dianetic Clear for
his next action.
SUMMARY
Keep in mind that a good percentage of the cases you see who by
origination want to attest to Dianetic Clear will have achieved the state.
The
C/S, trained in C/Sing the DCSI, follows the guidelines set forth here and
applies all the HCOBs on the subject, so that those who have attained
Dianetic
Clear as well as those who haven't will be able to move on swiftly up the
Bridge on the right gradient.
All C/Ses should get trained on the delivery of DCSIs, maintain their
Ivory Towers, make full use of the C/S Series, the data in this bulletin,
the
Keeping Scientology Working Series and the Dianetic Clear Series. It is
already going well and this additional data will handle the various
situations
that come to light.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
of CALIFORNIA
BDCSC:LRH:jk:bk
Copyright $c 1978, 1981
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
of CALIFORNIA
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=1/12/78
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=1
rDate=31/3/81
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
C/S Series 113
Dianetic Clear Series 10
PROGRAMMING THE DIANETIC CLEAR
FOR HIS NEXT STEP
Remimeo
AOs
SHs
Class IV Orgs
All Auditors
All C/Ses
HCOs
Tech/Qual
Missions
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 1 DECEMBER 1978R
Remimeo REVISED 31 MARCH 1981
AOs
SHs (Revised to emphasize and update the correct
Class IV Orgs programming of Dianetic Clears and to include
All Auditors additional references on such programming as
All C/Ses well as on the FESing of folders.)
HCOs
Tech/Qual
Missions
(Revisions Not in Script)
C/S Series 113
Dianetic Clear Series 10
PROGRAMMING THE DIANETIC CLEAR
FOR HIS NEXT STEP
REFS: HCOB 24 Sep 78R III Dianetic Clear Series 1
Rev. 21.2.81 DIANETIC CLEAR
HCOB 12 Jun 70 C/S Series 2
PROGRAMMING OF CASES
HCOB 26 Aug 70R C/S Series 17R
Rev. & Reiss. 22.9.80 KSW Series 15
INCOMPLETE CASES
HCO PL 23 Oct 80 II CHART OF ABILITIES GAINED
FOR LOWER LEVELS AND
EXPANDED LOWER GRADES
HCOB 4 Apr 81 THE BIOCHEMICAL PERSONALITY
Keeping Scientology Working Series 21 through 25
The 1980 Classification and Gradation Chart
The following are the guidelines for programming a Dianetic Clear
after
the state has been declared:
The Purification Rundown, if not yet done.
The Survival Rundown, if not yet done or unless full Objectives have
been
run to EP.
The Scientology Drug Rundown, given at C/S adjudication (Ref. HCOB 4
Apr
81 THE BIOCHEMICAL PERSONALITY). This modifies the mandatory
requirement
of a Scientology Drug RD for all Dianetic Clears who have not had a
Drug
Rundown, as given in HCOB 21 Dec 80 THE SCIENTOLOGY DRUG RUNDOWN,
HCOB/PL
29 Aug 80, KSW Series 23, HOW NOT TO MISS OUT ON GAINS FROM YOUR
AUDITING, and the 1980 Grade Chart.
Expanded Grades-ARC S/W, 0-IV, for all cases, if not yet done.
EXPANDED GRADES
1. If a Dianetic Clear has had no previous auditing on the Grades, you can
run
him on Expanded Grades-ARC Straightwire and 0-IV. This includes Service
Fac handling on Grade IV, with the R3RA steps on Service Facs omitted,
per
HCOB 6 Sep 78 III ROUTINE THREE SC-A, FULL SERVICE FACSIMILE HANDLING
UPDATED WITH NEW ERA DIANETICS.
HCOB 1.12.78R - 2 -
Rev. 31.3.81
2. If a Dianetic Clear was incomplete on Grades 0-IV prior to the Dianetic
Clear attest (i.e. mid-Grades), you would program him through to
Expanded
Grade IV (omitting the R3RA steps on Service Facs).
3. If a pc goes Clear on a Grade then you can give him the other Grades,
but
you'd end off that Grade and not continue it.
4. If a Dianetic Clear is an old timer who has had a out of pre-Grades
Scientology processes run (before formal Grades existed), you would
still
program him to ensure he has achieved or achieves the full Ability
Gained
for each Grade, but great care must be taken not to re-run actions that
have already been run to EP.
5. If a Dianetic Clear has previously completed ARC Straightwire and Grades
0-IV and these are each verified as having been run to full Ability
Gained,
they obviously would not be run further.
The Dianetic Clear is not run on power, R6EW or the Clearing Course.
With the necessary Grade Chart actions in and upon completing of the
Solo
Auditor Course, he goes directly onto OT I.
Correct programming ensures the Dianetic Clear gets the full benefits
to
be gained from each of the vital Grade Chart actions. It also prepares him
stably for handling the upper level materials.
FULL FES AND OBJECTIVES TABLE REQUIRED BY AOs AND SHs
It is mandatory that the folders of any pc or pre-OT sent to an
Advanced
Org or Saint Hill preparatory to the person going onto the Solo Course or
onto
Advanced Courses at the AO, have a full FES to PT of all auditing, showing
all
required Grade Chart actions completed to full EP, including a full
Objectives
Table completed. This is to be done per: HCOB 6 Oct 70, C/S Series 19,
FOLDER
ERROR SUMMARIES; HCOB 29 Jan 81, I Auditor Admin Series 24R, FES CHECKLISTS
AND SUMMARY; and HCOB 16 May 80 PREPARING AN OBJECTIVES TABLE.
The AO or SH C/S can then verify from this data that all the Grade
Chart
actions prior to Solo and/or Advanced Courses have been done. The AO C/S
would
also need to see that the pc received any set-ups or repair that might be
required, per HCOB 8 Jan 72RE II Re-rev. 17.9.80, Solo C/S Series 11RE,
ADVANCED COURSES C/S CHECKLIST ON FOLDERS OF NEW STUDENTS ONTO ADV COURSES,
to
ensure the person's full eligibility for Advanced Courses.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Accepted by the
BDCSC:LRH:nc:bk BOARD OF DIRECTORS
Copyright $c 1978, 1981 of the
by L. Ron Hubbard CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED of CALIFORNIA
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
of CALIFORNIA
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=29/11/78
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=1
rDate=31/3/81
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
C/S Series 104R
Dianetic Clear Series 8
DIANETIC CLEAR ATTESTS
Remimeo
All C/Ses
NED Auditors
Scn Auditors
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 29 NOVEMBER 1978R
Remimeo REVISED 31 MARCH 1981
All C/Ses
NED Auditors
Scn Auditors
(This Bulletin has been revised to include references
on Declares as well as references on Dianetic Clear
released after its original issue; to update and align
it with the Dianetic Clear Special Intensive, and to
incorporate it as part of the Dianetic Clear Series.)
(Revisions Not in Script)
C/S Series 104R
Dianetic Clear Series 8
DIANETIC CLEAR ATTESTS
References:
HCOB 24 Sep 78R III Dianetic Clear Series 1
Rev. 31.3.81 DIANETIC CLEAR
HCOB 5 Mar 79RA Dianetic Clear Series 11
Rev. 31.3.81 DIANETIC CLEAR FALSE DECLARES
HCOB 19 Jun 71 II C/S Series 46
DECLARES
HCOB 11 Nov 73 PRECLEAR DECLARE? PROCEDURE
and Keeping Scientology Working Series 5, 21-24
Well, well. I seem to have been right in Book One about making Clears,
but it seems to have exceeded mass reality.
WARNING TO NED AND SCN AUDITORS
If the case you are auditing has a fantastic win and then seems to go
into a decline, beware-the pc might have become a pre-OT and that funny
behavior of the needle and tone arm might have been a floating TA, when he
went Clear.
NOTE FOR C/Ses
I have found some very interesting case phenomena being resolved since
past Dianetic Clears are attesting to the state.
Some of the manifestations of some of the cases who were audited past
Dianetic Clear (unrecognized and unattested to) are:
(a) Manifesting PTSness and illnesses until the state was acknowledged
and attested to.
(b) Appearing to be no case gain, out-ethics cases.
(c) Not moving up the Bridge but remaining "parked" at some point.
(They have many "reasons" for this.)
(d) Becoming inactive as a Scientologist.
HCOB 29.11.78R - 2 -
Rev. 31.3.81
A C/S should look for these cases and recognize them when he sees
them.
This in no way means that every PTS or out-ethics case has an
unacknowledged
state of Clear underlying it but this fact certainly needs to be included
in
any C/S's case debug line-up.
In the cases mentioned above, you will almost always find that the
condition started at a certain point in the pc's auditing (or in his last
life, as a pc). If you do a thorough folder study and get the pc through a
standard Dianetic Clear Special Intensive, you might very likely find that
he
went Dianetic Clear just prior to the case going awry. (Or, by the same
procedure, you might find he went Dianetic Clear in auditing in his last
life.)
NOTE: The Dianetic Clear Special Intensive (HCOB 2 May 79R Issue I Rev.
25.3.81, Dn Clear Series 4, DIANETIC CLEAR SPECIAL INTENSIVE) may only be
delivered by those orgs qualified to do so.
Advance Scheduling Registrars and those working in the Central Files
of
an org can go through CF folders and ask the Org C/S to check the folders
of
those who have drifted off lines or stopped going up the processing side of
the Bridge, as an unacknowledged Dianetic Clear state may just be the
cause.
C/S WARNING
A C/S who is C/Sing pcs on the DCSI or sending pcs through to attest
to
Clear must be a graduate of the Dianetic Clear Special Intensive Delivery
Course and meet the qualifications expressed in HCOB 3 May 79R Dn Clear
Series
7, DIANETIC CLEAR SPECIAL INTENSIVE C/S AND AUDITOR REQUIREMENTS.
Otherwise,
he is C/Sing illegally.
THE ATTEST ITSELF
When a person validly attains the state of Clear, whether this is
reached
on the Clearing Course or at any point earlier in his auditing, he attests
to
"the State of Clear." Clear is Clear and there are no qualifying remarks at
the attest such as "Dianetic Clear" or anything else.
Depending on the outcome of a DCSI and whether or not the pc had
already
attested to Clear, there are four possibilities which may be declared as a
result of a DCSI.
1. When a pc successfully completes a DCSI and is verified as having
reached Clear he attests to "the state of Clear."
2. If a person had attested to Clear earlier and then received a
successful DCSI which verified the state, he would simply attest to
completion
of the DCSI. (He wouldn't need to re-attest to Clear.)
3. When a person receives a DCSI and it is established that he is not
yet
Clear, he attests to completion of the DCSI, but only after being cleaned
up
to F/N and VGIs and eager to progress up the Bridge.
4. Someone who formerly attested to Clear who then received a DCSI
which
established that he had, in fact, not yet reached Clear (and so had the
false
declare cancelled) would simply attest to the completion of the DCSI but
only
after being cleaned up to F/N and VGIs and eager to progress up the Bridge.
HCOB 29.11.78R - 3 -
Rev. 31.3.81
The procedure for handling attest cycles is fully described in HCOB 11
Nov 73 PRECLEAR DECLARE? PROCEDURE.
CLEAR IN LAST LIFE
Some people didn't believe one had lived before this life. Also some
people wondered what happened to old Dianeticists and Scientologists who
had
died. But others used to have the phrase "Well, we'll pick them up in the
next
lifetime," or "the next time around."
Well it seems like the former shouldn't have wondered and the latter
were
right. We are coming up with quite a few pcs who had gone Clear in their
last
lifetime during Book One auditing, Goals Processing, etc. This is something
that the pc originates or something he has been "wondering about" but
invalidated.
INVAL/EVAL
The state of Clear having been truly attained yet not acknowledged and
attested to, can cause an extraordinary amount of invalidation. Evaluation
also occurs on this subject and comes from others and even the pc himself.
These things are cleared up on the Dianetic Clear Special Intensive so
that the rehab of the state can easily be accomplished.
ETHICS WARNING
It is a Comm-Evable offense to coach the pc with data about Clear in
any
way. You also do not evaluate for any pc and try to convince him he has
gone
Dianetic Clear when he hasn't. You do not turn to "the pc must have gone
Dianetic Clear" when you can't easily solve a pc's case. You use the C/S
Series in full.
To send a pc through to attest to Dianetic Clear when he hasn't truly
made it is a suppressive act as that preclear will not make it on the OT
Levels.
An org that does not have a Clear C/S and a Clear auditor who are
qualified to deliver the Dianetic Clear Special Intensive must send a
person
who has originated he might be Dianetic Clear, and his folders, to the
nearest
org with tech terminals who are qualified to deliver this Intensive.
THE POWER OF AUDITING
The power of modern auditing shouldn't be underestimated. It was
pretty
hot in 1950, but realize there were 28 years of research and development.
This
has been enormously stepped up. For 28 years, apparently, the power of
auditing has been underestimated.
With better trained auditors than ever, and with their TRs and
metering
really in, the C/S who is keeping tech in on his lines can expect a lot
more
of this sort of thing, so he must be alert to it, without at the same time
going delusory or failing to handle cases that really are bogged for quite
some other reason.
Given standard tech used by standard auditors and C/Sed by standard
C/Ses, there is no reason why we cannot Clear the planet.
HCOB 29.11.78R - 4 -
Rev. 31.3.81
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
of CALIFORNIA
BDCSC:LRH:mm:nc:bk
Copyright $c 1978, 1981
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
of CALIFORNIA
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=27/11/78
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=1
rDate=31/3/82
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Word Clearing Correction
Word Clearing Series 35RG
WORD CLEARING CORRECTION LIST
Type = 12
iDate=21/7/71
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=6
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Remimeo
Word Clearers
Class IV Grad
and above
Auditors
C/Ses
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 27 NOVEMBER 1978R
Remimeo REVISED 31 MARCH 1982
Word Clearers (Cancels BTB 21 July 1971RE
Class IV Grad Word Clearing Correction
and above List Revised)
Auditors
C/Ses
(Revised to include missed withhold handling to Item #12
and to add new questions, Items #13 & #14,to the list.)
(Revisions in Script)
Word Clearing Series 35RG
WORD CLEARING CORRECTION LIST
The WCCL is the list to use when any form of Word Clearing bogs down.
Any and all trouble with Word Clearing should be corrected by assessing and
handling this list. The WCCL has been designed to parallel errors made in
Word
Clearing, not study, not the person's case, and it is to be used in Word
Clearing sessions to correct Word Clearing errors.
If, after the Word Clearing Correction List has been fully handled,
there seems to be other bypassed charge connected with the subject of
study, a
Study Green Form should be done.
This list can be assessed Method 3 or Method 5.
All Word Clearers are to check out on and use this list to correct
Word
Clearing errors.
1. IS THERE SOMETHING WRONG WITH YOUR CASE? _______
If this list is being assessed during course room metered Word
Clearing, end off for C/S instructions, otherwise assess and
handle a C/S Series 53.
2. HAVE YOU BEEN WORD CLEARED OVER OUT-RUDS? _______
Find out which and handle to F/N and VGIs.
3. IS A WORD STILL MISUNDERSTOOD? _______
Find out which and get it cleared to F/N. (If Method 1 Word Clearing,
clear it E/S to EP.)
4. WAS A WORD IN A DEFINITION MISUNDERSTOOD? _______
Find out which word and get it cleared to F/N.
5. COULDN'T YOU FIND THE ACTUAL MISUNDERSTOOD? _______
Using your meter and 2WC, find the misunderstood word and clear to F/N.
(If Method 1 Word Clearing clear it E/S to Ep.)
6. DID YOU NOT GET THE BASIC WORD? _______
Find out which word or subject was not taken to EP, locate the
misunderstood words and clear each to F/N, going E/S to EP.
7. DID YOU FAIL TO USE THE WORD YOU WERE CLEARING IN ENOUGH SENTENCES?
_______
Get the word used in sentences until it is fully understood,
to F/N and VGIs.
8. DID YOU NEED TO DEMO THE WORD YOU WERE CLEARING? _______
Get the word demoed to full understanding, F/N and VGIs.
9. WERE YOU USING AN IMPROPER DICTIONARY? _______
Find out what word and what dictionary. Get a proper dictionary and
clear it to F/N and VGIs.
HCOB 27.11.78R - 2 -
Rev. 31.3.82
10. WAS THERE AN EARLIER SIMILAR MISUNDERSTOOD WORD NOT CLEARED? _______
Find out what it is and clear it to F/N.
(If Method 1 Word Clearing, clear it E/S to EP.)
11. DID YOU NOT FEEL GOOD ABOUT A WORD WHEN IT WAS CLEARED? _______
Find the word and reclear it to F/N.
12. DO YOU KEEP FORGETTING WORDS YOU HAVE ALREADY DEFINED? _______
If the above reads, ask: "Do you have any withhold about going
past misunderstood words?" and handle as a missed withhold,
E/S to F/N. Then clear to F/N, each MU found. Then 2WC "How
have you tried to solve the problem of forgetting words?" to
F/N or E/S to F/N.
13. HAVE YOU GONE PAST WORDS YOU DIDN'T UNDERSTAND? _______
Handle as a missed withhold, E/S to F/N. Get the words located
and defined, each to F/N.
14. HAVE YOU GONE PAST A MISUNDERSTOOD WORD OR ABBREVIATION
IN YOUR WORK? _______
Handle the missed withhold of going past MUs, to F/N or E/S to F/N.
Then clear each MU uncovered, to F/N.
15. DID YOU HAVE TO CLEAR A WORD YOU ALREADY KNEW? _______
Find out what the word was and indicate. If no F/N get off any
protest or inval and rehab to F/N.
16. WAS A WORD OVERRUN? _______
Find out what word and rehab.
17. WAS A WORD READING ON PROTEST? _______
Get which word, indicate. If no F/N handle with Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N.
18. DID A WORD NOT REALLY READ? _______
Get which word, indicate. If no F/N handle with Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N.
19. COULDN'T YOU HEAR THE WORD CLEARER? _______
Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N.
20. DIDN'T YOU UNDERSTAND WHAT THE WORD CLEARER SAID? _______
Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N.
21. DIDN'T YOU UNDERSTAND THE ACTION BEING DONE? _______
Find out what it was and handle with Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N
or clear it up with correct references to F/N and VGIs.
22. WERE YOU CONFUSED BY SOMETHING? _______
Find out what it was and handle with Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N
or clear it up with correct references to F/N and VGIs.
23. WERE YOU PUZZLED WHY THE WORD CLEARER KEPT ON WORD CLEARING? _______
Find out what happened and handle with Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N
or rehab the win.
24. ON WORD CLEARING DID YOU FEEL OVERWHELMED? _______
Find out what happened and handle with Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N.
25. ON WORD CLEARING DID YOU FEEL HOPELESS? _______
Find out what happened and handle with Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N.
26. ON WORD CLEARING DID YOU FEEL INVALIDATED? _______
Find out what happened and handle with Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N.
HCOB 27.11.78R - 3 -
Rev. 31.3.82
27. ON WORD CLEARING WAS THERE ANY EVALUATION? _______
Find out what happened and handle with Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N.
28. ON WORD CLEARING WERE YOU PROTESTING? _______
Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N.
29. DID YOU GET DISTRACTED DURING WORD CLEARING? _______
Find out what happened and handle with Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N.
30. WAS THERE SOMETHING WRONG WITH THE F/Ns INDICATED? _______
Find out what happened and handle with Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N
or clear to F/N any words not fully cleared.
31. DID YOU HAVE TO LOOK UP TECHNICAL, OR SPECIALIZED DEFINITIONS
OF WORDS THAT DIDN'T APPLY? _______
Find out what the word was. Indicate this was an unnecessary action.
Correctly clear the word to F/N. (If Method 1 Word Clearing,
take E/S to EP.)
32. DID YOU TELL THE WORD CLEARER IT WAS UNDERSTOOD JUST TO
GET RID OF HIM? _______
Get the word (plus any others) and clear each to F/N.
33. WAS IT NOT YOUR MISUNDERSTOOD? _______
Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N.
34. WAS THERE INVALIDATION OF KNOWINGNESS? _______
Find out what it was, and handle with Itsa E/S Itsa to F/N.
35. DID YOU USE THE WRONG SIZED CANS? _______
False TA Checklist. Work out the right sized cans with the pc.
36. DID YOUR HANDS GET TIRED IN WORD CLEARING? _______
False TA Checklist. Work out the right sized cans with the pc.
37. WAS A WORD ON THE LIST OF SUBJECTS MISUNDERSTOOD? _______
Find out what it is and clear to F/N. (If Method 1 Word Clearing,
take E/S to EP.)
38. IS A SUBJECT STILL MISUNDERSTOOD? _______
Get which subject and which word and clear it to F/N.
(If Method 1 Word Clearing, take E/S to EP.)
39. DID YOU NOT GET THE BASIC SUBJECT? _______
Find out what subject is incomplete by 2WC, locate the
misunderstood words in it and clear each to F/N.
(If Method 1 Word Clearing, take E/S to EP.)
40. IN REGARD TO EARLIER SUBJECTS OR COURSES YOU STUDIED DID YOU FIND
ANY OF THEM DIFFICULT? _______
When this question is answered ask this second question:
WERE THERE ANY WORDS ON THESE COURSES THAT YOU DIDN'T
FULLY UNDERSTAND? _______
Find by subject and get each defined. Then do steps again until both
questions F/N.
41. DO YOU STILL HAVE MISUNDERSTOODS ON EARLIER COURSES? _______
Find out which course (or courses) and get each misunderstood
word cleared. Then recheck the question and handle until
it F/Ns on checking.
42. DO YOU HAVE MISUNDERSTOODS ON YOUR EARLIER THAN SCIENTOLOGY SCHOOL
OR FAMILY TRAINING? _______
When this question has been answered, ask:
WAS THERE ANY WORD IN (SUBJECT NAMED) YOU DIDN'T UNDERSTAND? _______
Get it fully defined to F/N and all such words cleared up for that
subject. Handle all subjects the person has named as above. Then
recheck the original question and handle until it F/Ns on checking.
HCOB 27.11.78R - 4 -
Rev. 31.3.82
43. WERE YOU BEING WORD CLEARED ON AN UNREADING SUBJECT? _______
Find out what. Indicate. If no F/N rehab or Date/Locate.
44. WAS A SUBJECT OVERRUN? _______
Find out what and indicate. If no F/N rehab.
45. WAS A MISUNDERSTOOD SUBJECT MISSED? _______
Find out which subject(s) and which words and clear each to F/N.
(If Method 1 Word Clearing, take E/S to EP.)
46. DID YOU TRY TO MAKE THE LIST F/N? _______
Put in ruds on word clearing, each to F/N, VGIs. Rehab any overruns.
47. IS THERE A SUBJECT WHICH SHOULD HAVE BEEN ON THE LIST BUT WASN'T?
_______
Find out what the subject is and clear all misunderstood words
to F/N, going E/S to EP.
48. HAS A WIN BEEN BYPASSED? _______
Find out what and rehab.
49. IS THERE SOMETHING ELSE WRONG? _______
Find out what and handle or return to the C/S.
50. WAS THERE NOTHING WRONG IN THE FIRST PLACE? _______
Indicate. If no F/N rehab or Date/Locate.
51. IS THERE SOME OTHER BYPASSED CHARGE ON THE SUBJECT OF STUDY? _______
Assess and assess a Study Green Form.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Revisions assisted by
Senior C/S International
LRH:DM:nc:bk
Copyright $c 1978, 1982
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Revisions assisted by
Senior C/S International
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=24/9/78
Volnum=0
Issue=3
Rev=2
rDate=31/3/81
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Dianetic Clear Series 1
DIANETIC CLEAR
Remimeo
AOs,
SHs
Class IV Orgs
NED Chkshts
Tech/Qual
All C/Ses
All Auditors
HCOs
Missions
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 24 SEPTEMBER 1978RA
Remimeo ISSUE III
AOs,
SHs RE-REVISED 31 MARCH 1981
Class IV Orgs
NED Chkshts
Tech/Qual
All C/Ses
All Auditors
HCOs
Missions
(This Bulletin has been revised to restate the most accurate
definition of the State of Clear, as given in Book One,
Chapter II of DIANETICS: THE MODERN SCIENCE OF MENTAL HEALTH,
to update the Bulletin in regard to the use of the Dianetic
Clear Special Intensive for verification and rehabilitation
of the State if it is achieved before doing the Clearing Course,
and to give data on the programming of a Dianetic Clear for
further auditing.)
(Revisions not in Script)
Dianetic Clear Series 1
DIANETIC CLEAR
REFERENCE:
HCOB 12 Sep 78 Dianetic Clear Series 2
Reiss. 31.3.81 URGENT-IMPORTANT, DIANETICS
FORBIDDEN ON CLEARS AND OTs
(This Bulletin revises the definition of "Dianetic Clear",
Page 113, Technical Dictionary, and the definition of
"Keyed-Out Clear", Page 221, Technical Dictionary.)
The state of Clear can be achieved on Dianetics.
I have now determined there is no such thing as Keyed-Out Clear. There
is
only a Dianetic Clear and he is a Clear.
The definition of Clear, to re-emphasize the most accurate statement
of
it as given originally in Book One, Chapter II of DIANETICS: THE MODERN
SCIENCE OF MENTAL HEALTH, is: A BEING WHO IS UNREPRESSED AND SELF
DETERMINED.
The state of Clear, whether achieved on the Clearing Course or on
processing on Grade Chart materials prior to the Clearing Course, can be
very
accurately determined when it is attained, as there are specific evidences
which accompany the state.
Should a pc originate that he has or might have gone Clear, or when he
has read on a prepared list as having gone Clear, the folder must be sent
to a
C/S who is Clear and who is qualilied to C/S the Dianetic Clear Special
Intensive. The pc will then be given the Dianetic Clear Special Intensive,
to
verify the state and rehabilitate it, if valid. The Dianetic Clear Special
Intensive is only given at a Class IV Org (or higher) that is qualified to
deliver that Intensive.
If a Mission or Field Auditor believes one of their pcs to have gone
Clear, they must send the pc and his folders to their closest qualified org
which has a qualified C/S, for adjudication and a full Dianetic Clear
Special
Intensive, as required.
HCOB 24.9.78RA III - 2 -
Re-rev. 31.3.81
NOTE: No auditor or C/S nor any other person must evaluate for a pc on
this nor feed or coax him to any cognition, which is a Comm-Evable offense.
Clears are made through auditing, not by feeding cognitions to pcs. This is
important as someone who has not made Clear will not make it on the OT
Levels.
Once declared, the person's pc folders must be clearly marked
"DIANETIC
CLEAR", for security and for purposes of further programming.
The individual is then issued the standard Clear Certificate by Certs
and
Awards, which states, simply, that he has attained the State of Clear. This
standard Certificate bears no qualifying statement of the State.
The Dianetic Clear, on achieving this state, is not run further on
Dianetics. He must not be run on engrams, R3RA or any version of R3R or
Dianetics. He can be given Touch or Contact Assists (as can Scn Clears and
OTs), but he is not to be given any Dianetic auditing assist nor any
Dianetic
auditing. (He can, of course, receive any actions on the Assist Summary
Bulletin, excluding R3RA.)
A Dianetic Clear does the Purification Rundown if not previously
completed. He does the Survival Rundown unless he has completed full
Objectives, each run to EP, prior to the issuance of the Survival Rundown.
He
is given the Scientology Drug Rundown, as needed (unless he has previously
completed a full NED Drug Rundown or other Dianetic Drug Rundown). He is
run
on Expanded ARC Straightwire and Expanded Grades 0-IV to full Ability
Gained
for each Grade not previously standardly declared. (Note: On Grade IV,
however, he would not be run on the R3RA section of Service Fac Handling.)
A point to be made here is that it is highly important to the
immediate
and future well-being of the individual that he does fully achieve the
Ability
of each Grade and that he misses none of the Levels or actions that will
enable him to eventually make it to OT.
When each Grade has been handled to ability Gained, the next step is
the
Solo Auditor Course at a Saint Hill or an Advanced Org.
Additionally, the above auditing actions fully completed are now
required
for a person going onto Advanced Courses at an AO.
A Dianetic Clear is not run on power, R6EW or the Clearing Course but,
upon completion of the Solo Auditor Course, goes directly onto OT I.
Until Dianetics and Scientology came along the surface of the subjects
of
the reactive bank and of Clearing had not even been scratched. You can look
in
vain all through the records of history and you will not find one shred of
valid data and enlightenment about the bank.
HCOB 24.9.78RA III - 3 -
Re-rev. 31.3.81
The uniform attainment of the State of Clear through standard Dianetic
and Scientology auditing procedures was miraculous and came as a result of
a
very long road of research, culminating in the release of the Clearing
Course
making it certain that everyone could reach the state. Then, with the
further
refinement of the technology of Dianetics which resulted in New Era
Dianetics,
and as a result of further tech developments, it became evident that some
persons were attaining Clear at an earlier Grade Chart level.
Where the person attains Clear in his processing (whether on the
Clearing
Course or at some earlier point in his processing) is not important. What
is
important is that he honestly attains it.
Clearing is the key to making a sane environment out of the barbarism
known as Earth. It is not something to be brushed off lightly, as the
technology was not easily won.
With the State of Clear and its technology protected and acknowledged
for
the important achievement that it is, the future of this planet can evolve
to
one of sanity and upward progress for all.
That is and has always been the goal and that is the trust that every
Scientologist now shares with me.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
of CALIFORNIA
BDCSC:LRH:bk:dr
Copyright $c 1978 1980, 1981
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
of CALIFORNIA
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=12/9/78
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
URGENT-IMPORTANT
Dianetic Clear Series 2
DIANETICS FORBIDDEN
ON CLEARS AND OTS
Remimeo
BPI
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 12 SEPTEMBER 1978
Remimeo REISSUED 31 MARCH 81
BPI
(Reissued as part of the Dianetic Clear Series)
URGENT-IMPORTANT
Dianetic Clear Series 2
DIANETICS FORBIDDEN
ON CLEARS AND OTS
New Era Dianetics or any Dianetics is NOT to be run on Clears or above
or
on Dianetic Clears.
This applies even when they say they can see some pictures.
Anyone who has purchased NED auditing who is Clear or above must be
routed to an AO or Flag to receive the special NED Rundown for OTs. They
are
NOT to be run on regular New Era Dianetics.
Anyone who is Clear but not OT III is to get through OT III
immediately
so he can receive this Special Rundown.
The EP of this Rundown is: CAUSE OVER LIFE.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
of CALIFORNIA
BDCSC:LRH:nc:bk
Copyright $c 1978, 1981
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
of CALIFORNIA
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=8/9/78
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=2
rDate=6/3/82
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
MINI LIST OF GRADE 0-IV PROCESSES
Remimeo
Level 0-IV
Chksheets
Supervisors
Auditors
C/Ses
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 8 SEPTEMBER 1978RA
Remimeo RE-REVISED 6 MARCH 1982
Level 0-IV
Chksheets
Supervisors
Auditors
C/Ses
(This HCOB has been revised to modify the original statement that
at the completion of each of the training Levels the student
audits the processes on this list for that Level. The revision has
been made to align this HCOB with HCO PL 13 Sep 81 Issue II
REVISION OF ACADEMY LEVELS 0-IV AUDITING REQUIREMENTS which states
that the student auditor must audit at least one pc on each of the
processes of a specific Level to the attainment of the ability
gained for that Level OR produce consistent well-done auditing
hours in the style of auditing taught on the Level to a definite
good pc result (remarkable case change). The exception is Level IV
where the student is required to audit a pc on the major process
of the Level, Service Facsimiles, to remarkably case changes
before certification on that Level.) (Re-revised 6 March 1982 to
add HCOB 7 March 1982 CONFESSIONALS INCLUDED IN EXPANDED GRADE 2
PROCESSES under Item 10, CONFESSIONAL PROCESSING.)
(Revisions in Script)
MINI LIST OF GRADE 0-IV PROCESSES
SPECIAL NOTE: The list below is by no means a complete list of Grade
0-IV Processes. Many, many processes exist on the Grades 0-IV on which
a preclear may need to be audited to achieve the full end phenomena
(ability gained) for a Grade, and which would also be required for a
pc
run on Expanded Grades.
The following is a MINI LIST of Grade 0-IV processes.
On each of the training Levels, toward the end of each checksheet, the
student auditor studies and drills the processes on this list for that
Level.
Commands for Flows 1, 2, 3 and 0 (Quads) for those processes that are
run
Quad are to be found on BTBs 15 Nov 76, Issues I through VI, 0-IV EXPANDED
GRADE PROCESSES-QUADS, PARTS A, B, C, D, E and F.
1. ARC STRAIGHTWIRE PROCESS
HCOB 27 Sep 68 II ARC STRAIGHTWIRE
BTB 15 Nov 76 I 0-IV EXPANDED GRADE PROCESSES-QUADS
PART A, ARC STRAIGHTWIRE, Item 11
2. ARC STRAIGHTWIRE HAVINGNESS
BTB 15 Nov 76 I 0-IV EXPANDED GRADE PROCESSES-QUADS
PART A, ARC STRAIGHTWIRE, Item 12
HCOB 8.9.78RA - 2 -
Re-rev. 6.3.82
3. 0-0, 0-A, 0-B
HCOB 11 Dec 64 SCIENTOLOGY 0 PROCESSES
HCOB 26 Dec 64 ROUTINE 0-A EXPANDED
BTB 15 Nov 76 II 0-IV EXPANDED GRADE PROCESSES-QUADS
PART B, GRADE 0 PROCESSES, p. 10
4. GRADE ZERO HAVINGNESS
BTB 15 Nov 76 II 0-IV EXPANDED GRADE PROCESSES-QUADS
PART B, GRADE 0 PROCESSES, p. 12
5. CCHs
HCOB 1 Dec 65 CCHs
6. LEVEL ONE PROBLEMS PROCESS
HCOB 19 Nov 65 PROBLEMS PROCESS
BTB 15 Nov 76 III O-IV EXPANDED GRADE PROCESSES-QUADS
PART C, GRADE I PROCESSES, p. 18
7. HAVINGNESS PROCESS FOR GRADE I
BTB 15 Nov 76 III O-IV EXPANDED GRADE PROCESSES-QUADS
PART C, GRADE I PROCESSES, p. 18
8. O/W PROCESS
BTB 15 Nov 76 IV O-IV EXPANDED GRADE PROCESSES-QUADS
PART D, GRADE 2 PROCESSES, Item 26
9. HAVINGNESS PROCESS FOR GRADE II
BTB 15 Nov 76 IV O-IV EXPANDED GRADE PROCESSES-QUADS
PART D, GRADE 2 PROCESSES, Item 27
10. CONFESSIONAL PROCESSING
HCOB 30 Nov 78 CONFESSIONAL PROCEDURE
HCOB 7 Mar 82 CONFESSIONALS INCLUDED IN EXPANDED GRADE 2 PROCESSES
11. TWO WAY COMM
HCOB 21 Apr 70 2 WAY COMM C/Ses
HCOB 3 Jul 70 C/Sing 2 WAY COMM
HCOB 17 Mar 74 TWC CHECKSHEET, TWC, USING WRONG QUESTIONS
12. L1C
HCOB 19 Mar 71 L1C
HCOB 8.9.78RA - 3 -
Re-rev. 6.3.82
13. L4BRA
HCOB 15 Dec 68RA L4BRA
14. R3H
HCOB 6 Aug 68 R3H
HCOB 1 Aug 68 THE LAWS OF LISTING & NULLING
BTB 15 Nov 76 V O-IV EXPANDED GRADE PROCESSES-QUADS
PART E, GRADE 3 PROCESSES, pp. 7 - 8
15. GRADE III HAVINGNESS
BTB 15 Nov 76 V O-IV EXPANDED GRADE PROCESSES-QUADS
PART E, GRADE 3 PROCESSES, pp. 8 - 9
16. SERVICE FACSIMILE PROCESS
HCOB 6 Sep 78 III URGENT-IMPORTANT, ROUTINE THREE SC-A,
FULL SERVICE FACSIMILE HANDLING UPDATED
WITH NEW ERA DIANETICS
17. GRADE IV HAVINGNESS PROCESS
BTB 15 Nov 76 VI O-IV EXPANDED GRADE PROCESSES-QUADS
PART F, GRADE 4 PROCESSES, p. 5
The student auditor must study and drill and get checked out on any of
the above processes or actions and their commands before he audits them.
He must not and cannot be required to audit any process above the
Level
to which he has been trained.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Revision assisted by
Research and Technical
Compilations Unit
LRH:RTC:ldv:bk
Copyright $c 1978, 1982
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Revision assisted by
Research and Technical
Compilations Unit
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=15/7/78
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=1
rDate=25/3/81
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
SCIENTOLOGY
AUDITING CS-1
Remimeo
All C/Ses
All Auditors
Tech
Qual
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 15 JULY 1978R
Remimeo REVISED 25 MARCH 1981
All C/Ses
All Auditors (Cancels BTB 8 Jan 71R, AUDITING CS-1
Tech FOR DIANETICS AND SCIENTOLOGY.)
Qual
(Revised to better clarify several of the handling
steps of the CS-1 procedure and to provide additional
data on terms in the attached Definitions Sheet.)
(Revisions Not in Script)
SCIENTOLOGY
AUDITING CS-1
A CS-1 is a general C/S (Case Supervisor direction) which covers the
actions necessary to orient the pc to the basic factors of auditing and
thus
prepares him to receive auditing. For this purpose, because of the
differences in Dianetic and Scientology auditing terms and procedures,
there
exists this Scientology CS-1 as well as a Dianetic CS-1 (HCOB 9 July 76R
Rev.
4.9.78).
The Scientology CS-1 is done to give a pc new to Scientology or a
previously audited pc, as needed, the necessary data and R-factor on
Scientology basics, terminology and auditing procedure so that he
understands
and is able and willing to be audited successfully.
Note: When the Case Supervisor orders a CS-1 for a pc who has been
trained or audited previously, the pc may protest that be knows the terms
and
procedure. Should this occur, the auditor must acknowledge with excellent
TRs.
Without invalidation or evaluation he can let the pc know that this C/S is
intended to make auditing more effective for him and to ensure that
anything
he might have missed is picked up and cleared. If the auditor's TRs are
good,
if he gives an honest R-factor and if he does not clean cleans (attempt to
handle something the pc has already grasped), no ARC break should ever
occur.
A CS-1 standardly delivered to the pc who needs it will give tremendous
wins.
It is not necessary to re-clear those sections of this Scn CS-1 which
the
pc may have already covered in a recent and thorough Dianetics CS-1,
provided
the auditor is certain of the pc's understanding of the terms.
The auditor should be fully familiar with this issue as well as:
HCOB 17 Oct 64 III ALL LEVELS GETTING THE PC SESSIONABLE
HCOB 5 Apr 69 NEW PRECLEARS, THE WORKABILITY OF SCIENTOLOGY
HCOB 16 Jun 70 C/S Series 6, WHAT THE C/S IS DOING
He will need to take a very thorough look at what has to be covered
with
the pc in this CS-1 and know his materials very well and have them ready in
the CS-1 session for reference and clearing any misunderstoods or questions
the pc may have.
HCOB 15.7.78R - 2 -
Rev. 25.3.81
The following will be needed in the auditing room:
Technical Dictionary
Admin Dictionary A good English dictionary
(See HCOB 13 Feb 81 DICTIONARIES.)
A good Dictionary in the pc's native language, and for a foreign
language
case a dual dictionary (English-to-foreign language and foreign
language
itself)
Scn CS-1 Definitions Sheet-Attachment No. 1 of this issue
THE BASIC SCIENTOLOGY PICTURE BOOK
THE FUNDAMENTALS OF THOUGHT
HCOB 14 Oct 68RA Rev. 19.6.80, THE AUDITOR'S CODE
Demo Kit.
The auditor makes full use of these as necessary. If further
references
are needed, ensure source materials are used.
A. Clear with the pc each Scientology (or other) term, using the
definitions
on the attachment sheet, and other references as needed. Ensure you
fully
handle any word or term that is obviously misunderstood or any word or
term
the pc is hesitant about or unsure of.
(Note: When having the pc define a word using Method 5 Word Clearing,
you
don't ask: "Do you know what this word means?" You ask: "What is the
definition of _______ ?")
When the pc has defined a word or term, have him use it correctly in
several sentences. Where it is applicable have him give you examples,
using
his experiences where possible or those of relatives or friends and/or
have
him demonstrate the item, using a demo kit. Cover by exact definition
all
terms used.
B. Check for any questions (or misunderstoods) as you go along and ensure
any
such get handled so the pc winds up with a clear understanding of the
word,
item or procedure.
Don't settle for glibness that does not show understanding, but, on the
other hand, don't overrun or put duress on the pc either.
Ensure that each word cleared on the pc is taken to F/N.
SCN CS-1 PROCEDURE:
1. Give pc the R-factor that you are going to do a Scientology Auditing CS-
1
to familiarize him with auditing procedure and any basic data that may
require clarification.
2. Clear the word: Scientology.
HCOB 15.7.78R - 3 -
Rev. 25.3.81
3. Clear the words: a) auditing d) Clear
b) auditing session c) preclear
c) auditor
4. Clear the words: a) thetan
b) mind
c) body
Have pc use the demo kit as well as the references to ensure he gets
the
relationship between these.
5. Now clear the words: a) picture c) reactive mind
b) mental image d) bank picture
Have the pc give you examples of how the reactive mind works on a
stimulus response basis, and have him demo it.
6. Clear with the pc:
a) the communication cycle.
Get the pc to give you examples he has observed. Have him demo the
communication cycle.
b) the auditing comm cycle.
Get the pc to explain the difference between a comm cycle and the
auditing comm cycle. Have him demonstrate it.
If it is necessary to clarify this further, you can demonstrate the
steps
of the auditing comm cycle to the pc using simple, non-restimulative
questions.
Example: Ask: "Have you eaten dinner?" (or breakfast or lunch).
And when he replies and has been acknowledged, ask: "What did you
do when I asked that question?" Then have him ask you a similar type
of question. Answer him and be sure he acknowledges you. Really
establish your comm cycle with the pc.
7. Go over the TRs with the pc, demonstrating each with him,
until he has a good idea of how they are used in auditing.
9. Go over with the pc what the meter does (registers charge/mental mass).
For demonstration, you can do a "pinch test" where you explain to the
pc
that to show him how the meter registers mental mass you will give him
a
pinch as part of the demonstration. Do so. Then get him to think of the
pinch (while he is holding the cans), showing him the meter reaction
and
explaining how it registers mental mass.
HCOB 15.7.78R - 4 -
Rev. 25.3.81
10. a) Clear the words: 1. key-in
2. key-out
and have the pc demo and give you examples of each.
b) Clear the word: release. Have the pc demo it.
c) Clear the word: rehabilitate (rehab). Ensure the pc understands
its use in auditing. Have the pc demo it.
11. a) Clear the word: postulate.
b) Have pc give you examples of a time or two when he postulated
something and got it.
12. a) Clear the word: cognition.
b) Have the pc give you some examples of a cognition.
13. Clear: floating needle.
14. a) Give the pc an R-factor on rudiments and when those would be used.
b) Clear the word: rudiment.
c) Clear: 1. affinity
2. reality
3. communication
Have pc give you examples of each.
d) Clear the term: ARC
Demonstrate to the pc how A, R and C equate to understanding.
Have the pc give you examples of how A, R and C bring about
understanding.
e) Clear: ARC break.
Have the pc demo it for you.
f) Using an appropriate dictionary, clear the words:
curious, desired, enforced, inhibited, no, refused.
g) Clear: 1. problem
2. Present Time Problem.
Have the pc demo:
1) a problem 2) a present Time Problem.
h) Clear:
1) overt 2) withhold 3) missed withhold.
Have the pc demo:
1) an overt 2) withhold 3) missed withhold.
(Use Definitions Sheet, or other references as needed.)
15. a) Using an appropriate dictionary, clear the words:
1) similar 2) earlier.
HCOB 15.7.78R - 5 -
Rev. 25.3.81
b) Then clear: "earlier similar." Give the pc examples of where it
would be used.
c) Have the pc give you an example of something "earlier similar."
16. Briefly clear with the pc how the rudiments are flown and the procedure
for each rudiment.
17. Clear with the pc what a Repetitive Process is. Ensure he understands
why
and how it is done. Have the pc demo it for you.
18. a) Clear the word: flow.
b) Demonstrate for the pc each of the Flows 1, 2, 3, 0.
c) Then have the pc demo and give you an example of each.
19. Clear the words: a) assess b) assessment.
20. a) Explain to the pc that if at any time there is any difficulty in the
auditing, you (or another auditor) will be using a prepared list to
find and handle the exact difficulty.
b) Ensure he understands that when such a list is being assessed he
sits
quietly holding the cans while the auditor calls the list and takes
meter reads to locate the difficulty.
21. Go over the Auditor's Code, Items 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 14, 17, 18,
19 and 22.
Check for and clear up any questions or misunderstoods the pc may have
on
this.
22. a) Clear: Examiner.
b) Give the pc an R-factor on the Examiner and the fact that he will go
to
the Examiner immediately after each auditing session. Ensure he
understands the Examiner says nothing to the preclear at that time,
only recording what the pc says and noting down the tone arm
position
and state of the needle.
Also, be sure the pc understands that the Examiner is the person he
sees if he wishes to make any sort of statement regarding his case
between sessions.
c) Conditional: To familiarize the pc more fully with this step, if it
is
feasible, take the pc to the Examiner's space, introduce him to the
Examiner, briefly orient him to the space and go over with him again
the functions the Examiner performs. Then return to the auditing
room.
23. Turn the folder in to the C/S.
The C/S can also order any additional actions to the above.
The Scientology Auditing CS-1 can usually be completed in one session.
If it takes more than one session, the first session should be ended off at
the end of a step or completion of a word or demonstration-never in the
middle of an action.
HCOB 15.7.78R - 6 -
Rev. 25.3.81
Make sure you do not leave your preclear with a question or a
misunderstood or confusion. Know the preclear in front of you and get your
product of an educated pc who can run Scientology processes easily and with
gain.
CLEARING COMMANDS
The Scientology Auditing CS-1 does not preclude clearing the commands
of
each process or clearing a procedure in a session where the pc is begun on
a
new process or procedure. (Ref. HCOB 9 Aug 78 II, CLEARING COMMANDS)
This would include the first time the pc is given a Two-Way Comm
session, a Listing & Nulling session, etc. With any new action the
procedure
would first be fully cleared on the pc by the auditor.
CLEARING WORDS ON CORRECTION LISTS
In addition to the CS-1, to fully prepare the pc for his auditing up
the
Grade Chart, it is standard to clear the words on the various correction
lists
very early in auditing, before the need for them arises. (Otherwise, it is
difficult to clear the words of a correction list over heavy by-passed
charge.) Thus, when the need for correction lists does arise the words have
already been cleared and the correction list can be used without delay.
(Ref.
HCOB 9 Aug 78 II, CLEARING COMMANDS, Items 7 and 8)
This would be done as ordered by the C/S.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:dr:bk
Copyright $c 1978, 1981
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HCOB 15.7.78R
ATTACHMENT
SCIENTOLOGY CS-1
DEFINITIONS SHEET
(The following definitions have been taken from the DIANETICS AND
SCIENTOLOGY TECHNICAL DICTIONARY, the glossary of the book DIANETICS TODAY,
from the book DIANETICS: THE MODERN SCIENCE OF MENTAL HEALTH, Book One,
Chapter II, and from existing HCO Bulletins where indicated.
Use these in conjunction with the BASIC SCIENTOLOGY PICTURE BOOK. If
further references are needed when clearing these terms and concepts,
ensure
source materials are used. For any non-Scientology terms use a good non-
dinky
dictionary, per HCOB 13 Feb 81 DICTIONARIES and HCOB 19 Jun 72R Rev.
15.2.81
DINKY DICTIONARIES.)
SCIENTOLOGY:
An applied religious philosophy developed by L. Ron Hubbard dealing
with
the study of knowledge, which through the application of its
technology
can bring about desirable changes in the conditions of life.
(Taken from the Latin word scio, knowing in the fullest sense of the
word, and the Greek word logos, to study.)
The study of the human spirit in its relationship to the physical
universe and its living forms. A religious practice applying to Man's
spirit and his spiritual freedom.
A body of knowledge which, when properly used, gives freedom and
truth
to the individual.
AUDITING:
Processing, the application of Scientology (or Dianetic) processes
and
procedures to someone by a trained auditor. The exact definition of
auditing is: the action of asking a preclear a question (which he can
understand and answer), getting an answer to that question and
acknowledging him for that answer.
AUDITING SESSION:
A period in which an auditor and preclear are in a quiet place where
they will not be disturbed. The auditor gives the preclear certain
and
exact commands which the preclear can follow.
AUDITOR:
A person trained and qualified in applying Scientology and/or
Dianetic
processes and procedures to individuals for their betterment; called
an
auditor because auditor means "one who listens." An auditor is a
minister of the Church of Scientology.
HCOB 15.7.78R - 2 -
ATTACHMENT
CLEAR:
A being who is unrepressed and self-determined. (Ref. Book:
DIANETICS: THE MODERN SCIENCE OF MENTAL HEALTH, Book One, Chapter II)
The state of Clear is achieved by completion of the Clearing Course
at
an Advanced Organization of the Church of Scientology. Additionally,
the
power of auditing is such that Clear has been achieved earlier than
the
Clearing Course, on the standard Grade Chart processes of Dianetics
and
Scientology as delivered by Class IV Organizations of the Church of
Scientology.
PRECLEAR:
From pre-Clear, a person not yet Clear; generally a person being
audited, who is thus on the road to Clear; a person who, through
Scientology and Dianetic processing, is finding out more about
himself
and life. Abbreviated-p.c.
THETAN:
From THETA (life static), a word taken from the Greek symbol or
letter:
theta, traditional symbol for thought or spirit. The thetan is the
individual himself-not the body or the mind. The thetan is the "I";
one doesn't have or own a thetan; one is a thetan.
It is the person himself-not his body or his name, the physical
universe, his mind, or anything else; that which is aware of being
aware; the identity which is the individual.
MIND:
A control system between the thetan and the physical universe. It is
not
the brain. The mind is the accumulated recordings of thoughts,
conclusions, decisions, observations and perceptions of a thetan
throughout his entire existence. The thetan can and does use the mind
in
handling life and the physical universe.
BODY:
The organized physical composition or substance of an animal or man
whether living or dead.
The body is the thetan's communication center. It is a physical
object.
It is not the being himself.
PICTURE:
An exact likeness of something; a copy or representation of a thing,
not
the thing itself. An image or mental image of something.
MENTAL IMAGE PICTURE:
Mental picture; a copy of one's perceptions of the physical universe
sometime in the past.
A facsimile or a mock-up. In Scientology we call a mental image
picture
a facsimile when it is an unknowingly created picture or "photograph"
of
the physical
HCOB 15.7.78R - 3 -
ATTACHMENT
universe sometime in the past. We call a mental image picture a mock-
up
when it is created by the thetan or for the thetan and does not
consist
of a photograph of the physical universe.
Facsimiles, made up of mental energy, are the pictures contained in
the
reactive mind.
REACTIVE MIND:
Reactive bank. The portion of the mind which works on a stimulus-
response basis (given a certain stimulus it will automatically give a
certain response) which is not under a person's volitional control
and
which exerts force and power over a person's awareness, purposes,
thoughts, body and actions.
It consists of locks, secondaries, engrams and chains of them and is
the
single source of human aberrations and psychosomatic ills.
The reactive mind never stops operating. Pictures of the environment,
of
a very low order, are taken by this mind even in some states of
unconsciousness.
The reactive mind comprises an unknowing, unwanted series of
aberrated
computations which bring about an effect upon the individual and
those
around him. It is an obsessive strata of unknown, unseen, uninspected
data which are forcing solutions, unknown and unsuspected, on the
individual-which tells you why it remained hidden from man for so
many thousands of years.
BANK:
A colloquial name for the reactive mind. The mental image picture
collection of the pc. It comes from computer technology where all
data
is in a "bank."
COMMUNICATION CYCLE:
A completed communication, including origination of the
communication,
receipt of the communication, and answer or acknowledgement of the
communication. A communication cycle consists of just: cause,
distance,
effect, with intention, attention, duplication and understanding.
AUDITING COMM CYCLE:
(HCOB 30 Apr 71) This is the auditing comm cycle that is always in
use:
(1) is the pc ready to receive the command?
(appearance, presence)
(2) auditor gives command/question to pc
(cause, distance, effect)
(3) pc looks to bank for answer...
(4) pc receives answer from bank
(5) pc gives answer to auditor (cause, distance, effect)
(6) auditor acknowledges pc
HCOB 15.7.78R - 4 -
ATTACHMENT
(7) auditor sees that pc received acknowledgement (attention)
(8) new cycle beginning with (1).
CHARGE:
The stored quantities of energy in the time track; stored energy or
stored or re-creatable potentials of energy. The electrical impulse
on
the case that activates the meter. Harmful energy or force
accumulated
and generated in the reactive mind, resulting from the conflicts and
unpleasant experiences that a person has had.
MENTAL MASS:
Mental mass is the mass contained in the mental image pictures
(facsimiles) in the reactive mind. It has weight; very tiny, but it
has
weight, and it actually has size and shape and so forth. Its
proportionate weight would be terribly slight compared to the real
object which the person is making a picture of.
KEY-IN:
The action of recording a lock on a secondary or engram; the moment
an
earlier upset or earlier incident has been restimulated.
The action of some part of the reactive mind moving in on the person.
A
Key-in occurs when the environment around the awake but fatigued or
distressed individual is similar to some part of the reactive mind.
Since the reactive mind operates on the equation A=A=A, the present
time
environment becomes identified with the contents of a particular
portion
of the bank and so it activates and exerts its influence on the
person.
(Ref. Tech Dictionary & HCOB 19 Dec 80 REHAB TECH)
KEY-OUT:
An action of an engram or secondary dropping away without being
erased.
Released or separate from one's reactive mind or some portion of it.
The action of the reactive mind or some portion of it dropping out of
restimulation on the pc. (Ref. Tech Dictionary & HCOB 19 Dec 80 REHAB
TECH)
RELEASE:
(0) A preclear whose reactive mind or some major portion of it is
keyed
out and is not influencing him. (1) A person who has been able to
back
out of his bank. The bank is still there but the person isn't sunk
into
it with all its somatics and depressions. (2) When the pc disconnects
from the mass in his bank, that is a release. When this happens, the
pc
disconnects from the bank to a greater or lesser degree. (3) A person
who has become free of a difficulty or personal "block" stemming from
the mind. (4) When you take a thetan out of a mass, that is a
release.
(Ref. Tech Dictionary & HCOB 19 Dec 80 REHAB TECH)
HCOB 15.7.78R - 5 -
ATTACHMENT
REHABILITATE (Rehab):
To restore to a former capacity or condition. In auditing, this means
to
do the series of actions in session which result in regaining a state
of
release for the pc. Abbreviated "Rehab." (Ref. Tech Dictionary & HCOB
19 Dec 80 REHAB TECH)
POSTULATE:
A conclusion, decision or resolution made by the individual himself;
to
conclude, decide or resolve a problem or to set a pattern for the
future
or to nullify a pattern of the past.
... We mean, by postulate, a self-created truth. A postulate is, of
course, that thing which is directed desire or order, or inhibition,
or
enforcement, on the part of the individual in the form of an idea.
... Postulate means to cause a thinkingness or consideration.
COGNITION:
A pc origination indicating he has "come to realize." It's a "What do
you know? I..." statement. A new realization of life. It results in a
higher degree of awareness and consequently a greater ability to
succeed
with one's endeavors in life.
FLOATING NEEDLE:
A Floating Needle is a rhythmic sweep of the dial at a slow, even
pace
of the needle.
It is always accompanied by very good indicators in the pc. (Ref.
HCOB
10 Dec 76R, C/S Series 99R SCN F/N AND TA POSITION, HCOB 21 Jul 78
WHAT
IS AN F/N)
RUDIMENTS:
First principles, steps, stages or conditions. The basic actions done
at
the beginning of a session to set up the pc for the major session
action; ARC Breaks, PTPs, withholds.
A rudiment is that which is used to get the pc in shape to be audited
in
that session.
AFFINITY:
Degree of liking or affection or lack of it.
The feeling of love or liking for something or someone.
Affinity is a tolerance of distance. A great affinity would be a
tolerance of or liking of close proximity. A lack of affinity would
be
an intolerance of or dislike of close proximity. Affinity is one of
the
components of understanding; the other components being reality and
communication.
HCOB 15.7.78R - 6 -
ATTACHMENT
REALITY:
Reality is an agreement as to what is. It is not what the individual
thinks reality is; it is what the majority agrees it is. It is the
solid
objects, the real things of life. It is the agreement upon
perceptions
and data in the physical universe. Reality is what is. It is one of
the
components of understanding.
COMMUNICATION:
The interchange of ideas or objects between two people or terminals.
More precisely the definition of communication is the consideration
and
action of impelling an impulse or particle from source point across a
distance to receipt point, with the intention of bringing into being
at
the receipt point a duplication of that which emanated from the
source
point. The formula of communication is: cause, distance, effect, with
attention and duplication. Communication by definition does not need
to
be two-way. Communication is one of the component parts of
understanding.
ARC:
A word formed from the initial letters of Affinity, Reality and
Communication, which together equate to Understanding. It is
pronounced
by stating its letters, A-R-C. To Scientologists it has come to mean
good feeling, love or friendliness.
ARC BREAK:
A sudden drop or cutting of one's affinity, reality or communication
with someone or something. It is pronounced by its letters A-R-C
break.
Upsets with people or things come about because of a lessening or
sundering of affinity, reality or communication or understanding.
PROBLEM:
A problem is a conflict arising from two opposing intentions.
Anything
which has opposing sides of equal force; it is
postulate-counter-postulate, intention-counter-intention,
terminal-counter-terminal, force-counter-force. It's one thing versus
another thing. You've got two forces or two ideas which are
interlocked
of comparable magnitude and the thing stops right there.
PRESENT TIME PROBLEM:
A specific problem that exists in the physical universe now, on which
a
person has his attention fixed.
... Any set of circumstances that so engages the attention of the
preclear that he feels he should be doing something about it instead
of being audited.
OVERT:
An overt act is an act of omission or commission which does the least
good for the least number of dynamics or the most harm to the
greatest
number of dynamics.
HCOB 15.7.78R - 7 -
ATTACHMENT
... An aggressive or destructive act by the individual against one or
more of the eight dynamics (self, family, group, mankind, animals or
plants, mest, life or the infinite). That thing which you do which
you
aren't willing to have happen to you.
WITHHOLD:
An undisclosed harmful (contra-survival) act.
A withhold is something the pc did that he isn't talking about. Any
withhold comes after an overt.
MISSED WITHHOLD:
An undisclosed contra-survival act which has been restimulated by
another but not disclosed. This is a withhold which another person
nearly found out about, leaving the person with the withhold in a
state of wondering whether his hidden deed is known or not.
REPETITIVE PROCESS:
... A process that is run over and over with the same question of the
pc.... we don't expect the auditor to do anything but state the
command
(or ask the question) with no variation, acknowledge the pc's answer
and
handle the pc origins by understanding and acknowledging what the pc
said. A process which permits the individual to examine his mind and
environment and out of it select the unimportances and importances.
FLOW:
A progress of energy between two points.
An impulse or direction of energy particles or thought or masses
between
terminals.
The progress of particles or impulses or waves from point A to Point
B.
The four flows used in processing are:
F-1, flow one, something happening to self.
F-2, flow two, doing something to another.
F-3, flow three, others doing things to others.
F-0, flow zero, self doing something to self.
ASSESS:
To choose, from a list or statements-which item or thing has the
longest read or blowdown. (In Dianetics it is choosing which item or
statement has the longest read, blowdown or pc's interest. The
longest
read usually will also have the pc's interest.)
ASSESSMENT:
An action done from a prepared list. Assessment is done by the
auditor
between the pc's bank and the meter. The auditor looks at the meter
while doing an assessment.
HCOB 15.7.78R - 8 -
ATTACHMENT
He just notes which item has the longest fall or blowdown.
Assessment isn't auditing, it is simply trying to locate something to
audit. It is the whole action of obtaining a significant item from a
pc.
EXAMINER:
Preclear Examiner. The person in a Scientology Church to whom
preclears
are sent immediately after any auditing session. The Examiner is
assigned to the duties of noting the pc's statements, TA position and
state of the needle and the pc's indicators, after session. He says
nothing to the pc during this action; he simply records the necessary
data, and acknowledges the pc's statement if one is made.
The examiner is also the person the pc sees when he wishes to
volunteer
information or make any sort of statement about his case, or if there
is
something he wants handled regarding his case.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
[?]
Type = 0
iDate=2/6/78
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=3
rDate=31/3/82
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Cramming Series 18RB
CRAMMING REPAIR ASSESSMENT LIST
IMPORTANT
Remimeo
Cram Off Hats
All Auditors
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 2 JUNE 1978RB
Remimeo RE-REVISED 31 MARCH 1982
Cram Off Hats
All Auditors
(Re-revised 31 Mar 82 to add missed withhold handlings to Items
23 & 29 and to add questions, Items 30 & 45 to the list.)
(Revisions in Script)
IMPORTANT
Cramming Series 18RB
CRAMMING REPAIR ASSESSMENT LIST
HISTORY: I recently made an important technical discovery that a
person, org or area can be totally bogged by a mis-cram or by an R/Ser
operating under the guise of a "Cramming Officer." In the particular
instance,
one R/Sing Cramming Officer had bogged an org and then a second R/Sing
Cramming Officer took over to "repair it," resulting in a nearly total
crash.
This isn't meant to be condemnatory of Cramming Officers because I
know
the vast majority do a good job and are valuable to their orgs and I do
appreciate their efforts. The above are the general circumstances which led
to
my discovery.
To remedy this, I developed the following Cramming Repair List. In
subsequent use of it, including people who had been mis-crammed elsewhere,
the
usage appeared quite miraculous.
It has been found that faulty, quicky or mis-cramming can result in
continual goofs or an apparency of out-ethics as the person isn't
correcting.
This list covers the basic errors that can occur in cramming. It has also
been
found that a Cramming Officer who has consistent overt products will mess
up
an area. This list is used to correct such cramming.
This list can be used by an Auditor in session who finds the PC has
by-passed charge on his past cramming.
It is also used when a bog or impasse has occurred during a cramming
action which the Short Cramming Repair List did not resolve, or when the
person goes sour after a cramming action.
Its main use is to clear up an org or area where it is found that one
or
more Cramming Officers have been messing it up. In such an instance, it is
applied to every past or present staff member. In such an instance
particularly, its use can result in a miraculous resurge of the org or
area.
Needless to say it can produce a remarkable resurgence in a person who has
a
history of being mis-crammed.
The list is done in a session by an Auditor or qualified Cramming
Officer who has a Qual OK to assess a prepared list and Qual OK to operate
an
E-Meter. It can be assessed Method 3 or Method 5.
HCOB 2.6.78RA - 2 -
Re-rev. 31.3.82
Auditor Instruction: In case of a wrong why, self-listing or out-
list,
handle per HCOB 11 Apr 77 LIST ERRORS CORRECTION OF and L4BRA.
In case of any read find out who and when as needed to handle the
question. If any question reads keep at it until you F/N it. F/N every item
on
the list that reads, then F/N the whole list on a final assessment of it.
In calling these items to the PC call them as questions, not as
statements. This is the case in this list or any other prepared list. Do
not
call them as statements as this will tend to evaluate for the PC and even
invalidate him.
If the list does not F/N or if the cramming repair does not seem to
be
getting anywhere, do a C/S 53 and return to and F/N the Cramming Repair
List
after you've handled the C/S 53.
NAME: ________________________________ DATE:
_________________________________
1. WAS CRAMMING DONE OVER OUT-INT? _______
(If Int is validly reading and is not reading on False or
Protest, end off and send folder to C/S. If Int is not out now,
but there is BPC on being crammed over out now, indicate the
read to get an F/N.)
2. WAS CRAMMING DONE OVER AN OUT-LISTS? _______
(Handle per HCOB 11 Apr 77 LIST ERRORS CORRECTION OF and with
an L4BRA.)
3. HAVE YOU BEEN GIVEN A WRONG WHY? _______
(Handle as in #2.)
4. DO YOU HAVE A WRONG WHY? _______
(Handle as in #2.)
5. AS A RESULT OF CRAMMING ARE YOU SELF-LISTING? _______
(Handle as in #2.)
6. DO YOU SELF-LIST? _______
(Handle as in #2.)
7. WERE YOU CRAMMED OVER OUT-RUDS? _______
(Find out which and handle E/S to F/N.)
8. DO YOU HAVE AN ARC-X? _______
(ARCU CDEINR E/S to F/N.)
9. HAVE YOU BEEN UPSET WITH SOMEONE'S HANDLING OF YOUR AREA? _______
(ARCU CDEINR E/S to F/N.)
10. HAVE YOU ARC BROKEN ANOTHER? _______
(ARCU CDEINR E/S to F/N.)
11. DO YOU HAVE A PROBLEM? _______
(Get what and E/S to F/N.)
12. HAVE YOU MADE ANY PROBLEMS FOR ANOTHER? _______
(E/S to F/N.)
HCOB 2.6.78RA - 3 -
Re-rev. 31.3.82
13. DO YOU HAVE ANY WITHHOLDS? _______
(Handle each E/S to F/N.)
14. HAVE YOU WITHHELD THAT OTHERS HAVE WITHHOLDS? _______
(Handle as W/H. E/S to F/N.)
15. HAVE YOU BEEN CRITICAL OF ANOTHER? _______
(Get prior overt. E/S to F/N.)
16. HAVE YOU COMMITTED ANY OVERTS? _______
(Handle each E/S to F/N.)
17. HAVE YOU BEEN UPSET BECAUSE SOMEONE SEEMED MAD AT YOU? _______
(ARCU CDEINR E/S to F/N.)
18. DID YOU STILL HAVE A PROBLEM WHEN YOU LEFT CRAMMING? _______
(E/S to F/N.)
19. WAS CRAMMING A PROBLEM TO YOU? _______
(E/S to F/N.)
20. DID YOU FEEL WORSE AFTER BEING CRAMMED? _______
(Ind E/S to F/N.)
21. HAVE YOU BEEN TOLD ANYTHING F/N'D WHEN YOU FELT IT HADN'T?
_______
(Find out what and ind. E/S. Handle what hadn't really F/N'd.)
22. HAVE YOU FELT SOMETHING SHOULD HAVE F/N'D WHEN THE CRAMMING
OFFICER/AUDITOR DIDN'T INDICATE IT HAD? _______
(Indicate. 2WC E/S to F/N. Rehab any O/Rs.)
28. HAVE YOU HAD MISUNDERSTOODS THAT YOU STILL MISUNDERSTOOD AT THE
END OF CRAMMING? _______
(Handle it as a missed withhold, to F/N or earlier similar missed
withhold of going past a misunderstood, to F/N. Then clear each MU
found, to F/N.)
24. HAVE MISUNDERSTOODS BEEN MISSED? _______
(Get them and handle per Word Clearing Tech.)
28. HAVE WITHHOLDS BEEN MISSED? _______
(Handle each E/S to F/N.)
26. HAS THE WRONG MATERIAL BEEN GIVEN YOU TO CLEAR UP A MISUNDERSTOOD?
_______
(Find out what. Ind E/S to W/N. Clear up any MUs.)
27. HAS NO MATERIAL BEEN GIVEN YOU TO CLEAR UP A MISUNDERSTOOD? _______
(Find out what. Ind E/S to F/N. Clear up any MUs.)
28. DO YOU HAVE MISUNDERSTOODS NOW? _______
(Find out what. Handle per Word Clearing Tech.)
29. DO YOU HAVE MISUNDERSTOODS THAT YOU HAVEN'T CLEARED UP? _______
(Handle the missed withhold of going past MUs, do F/N or
E/S to F/N. Then clear each MU uncovered, do F/N.)
HCOB 2.6.78RA - 4 -
Rev. 31.3.82
30. HAVE YOU GONE PAST MISUNDERSTOODS? _______
(Handle as above.)
31. WERE YOU MADE TO LOOK UP WORDS YOU ALREADY UNDERSTOOD? _______
(Indicate E/S to F/N.)
32. COULDN'T YOU UNDERSTAND THE CRAMMING ORDER? _______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
33. WAS A CRAMMING ORDER INVALIDATIVE? _______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
34. WAS A CRAMMING ORDER EVALUATIVE? _______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
35. HAVE YOU BEEN TOLD YOU SHOULDN'T HAVE BEEN SENT TO CRAMMING? _______
(Find out who and what. E/S to F/N.)
36. HAS THE CRAMMING OFFICER BEEN CRITICAL OF ANOTHER? _______
(Get who and what E/S to F/N. Then check for "Have you
been similarly critical?" Get MWH.)
37. HAVE YOU FELT PTS TO YOUR AREA? _______
(2WC E/S to F/N. Return folder to C/S for any needed further
handling or programming.)
38. IN CRAMMING HAS ANYBODY INVALIDATED YOU? _______
(Find out who and what. Ind E/S to F/N.)
39. IN CRAMMING HAS ANYBODY EVALUATED FOR YOU? _______
(Find out who and what. Ind E/S to F/N.)
40. HAS FALSE DATA STRIPPING BEEN MESSED UP? _______
(Find out what's been missed up and indicate the BPC going E/S
as needed to F/N. Then handle by stripping off the False Data
or Rehabbing the overrun or indicating cleaned cleans, etc.
depending on what comes up.)
41. DID SOMEONE FAIL TO CLEAN UP FALSE DATA? _______
(2WC E/S to F/N. Then program to clean up False Data as necessary
on the subjects mentioned.)
42. HAS A PRODUCT DEBUG BEEN MESSED UP? _______
(Handle with a Product Debug Repair List.)
43. WAS CRASHING MU FINDING MESSED UP? _______
(Handle with a CRMU Repair List.)
44. HAVE YOU GOOFED AND NOT TOLD ANYBODY? _______
(Find out what. Handle as a MWH. E/S to F/N.)
45. HAVE YOU GONE PAST A MISUNDERSTOOD WORD OR ABBREVIATION
IN YOUR WORK? _______
(Handle the missed withhold of going past MUs, to F/N or E/S to F/N.
Then clear each MU uncovered, to F/N.)
46. IS THERE SOME OTHER REASON FOR TROUBLE IN YOUR AREA? _______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
47. ARE YOU HAVING GENERAL CASE TROUBLE? _______
(Find out what to F/N, C/S 53 if necessary.)
HCOB 2.6.78RA - 5 -
Rev. 31.3.82
48. DID THE CRAM INTERRUPT YOUR USUAL AUDITING? _______
(Ind E/S to F/N.)
49. WERE SEVERAL CORRECTIVE ACTIONS BEING DONE ON YOU AT ONCE?
_______
(2WC E/S to F/N. Send folder to C/S for sort out and program to
complete each needed action in correct sequence.)
50. DID THE CRAMMING OFFICER RUSH YOU? _______
(2WC E/S to F/N.)
51. WAS A CRAM QUICKIED? _______
(2WC E/S to F/N. Send to clamming to complete any incomplete
cram after this list is handled.)
52. DID THE CRAMMING OFFICER FAIL TO DRILL YOU? _______
(2WC E/S to F/N. Send to cramming for any needed drilling after
this list is handled.)
53. WAS THERE NOTHING WRONG IN THE FIRST PLACE? _______
(Ind E/S to F/N.)
54. WAS THE CRAM DONE OVER SOME OTHER BY-PASSED CHARGE? _______
(Find out what and handle.)
55. WAS THIS ASSESSMENT UNNECESSARY? _______
(Ind E/S to F/N.)
56. WAS THERE SOMETHING ELSE WRONG? _______
(Find out what and handle. GF if no joy.)
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
As assisted by
Special Tech Project
Re-revisions assisted by
Senior C/S International
LRH:DM:STP:bk
Copyright $c 1978, 1981, 1982
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
As assisted by
Special Tech Project
Re-revisions assisted by
Senior C/S International
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=1/5/78
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=1
rDate=30/8/81
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Cramming Series 17R
TECH QUALITY
Remimeo
Cramming Off
C/Ses
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 1 MAY 1978R
Remimeo REVISED 30 AUGUST 1981
Cramming Off (Taken from LRH ED 140 INT)
C/Ses
(Revised to delete the mandatory 2 hours of
TRs and metering, which was part of every cram.)
(Revisions in Script)
(Ellipsis Indicates Deletion)
Cramming Series 17R
TECH QUALITY
Ref: HCOB 23 Sep 79 CANCELLATION OF DESTRUCTIVE
BTBs AND BPLs ON TRs
HCOB 18 Apr 80 TR CRITICISM
My current concern is tech quality over the world. Whereas the
majority
of auditors do a good job, there are some who don't, and it is these who
have
our reputation at stake.
The general outness has beef traced (as usual) to out-TRs and
metering.
Lack of a Cramming in Qual Divs and even lack of Qual Divs is what has
brought this about.
TRs and metering are out of the view of a C/S. He only sees what is
written on the auditor report.
A Cramming should exist in every org and every bog should cause the
auditor to be sent to Cramming on the material missed.
As TRs and metering are not visible to the C/S, it is usual to check
an
auditor's TRs and metering in Cramming whenever these are suspected and
handle
any outnesses. Auditors who receive frequent crams must tape a session or
do
a video.
A TR 1 that can't be heard (or blows the pc's head off), a TR 2 that
consists of "That didn't read. That read" and TR 4 that is pure Q and A,
plus
missed reads and by-passed F/Ns can wreck any program.
A Cramming in every org and ... verification of TRs and metering will
go
a long ways to improve tech quality.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Revisions assisted by
Research and Technical
Compilations Unit
Accepted by the
BDCSC:LRH:RTC:nc:bk BOARD OF DIRECTORS
Copyright $c 1971, 1978, 1981 of the
by L. Ron Hubbard CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED of CALIFORNIA
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Revisions assisted by
Research and Technical
Compilations Unit
Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
of CALIFORNIA
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=6/2/78
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=3
rDate=21/4/83
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN
REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM
Type = 11
iDate=6/2/78
Issue=0
Rev=1
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=1
aDate=16/3/78
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Type = 11
iDate=30/4/78
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Remimeo
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 6 FEBRUARY 1978RB
Remimeo REVISED 16 MARCH 1978
RE-REVISED 4 DECEMBER 1979
RE-REVISED 21 APRIL 1983
(Cancels: HCOB 6 Feb 78R-1 Addition of 16 Mar 78, "LSD
and the Sweat Program-Addition"; HCOB 30 Apr 78, "The
Sweat program Further Data". Re-revises and re-titles the
original bulletin of this date, "LSD and the Sweat Program".)
(Re-revised to further clarify the purpose of the Purification Rundown
and to include and emphasize that before any person is permitted onto
the Program written medical approval for the person to do the Program
must be obtained from a licensed medical practitioner.)
(Revisions in Script)
THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN
REPLACES THE SWEAT PROGRAM
Refs: HCOB 5 Nov 74 DRUGS, MORE ABOUT
HCOB 31 May 77 LSD
HCOB 25 Oct 71 DRUG DRYING OUT
HCOB 2 Jun 71 Study Series 2
Issue I CONFRONTING
(This issue has been revised to incorporate data from recent
research into the progress of cases in view of the current
environmental and drug scene, and to give the full steps of the
new purification Rundown.)
(The Purification Rundown does not supplant technology developed
and in use especially in Narconon for persons currently on drugs
and apt to experience withdrawal symptoms when taken off of them.
The Rundown would be begun only after such technology was applied.)
(While it is being published now as a holding action until the
Purification Rundown is issued as an individual package, this issue
does contain the Rundown as it has been piloted.)
(We are not concerned with handling bodies with the Purification
Rundown. Our concern is freeing the individual up spiritually. The
only dosages recommended are those classified as food. There are no
medical recommendations or claims for it. The only claim is future
spiritual improvement.)
(This data is released as a record of researches and results noted.
It cannot be construed as a recommendation of medical treatment or
medication and it is undertaken or delivered by anyone on his own
responsibility. I receive no percentage of fees for administering
this rundown and my development of it is a contribution and gift to
my friends.)
Glossary: Any words you find in this HCOB which you do not understand
can be found in a normal dictionary or in the Dianetics and Scientology
Technical Dictionary or are explained in the following text.
The plant has hit a barrier that prevents widespread clearing-drugs
and biochemical substances. These can put beings in a condition that can
prevent case gain.
HCOB 6.2.78RB - 2 -
Re-rev. 4.12.79
Re-rev. 21.4.83
That's the situation today.
What would you give for a rundown that undercut every case on the
planet
and could be administered by technicians who did not require long periods
of
training?
Sweeping breakthroughs have been made recently through my 29 year
study
of the progress of cases against the environmental factors and biochemical
aspect of our current society.
One immediate result of this is the Purification Rundown.
The purification program is a program to purify and clean out of one's
system the restimulative drug or chemical residues which could act to
prevent
case gain from Dianetics or Scientology processing. Based on the original
Sweat Out program, it is a new much more thorough and much faster version
of
that program, streamlined by the introduction of the sauna bath for
sweating,
and with a much broader use.
It should be clearly understood at the outset that the Purification
Rundown is not a substitute for any kind of processing.
Rather, because of the biochemical problem that besets society today,
it
is the undercut that has become necessary to prepare the majority of pcs
for
making optimum case gain from their processing.
In point of fact, the Purification Rundown is for anyone.
BIOCHEMICAL FACTORS
By "biochemical" is meant:
The interaction of life forms and chemical substances.
BIO means life; of living things. From the Greek "BIOS", life or way
of
life.
CHEMICAL: of or having to do with chemicals.
"Chemicals" are substances, simple or complex, which are the building
blocks of matter.
We live in a chemical oriented society.
One would be hard put to find someone in the present-day civilization
who
is not affected by this fact. The vast majority of the public is subjected
every day to the intake of food preservatives and other chemical poisons
including atmospheric poisons, pesticides and the like. Added to this are
the
pain pills, tranquilizers and other medical drugs used and prescribed by
doctors. And we have as well the widespread use of marijuana, LSD, Angel
Dust
and other street drugs which contribute heavily to the scene.
I have even found that there is such a thing as the "Drug
personality".
Drugs can apparently change the attitude of a person from his original
personality to one secretly harboring hostilities and hatreds he does not
permit to show on the surface. While this possibly is not always the case,
it
does establish a linkage between drugs and increasing difficulties with
crime,
production, program execution and the modern breakdown of the social and
industrial culture.
These factors are all part of the biochemical problem.
WHY "PURIFICATION"?
We have known since 1968 that it is a mistake to try to do mental and
spiritual handling on somebody who has been on drugs.
HCOB 6.2.78RB - 3 -
Re-rev. 4.12.79
Re-rev. 21.4.83
People who have been on drugs do not make case gain until the drugs are
handled. In the early '70s the Drug Rundown was developed and put into
broad
use and it included the auditing out of drugs, medicines and alcohol.
In 1977 I issued HCOB 1 May 77 in which I stated that LSD apparently
stays in the system, lodging in the tissues and mainly the fatty tissues of
the body and is liable to go into action again, giving the person
unpredictable "trips".
The "restimulation" experienced by people who had been on LSD appeared
to
act as if they had just taken more LSD.
As it has been stated that it only takes 1/millionth of an ounce of
LSD
to produce a drugged condition and because it is basically wheat rust which
simply cuts off circulation, my original thinking on this over the years
was
that LSD sticks around in the body. That basically is the idea underlying
the
original Sweat Program. The remedy given was to sweat it out.
From the most recent research developments, it now appears that:
Not only LSD but other chemical poisons and toxins, preservatives,
pesticides, etc., as well as medical drugs and the long list of
heavy
street drugs (Angel Dust, heroin, marijuana, etc.) can lodge in the
tissues and remain in the body for years.
Even medicinal drugs such as diet pills, codeine, novocaine and
others
have gone into "restim" years after they were taken and had
supposedly
been eliminated from the body.
Thus it seems that any or all of these hostile biochemical substances
can
get caught up in the tissues and their accumulation probably disarranges
the
biochemistry and fluid balance of the body.
These substances must be eliminated if the person is to get the most
possible gains from mental and spiritual processing.
The operating rule is that mental actions and even biophysical
processes
(Objectives, etc.) do not work in the presence of drugs.
Drug residues can stop any mental help. They also stop a person's
life!
THE ONLY REASON WE ARE HANDLING DRUGS AND DRUG DEPOSITS IN THE BODY IS
SO
THAT THE INDIVIDUAL CAN THEN GET CASE GAIN
APPARENT GAIN OCCURS BY CLEANING UP THE BODY AND CAN BE SEEN AS AN END
ALL IN ITSELF. THIS IS NOT THE CASE.
DRUGS AND BIOCHEMICAL SUBSTANCES CAN PREVENT CASE GAIN FROM OCCURRING.
Only when we have accomplished the biochemical handling can we then go
onto the next step, the biophysical handling (the relationship of the being
to
the body, the environment or universe) and then onto mental and spiritual
processing.
When you try to move these around and put them out or sequence you get
losses.
EXAMPLES: Actual tests have demonstrated that a person who has been on
heavy drugs requires up to ten times the time to obtain a result which a
non-drug person attained in only 6 to 8 hours of processing. Early tests
are
also showing that the
HCOB 6.2.78RB - 4 -
Re-rev. 4.12.79
Re-rev. 21.4.83
learning rate of a person who has been on drugs is much lower than a non-
drug
person. The memory of a person who has been on drugs is such as to remove
him
from fear of consequences. Rate or case gain is enormously retarded by
toxic
substances such as drugs.
The reason we can make a breakthrough with this is because of the
"Theta-MEST theory" covered in the text SCIENCE OF SURVIVAL. Older
scientific
thought believed all life came from matter, a belief which goes back to the
ancient Egyptian priests and remains today the dominant belief of chemists,
psychologists and psychiatrists.
A life form is a combination of life itself and the physical universe.
Certain elements in the physical universe are highly antipathetic to life
and
when introduced into life forms, inhibit proper functioning and even
destroy.
The being (thetan) of course has potential pictures of these toxic
substances and states and as long as they are in the body, these actual
substances can restimulate a being. When they are gone from the body, the
constant restimulation can cease. So it is actually a spiritual action that
is
being done.
A Case Supervisor should be aware of the fact that he is wasting his
time
if he ignores the above.
The removal of these life-hostile chemical substances from the body of
any person apparently speeds, and in some cases even makes possible, case
gain. It is even worth doing for its own sake.
The Purification Rundown, therefore, is for anyone.
There is probably not a pc today who is outside this requirement.
THE PURIFICATION RUNDOWN
The Rundown is a tightly supervised regimen which includes:
Exercise
Sauna Sweat Out
Nutrition, including vitamins,
minerals, etc., as well as oil intake
A properly ordered personal schedule.
An OCA and IQ Test are given the person before starting the Rundown
and
upon its completion.
With each of these points kept in and the introduction of the Sauna
Bath
for sweating out, it is a refined and streamlined version of the original
Sweat Out and can be completed in a fraction of the time Sweat Outs have
taken
in the past. properly scheduled, with exercise and sauna sweat out done 5
hours a day the program can be completed by many in two weeks time. Some
pcs
may require more than that, some less.
When The Purification Rundown Is Done: The Purification Rundown could be
considered mandatory to any person who has been on LSD or heavy drugs or
who
has a heavy medical drug history. Such a pc is not likely to get very fast
case gain without it.
There are many pcs who have had hundreds or hours of auditing,
including
Drug Rundowns, who have never done a sweat out of any kind. While
tremendous
gains have been made by such pcs which are not to be invalidated, there is
no
doubt but what a large
HCOB 6.2.78RB - 5 -
Re-rev. 4.12.79
Re-rev. 21.4.83
majority of them would benefit by the Purification Rundown and benefit even
further from future auditing as a result.
Additionally, there are those who have done sweat out programs in the
past who have not experienced all the gain from it possible, or who have
skimped or are incomplete on sweat outs.
In all cases such as those above, it is a matter for C/S adjudication
as
to whether or not the person would now do the program.
One would not interrupt a case that was running smoothly and making
excellent gains progressively. One would not interrupt an ongoing auditing
action to throw in such a program randomly.
On the other hand, where a pc is consistently not making the expected
gains from his processing, or is not continuing up the Bridge on his
Grades, a
C/S might suspect the need for this program and it now becomes a part of
the
tech of C/Sing to take this into consideration.
In the case of a pc who has started and is continuing up the Grades,
it
would require the correct programming.
As the Purification Rundown is always done under C/S supervision, it
becomes a matter for the C/S to decide.
The Purification Rundown And Auditing: Originally, sweat outs were used to
debar people from processing, so they were then permitted to be done during
processing, which was not the most optimum solution.
Today, as the Purification Rundown via sauna can take as little as two
weeks, it is not done concurrently with auditing. The program is done by
itself, intensively, to completion under the daily supervision of the C/S.
WARNING
This program can be strenuous and should not be undertaken by anyone
who
has a weak heart or who is anemic. It is therefore absolutely essential
that
the following rules are strictly adhered to:
1. Any person, before being put on the purification Rundown, must first
have
written medical okay to do the program from an informed licensed medical
practitioner. The C/S, the Medical Liaison Officer (MLO) and the
Purification Program I/C must ensure this prerequisite is kept in.
2. The MLO must ensure that no one who has a weak heart or who is anemic is
allowed onto the program. These points must be checked by a reliable
licensed medical doctor before the person starts the program. People
wishing to do the Purification RD who have a known heart condition or
high
blood pressure or who are anemic, and even those with certain kidney
conditions must do a program which is of a much lower gradient. An
exercise
program and nutrition can be worked out for them with a Medical Doctor.
3. Blood pressure checks and tests for anemia are given periodically as the
person goes through the program and if any signs of a weak heart or
anemia
should appear, the person is taken off the Rundown and handled
medically.
HCOB 6.2.78RB - 6 -
Re-rev. 4.12.79
Re-rev. 21.4.83
EXERCISE AND SAUNA
In order to flush the poisons and chemical substances out of the body,
the following actions are done.
1. OUTSIDE RUNNING.
The first action is outside running. The purpose of this is NOT to
generate sweat but to get the blood circulating and the system functioning
so
that impurities held in the system can be released and are pumped out.
Running increases the circulation throughout the whole body, thus: (a)
it carries out cell waste more rapidly and (b) causes the circulation to go
deeper into the muscles and tissues so those areas which have been stagnant
can now get rid of the accumulation of biochemical deposits and, in the
case
of LSD, the "residual crystals" which have been stored.
Running is done on a daily basis once the person has been assigned to
this program. It is done in a rubberized or vinyl-type sweat suit.
The running should be done on a gradient. If you are so breathless
that
you can't talk to another while you are running, then you are straining too
much, so cut the gradient.
2. SWEATING IN THE SAUNA.
The second action, following the running, is sweating. A person goes
into
the sauna to sweat. The impurities can now be dispelled from the body and
leave the system through the pores.
A sweat suit is NEVER worn in the sauna as this acts as insulation
much
the same as when a diver wears a wet suit to insulate against the cold of
the
sea. Wearing a sweat suit in the sauna would insulate against the heat and
so
inhibit and curtail sweating.
Thus far, the use of a dry sauna has proved to be the most successful
in
inducing profuse sweating on most people. It is possible that some people
may
sweat more in a wet sauna; it may be that it is an individual matter and it
has not yet been fully tested. There is no regulation on the Rundown that
outlaws the use of a wet sauna. Whichever type of sauna is employed, the
whole
idea is to use the system which permits the person to sweat the most.
Sweating in the sauna is done at temperatures ranging anywhere from
140
degrees to 180 degrees. It is a matter of what temperature the person can
take. Usually, but not always, a person beginning the Rundown will start at
a
lower temperature and work up. Then as he progresses he will find he can
take
increasing degrees of heat.
On the Purification Rundown, five hours a day are spent on a
combination
of running and sweating. There are no arbitraries set as to exact time
limits
for each, but the bulk of the period would probably be best spent in the
sauna
after the person had Rotten his circulation up with running. One would not
stint on the running, however, as the most benefit is obtained from the
sweating when the circulation has been worked up so that the impurities are
ready to be flushed out.
Running and sauna sweat out should be done with another person, as
restimulation of past drugs, medicines, even anesthetics, etc., can and
often
does occur, as the toxins get sweated out. This can include the
restimulation
of a full-blown "trip" from LSD or other drugs one may have taken. It is a
safeguard, therefore, to be accompanied by a partner or twin.
HCOB 6.2.78RB - 7 -
Re-rev. 4.12.79
Re-rev. 21.4.83
Salt and Potassium: Salt (sodium chloride) is not mandatory for every
individual on the program. It is only necessary as a treatment it the
symptoms
of salt depletion (heat exhaustion) occur. These are clammy skin,
tiredness,
weakness, headache, sometimes cramps, nausea, dizziness, sometimes vomiting
or
fainting.
As potassium is lost in sweating, some of the above symptoms can be
from
potassium depletion. So, if salt does not handle the above symptoms, then
one
would switch to either potassium gluconate tablets or "salt substitute"
which
is mainly potassium.
Salt and potassium must be available to anyone who is on the
Purification
Rundown. Ideally, they would be located very near the sauna, clearly
labeled.
Liquids: While on this program, it is important that one drink plenty of
water which greatly assists in flushing and cleansing the system out.
Additionally, with all the sweating done in the sauna it would be dangerous
not to replenish body fluids.
PERSONAL SCHEDULE
It is important that a person on the Purification Rundown maintains a
properly-ordered personal schedule.
This means that once one has started on the program he must stick to
it
sensibly and not skip days or do it in a random fashion.
It also means that one should get enough sleep.
If one proceeds through the program in an orderly fashion it will be
faster and more effective.
NUTRITION
When we speak of nutrition we are not talking about food, as such. We
are
talking about vitamins and minerals as well, as these are vital to proper
nutrition and vital to the effectiveness of this Rundown. We are not,
however,
talking about "diet" in the over-used sense of the word.
Diet and Food Fads
There are NO diets required on this Rundown.
The person simply eats what he normally eats and he should make sure
he
gets some vegetables and that the vegetables aren't cooked to death.
Vegetables contain a lot of minerals and fiber as well as some vitamins
necessary to his recovery.
We are not food faddists. However, there is plenty of food faddism
going
on in society and you can easily start such a fad, so this must be watched
on
the Purification Rundown. If we don't watch it on all this we'll have
people
eating banana fronds split into diamonds and star shapes and blessed by
some
Deity or other. Or a fad of "three lettuce leaves criss-crossed with two
slabs of peanut butter an absolute must 18 times a day" as the only food a
person can have.
Food is subject to becoming very faddist and frankly people know very
little about it.
I wrote an essay on this subject (HCOB 25 Mar 75 DIET, THEORY OF A
NATURAL DIET) to the effect that nobody has ever isolated the proper diet
for
Homo Sapiens. It gives the formula of
HCOB 6.2.78RB - 8 -
Re-rev. 4.12.79
Re-rev. 21.4.83
how one would go about finding the exact and proper diet. It tells you that
all this diet faddism is based on no data.
So, there is no thought here of putting the person on any kind of
special
diet at all. There are no restrictions on what one may eat. We are not even
trying to preach against toxic foods or campaign against diet abuses or
junk
foods or anything of that sort.
We are only trying to handle the accumulation of impurities built up
in
the body. If you wanted to defend your body against ill future impurities
then
that is another program and not part of this one.
What is part of this scene is that a person will need certain
nutrition
in the form of vitamin intake and minerals.
One follows his normal eating habits. There are, however, some
additions
tn the normal eating habits which consist of taking a quantity of "All
Blend"
oil each day, secondly, drinking lots of water to help flush out the system
and thirdly, ensuring that the vitamin and mineral intake is adequate.
To put a person on a diet different than that to which he is
accustomed
is to introduce a sudden change in the midst of these other changes. A
change
of diet might be just one too many changes and is an additive to this
Rundown.
Oil
There is an oil called "All Blend" which has the four essential oils
in
it (soy, walnut, peanut and safflower oil) which is available in the US in
health food stores. If this type of oil is not obtainable elsewhere, one
could
blend it from these four nils in the proper amounts, or find an adequate
substitute. "All Blend" oil would be best but any oil used must be
cold-pressed and polyunsaturated. The oil must be kept refrigerated so that
it
does not go rancid.
Toxic substances tend to lock up mainly, but not exclusively, in the
fat
tissue of the body. (There is no such thing as a fat cell.) The theory,
then,
is that one could replace the fat tissues that hold these accumulations.
The
body will actually tend to hold onto something it is short of. Thus, if you
try to get rid of something it is short of, it won't give it up. So, in the
matter of oil, if the person takes some oil the body might possibly
exchange
the good oil for the bad fat in the body. That is the basic theory.
It is a theory of exchange. It is based on the Have-Waste formulas and
processes which were extant in Scientology in the late '50s. That whole
body
of data applies to this oil's scene.
(Ref: PAB No. 123 THE REALITY SCALE
1 Nov 57 Vol III, pg 136
HCOB 29 May 58 Special Bulletin STANDARD CLEAR PROCEDURE
AND AN EXPERIMENTAL ROAD: CLEARING
BY VALENCES, Vol III, pg 273
SCIENTOLOGY 8-8008, page 117
ASSOCIATE NEWSLETTER NO. 2, 1953, ca. early May,
Vol 1, page 330
ASSOCIATE NEWSLETTER NO. 7, 1953, ca. late July,
Vol 1, page 412)
If one wants somebody to clean up the fat tissue in the body, he had better
give the body some fat in order to make up for the fat tissues the body is
now
releasing or changing. The effort is to get the body to take good oil or
fat
in exchange for the
HCOB 6.2.78RB - 9 -
Re-rev. 4.12.79
Re-rev. 21.4.83
had fat it is holding onto. In this way we have some chance of getting the
body to release fatty tissue which is impregnated with toxic substances.
How Much Oil?
The exact quantity of oil needed by the person on the Rundown has not
been definitely established, but it is very likely somewhere between two
tablespoonsful and a half a cup. One tablespoonful of oil is not going to
accomplish much. Too little oil won't let the body substitute the fat
tissue.
If too much is given it can cause diarrhea. One way to test for the right
amount of oil for the person would be to put him on a scale and keep a
close
check on his weight. This should be done routinely in any event when a
person
is on the Purification Rundown. If the fat is being replaced in the body
despite the intake of oil then the weight will not go up. If the body is
simply assimilating the oil, with no exchange in fat tissue, the weight
will
go up. Change in weight would tend to indicate whether or not the body was
exchanging old fat tissue for new fat tissue or simply adding new fat
tissue.
All people, be they fat or thin, have some fatty tissue. Some of
course
have more fat stored in their bodies than others. On this program we simply
want to get rid of the fat that contains the toxic substances, we are not
even
trying to make people lose weight.
(Worth mentioning here is also the fact, particularly in regard to
thin
people, that while toxic substances lock up mainly in fat tissue it does
not
mean that the person cannot have drug deposits inside cells.)
One could not expect the results that can be achieved on the
Purification
Rundown without sufficient oil intake.
Nutritional Deficiencies
Having been an early discoverer and instigator of vitamin therapy over
the past 29 years, I know whereof I speak on the subject of nutritional
deficiencies. My work covering vitamins and deficiencies, stimulants and
depressants and the field of biochemistry goes back to the spring of 1950.
Though I have been interested in vitamins primarily only as they might
aid, speed or assist auditing, my research along this line has been
extensive.
This is not to devalue the work and contributions of others in the
nutritional
fields.
It takes a mere skimming of the surface of this subject, however, to
recognize that the Purification Rundown will not be effective in the face
of a
vitamin or mineral deficiency in the person.
One of the things that toxins and drugs do is create nutritional
deficiencies in the body in the form of vitamin and mineral deficiencies.
Obviously a C deficiency, a B Complex deficiency and a Niacin deficiency
are
brought about by drugs. There may be other deficiencies that we are not
aware
of at this time. But that list is certain.
Also, alcohol, for example, depends for its effects on a person being
able to burn up B1. When it burns up all the B1 in the system the person
goes
into DTs (delirium tremens) and nightmares.
In the case of other toxic substances the probability exists that
other
vitamins besides B1 are burned up. What we seem to have hit on here is that
the LSD and street drugs burn up not
HCOB 6.2.78RB - 10 -
Re-rev. 4.12.79
Re-rev. 21.4.83
only B1 and B Complex (which we assume they do) but also create a
deficiency
in Niacin in the body and that they possibly depend on Niacin (one of the B
Complex vitamins) for their effect.
It is easily seen that there is a wide range of toxic substances which
create nutritional deficiencies.
It is quite vital that any vitamin or mineral deficiency is being
handled
while the person is on this Rundown.
In the piloting and development of the Purification Rundown, the most
effective handling for this was found to be starting the person on the
following:
Vitamin A-approximately 5000 IU per day.
Vitamin B Complex-approximately 2 caps per day. Ensure the Vitamin B2
and B6 are balanced (approximately the same amount of each).
Vitamin B1 -- special additional amounts of B1 are required, 250 - 500
mg
or greater daily, depending on the amount of Niacin given.
Vitamin C -- 250 - 1000 mg daily, depending upon the person's
tolerance.
(As Vitamin C can cause stomach problems or diarrhea, each person's
tolerance
must be worked out.)
Vitamin C has to be increased in proportion to the Niacin given.
Records
exist wherein Vitamin C has become so deficient in a drug user that he used
up
tens of thousands of milligrams per day before he began to eliminate any.
Vitamin C deficiencies result in scurvy. "Live C" from raw onions or raw
potatoes is sometimes necessary in addition to synthetic C and were the
traditional remedies for scurvy.
Vitamin D-approximately 400 IU daily.
Vitamin E-approximately 800 IU daily.
Niacin -- 100 mg daily to begin.
It is then increased gradiently to as high as 5000 mg. Particularly B1
and C have to keep pace with it as it is increased in dosage.
Cal-Mag-one glass daily, at least.
Multi-Minerals -- (a balanced combination of minerals).
These would then be increased proportionately according to need and/or
Niacin increase as the person progressed on the Rundown.
A person may have certain vitamin deficiencies which are not handled
by
the above. When he routes onto the Purification Rundown he should be sent
to a
Medical Doctor who would determine what, if any, additional vitamin
deficiencies he might have. Any such not covered in the above list would
then
be handled with specific supplements for those deficiencies.
Vitamins would be taken after meals or with yoghurt. If taken on an
empty
stomach they could cause stomach burn.
HCOB 6.2.78RB - 11 -
Re-rev. 4.12.79
Re-rev. 12.4.83
NIACIN
Niacin, as one of the B Complex vitamins, is essential to nutrition.
It
is so vital to the effectiveness of the Purification Rundown that it
requires
some extensive mention here.
It can produce some startling and in the end very beneficial results
when
taken properly on the Rundown, along with the other necessary vitamins and
minerals in sufficient and proportionate quantities and along with proper
running and sweat out.
Its effects can be quite dramatic so one should understand what Niacin
is
and does and have a good R-factor on it when starting the Rundown. Taken in
sufficient quantities it appears to break up and unleash LSD, marijuana and
other drugs and poisons from the tissues and cells. It can rapidly release
LSD
crystals into the system and send a person who has taken LSD on a trip.
(One
fellow who had done the earlier sweat out for a period of months and who
believed he had no more LSD in his system took 100 mg of Niacin and
promptly
turned on a restimulation of a full blown LSD trip!)
Running and sweating must be done in conjunction with taking Niacin to
ensure the toxic substances it releases actually do get flushed out of the
body.
Niacin: Background History
Niacin's biochemical reaction is my own private, personal discovery.
In
the middle of the 1950s, I was doing work on radiation and I worked out
that
it must be Niacin that operated on radiation. I was recently told by a
doctor
that the Dianazene formula of that time is remarkably workable today.
Niacin runs out radiation. It will often cause a very hot flush and
prickly, itchy skin which can last up to an hour or longer. It may also
bring
on chills or make a person feel tired.
The outpoint in medical thinking has been that they thought the Niacin
itself turned on a flush. So they invented something called Niacinamide to
keep from turning on this flush. Niacin all by its lonesome does not turn
on
any flush. What it starts to do is immediately run out sunburn or
radiation.
So the Niacinamide they invented is worthless and it should be mentioned
that
it is.
In 1973 someone got a Nobel Prize for curing insanity with Niacin, but
it
was fairly marked that he didn't know the facts of what was actually
happening
because it was then promptly abandoned as people found that prolonged
quantities of Niacin "gave very bad side effects". The truth of the matter
is
that if one continues Niacin, always along with the other necessary
vitamins
in proper amounts, the bad effects will vanish. In other words, the work I
did
on this was picked up and misapplied and then abandoned. This is the
background history of Niacin.
Now more recently doctors in megavitamin research have been
administering
Niacin to get people through withdrawal symptoms or get them over bad drug
kicks and they have been using enormous doses of, for example, 5000 mg.
I have no personal knowledge that such enormous doses are necessary
for
handling drugs. It is very possible that, given the combination of all the
points on the Purification Rundown, many people would be able to handle
drugs
with lesser amounts of Niacin, something under 5000 mgs.
HCOB 6.2.78RB - 12 -
Re-rev. 4.12.79
Re-rev. 21.4.83
Niacin Theory
In theory, Niacin apparently does not do anything by itself. It is
simply interacting with Niacin deficiencies which already exist in the
cellular structure. It doesn't turn on allergies; it runs out allergies.
Evidently anything that Niacin does is the result of running out and
running
through past deficiencies.
CAUTION: The manifestations Niacin produces can be quite horrifying.
Some of the somatics and manifestations the person may turn on are not just
somatics in lots of cases, in my experience. I have seen a full blown case
of
skin cancer turn on and run out. So, a person can turn on skin cancer with
this and if that should happen if Niacin is continued the skin cancer has
run
out completely.
Other things that may turn on are hives, flu symptoms, gastroenteritis
(inflammation of the mucous membrane of the stomach and intestine), aching
bones, upset stomach or a fearful or terrified condition. There seems to be
no
limit to the variety of phenomena that may occur with Niacin. If it is
there
to turn on by Niacin it apparently will do so with Niacin.
The two vital and proven facts here are:
1. When the Niacin was carried on until these things discharged they did
run
out, as they will do. (Sometimes people chicken out on it and don't
finish
the course and it leaves them hung up. This should not be allowed to
happen.)
IT IS A MATTER OF RECORD THAT WHAT TURNS IT ON WILL TURN IT OFF WHERE
NIACIN IS CONCERNED.
2. When the Niacin dosage was increased and the whole lot of the rest of
the
vitamins being taken was also increased proportionately, the Niacin
itself,
taken in large amounts, did not create a vitamin deficiency.
Increasing Niacin and Other Vitamin Quantities
Most persons who have done the Purification Rundown started Niacin at
100
mgs a day (some took lesser amounts, depending upon tolerance) and
increased
the dosage as they progressed.
The best results were obtained when Niacin was taken all at one time,
not
split up during the day. Taken with water on an empty stomach it can be
very
upsetting. It is found to be best taken after a meal or with yoghurt or
milk.
To increase the dosage, a specific quantity of Niacin was administered
each day until the effect that dosage produced diminished. One would then,
next day, up the dosage on a gradient, say in amounts of 100 mg. In this
way
you get an overlap of the old dosage becoming useless and the new dosage
being
needed. This tended to speed up the action considerably when continued each
time the effect of the dosage diminished.
The other vitamins would have to be increased proportionately tn
Niacin
at the same time the Niacin is increased as they are interacting in the
deficiencies and more are needed.
It was found essential that C, B1 and other B vitamins need to be
given
in ratio to the Niacin being fed. In other words, as you up the Niacin you
would up the B1 and the B Complex. And also is the Niacin is upped, the
Vitamin C would be upped. These things would have to be kept in ratio.
HCOB 6.2.78RB - 13 -
Re-rev. 4.12.79
Re-rev. 21.4.83
The theory here is that one, by overdosing one vitamin, can create a
deficiency artificially of another vitamin. This is a principle I hit upon
as
early as 1950 and proved it. You can actually create a deficiency in C by
administering B and Calcium. All you have to do is pump those things to the
guy in very very heavy dosages and he will develop the deficiency
characteristics of C. His teeth begin to hurt. Then when you give him C the
manifestations go away. In other words, an overdose of X and Y can
apparently
create a deficiency in vitamin Z.
The reason for all this is that a vitamin is making certain changes in
the body and these changes to occur fully also require the additional
vitamin.
But that additional vitamin isn't there. So it gives the manifestation of
being in deficiency. All of this is my own private theory; it isn't
anywhere
else and it hasn't been subjected to tremendous and intensive research. But
I
sure can turn on a Vitamin C deficiency in anybody by overadministering B
and
Calcium.
In other words, vitamin rations would have to be in preportion to one
another.
MINERALS
Between 1945 and 1973 I studied the endocrine system. In 1973 it
seemed
that minerals and trace minerals operating in the blood stream and
circulated
by other body fluids were a key to glandular interactions. The theory is:
Every gland in the body specializes in one or more minerals and actually
that
is how they make themselves interact one with another. The endocrine system
of
the body monitors the endocrine system of the body apparently through
minerals.
As various drugs upset the whole endocrine system of the body you can
see
that the moment you start administering vitamins and sweat out and things
like
that you're going to get a mineral demand in the body. Therefore, there
would
need to be certain mineral dosages right along with the rest of this
package.
The principle here is that by giving one or two vitamins in excess
amount
you can create a nutritional deficiency of another vitamin which isn't
being
given or isn't being given in enough quantity.
Thus, what could slow down the Purification Rundown and make it appear
unflat would be a nutritional failure-a failure to flank the Niacin on
either side by sufficient amounts of the other needed vitamins and minerals
in
proportion and a food intake which includes vegetables and oil.
In such a case one would be looking at created nutritional
deficiencies-not conditions which were there to begin with to be run out.
Not knowing these things is probably what made the medics earlier
believe
that Niacin had side effects. The side effects were probably somatics and
manifestations half run out and deficiencies created by not flanking Niacin
with the other vitamins and minerals and oils necessary to cause a rebuild.
CAL-MAG
Calcium is a must where any healing or exchange process is involved as
it
is a basic building block. But more important, it is calcium which affects
the
nervous system. I do not know the total relationship between calcium and
toxic
substances (and neither does anyone else) but it actually exists. The
rationale back of
HCOB 6.2.78RB - 14 -
Re-rev. 4.12.79
Re-rev. 21.4.83
this is that calcium in deficiency sets a person up for spasms. Nerve
spasms
occur in the absence of calcium. A person who thinks he is in high tension
or
something of the sort may simply have a calcium deficiency.
Calcium would be administered in company with magnesium. Magnesium
itself has been proven necessary to keep the nerves smoothed out. The
proven
ratio is one half the quantity of magnesium to the quantity of calcium.
Something else odd about calcium is that it has to have an acidic base
to
operate in. If the system is too alkaline the calcium will not release the
positive ion which makes it possible for the calcium to operate in the
cellular structure and go through the vein walls and the intestinal walls
and
so forth. In other words, in an alkaline system calcium is ineffective and
inactive. So this brings us up to vinegar, which would add the acidic base.
With Calcium, Magnesium and vinegar, in their correct quantities, in water
exactly per the recipe, we have Cal-Mag. That is what "Cal-Mag" is and what
it
does. I developed and worked this out in 1973 against the very best
biochemical background and references and tests.
Calcium and Magnesium can be taken in order to prevent sore muscles.
Cal-Mag has been found to have the added benefit of balancing out the
Vitamin
B1 taken, as Vitamin B1 taken without calcium can cause serious teeth
problems
due to causing an imbalance of vitamins and minerals.
The Cal-Mag formula, as given in HCOB 5 Nov 74 DRUGS, MORE ABOUT is
repeated here:
1. Put one level tablespoon of Calcium Gluconate in a normal sized
glass.
2. Add Ѕ level teaspoon of Magnesium Carbonate.
3. Add 1 tablespoon of cider vinegar (at least 5% acidity).
4. Stir it well.
5. Add Ѕ glass of boiling water and stir until all the powder is
dissolved and the liquid is clear. (If this doesn't occur it could be
from poor grade or old Magnesium Carbonate.)
6. Fill the remainder of glass with lukewarm or cold water and cover.
It will stay good for 2 days.
NOTE: There is a warning about Cal-Mag. Variations from the above can
produce an unsuccessful mess that can taste pretty horrible. It can be made
incorrectly so that it doesn't dissolve and become the most unpalatable,
ghastly stuff anybody ever fed anybody. Possibly made incorrectly it is
even
unworkable. Made correctly it is a very clear liquid, quite pleasant to
take
and palatable. So the directions should be followed very explicitly to
produce
a proper Cal-Mag, pleasant to take and very beneficial.
MANIFESTATIONS
Various manifestations turn up an the purification program and these
can
vary widely from person to person. Anything from insect bites to a full
blow
restimulation of an LSD trip may turn on and these oil simply run
themselves
not and blow as the program is contained. If there are heavy drugs to be
flushed
HCOB 6.2.78RB - 15 -
Re-rev. 4.12.79
Re-rev. 21.4.83
out it is not uncommon for the person to experience a restim of whatever
the
effects of the drug or medicine were when he first took it. Old injuries or
old somatics may turn on, flare up for a brief spell and vanish.
It is important to note that a given manifestation which turns on may
turn on and vanish wholly or partly in any given day. Then it may turn on
again the following day but less. If one increases the vitamin and mineral
dosage at this time, the manifestation will turn on again. But it will be
less. These things don't become more and more violent day by day, they
become
less and less day by day, providing the whole Purification Rundown in
continued properly. At length, the vitamins, minerals, etc. an longer turn
the
manifestation on and it is gone. There is evidence that no amount of
vitamins
and mineral dosage above a certain final level for the given individual
will
turn the manifestation on again. The trick is to take a proper gradient
with
the vitamins and minerals. When you go out gradient they can turn on
awfully
hard so don't get in a rush. And don't chicken out either.
Emotions that have been shut off may start to reappear. the person can
blow through stupidity and become more aware. Be may find he can do actions
more easily and consequences start to take on a new meaning to him. Memory
can
return.
At first some individuals may feel other determinism about doing this
program but that will gradually change and he or she will want to do it on
his
own determinism and for his or her own welfare. Most individuals embrace it
with enthusiasm.
As long as the precautions listed earlier are well taken and the
procedure followed exactly as given, the solution to any manifestation is
to
continue the program until the phenomenon blows. The manifestations become
less and less frequent until finally they cease altogether.
TRIPS
If a person is having trips during the program, he should take a lot
of
extra Vitamin B Complex and Vitamin C in correct ratio to other vitamins as
these aid the body, especially the liver in getting rid of the drugs in the
system. Normally the vitamins and minerals in the program are sufficient
for
the body to handle the residual drugs which come out.
ADMINISTRATION
The advices on the administration of the Purification Rundown are
taken
from the practical experience of large pilot projects. They should not be
lightly disregarded. One may find that people administering the program
tend
to enter their own fads and hobbies into it, or needing it themselves,
avoid
delivering it. The Purification Rundown runs best when purely delivered.
Any org or person administering it should:
A. Get a signed release or quit claim from the person as is usual.
B. See that the person understands that the action is being undertaken to
help
free him as a spirit and is not a medical treatment.
C. No medication of a medical nature; vitamins, minerals and oils are food.
HCOB 6.2.78RB - 16 -
Re-rev. 4.12.79
Re-rev. 21.4.83
D. Brief the person as to what he can expect and why, making no promises.
E. Getting his promise to follow orders and complete the Rundown and not
blow
it because it's uncomfortable or because he is lazy or has other
appointments.
Testing
A battery of tests should be done on the individual and should be dune
before and after the Purification Rundown. These would include OCA, IQ, any
learning rate tests that may exist and any other tests which would give a
before and after picture of the person. These of course, include weight,
blood pressure, etc.
The purification program must be tightly supervised to be successful.
The
program is done under the close supervision of the Medical Officer, the
purification program In Charge and the Case Supervisor, as well as a
Medical
Doctor as required.
Purification Program In Charge
The In Charge will be the D of P (for org public) or the DPE er other
appointed person (for org staff). The Program I/C must closely supervise
each
person's progress on the program and must ensure the program is done
faithfully and with all points of the program in. When supervising a large
group, the Program I/C is assisted by one or more Deputies and a
Purification
Program Admin, who maintains the progress board, handles filing in pc
folders
and transports folders to and from the C/S.
The person's daily schedule must be set up so that he is always
running
or sweating in the sauna with at least one other person.
It is important, especially when a group of people are doing the
Purification Program at the same time, that musters and roll calls are held
by
the program I/C or his Deputy. Where individuals are not doing the program
in
a group, they should twin up and each twin assumes responsibility for the
other and sees that he does the program fully.
Anyone not keeping to his schedule or the program as written is
handled
by the program I/C with warnings, cramming, chits, or ethics, as needed.
THE PROGRAM I/C IS RESPONSIBLE FOR SEEING THAT EVERYONE PARTICIPATING
IN
THE PROGRAM GETS THROUGH IT CORRECTLY AND COMPLETELY AND ATTESTS TO IT UPON
COMPLETION.
Medical Doctor, Medical Liaison Officer
Before beginning the purification program, a person must first get
written medical okay from a licensed medical practitioner. This is usually
handled by the Medical Liaison Officer (MLO) or Medical Officer (MO) in the
org in liaison with the Purification Program I/C. The MLO, when sending the
person to a Medical Doctor for such okay, must ensure the Medical Doctor is
informed about the Program and that the exam would include ensuring the
person's blood pressure is normal and that there is no evidence of a weak
heart, anemia, kidney condition or other condition which would prevent the
person from doing the Program. Forms for such medical approval would be
supplied by the organization.
In the case of a person who cannot go onto the Program for medical
reasons,
the MLO should see if a more gradient program can be worked out for the
person
with a Medical Doctor, and the Case Supervisor must be informed of this.
HCOB 6.2.78RB - 17 -
Re-rev. 4.12.79
Re-rev. 21.4.83
While on the program, the person reports daily and, once the folder
has
been C/Sed, it is the Medical Liaison Officer (or the Program I/C) who
issues
him his vitamins, minerals, niacin and oil. Blood pressure and anemia
checks
are re-done as needed And it is the MLO's responsibility to see there are
done
as required. The Medical Liaison Officer also writes up any medical reports
on the person that are needed from her hat and ensures that these and any
reports from the Medical Doctor are immediately filed in the person's pc
folder for the C/S to inspect.
Case Supervisor
C/S okay to begin the program is required. The C/S then continues to
supervise the progress of each person on the program on a daily basis.
It must be noted that this is a fully C/Sed action.
Daily Reports
Each program participant writes a daily report which includes:
1. How long he jogged.
2. How long he sweated in the sauna.
3. Vitamins taken and in what amount.
4. Minerals taken and in what amount.
5. Niacin taken and in what amount.
6. Cal-Mag taken and in what amount.
7. Salt taken and in what amount.
8. Weight (include any gain or loss).
9. Any occurrences, somatics, restimulations.
10. Wins.
The Daily Reports are given to the Program I/C or his Deputy or are
placed in his basket. They are read by the I/C to ensure the person is
doing
the program and then filed in his pc folder, which goes in to the C/S.
The C/S verifies each person's daily progress (initialling the daily
report and any medical reports to show he has inspected them) and writes
orders to correct any out-tech found, such as not taking the right
vitamins,
etc.
The folder is returned to the Program I/C who checks the written C/S
and
executes any C/S orders, such as getting the person back onto the correct
vitamins, getting the person to attest, and so on.
The program is run in this fashion until it is completed.
END PHENOMENA
The purpose of this program is very simply to clean out and purify
one's
system of all the accumulated impurities such as drugs, insecticides and
pesticides, food preservatives, etc., etc. which by their presence and
restimulative effects could prevent or delay
HCOB 6.2.78RB - 18 -
Re-rev. 4.12.79
Re-rev. 21.4.83
freeing the being spiritually through processing. For someone who has taken
LSD or Angel Dust this would include getting rid of any residual crystals
from
the body.
When this has been accomplished the program is complete.
As the person goes through the Purification Program, one should be
able
to see an improvement in his physical well-being as he rids the system of
its
accumulated impurities.
Obviously if the person is still feeling the effects of past drugs or
chemicals going into restimulation, the program cannot be considered
complete
and must be continued until all these manifestations have turned off
completely.
The product of this program is a purified body, free from the
impurities,
drugs, etc., that had accumulated in it.
It is up to the C/S to send the person to attest when the above
product
has been achieved.
A continuation of the vitamins, minerals, oil, vegetables and Cal-Mag,
at
least at the rate of recommended daily requirements in balanced amounts is
wise after the Rundown is completed. A sudden cessation of such heavy a
vitamin dosage can itself produce a let down. It is possible the person
should
come off them on a steep gradient rather than abruptly. Particularly, where
drug damage to the brain or nerves has occurred, the body needs these
things
to rebuild itself. If one doesn't do the above there can be a brief
apparency
of a let down.
Remember that the person has probably been leading an unhealthy life
without proper nutrition, sleep and exercise so it would be a good idea to
recommend moderate daily dietetic and exercise disciplines so he will stay
healthy, having nothing to do with therapy.
If such a let down occurs the C/S should take the above into account,
otherwise he may be puzzled. He will find a certain number skimped the
Rundown
are unflat but the majority of such simply went back to an exerciseless,
five
packs of cigs a day, vitamin and mineral deprived life. Such regimen
recommendations are up to people who specialize in them. No fads please.
The
C/S must remember that the person should now be restored to any interrupted
program or C/Sed for his next level or, if he is also PTS, should be de-
PTSed.
For most the next C/S would be Objective processing. The person has not
finished his processing with the Purification Rundown. He has just cleared
the
way to get real case gains.
LENGTH OF PROGRAM
One should be able to get through the whole program in two weeks at
five
hours a day. Some will take more and some will take less.
If the procedure in this HCOB is exactly followed this will not become
a
long, drawn-out action.
SUMMARY
With the Purification Program we now have the means to get rapid
recovery
from the effects of the accumulation of the environmental chemical poisons
as
well as the medical drugs and street drugs which inhibit the progress of
cases.
HCOB 6.2.78RB - 19 -
Re-rev. 4.12.79
Re-rev. 21.4.83
By reducing the time required for sweat out and increasing its
efficiency, we are able to make the Purification Program a single, easily
completed step.
With the inclusion of vitamins, minerals and oils we are able to work
toward restoring the biochemical balance of the body and make it possible
for
the body to reconstruct itself from the damage done by drugs and other
biochemical substances.
We have brought the person up to the level where he is now ready for
processing and can truly achieve biophysical and then mental and spiritual
gain.
From this step alone one will see some sparkling results.
The Purification Rundown should be ideally followed by auditing. The
type
of auditing most beneficial for the next step is "Objective Processing". An
enormous body of work exists for this next level, none of which is changed
by
the Purification Rundown. The Purification Rundown only undercuts it. As
the
world sinks we get below it to prop it up!
Let's give this program a total push and take a major step toward a
drug-free society and planet!
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:gal:iw
Copyright $c 1978, 1979, 1983
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=26/9/77
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=1
rDate=30/12/79
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Art Series 5
ART AND COMMUNICATION
Remimeo
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 26 SEPTEMBER 1977R
Remimeo REVISED 30 DECEMBER 1979
(Only revision is series number.)
Art Series 5
ART AND COMMUNICATION
When a work of painting, music or other form attains two-way
communication, it is truly art.
One occasionally hears an artist being criticized on the basis that
his
work is too "literal" or too "common". But one has rarely if ever heard of
any
definition of "literal" or "common". And there are many artists simply hung
up
on this, protesting it. Also, some avant-garde schools go completely over
the
cliff in avoiding anything "literal" or "common"-and indeed go completely
out of communication!
The return flow from the person viewing a work would be contribution.
True art always elicits a contribution from those who view or hear or
experience it. By contribution is meant "adding to it".
An illustration is "literal" in that it tells everything there is to
know. Let us say the illustration is a picture of a tiger approaching a
chained girl. It does not really matter how well the painting is executed,
it
remains an illustration and it IS literal. But now let us take a small
portion
out of the scene and enlarge it. Let us take, say, the head of the tiger
with
its baleful eye and snarl. Suddenly we no longer have an illustration. It
is
no longer "literal". And the reason lies in the fact that the viewer can
fit
this expression into his own concepts, ideas or experience: he can supply
the
why of the snarl, he can compare the head to someone he knows. In short he
can
CONTRIBUTE to the head.
The skill with which the head is executed determines the degree of
response.
Because the viewer can contribute to the picture, it is art.
In music, the hearer can contribute his own emotion or motion. And
even
if the music is only a single drum, if it elicits a contribution of emotion
or
motion, it is truly art.
That work which delivers everything and gets little or nothing in
return
is not art. The "common" or overused melody, the expected shape or form
gets
little or no contribution from the hearer or viewer. That work which is too
unclear or too poorly executed may get no contribution.
Incidental to this, one can ask if a photograph can ever be art, a
controversy which has been raging for a century or more. One could say that
it
is only difficult to decide because one has to establish how much the
photographer has contributed to the "reality" of "literalness" in front of
his
camera, how he has interpreted it, but really the point is whether or not
that
photograph elicits a contribution from its viewer. If it does, it is art.
Innovation plays a large role in all works which may become art. But
even
this can be overdone. Originality can be
HCOB 26.9.77R - 2 -
Rev. 30.12.79
overdone to the point where it is no longer within any possible
understanding
by those viewing or hearing it. One can be so original one goes entirely
outside the most distant perimeter of agreement with his viewers or
listeners.
Sometimes this is done, one suspects, when one has not spent the labor
necessary to execute the work. Various excuses are assigned such an action,
the most faulty of which is "self-satisfaction" of the artist. While it is
quite all right to commune with oneself, one cannot also then claim that it
is
art if it communicates with no one else and no other's communication is
possible.
The third flow, of people talking to one another about a work can also
be
considered a communication and where it occurs is a valid contribution as
it
makes the work known.
Destructive attitudes about a work can be considered as a refusal to
contribute. Works that are shocking or bizarre to a point of eliciting
protest
may bring to themselves notoriety thereby and may shake things up; but when
the refusal to contribute is too widespread, such works tend to disqualify
as
art.
There is also the matter of divided opinion about a work. Some
contribute to it, some refuse to contribute to it. In such cases one must
examine who is contributing and who is refusing. One can then say that it
is a
work of art to those who contribute to it and that it is not to those who
refuse to contribute to it.
Criticism is some sort of index of degree of contribution. There are,
roughly, two types of criticism: one can be called "invalidative
criticism",
the other "constructive criticism".
Invalidative criticism is all too prevalent in the arts for there
exist
such things as "individual taste", contemporary standards and,
unfortunately,
even envy or jealousy. Too often, criticism is simply an individual refusal
to
contribute. One could also state that "those who destructively criticize
can't do."
"Constructive criticism" is a term which is often used but seldom
defined. But is has use. It could probably be best defined as criticism
which
"indicates a better way to do", at least in the opinion of the critic.
Those
who simply find fault and never suggest a practical means of doing it
better
rather forfeit their right to criticize.
Art is probably the most uncodified and least organized of all fields.
It
therefore acquires to itself the most "authorities". Usually nothing is
required of an "authority" except to say what is right, wrong, good, bad,
acceptable or unacceptable. Too often the sole qualification of the
authority
(as in poor teaching of some subjects) is a memorized list of objects and
their creators and dates with some hazy idea of what the work was. An
"authority" could considerably improve his status by using rather precise
definitions of his terms. The modern trend of seeking the significance in
what
the artist meant is of course not likely to advance the arts very much.
Viewing and experiencing art on the basis of what one is contributing
to
it and what others contribute to it is a workable approach. And it would
result in improved art and improved appreciation.
HCOB 26.9.77R - 3 -
Rev. 80.12.79
Such a viewpoint, interestingly, also includes some things into the
field
of art not previously so viewed.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Revision assisted by
Maggie Sibersky
LRH Comps I/C
LRH:MS:pat:dr
Copyright $c 1977, 1979
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Revision assisted by
Maggie Sibersky
LRH Comps I/C
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=30/1/77
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=1
rDate=25/5/80
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
FALSE TA DATA
Remimeo
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 30 JANUARY 1977R
Remimeo REVISED 25 MAY 1980
(Revised to add all relevant issues pertaining to false TA.)
(Revisions not in Script)
FALSE TA DATA
There have been several recent revisions of False TA issues. This issue
will just clearly list out all the issues and their dates so there is an
easy
reference for data on false TA handling.
References:
HCOB 8 Jun 70 LOW TA HANDLING
HCOB 16 Aug 70R C/S Series 15R, GETTING THE F/N TO THE EXAMINER
HCOB 24 Oct 71RA FALSE TA
HCOB 12 Non 71RB FALSE TA ADDITION
HCOB 15 Feb 72R FALSE TA ADDITION 2
HCOB 18 Feb 72RA FALSE TA ADDITION 3
HCOB 16 Feb 72 C/S Series 74, TALKING THE TA DOWN MODIFIED
HCOB 23 Nov 73RB DRY AND WET HANDS MAKE FALSE TA
HCOB 24 Nov 78RD C/S 5SRL SHORT FORM
HCOB 24 Nov 78RE C/S 53RL LONG FORM
HCOB 19 Apr 78R OUT BASICS AND HOW TO GET THEM IN
HCOB 23 Apr 75RA VANISHING CREAM AND FALSE TA
HCOB 24 Oct 76RA C/S Series 96RA, DELIVERY REPAIR LISTS
HCOB 10 Dec 76RB C/S Series 99RB SCIENTOLOGY F/N AND TA POSITION
HCOB 21 Jan 77RB FALSE TA CHECKLIST
HCOB 24 Jan 77 TECH CORRECTION ROUND-UP
HCOB 26 Jan 77R FOOTPLATES USE FORBIDDEN
HCOB 30 Jan 77R FALSE TA DATA
HCOB 4 Dec 77 CHECKLIST FOR SETTING UP SESSIONS AND AN E-METER
HCOB 13 Jan 77RB HANDLING A FALSE TA
OWNER'S MANUAL, HUBBARD PROFESSIONAL MARK VI,
HOW TO SET UP YOUR MARK VI E-METER
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Revision assisted by
LRH Technical
Compilations Unit
LRH:RTCU:bk
Copyright $c 1977, 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Revision assisted by
LRH Technical
Compilations Unit
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=26/1/77
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=1
rDate=25/5/80
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
FOOTPLATES USE FORBIDDEN
Remimeo
Tech & Qual
All Levels
All Auditors
All Tech
Checksheets
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 26 JANUARY 1977R
Remimeo REVISED 25 MAY 1980
Tech & Qual
All Levels (Revisions not in Script)
All Auditors
All Tech This issue is revised to up-date references.
Checksheets
FOOTPLATES USE FORBIDDEN
There have been several recent revisions of False TA issues. This
issue
will just clearly list out all the issues and their dates so there is an
easy
reference for data on false TA handling.
References:
HCOB 8 Jun 70 LOW TA HANDLING
HCOB 16 Aug 70R C/S Series 15R, GETTING THE F/N TO THE EXAMINER
HCOB 24 Oct 71RA FALSE TA
HCOB 12 Nov 71RB FALSE TA ADDITION
HCOB 15 Feb 72R FALSE TA ADDITION 2
HCOB 18 Feb 72RA FALSE TA ADDITION 3
HCOB 16 Feb 72 C/S Series 74, TALKING THE TA DOWN MODIFIED
HCOB 23 Nov 73RB DRY AND WET HANDS MAKE FALSE TA
HCOB 24 Nov 73RD C/S 53RL SHORT FORM
HCOB 24 Nov 73RE C/S 53RL LONG FORM
HCOB 19 Apr 75R OUT BASICS HOW TO GET THEM IN
HCOB 23 Apr 75RA VANISHING CREAM AND FALSE TA
HCOB 24 Oct 76RA C/S Series 96RA, DELIVERY REPAIR LISTS
HCOB 10 Dec 76RB C/S Series 99RB, SCIENTOLOGY F/N AND TA
POSITION
HCOB 21 Jan 77RB FALSE TA CHECKLIST
HCOB 24 Jan 77 TECH CORRECTION ROUNDUP
HCOB 26 Jan 77R FOOTPLATES USE FORBIDDEN
HCOB 30 Jan 77R FALSE TA DATA
HCOB 4 Dec 77 CHECKLIST FOR SETTING UP SESSIONS AND AN E-
METER
HCOB 13 Jan 77RB HANDLING A FALSE TA
OWNER'S MANUAL, HUBBARD PROFESSIONAL MARK VI,
HOW TO SET UP YOUR MARK VI E-METER
The use of footplates is forbidden. A recent dispatch to myself from
LRH
quotes him, "I tested footplates and they don't read! Not on the bank."
The above issues cover how to handle a false TA. Use them to resolve
TA
problems not footplates.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Revision assisted by
LRH Technical
Compilations Unit
LRH:RTCU:djm
Copyright $c 1977, 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
Revision assisted by
LRH Technical
Compilations Unit
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=22/1/77
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=0
rDate=0/0/0
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
Cramming Series 24
Keeping Scientology Working Series 21
IN-TECH, THE ONLY WAY
TO ACHIEVE IT
Remimeo
All Course
Supervisors
All Ds or P
All C/Ses
All Qual
Cramming Terminals
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 22 JANUARY 1977
Remimeo REISSUED 7 DECEMBER 1978
All Course REISSUED 12 APRIL 1983
Supervisors
All Ds or P (Reissued as part of the Cramming Series
All C/Ses and the Keeping Scientology Working Series.)
All Qual
Cramming Terminals
Cramming Series 24
Keeping Scientology Working Series 21
IN-TECH, THE ONLY WAY
TO ACHIEVE IT
The dominating factor of tech being in, is whether the Auditor really
wants to do a good job and help the pc. It is a matter of professional
competence and pride.
If the Auditor does not have this there is no amount of rules, reading
or
supervision that will bring about technical successes.
Fortunately the vast majority of Auditors have a high professional
conscience and are willing to study, drill and do everything possible to
perfect their tech. The Course Supervisor, the D of P, the C/S and Qual
Cramming terminals must realize this and must do all possible to fortify it
and must abstain from invalidations and accusations and injustices which
tend
to nullify it.
From this springboard of belief in the Auditor and a willingness on
the
part of those training and handling him, to strengthen the Auditor's
determination to be professionally competent, in-Tech will only then
blossom
in in org.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:nt:jk:ks
Copyright $c 1977, 1978, 1983
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
[?]
Type = 11
iDate=21/1/77
Volnum=0
Issue=0
Rev=3
rDate=25/5/80
Addition=0
aDate=0/0/0
aRev=0
arDate=0/0/0
FALSE TA CHECKLIST
Remimeo
Tech & Qual
All Levels
All Auditors
All Tech Checksheets
HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex
HCO BULLETIN OF 21 JANUARY 1977RB
Remimeo RE-REVISED 25 MAY 1980
Tech & Qual
All Levels
All Auditors (Re-revisions in script)
All Tech Checksheets
(This HCOB has been revised to include additional data on False TA
and the full list of references on False TA. The layout of the list
of handlings has been arranged to follow the line for checking, and
reference to any specific brand of hand cream has been taken out.)
FALSE TA CHECKLIST
Ref: HCOB 8 Jun 70 LOW TA HANDLING
HCOB 16 Aug 70R C/S Series 15R. GETTING THE F/N TO THE EXAMINER
HCOB 24 Oct 71RA FALSE TA
HCOB 12 Nov 71RB FALSE TA ADDITION
HCOB 15 Feb 72R FALSE TA ADDITION 2
HCOB 18 Feb 72RA FALSE TA ADDITION 3
HCOB 16 Feb 72 C/S Series 74, TALKING THE TA DOWN MODIFIED
HCOB 23 Nov 73RB DRY AND WET HANDS MAKE FALSE TA
HCOB 24 Nov 73RD C/S 53RL SHORT FORM
HCOB 24 Nov 73RE C/S 53RL LONG FORM
HCOB 19 Apr 75R OUT BASICS AND HOW TO GET THEM IN
HCOB 23 Apr 75RA VANISHING CREAM AND FALSE TA
HCOB 24 Oct 76RA C/S Series 96RA, DELIVERY REPAIR LISTS
HCOB 10 Dec 76RB C/S Series 99RB, SCIENTOLOGY
F/N AND TA POSITION
HCOB 13 Jan 77RB HANDLING A FALSE TA
HCOB 24 Jan 77 TECH CORRECTION ROUND-UP
HCOB 26 Jan 77R FOOTPLATES USE FORBIDDEN
HCOB 30 Jan 77R FALSE TA DATA
HCOB 4 Dec 77 CHECKLIST FOR SETTING UP
SESSIONS AND AN E-METER
HCOB 7 Feb 79R E-METER DRILL 5RA
BTB 24 Jan 73R II EXAMINER AND FALSE TA
BOOK: E-METER ESSENTIALS
BOOK: INTRODUCTION TO THE E-METER
OWNER'S MANUAL, HUBBARD PROFESSIONAL MARK VI,
HOW TO SET UP YOUR MARK VI E-METER
"This Bulletin cancels HCOB 29 February 1972RA Revised 23 April 1975 as
it
is misleading and has caused some auditors to assess the pc on the meter to
find the cause of false TA instead of checking directly with the pc."
This Bulletin reinstates the False TA Checklist with specific handlings
that are directly from the issues that I wrote on false TA.
HCOB 21.1.77RB - 2 -
Re-rev. 25.5.80
"The following are the items to be checked by an auditor on any pc. It
need only be done once unless the check itself is suspected false, or if
conditions of the pc's hands, etc. change.
"The checklist is kept in the pc folder and is entered on the Folder
Summary as an action done.
"The value of operating with correct can size should not be
underestimated, the reference HCOBs state why."
The auditor signs and answers the following points on the checklist.
The
auditor must obtain information by checking the pc's hands himself or
herself
to see if the hands are dry or wet. The cause of false TA is in the
physical
universe and that is where the check is done. It is not done by asking the
pc
or checking the questions on the pc for meter reads. So the auditor would
feel
the hands of the pc to establish if they are dry or wet, would feel the
pc's
hands with cream on them to see if the cream has dried up, would see if the
pc's hands cup so as to form an area that does not touch the cans and so
forth. False TA is not think or mental mass. It is in the physical universe
and that is where it has to be handled for it to be remedied. The handling
follows each line as you check it. This is for simplicity, as that is the
way
this checklist is done, each line being handled as you go.
R-FACTOR TO PC: "I AM GOING TO CHECK THE CANS, YOUR HANDS AND VARIOUS OTHER
THINGS TO ADJUST EVERYTHING FOR BEST ACCURACY."
FALSE TA CHECKLIST AND HANDLING SHEET
1. IS THE METER FULLY CHARGED? .......................................
_______
Handling:
"Keep a meter charged at least one hour for every 10 of auditing for 240 AC
volt charging current, or 2 hrs. for every 10 of auditing on a 110 AC volt
charging current. (Mark VI will get about 6 hrs. for every 1 hr. charged.)
"Before each session snap the knob over to TEST. The needle should hit hard
on
the right side of the face. It can even bounce. If the needle doesn't snap
to
the right hard or if it doesn't quite get there on TEST, then that meter
will
go flat in mid-session and give false TA and no reads or TA on hot
subjects."
LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA False TA)
NOTE: To ensure an accurate check, the meter should be turned on a minute
or
two before turning to test.
2. IS THE METER TRIMMED CORRECTLY? ...................................
_______
Handling:
"A meter can be improperly trimmed (not set at 2.0 with the trim knob) and
can
give a false TA position. When a meter is not left on a minute or two
before
trimming, it can drift in the session and give a slightly false TA.
"The trim can quietly be checked in mid-session by snapping out the jack
where
the cord goes into the box and putting the TA on 2, seeing if the needle is
now on SET. If not, the trim knob can be moved to adjust it. The
HCOB 21.1.77RB - 3 -
Re-rev. 25.5.80
jack is quietly slipped back in. All without distracting the pc." LRH (HCOB
24
Oct 71RA False TA)
3. ARE THE LEADS CONNECTED TO THE METER AND CANS? ....................
_______
Handling:
"A properly set up meter with cans (electrodes) fitted to a pc who is
holding
them properly IS ALWAYS CORRECT." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 1971RA) Reference for
setting up a meter is covered in E-Meter Drills Book, EM 4, and the Mark VI
owner's manual if one is using a Mark VI.
4. ARE THE CANS RUSTY? ...............................................
_______
Handling:
"Corroded cans Can falsify TA. Get new ones now and then." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct
71RA)
5. ARE PC'S HANDS EXCESSIVELY DRY REQUIRING HAND CREAM? ..............
_______
Handling:
"A quick test is have the pc put the cans under his armpits and you'll see
if
it's his calloused or chemically dried out hands. The excessively dry hand
is
seen as shiny or polished looking. It feels very dry. The correct treatment
is
to use a hand cream, but not a greasy hand cream or vanishing cream. A good
hand cream rubs all the way into the hand and leaves no excess grease. Hand
cream is usually smeared on, rubbed in and can then be thoroughly wiped
off.
The hands will usually produce, then, a normal TA and meter response." LRH
(HCOB 23 Nov 73RB Re-revised 25 May 1980 Dry and Wet Hands Make False TA)
6. ARE THE PC'S HANDS EXCESSIVELY WET REQUIRING POWDER? ..............
_______
Handling:
"If the TA is low, check if the pc's hands are wet. If so have him wipe
them
and get a new read. It is usually found that the 1.6 was really 2.0 ...
Have
the pc wipe hands. LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA)
"Anti-perspirants can be applied to too wet hands. There are many brands of
these, often a powder or spray. It can be wiped off after application and
should work for two to three hours." LRH (HCOB 28 Apr 75RA)
7. THE PC IS NOT BEING TOLD CONTINUALLY TO WIPE HIS HANDS? ...........
_______
Handling:
Above per wet hands.
8. THE PC'S GRIP ON THE CANS IS NOT BEING CONTINUALLY CHECKED BY THE
AUDITOR
IN A WAY THAT INTERRUPTS THE PC? ..................................
_______
Handling:
"Keep the pc's hands in sight. Check the pc's grip. Get smaller cans." LRH
(HCOB 24 Oct 71RA)
HCOB 21.1.77RB - 4 -
Re-rev. 25.5.80
8A. IS THE PC USING THE WRONG TYPE OF CANS? ...........................
_______
a) corrugated _______
b) cellophane bonded to metal _______
c) wrong metal _______
The right metal is tin-plated steel, not cellophane bonded or painted.
Handling: Replace with the correct cans. "Cans of course should be steel
with
a thin tin plating." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA)
8B. ARE THE CANS TOO SHORT FOR THE PC's HANDS TO COVER? ...............
_______
Handling:
Replace with cans of correct length so that the whole hand has contact with
the can. (Ref. HCOB 24 Oct 71Ra)
9. TA POSITION FOR LARGE CANS? .......................................
_______
Size approx 4 Ѕ inches by 3 inches
or
11 cm by 8 cm
Handling: "For a normal or large handed pc the can size is about 4 7/8ths
inches by 2 5/8ths inches or 12 Ѕ cm by 7 cm. This can be altered as big as
4 Ѕ inches by 8 inches diameter or 11 cm by 8 cm. This is standard." LRH
(HCOB 24 Oct 71RA)
10. TA POSITION ON MEDIUM CANS? .......................................
_______
Size approx 4 7/8 inches by 2 5/8 inches
or
12 Ѕ cm by 7 cm
Handling: Covered above.
11. TA POSITION ON SMALL CANS? ........................................
_______
Size approx 3 ѕ inches by 2 1/8 inches
or
9 cm by 5 cm
Handling: "This can should be 3 ѕ inches by 2 1/8th inches or 9 cm by 5 cm
diameter or thereabouts. A small child would be lost even with that can. So
a
small 35 mm film can could be used. This is 2 inches long by 1 3/16ths
diameter or 5 cm by 3 cm. This works but watch it as these cans are
aluminum.
They do work but test for true read with a slightly larger can and then
trim
to adjust for the aluminum if any different.
"Cans of course should be steel with a thin tin plating. Regular soup cans.
Can size to match the pc avoids slack can grip or tiring the hands into
going
slack, giving the auditor 3.2 F/Ns and trouble." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA)
HCOB 21.1.77RB - 5 -
Re-rev. 25.5.80
11A. CAN SIZE FOR A CHILD IS INCORRECT? ...............................
_______
Handling:
Size can go down to photographic aluminum 35 mm film cans for a child. Size
approx 2 inches by 1 3/16 inches or 5 cm by 3 cm. Note down TA position.
11B.IF THE ABOVE MENTIONED CAN SIZES AREN'T CORRECT FOR THE PC'S HANDS
OTHER SIZES CAN BE TRIED ..........................................
_______
Handling: 1 ј" tubing or 1 ѕ" tubing as well as other can size checked to
see which fits the pc's hand. Note TA position.
12. ARE THE CANS TOO LARGE FOR THE PC? ................................
_______
Handling: "Can size to match the pc avoids slack can grip or tiring the
hands
into going slack." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA)
Check the pc's grip and see if the hand is touching all of the can and if
the
size is comfortable. (Ref. HCOB 13 Jan 77RB Handling a False TA)
13. ARE THE CANS TOO SMALL FOR THE PC? ................................
_______
Handling:
Per above. Check how the pc is holding the cans and if the entire hand is
on
the cans and if they are comfortable and adjust accordingly per above.
14. ARE THE CANS JUST RIGHT FOR THE PC? ...............................
_______
Handling:
Check the grip and see if the can size is correct for the pc. Do the cans
comfortable fit the pc's hands with the hand touching the cans so it gets
an
accurate reading on the meter? If the can size is correct then you must
ensure that the grip is also correct on the cans.
15. ARE THE CANS COLD? ................................................
_______
Handling:
"Regardless of can size, cold E-Meter electrodes tend to give a much higher
tone arm reading particularly on some pcs.
"Until the cans warm up, the reading is generally false and is false in the
direction of high. Some pcs are 'cool blooded' and the shock of ice cold
cans
can drive the TA up and it takes awhile to drift down.
"A practice which gets around this is for the auditor or Examiner to hold
the
cans briefly until they are warm and then give them to the pc. A variation
is
for the auditor or Examiner to put the cans under his armpits while setting
up. This warms them. There are probably many other ways to warm up cans to
body temperature." LRH (HCOB 12 Nov 71RB)
15A.DID THE PC WASH HIS HANDS JUST BEFORE SESSION? ....................
_______
Handling:
Use a bit of hand cream to bring hands back to normal amount of moisture.
HCOB 21.1.77RB - 6 -
Re-rev. 25.5.80
16. ARE THE PC'S HANDS DRY OR CALLOUSED? ..............................
_______
Handling:
Covered above under pc's hands excessively dry requiring hand cream.
There are ways to apply the hand cream so that it is correct for that
individual pc and does handle the false TA. You can spread it on
extensively
then wipe it off and then rub a bit more in ensuring the thumbs are
included
is one way. (Ref. HCOB 13 Jan 77RB)
The point is to feel the hands with the cream on them to see if it has
handled
the excessively dry hand that is seen as shiny or polished looking.
And it now should no longer feel dry. (HCOB 23 Nov 73RB Re-revised 25 May
80)
The correct treatment is to use a hand cream but not greasy hand cream or
vanishing cream.
A good hand cream rubs all the way into the skin and leaves no excess
grease.
This restores normal electrical contact. Such a hand cream would only have
to
be applied once per session-at session start-as it lasts for a long
while.
If a cream leaves smears on a can, it is too heavily applied or too little
absorbed. (HCOB 25 Apr 75RA Re-revised 25 May 80)
17. DOES THE PC HAVE ARTHRITIC HANDS? .................................
_______
Handling:
"A rare pc is so crippled with arthritis that he doesn't make contact fully
with the cans. This gives high TA. Use wide wrist straps and you'll get a
right read." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA Re-revised 25 May 80)
18. DOES THE PC LOOSEN HIS GRIP ON THE CANS? ..........................
_______
Handling:
Check the grip. Does the angle of the cans go across the palms of the pc?
Is
the natural curl of the fingers sufficient to hold the cans in place, and
is
the placement of the cans at an angle ensuring that the maximum skin area
is
touching the cans? (Ref. BOOK OF E-METER DRILLS) See if the palm is
touching
the can and not elevated off. (Ref. HCOB 13 Jan 77RB)
19. CHECK THE PC'S GRIP DOES HE HOLD THE CANS CORRECTLY?...............
_______
Handling:
Covered in above section. Also check to see if the pc is holding the cans
so
tight that it is causing the hands to sweat and read falsely low. (Ref.
HCOB
13 Jan 77RB and HCOB 7 Feb 79R E-METER DRILL 5RA)
20. IS THE PC HOT? ....................................................
_______
Handling:
Get a fan in the room or handle the room so that it is cooler and the pc
comfortable.
HCOB 21.1.77RB - 7 -
Re-rev. 25.5.80
21. HAS THE PC SLEPT WELL? ............................................
_______
Handling:
Don't audit a pc who has not had sufficient rest or is physically tired.
(Ref.
HCO PL 14 Oct 68RA The Auditor's Code)
22. IS THE PC COLD? ...................................................
_______
Handling:
"A pc sometimes has a falsely high TA. Wrap him in a blanket or get a
warmer
auditing room. The auditing environment is the responsibility of the
auditor."
LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA)
28. IS THE PC HUNGRY? .................................................
_______
Handling:
Get the pc something to eat and don't audit a pc who has not bad enough to
eat
or is hungry. (Ref. HCO PL 14 Oct 68RA The Auditor's Code)
24. IS IT TOO LATE AT NIGHT? ..........................................
_______
Handling:
"Between 2 and 8 A.M. or late at night a pc's TA may be very high. The time
depends on when he sleeps usually. This TA will be found normal in regular
hours." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA)
25. IS THE AUDITING BEING DONE NOT IN THE PC'S NORMAL REGULAR AWAKE
HOURS? ............................................................
_______
Handling:
Covered above.
26. ARE THERE RINGS ON THE PC'S HANDS? ................................
_______
Handling:
"Rings on the pc's hands must always be removed. They don't influence TA
but
they give a false rock slam." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA)
If the rings can't come off use a small strip of paper around them to
shield
the rings touching the can.
27. IS THE PC WEARING TIGHT SHOES? ....................................
_______
Handling:
Remove them. (Ref. HCOB 24 Oct 71RA, HCOB 18 Jan 77RB)
28. IS THE PC WEARING TIGHT CLOTHES? ..................................
_______
Handling:
If it turns out that tight clothing is affecting the TA ensure that the pc
doesn't wear tight clothes in future sessions. If possible have the pc
remove
the tight clothing and see what the effect was that it had on the TA and
make
sure no more tight clothes are worn in future sessions.
29. IS THE PC USING THE WRONG HAND CREAM? .............................
_______
Handling:
Using the reference materials find the right hand cream and test it on the
pc.
Note TA position.
HCOB 21.1.77RB - 8 -
Re-rev. 25.5.80
30. IS THE APPLICATION OF THE HAND CREAM CORRECT AND DOES IT COVER THE
ENTIRE BODY? ......................................................
_______
Handling:
Watch how the pc puts on hand cream and see if it covers the entire hand,
thumb included. If not then have the pc put on hand cream covering the
entire
hand and pick up the cans and note TA position. Some pcs may have to put
cream
on and wipe it off and then re-apply it. (Ref. HCOB 13 Jan 77RB)
31. IS THE CHAIR THE PC IS SITTING IN COMFORTABLE? ....................
_______
Handling:
Get a new chair that is comfortable for the pc.
32. IS IT ACTUALLY A CHRONIC HIGH OR LOW TA CASE CONDITION? ...........
_______
Handling:
C/S Series 53 Assessment or Hi-Lo TA Assessment. Done To F/Ning assessment.
So standard tech handles the high and low TA. The C/S Series gives more
data
on the subject.
33. HAS THE PC GONE INTO DESPAIR OVER HIS TA? .........................
_______
Handling:
Handle the false TA with using this list as a guideline so that the cause
of
false TA is found and fully handled with the pc by the various handlings
covered above. When false TA is handled check TA worries, TA hassles and
L1C
best read.
This handling sheet is used in conjunction with the items that are
checked. This gives you the way to handle them.
Refer to reference material in reference section above for further
data
on handling a false TA.
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER
LRH:bk
Copyright $c 1977, 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER